tourism infrastructure guidelines - ukdisasterrecovery.in

Mussoorie

INDIA: UTTARAKHAND EMERGENCY ASSISTANCE PROJECT

(Tourism Sector)

ADB LOAN NO. 3055-IND

Uttarakhand Tourism Development Board (UTDB) Pandit Deendayal Upadhyaya Paryatan Bhawan,

Near ONGC Helipad, Garhi Cantt, Dehradun-248003

Tel.: +91-135-2559987, Fax: +91-135-2559985 Email: [email protected]>

Website: www.uttarakhandtourism.gov.in

INFRASTRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT GUIDELINES

Developing new infrastructure under tourism

sector, including any rehabilitated and reconstructed tourism infrastructure

UTDB-IDG-01

(Final)

March

2015

http://www.uttarakhandtourism.gov.in/

ADB LOAN NO. 3055 –IND UTDB-IDG-01 India: Uttarakhand Emergency Assistance Project March 2015

Uttarakhand Tourism Development Board 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS

EXECUTIVE SUMMARY ............................................................................................................ 10

1 PROJECT SUMMARY ..................................................................................................... 28

2 INTRODUCTION, RATIONALE/NEED ............................................................................. 31

2.1 People ...................................................................................................................................... 31

2.2 Climate .................................................................................................................................... 31

2.3 Geography ............................................................................................................................. 31

2.4 Drainage ................................................................................................................................. 32

2.5 Soils ............................................................................................................................................ 32

2.6 Demography .......................................................................................................................... 32

2.7 Literacy .................................................................................................................................... 32

2.8 Economy ................................................................................................................................. 32

2.9 Tourism in Uttarakhand and Tourist Arrivals ................................................................... 33

2.10 Rationale/Need .................................................................................................................... 36

3 CRITERIA FOR INFRASTRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT GUIDELINES ..................................... 39

3.1 Technical and Economic Criteria under ADB Investment Program/Project ....... 39

3.2 Criteria suggested under JRDNA Report (June 2013) ................................................ 40

3.3 Criteria provisions under Disaster Management by Government of India .......... 43

3.4 Introduction from Report of the Steering Committee on Tourism for ―The

Eleventh Five Year Plan (2007-2012)‖ .......................................................................................... 44

3.5 Guidance Inputs from Uttarakhand Tourism Development Master Plan (2007-

2022) 45

3.6 Guiding Principles/Inputs discussed with various Departments, GoUK ................. 46

3.7 Principles of Ecotourism Development (MOT, GoI, 1998) .......................................... 63

3.8 Guidance for Taking-up Non-Forestry Activities in Wildlife Habitats (MoEF, 2012)

67

4 DEVELOPMENT OF INFRASTRUCTURE FOR TOURISM – CERTAIN

SUGGESTIONS/RECOMMENDATIONS .................................................................................... 68

4.1 Vision and Objectives .......................................................................................................... 68

4.2 Definitions related to Integrated Tourism-Heritage Sector (UNWTO/TA/ETC,

2010/2011; IUCN, 2001, etc.) .......................................................................................................... 69

4.3 Strategic Framework .......................................................................................................... 119

4.3.1 Improve Infrastructure, Tourism Products and Services .................................... 119



4.4 Position Uttarakhand as a Preferred Tourism Destination at State, National and

International Levels ........................................................................................................................ 125

4.4.1 Marketing and Promotional Activities ................................................................... 125

4.4.2 Branding ......................................................................................................................... 125

4.4.3 Calendar of Events...................................................................................................... 126

4.4.4 Tourism Industry Profile & State Tourism Database Repository ........................ 126

4.5 Spatial/Site Planning Approach ..................................................................................... 127

4.6 Site Finalization/Subproject Selection Criteria ............................................................ 131

4.7 Technical Criteria for Development of Sites/Subprojects ....................................... 139

4.8 Infrastructure Design Norms & Standards .................................................................... 146

4.8.1 Technical Standards and Regulations .......................................................................... 146

4.8.2Design Guidelines - Recommendations .......................................................................... 148

5 SPECIFIC GUIDELINES FOR DEVELOPMENT OF INFRASTRUCTURE FOR TOURISM

SECTOR .................................................................................................................................. 269

5.1 Guidelines for Site Selection and Development ........................................................ 269

5.1.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................... 269

5.1.2 Preliminary Requirements .......................................................................................... 270

5.1.3 Major Requirements .................................................................................................... 274

5.2 Guidelines for Development of Home Stays in Uttarakhand ................................. 280

5.3 Guidelines for Rural Tourism ............................................................................................. 280

5.3.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................... 280

5.3.2 Requirements ................................................................................................................ 281

5.4 Guidelines for Developing Eco-Tourism ........................................................................ 282

5.4.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................... 282

5.4.2 Eligibility .......................................................................................................................... 283

5.4.3 Other Requirements .................................................................................................... 285

5.5 Guidelines for Developing Adventure Tourism & related Activities ...................... 286

5.5.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................... 286

5.5.2 Eligibility .......................................................................................................................... 287

5.5.3 Specific Requirements: .............................................................................................. 289

5.6 Guidelines for Developing Theme Parks ....................................................................... 298

5.6.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................... 298

5.6.2 Eligibility ................................................................................................................................ 299




5.7 Guidelines for Developing Wayside Amenities .......................................................... 301

5.7.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................... 301

5.7.2 Eligibility .......................................................................................................................... 301


5.8 Guidelines for Tourist Rest Houses/Yatri Niwas with Dormitories, and Youth

Hostels ................................................................................................................................................ 304

5.8.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................... 304

5.8.2 Eligibility .......................................................................................................................... 304

5.8.3 Requirements for Yatri Niwas .................................................................................... 304

5.8.4 Requirements for Youth Hostels ............................................................................... 306

5.8.5 Requirements for Dormitories ................................................................................... 308

5.9 Guidelines for Developing Tourist Information Centre and Interpretation Centre

309

5.9.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................... 309

5.9.2 Eligibility .......................................................................................................................... 310

5.9.3 Requirements for Tourist Information Centre (TIC) ............................................. 310

5.9.4 Requirements for Tourist Interpretation Centre ................................................... 312

5.10 Guidelines for Media, Communication and Promotional Activities .................... 313

5.10.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................... 313

5.10.2 Eligibility .......................................................................................................................... 314


5.11 Guidelines for Event-based tourism ............................................................................... 315

5.11.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................... 315

5.11.2 Eligibility .......................................................................................................................... 315


5.12 Guidelines for Heritage Trails and Nature Trails .......................................................... 317

5.12.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................... 317

5.12.2 Eligibility .......................................................................................................................... 317


5.12.4 Additional Requirements for Nature Trails............................................................. 319

5.13 Guidelines for Heritage Property Conservation & Revitalization ........................... 319

5.13.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................... 319

5.13.2 Conservation & Revitalization Process .................................................................. 320



5.13.3 On-site issues ................................................................................................................. 347

5.13.4 Minor Additions ............................................................................................................. 353

5.13.5 Major Additions ............................................................................................................ 353

5.14 Museum Management and Special Experiences ..................................................... 355

5.14.1 Objectives of Museum Management and Special Experiences ................... 355

5.14.2 Guidelines and Directives for Design of Museum and Special Experiences

355

5.15 Human Resource Development & Capacity Enhancement Interventions ....... 383

5.15.1 Education and Awareness-Raising ......................................................................... 384

5.15.2 Training / Capacity Building ..................................................................................... 384

5.16 Do‘s and Don‘ts for Visitors ............................................................................................... 385

6 LIST OF OFFICIALS INTERACTED (MET / HAD TELECONVERSATION WITH) ................ 394

7 BIBLIOGRAPHY ................................................................................................................ 396

8 APPENDIX – 1 CHECKLIST FOR ENSURING DUE-DILIGENCE IN TOURISM

INFRASTRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT PROCESS IN THE STATE OF UTTARAKHAND .................... 409

9 APPENDIX – 2 UTTARAKHAND HOME STAY RULES 2015 ........................................ 413



ABBREVIATIONS

ACP aluminium cladding panel

ADA American Disability Act

ADB Asian Development Bank

AS/NZS Australian Standard/New Zealand Standard

ASTM American Society of Testing and Materials

ATC Air Traffic Control

ATO Adventure Tour Operator

BADP Border Area Development Program

BIS/IS Bureau of Indian Standards (Indian Standards Code)

BMTPC Building Materials and Technology Promotion Council

BPL Below Poverty Level

BRO Border Roads Organization

BS British Standard

c/c centre-to-centre

CBT community-based tourism

CEO Chief Executive Officer

CFA central financial assistance

CFC chloroflourocarbon

CCF Chief Conservator of Forests

CPR Cardiopulmonary Resuscitation

CPWD Central Public Works Department

CWLW Chief Wildlife Warden

DEA Department of Economic Affairs

DEC Departmental Empowered Committee

DFO Divisional Forest Officer

DGCA Director General Civil Aviation

DoT Department of Tourism

DPR detailed project report

DRR disaster risk reduction

EA executing agency

EARF environmental assessment and review framework

EDC eco-development committee

EIA environmental impact assessment

EIRR economic internal rate of return

EMMP environmental management and monitoring plan



ETC European Travel Commission

EU European Union

FAM facility administration manual

FATO final approach and take off

fc/lx foot-candle/lux

FD Forest Department

FRP fiber-reinforced plastic

GIS geographic information system

GI galvanised iron

giz Deutschen Gesellschaft für Internationale Zusammenarbeit (GIZ) GmbH

(earlier gtz)

GMVN Garhwal Mandal Vikas Nigam Limited

G.O. government order

GoI Government of India

GoUK Government of Uttarakhand

GPS global positioning system

GRIHA Green Rating for Integrated Habitat Assessment

GSI Geological Survey of India

HDPB Hospitality Development and Promotion Board

HET Himalayan Environment Trust

HPC High Powered Committee

HQ head quarter

H&R hotel & restaurant

hrs hours

IA implementing agency

IAAPA International Association of Amusement Parks and Attractions

IAF Indian Air Force

ICAO International Civil Aviation Organization

ICIMOD International Centre for Integrated Mountain Development

ICOMOS International Council on Monuments and Sites

ICT Information, Communication and Technology

IEE initial environmental examination

IMF Indian Mountaineering Federation

in. inch(es)

IND India

INR Indian Rupees

IPs indigenous peoples



IPP indigenous peoples plan

ILSP Integrated Livelihood Support Project

IR involuntary resettlement

IUCN International Union for Conservation of Nature and Natural Resources

JRDNA joint rapid damage and needs assessment

km/kms kilometre(s)

KMVN Kumaon Vikas Mandal Nigam Limited

LAC local advisory committee

LGFS light-gauge steel frame system

LID low-impact development

MHA Ministry of Home Affairs

m/mtrs meter(s)

mn million

MNRE Ministry of New and Renewable Energy

MoEF Ministry of Environment and Forests

MoHUPA Ministry of Housing and Urban Poverty Alleviation

MoRD Ministry of Rural Development

MoU memorandum of understanding

MoUAE Ministry of Urban Affairs and Employment

MPH multi-purpose hall/shelter

MSK Medvedev–Sponheuer–Karnik (a macro-seismic intensity scale)

MSL mean sea level

NBC National Building Code

NBWL National Board for Wildlife

NDRF National Disaster Response Force

NDM National Disaster Management Division

NHAI National Highway Authority of India

NIWAS National Institute of Water-sports

No./No‘s number(s)

N.P. national park

NOC no objection certificate

NGO non-governmental organization

NTCA National Tiger Conservation Authority

O&M operation and maintenance

PA Protected Area

PAM project appraisal manual

PEB pre-engineered building



PIU Project Implementation Unit

PMU Project Management Unit

PPP public-private partnership

PR Panchayati Raj

PUF polyurethane foam

PWD Public Works Department

RDD Rural Development Department

REA rapid environmental assessment

RED regional economic development

RES Rural Engineering Services

RF resettlement framework

ROW right of way

RP resettlement plan

SC scheduled caste

SDMA State Disaster Management Authority

SEIAA State Level Environment Impact Assessment Authority

SEL son et lumière (sound and light)

SHG self-help group

SOP standard operating procedures

SOR schedule of rates

SPCB State Pollution Control Board

SPS safeguard policy statement

sqm/km square meter/kilometer

ST scheduled tribe

TA Tourism Australia

T&CP Town and Country Planning

TCPO Town and Country Planning Organisation

TEMP Tourism and Environmental Management Plan

TIC Tourism Information Center

TIES The International Ecotourism Society

TNA training needs analysis

TRH tourist rest house

UCADA Uttarakhand Civil Aviation Development Authority

UDPFI Urban Development Plan Formulation and Implementation

UEAP Uttarakhand Emergency Assistance Project

UEPPCB Uttarakhand Environment Protection and Pollution Control Board

UGVS Uttarakhand Gramya Vikas Samiti



UIAA Union International de Alpine Association

ULIPH Uttarakhand Livelihoods Improvement Project for Himalayas

UNDP United Nations Development Programme

UNEP United Nations Environment Programme

UNWTO United Nations World Travel Organization

UPRNN Uttar Pradesh Rajkiya Nirman Nigam

US$ United States Dollars

UT union territory

UTDB Uttarakhand Tourism Development Board



EXECUTIVE SUMMARY

INTRODUCTION

During June 15-17, 2013, significant part of both regions of Garhwal and

Kumaon of state of Uttarakhand received heavy torrential rains, cloudburst and

unexpected floods from probable glacial meltdown (e.g. glacial lake

burst/overflow related flash floods at Kedarnath) which led to large scale

devastations. The aftermath experienced as: long stretches of roads washed

out or caved in; complete loss of road connectivity and communications; loss of

human lives; large scale damage to personal and civic infrastructure property;

natural alteration in local ecology; complete disruption of civic services in

affected towns; impacts on local and regional livelihood and loss of tourism

footprint; complete disruption in pilgrimage; etc. In this context, it has been

observed that presently there does exist some guidelines/directive circulars

issued from time to time by Uttarakhand State Government through Forest

Department as well as those under Tourism, Urban Development, Housing, and

T&CP Departments. However, these need to be duly studied and holistically

integrated and made comprehensive in nature towards meeting sustainable

tourism infrastructure development in such Himalayan terrain.

Thus, as per the loan covenant of Asian Development Bank (ADB) provisioned in

para 7, Schedule 5 of the Loan Agreement of Uttarakhand Emergency

Assistance Project (UEAP)‖, it‘s imperative that ―With regard to tourism

infrastructure rehabilitated and reconstructed under the Project, without limiting

the generality of Project requirements, the EA in particular shall (a) prepare

guidelines for new infrastructure to be developed under the sector…‖ The

guidelines has thus been prepared as “Infrastructure Development Guidelines:

Developing new infrastructure under tourism sector, including any rehabilitated

and reconstructed tourism infrastructure (UTDB-IDG-01), March 2015” and

discussed amongst several stakeholders and finalised.

NEED FOR GUIDELINES FOR DEVELOPMENT OF INFRASTRUCTURE FOR TOURISM

The need for creating a range of infrastructure development

principles/recommendations/criteria with use of feasible best practices for

tourism sector has been identified for the State of Uttarakhand, for the following

reason:

Natural Disaster of June 2013 has resulted in huge loss of lives of tourists/residents

and severe damage to conventionally created infrastructural facilities in the

region, highlighting the requirement to strengthen the principles/criteria of

tourism infrastructure development proposals and their approval, so such



tourism infrastructure is durable to withstand natural elements and such

eventualities in the difficult Himalayan terrain, and yet are low-impact

developments (LID) making them energy efficient/climate resilient and cost-

effective in long-term, thus making them sustainable interventions for the

immediate-interventions.

Also, ―The RED Tourism Value Chain Selection, Strategy and Operational Plan-

Uttarakhand, October 2008‖ by International Tourism Consultancy for gtz-RED

program, Uttarakhand highlights the following on existing ecotourism-based

development:

―Over-construction in certain areas is creating serious damage because of poor

control of land use and exceeding carrying capacity in sensitive zones. This is

resulting in forests being depleted, views being obstructed and visual pollution in

natural areas. The design and the material used in the construction of some of

the properties that are promoted for ecotourism are inappropriate and do not

blend into the surroundings.

There was evidence of poor hygiene at some of the properties visited during the

study and the management of non-biodegradable waste is poor in general

because the waste collection system and recycling measures are weak or non-

existent. Natural areas are becoming dangerously polluted, thus degrading the

ecotourism experience that the visitors have come to enjoy.

Villagers who want to provide ecotourism services need to be educated about

environmental protection of their area, trained so that they can deliver the

quality of service required and explained about energy management and the

use of renewable energy. This may require developing a system of incentives or

grants to encourage accommodation providers to install renewable energy

equipment.

… Operators complain that there is nowhere to protect their clients during

periods of bad weather and shelters are needed on the trekking routes. Trekking

can cause environmental damage and there is a need for carrying capacity

studies on popular routes and strategies to divert trekkers to other routes during

the high season.‖

Thus, this guidelines document deliberates on the recommendations to be

made for when, where, and what type of construction should be followed to

conserve the fragile environment in the Himalayan region, and promote climate

resilient and overall environmentally sustainable tourism infrastructure at such

destinations in the state of Uttarakhand. It is felt imperative and so

recommended, to follow low-impact development (LID) and safe tourism

infrastructure development that has built-in mitigation measures that eventually

support the capacity of the Uttarakhand State towards adaptation capabilities

to meet climate change impacts/threats.



A summarized process checklist for ensuring due-diligence in tourism

infrastructure development process in the state of Uttarakhand is attached as

Appendix-1 in this document, supplementing the set guidelines.

GUIDING PRINCIPLES/INPUTS DISCUSSED WITH VARIOUS DEPARTMENTS, GoUK

As part of these guidelines‘ development process, interactions with several

government departments in the State of Uttarakhand were held by meeting

senior officials and their other representative officials as further directed, under

the coordination of Secretary, Tourism, and Department of Tourism‘s

representative Tourism Officer, UTDB.

The Table 3.2 of the guidelines lists these interactions and the guiding

principles/inputs as well technical/any other suggestions made, to be adopted

in preparing these infrastructure development guidelines for the overall tourism

sector.

STRATEGIC FRAMEWORK

To realize the core objectives and achieve the larger vision outlined for the

tourism sector, the GoUK has identified the following strategic intervention

areas:

Facilitate improvement of infrastructure, tourism products and service.

Create institutional structures that harness and compliment such

initiatives.

Create streamlined processes for obtaining clearances.

Offer attractive incentives for various tourism products and services as

well as to the operators/entrepreneurs–whether private or government.

Prioritise Human Resource Development & Capacity Enhancement.

A set of actions have been identified for each of the strategic intervention

areas, which are elaborated in the following sections. Detailed guidelines for

undertaking activities in the identified areas are elaborated under Section 5 of

this guideline. Section 5 includes brief description about the tourism product /

destination, eligibility criteria for the entities intending to develop the destination

and associated facilities; and minimum requirements for promoting and

developing the facility. The tourism products covered are as follows:

1. Site selection and development

2. Home Stays

3. Rural Tourism

4. Eco-Tourism

5. Adventure Tourism

6. Theme Parks

7. TRHs / Yatri Niwas with Dormitories and youth hostels

8. Tourist information & interpretation centres



9. Media Communication and promotional activities

10. Event Based Tourism

11. Heritage trails and natural trails

12. Heritage property conservation & revitalization

13. Museum management & special experience

14. Human resource development & capacity enhancement.

BASIC TOURISM INFRASTRUCTURE FACILITIES

Tourist Accommodation

i. Promote quality accommodation through Hotels/Resorts/Eco-

lodges/Camping Sites (Regular Camping Tents as well as Swiss Tents and

Log Huts category), Tourist Rest Houses (TRHs)/Yatri Niwas along with

Dormitories, including other stay facilities like home stays/B&Bs. The

definition of home stays includes traditional home stays developed at

various locations (e.g. at Jageshwar, Mukteshwar, Sakri Village, etc). The

Home stays Policy / Guidelines should be strengthened to encourage

registered home stays across the State. A mechanism for inspection,

certification and licensing of the home stays is also to be defined.

ii. Encourage adaptive reuse of non-notified or unprotected heritage

buildings for use as heritage hotels assuring minimal impact and risks are

mitigated therein.

iii. Facilitate development of accommodation for all customer segments

through serviced apartments, cottages, camping sites, dormitories,

youth hostels & Yatri Nivas at tourist destinations.

iv. Promote private sector participation in asset creation, management and

operation of commercial proponents of tourism products.

At Destination and Wayside Amenities

i. Promote wayside amenities including universal access or barrier-free

friendly built-environment compliant toilets, cafeteria, mini-

store/pharmacy/ATMs/ information kiosks/souvenir booth at appropriate

intermittent intervals along connecting roads leading to major tourist

destinations.

ii. Where possible as per the land/space availability environment-friendly

pre-fabricated bio-toilet units/pre-engineered building toilet complex with

bio-digester system should be promoted. Wayside amenities

economically benefitting local communities shall be encouraged. This

specific intervention should be proposed only after assurances that the

viability and sustainability of such proposals have been evaluated

diligently.



iii. Retail for local produce, crafts, adult literacy programmes, access to

internet etc. should be encouraged, wherever possible.

iv. Amenities including parking at the entrance of major tourist destinations

shall be promoted to regulate vehicular movement, with special access

for the physically challenged. Thrust should be given to provide

information centres/kiosks at all major tourist destinations.

v. Community kitchens, community-run tourist facilitation centre and cluster

of public conveniences at rural locations should be encouraged, largely

through Community-based Organisations, Voluntary Community

Organisations, Non-Governmental Organisations, Micro-Initiatives, Self-

Help Groups, etc.

Connectivity Infrastructure

i. The Government shall endeavour to increase entry points and improve

direct access to different destinations across the State for international,

interstate and intrastate visitors by encouraging development of new

routes, expanding existing airport capacity, etc.

ii. Development of low-cost terminals, transport nodes/heads, use of smaller

and viable transport modes transit-oriented development shall be

encouraged for sites, destination and regions of touristic significance.

iii. Improving last-mile road/rail connectivity to tourist destinations will be a

priority area and Government should co-ordinate with other government

agencies/departments in facilitating these tourism development

activities.

iv. Intermodal transport connectivity such as link from railway stations and

bus terminals to tourist destinations where required, should be developed

in collaboration with respective government agencies/departments.

v. Environment-friendly vehicles having a minimum impact on the ecology

of the destination shall be promoted.

Tourist Amenities

Amenities like information kiosks, trained guides/audio guides,

interpretation centres, tourist scouts, medical aid, and Barrier free space

and environment for the physically challenged/differently-able will be

promoted at all major tourist destinations.

Information, Communication & Technology (ICT)

i. Initiatives should be encouraged to provide adequate and reliable

information about destinations, accommodations, itinerary, events,

online bookings and other offerings through various modes such as

online web portals, tourism offices, booklets, flyers, brochures, maps etc.



ii. Provision of audio guides, mobile technology, wi-fi at major tourist

destinations should be encouraged. Technology interventions for social

networking and data management shall be supported by the GoUK.

iii. Apart from promoting a digital marketing and information collateral, the

Government shall support other initiatives for branding and promotion

such as development of information and interpretation centres at tourist

destinations.

Safety and Security of Visitors

i. The ―tourist scouts‖ shall be deployed at key tourist destinations for

keeping a vigil on the gathering thus ensuring safety and security of

visitors.

ii. Visitor monitoring and management plan should be developed for

rationalizing the flow of visitors. Registration of tourist and vehicles arriving

in the state from any of the gateways / entrance should be done to

manage overcrowding and traffic congestion at tourist destinations. The

wireless communication based methods which provide real time

information about the tourist numbers and location at various tourist

destinations should also be studied and feasibility of introducing any of

these shall be looked into.

iii. A Disaster Management Plan, in collaboration with State Disaster

Management Authority (SDMA), should be developed for major tourism

destinations to enhance preparedness for any eventuality. A dedicated

helpline number will be launched exclusively for the convenience of

tourists. In addition, based on the carrying capacity and tourism

regulation studies (including those undertaken as per UEAP loan

covenant requirements) measures thereof for visitor numbers through

registration (e.g. bio-metric registration for important pilgrimages) &

control of visitation permitted from one registration control point at a

lower level to the respective destination enroute. This is expected to

facilitate disaster management during any eventuality and would not

unnecessarily invite the visitors at risk beyond the carrying capacity of a

travel route/destination.

SITE FINALIZATION CRITERIA

For site finalization/subproject selection post-spatial planning, consider the

following international/national best practice for–new projects or those which

require redevelopment/rehabilitation/restoration:

The selection of sites as attractions/destinations along a priority tourism

circuit must be connected to at least one main gateway centre that is, in

turn, connected either by air, rail, road or water transportation to one or

more domestic or international transportation hubs.



The selection of local communities for participation in the subproject(s)

must be based upon the following criteria:

i. preferably comprise clusters of villages within or adjacent to, a tourist

attraction site;

ii. must be accessible through an existing road including that which has the

potential to enhance access to other tourist attraction(s), and gateway

centre(s), through minimum upgrading;

iii. There is strong support and commitment from key stakeholders (e.g., local

community members, ULB/Panchayat, SHG, tourism and related

concerned agencies, private sector tour operators and carriers, and

development partners and NGOs); and

iv. Cost recovery mechanisms for recurrent operating costs are in place or

there is a clear willingness to put them in place.

TECHNICAL & ECONOMIC CRITERIA FOR DEVELOPMENT OF SUBPROJECT

This guideline in-principle recommends adopting the existing provisions of

subproject selection criteria defined in the UEAP-PAM under Appendix 4,

Section 2 (ii) to (vii) of the Technical Criteria, as below:

The subproject shall be technically sound and meeting design standards.

The subproject will be designed and executed as seismic resistant structure.

The subproject shall be cost-effective.

The subproject should be avoided in core zones of national parks, wildlife

sanctuaries and biospheres and the critical habitats. If unavoidable, such

subprojects should be strictly confined to minor rehabilitation of existing

infrastructure.

The revised high flood levels of the rivers or the natural streams or drainage

channels shall be considered, while designing facilities.

Geo-technical studies shall be undertaken and slope stabilization measures

considered for slide zones, wherever applicable.

The subproject shall be in compliance with all applicable local rules and

regulations.

Similarly, the provisions made under the ongoing ADB IDIPT-UK Loan under

its FAM with respect to subproject selection and technical criteria are also

duly referred and incorporated.

While, the Economic Criteria being as below:

the analysis should ensure that there is sufficient demand for the critical

public and social infrastructure;

the analysis is undertaken for the various alternatives

economic evaluation should cover the key areas of economic analysis

indicated in ADB‘s Key Areas of Economic Analysis of Projects – An

Overview.



In addition, similar criteria provisions made by the Government of India under

the disaster management subject are also considered herein:

i. Mitigation measures on individual structures can be achieved by

design standards, building codes and performance specifications.

Building codes, critical front-line defence for achieving stronger

engineered structures, need to be drawn up in accordance with the

vulnerability of the area and implemented through appropriate

techno-legal measures.

ii. Mitigation measures need to be considered in land use and site

planning activities. Constructions in hazardous areas like flood plains or

steep soft slopes are more vulnerable to disasters. Necessary mitigation

measures need to be built into the design and costing of development

projects.

iii. Every hazard prone district may draw up specific hazard related plans.

These plans may be reviewed/updated in the months of April and May

each year.

iv. Every district located in area prone to hazard will need to maintain an

online inventory of resources available in the Government, public and

private sector. This will enable easy and quick mobilization of resources

in case of need. A State-wide online resources inventory would enable

the mobilization of resources from neighbouring districts in cases of

need.

v. State in seismic zone V and IV may ensure that the BIS building codes

for these zones have been adopted and are rigorously enforced by the

municipal bodies. All construction in the Government sector in these

areas must conform to the BIS code.

vi. Additional Provisions in Development Control Regulations for Safety;

and Additional Provisions in Building Regulations/Byelaws for Structural

Safety–in Natural Hazard Zones under the following heads are

incorporated:

Earthquake Prone Areas,

Flood Prone Areas,

Land Slide Prone Areas,

Approach for Land Use Zoning,

Prioritisation,

Land Use Zoning for Flood Safety,

Planning in Hill Areas, and

Identification of Open Spaces.



CRITERIA FOR DEVELOPMENT OF SITES/SUBPROJECTS

General requirements that must be followed in developing the

sites/subprojects for tourism infrastructure are set out below:

(i) Proposed works under the subprojects shall conform to each of the

safeguard frameworks (i.e. both environment and social);

(ii) Proposed works should give preference to the use of local materials

and labour;

(iii) Building/streetscape/community market‘s designs, materials and

scale must be compatible to the local vernacular architecture, and

physical and cultural heritage landscape;

(iv) Proposed works should result in significant improvements to the

quality of the site environment and enable it to host tourists in a safe,

healthy/comfortable, and secure manner;

(v) Design of environmental infrastructure and last-mile road

connectivity should comply to nationally-accepted benchmarks and

standards including the international best practice of ―complete

streets‖ concept which adopt green infrastructure principles, have

proper road-side drainage & cross-drainage works and are

protected with crash barriers, are inclusive in nature for pedestrian

use with appropriate spaces & surface markings, are barrier-free

built-environment compliant, and have signage etc. and practice

should be made preferably complete the road in all respects prior to

the road being opened for public use;

(vi) Environmental infrastructure including water supply, drainage and

flood control, sanitation, and solid waste management shall be

provided where existing provisions are assessed to be insufficient for

both community and projected tourism use, and should explore the

options of adopting green infrastructure practices; and

(vii) Responsible organization exists or can be established to maintain

and operate the tourism assets/tourism infrastructure to be created.

Utilities/Infrastructure Services

The type of environmental-friendly utilities/infrastructure services eligible at

tourist attractions/destinations, gateway centres and CBT village sites, and

on main access roads between these (where wayside facilities are

proposed) include: water supply, sanitation, solid waste management,

drainage and flood control, and use of renewable energy applications.

Tourist Support Infrastructure and Services

Tourist support infrastructure and services are a key element in ensuring

that tourists are able to fully appreciate and enjoy tourist destinations and

attractions in a safe, convenient/comfortable and healthy manner, thus



helping to increase the attractiveness of the tourist destinations, and thus

length of stay and expenditure by the tourists. Such infrastructure and

services include: visitor information and interpretation facilities; public

toilets; signage, lighting and landscaping; community markets; and CBT

facilities and services at tourist attractions/ destinations and gateway

centres.

Tourist Destination Connectivity Infrastructure

Connectivity is a key element in effectively linking tourist attraction site(s)

within a tourist destination and linking tourist destinations and gateway

centre(s) along a tourism circuit/sub-circuit. Eligible infrastructure and

services include helipad/heliports/helidromes (which also provide

capacity development for disaster preparedness when integrated with

multi-purpose halls/shelters for facilitating any disaster-based/emergency

evacuation, rescue and relief services), last-mile connectivity

improvements (by roads/pedestrian paths), wayside facilities, and traffic

management infrastructure (circulation and parking). Description of each

type of infrastructure and services, and the guidelines that must be

followed in selecting, undertaking and operating these subprojects are

set out below:

(i) Helipads/heliports provide the opportunity to bring tourists to

more remote locations as well as provide emergency medical

evacuation services to enhance tourists‘ safety and security.

Post-disaster of June 2013, helidromes may be developed near

selective large tourism destination/urban centers as felt

necessary for disaster preparedness coverage needs, and those

already existing may be upgraded as felt required. The site shall

be finalized based on required land area availability,

obstruction analysis report for FATO alignment, and safeguard

screening (both environment and social) completed. Land

required for helipad/heliport/helidrome development, and

passenger and freight services should be made available by the

State. Willingness to operate regular services between the site

and main gateway centre(s) must be confirmed and

guaranteed with one or more private helicopter service

operators. These facilities should be developed as per

applicable norms & standards/regulations viz. DGCA CAR, ICAO

Heliport Manual, etc. Also, associated facilities with each

helipad/heliport/helidrome category as applicable like apron,

helicopter parking, taxiway, any hangar/terminal building,

approach road access & vehicle parking, surface markings,

fencing, and equipments like–windsock/lighting & any

navigational aid/fire-fighting and rescue & relief mechanism,



etc., should be provided; and an integrated amenity of

multipurpose hall/shelter within 500 m distance (as per land

availability) should also be thought off to strengthen disaster

preparedness capacity;

(ii) Last-Mile Connectivity Improvements include improvements to

last-mile road access to tourist attraction sites and provision of

road signage. Road upgrading must follow existing alignments

as far as practicable and must not lead to alteration of surface

water hydrology of rivers/streams/waterways. Where required to

protect the ecological sensitivity and to maintain the serenity of

the tourism site, last-mile connectivity may also be explored

through the provision of environment-friendly constructed

pedestrian pathways/trails;

(iii) Wayside facilities/amenities are essential where travel distance

between tourist gateway centre and destination, or between

two tourist destinations, is significant. Wayside facilities include

off and on-highway ramps, parking for cars and buses, public

toilets and restrooms with lockers, refreshment centre offering

food and beverage, information, fuel and vehicle

maintenance, etc. The location of wayside facilities must be

determined by the length of vehicle travel times between tourist

gateway centre and destination, or between two tourist

destinations (typically one for a vehicle travel interval of

between 45 minutes and 1.5 hours) as well as by ―through

traffic‖ requirements, if any, based on traffic flow studies. Land

required for the wayside facilities should be made available by

the State (if land transfer is required between two state

departments, the same should be done in a well-coordinated

and timely manner to achieve the purpose of tourism

asset/infrastructure creation in time). In principle, wayside

facilities should be operated on a PPP basis by the private

sector; and

(iv) Traffic management and transportation infrastructure,

especially circulation and parking, is essential for ensuring

attractive environment and quality experience for visiting

tourists. As a long-term measure integrated traffic management

plan and/or comprehensive mobility plan (CMP) should be

prepared for tourist attractions/destinations and gateway

centres to provide a framework for investments in traffic

management infrastructure. Traffic management infrastructure

such as multi-storey parking, which is well suited for PPP or

private sector investment, should be encouraged. Such parking



structure may also be integrated with one tourism information

kiosk/booth, one small cafeteria, and where felt required one

PCO booth as well (as access to all mobile networks may not be

available at all sites, especially in the upper reaches of the

Himalayan Region in Uttarakhand State).

TECHNICAL STANDARDS AND REGULATIONS

Except where otherwise specified, materials and workmanship shall comply with

the requirements of the Central Public Works Department (CPWD)

Specifications, relevant Indian Standards (hereinafter referred to as IS) issued by

the Bureau of Indian Standards (BIS), safety manuals and National Building

Code (NBC). Also, GRIHA, an acronym for Green Rating for Integrated Habitat

Assessment, is the national rating system for green building in India [GRIHA has

been conceived by TERI and developed jointly with the Ministry of New and

Renewable Energy, Government of India. It is a green building 'design

evaluation system', and is suitable for all kinds of buildings in different climatic

zones of the country].

In the absence of any IS or specifications, equivalent International Standard

Specifications such as those issued by the International Organization for

Standardization (ISO) or British Standards (BS) or the International Electro-

technical Commission (IEC) or American Society for Testing and materials

(ASTM) or American National Standards Institute (ANSI) or Japanese Industrial

Standards (JIS) any other international standard, specifications or Manual may

be followed or proposed by the developer at the sole discretion of the

Executing Authority or as may have been agreed in the Contract.

All standards and specifications, whether national or international, applied and

used shall be with latest amendments / correction slips. In the event of conflict

between any of these Specifications and the Codes referred, such

specifications shall be defined, prepared by the Developer and submitted to

the Executing/Implementing Authority for approval. The decision of

Executing/Implementing Authority in such case shall be final and binding on the

Developer.

In referring to the Standards, Specifications, Manuals, Guidelines, etc. the

following abbreviations are used but not limited to these only:

ANSI : American National Standards Institute APA : American Planning Association

AWS : American Welding Society AGMA : American Gear Manufacturer’s Association AS : Australian Standards ASME : American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASTM : American Society of Testing and Materials AWWA : American Water Works Association



BIS : Bureau of Indian Standards

BS : British Standard CEN : Comité Européen de Normalisation or European Committee for

Standardization CPHEEO : Central Public Health Environmental and Engineering Organization.

CPWD : Central Public works Department DIN : Deutsches Institute fur Normung EN : European Standards GRIHA : Green Rating for Integrated Habitat Assessment ICOMOS : International Council on Monuments and Sites IEC : International Electrotechnical Commission

IEE : Institution of Electrical Engineers IEEE : Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers ISO : International Organisation for Standardisation IP Ratings/IP code : Ingress Protection Ratings IRC : Indian Road Congress IS : Indian Standard JIS : Japanese Industrial Standards MORTH : Ministry of Road, Transport and Highways NBC : National Building Code NEMA : National Electrical Manufacturers Association

NZS : New Zealand Standards

All materials, plant and equipment shall be new and all materials and

workmanship not fully specified herein or covered by an approved standard

shall be of such kind as is used in first class work and suitable to the environment

and climate in the project area. All details, materials and equipment supplied

and workmanship performed shall comply with these Standards.

PLANNING AND ENGINEERING DESIGN

o Uttarakhand State falls primarily in seismic zone V and some parts in seismic

zone IV and thus all areas in the State are considered prone to earthquake

hazards. The State shall ensure that the BIS building codes for these zones

have been adopted and are rigorously enforced by the ULBs/Panchayats

and PWD/District Administration. All new construction (single- or multi-

storeyed) in the Government sector in these areas for tourism infrastructure

integrated with disaster preparedness infrastructure measures must

conform to the BIS code for earthquake resistant framed-structure design.

All new construction in Private sector under Tourism Sector (i.e. tourism

assets/supporting tourism infrastructure) in Uttarakhand State must conform

to the BIS code for earthquake resistant framed-structure design, without

any exception to number of storeys proposed during process of approval

from ULBs/Panchayats, and for registration under Department of Tourism

(through UTDB/GMVN/KMVN) for operating such tourism services. The State

departments participating in creation of tourism assets/tourism



infrastructure directly (UTDB/GMVN/KMVN) or as an assisting body

(RDD/PWD/RES/UPRNN etc. including for rural areas) must follow the criteria

proposed by NDM Division, MoHA, GoI in 2004 for ―Earthquake Prone

Areas‖ recommended and reproduced herewith:

a) Intensities of VII or more on Modified Mercalli or MSK intensity scale

are considered moderate to high areas under seismic zones III, IV

and V as specified in IS 1893. Therefore, all areas in these three zones

will be considered prone to earthquake hazards.

b) In these zones the areas which have soil conditions and the level of

water table favourable for liquefaction or settlements under

earthquake vibrations will have greater risk to buildings and structures

which will be of special consideration under Land Use Zoning.

c) Under these zones, those hilly areas which are identified to have poor

slope stability conditions and where landslides could be triggered by

earthquake or where due to prior saturated conditions, mud flow

could be initiated by earthquakes and where avalanches could be

triggered by earthquake will be specially risk prone.

d) Whereas, earthquake hazard prone areas defined in ‗a‘ above are

identified on the map given in IS 1893 to small scale and more easily

identified in the larger scale state wise maps given in the Vulnerability

Atlas of India, the special risky areas as defined in ‗b‘ and ‗c‘ above,

have to be determined specifically for the planning area under

consideration through special studies to be carried out by geologists

and geo-technical engineers.

e) If an active fault trace is identified by GSI (Geological Survey of

India), a structure for human occupancy should not be placed over

the fault trace and must be set back by a minimum of 15 m on either

side of fault trace.

o The provisions proposed by NDM Division, MoHA, GoI as mentioned-above

in 2004 including for ―Flood Prone Areas‖ are recommended to be

followed in Uttarakhand State (as reproduced herewith):

a) The flood prone areas in river plains (unprotected and protected by

bunds) are indicated in the Flood Atlas of India prepared by the

Central Water Commission and reproduced on larger scale in the

state-wise maps in the Vulnerability Atlas of India.

b) Besides the above areas, other areas can be flooded under

conditions of heavy intensity rains, inundation in depressions,

backflow in drains, inadequate drainage, failure of protection works,

etc.

c) Whereas, the flood prone areas under ‗a‘ are identified on the

available maps as indicated, the areas under ‗b‘ have to be

identified through local contour survey and study of the flood history



of the planning area. Such studies may be carried out through

Survey of India or local survey teams, and by reference to the

Central Water Commission and the departments of the State or UT

dealing with the floods.

o Since the Uttarakhand State located in the young Himalayan mountain

range, the provisions proposed by NDM Division, MoHA, GoI as mentioned-

above in 2004 including for ―Land Slide Prone Areas‖ are recommended to

be followed in the State (as reproduced herewith):

a) While it is known that most hilly areas are prone to

landslides/landslips, the susceptibility of the various areas to landslide

varies from very low to very high. Landslide zoning naturally requires

mapping on large scale. Normally medium scale of 1:25000 is at least

chosen. In preparation of the landslide zone map, two types of

factors are considered important as listed here below:

1) Geological/Topographic Factors/Parameters

- Lithology

- Geological Structures/Lineaments

- Slope-dip (bedding, joint) relation

- Geomorphology

- Drainage

- Slope angle, slope aspect and slope morphology

- Land use

- Soil texture and depth

- Rock weathering

2) Triggering Factors

- Rainfall

- Earthquake

- Anthropogeny

b) Whereas the factors listed under geological/topographic parameters

have been considered as basic inputs for the landslide potential

model, the three triggering factors namely, Rainfall, Earthquake and

Anthropogeny were considered external factors which trigger the

occurrence of a landslide.

c) Whereas, the landslide prone areas under ‗a‘ are available for some

parts of the country on the maps given in Landslide Hazard Zonation

Mapping in the Himalayas of Uttaranchal and Himachal Pradesh

States using Remote Sensing and GIS Techniques, published by

National Remote Sensing Agency, Department of Space,

Government of India, Hyderabad and Landslide Hazard Zonation

Atlas of India – Landslide Hazard Maps and Cases Studies prepared

by Building Materials & Technology Promotion Council, Ministry of



Urban Development & Poverty Alleviation, Government of India, the

risky areas in other parts of the country have to be determined

specially for the planning areas under consideration through special

studies to be carried out by the State/UT governments and the

concerned Competent Authorities.

o Mitigation measures need to be considered in land use and site planning

activities. Constructions in hazardous areas like flood plains or steep soft

slopes are more vulnerable to disasters. Necessary mitigation measures

need to be built into the design and costing of development projects.

o The provisions proposed by NDM Division, MoHA, GoI as mentioned above

in 2004 including for ―Approach for Land Use Zoning‖ are recommended to

be followed in Uttarakhand State (as reproduced herewith):

Having identified the hazard prone areas the following alternatives

can be adopted for dealing with the disaster risk problems:

1) Leaving the area unprotected: In this case it will be necessary to

specify Land Use Zoning for various development purposes as

recommended under herein (next four bulleted sub-sections

below).

2) Using protection methods for the areas as a whole or in the

construction of buildings, structures and infrastructure facilities to

cater for the hazard intensities likely in the Planning Area.

3) It will be appropriate to prioritise buildings, structures and

infrastructures in terms of their importance from the point of view

of impact of damage on the socio-economic structure of the

society.

o Prioritisation (recommended as proposed in above-mentioned NDM

Division, MoHA, GoI report in 2004, and as reproduced herewith):

In regard to Land Use Zoning, different types of buildings and utility

services are grouped under three priorities as indicated below:

Priority 1. Defence installation, industries, public utilities, life line

structures like hospitals, electricity installations, water supply,

telephone exchange, aerodromes and railway stations;

commercial centres, libraries, other buildings or installations with

contents of high economic value.

Priority 2. Public and Semi-public institutions, Government offices,

and residential areas.

Priority 3. Parks, play grounds, wood lands, gardens, green belts,

and recreational areas.



o Land Use Zoning for Flood Safety (recommended as proposed in above-

mentioned NDM Division, MoHA, GoI report in 2004, and as reproduced

herewith):

1) Recommendations for Land Use Zoning of Flood Prone Areas

(a) Preparation of Flood Contour Maps

The following actions should be taken to prepare the flood

contour maps by taking up special studies/surveys as found

necessary in the Development Area:

i. Prepare detailed contour plan of the area liable to flood

on a scale of 1 in 15000 or larger scale showing contours

at interval of 0.3 to 0.5 metre;

ii. Fix reference river gauges or maximum flood levels due to

heavy rains with respect to which the areas are likely to

be inundated;

iii. Demarcate areas liable to flooding by floods in rivers of

return periods of 5, 25, 50 and 100 years or by excessive

rainfall of return period of 5, 10, 25, and 50 years; and

iv. Mark on the maps the submersion contours for these flood

stages.

(b) Regulation for Land Use Zoning

i. Installations and Buildings of Priority 1 should be located in

such a fashion that the area is above the levels

corresponding to a 100 year flood or the maximum

observed flood levels, whichever higher. Similarly, they

should also be above the levels corresponding to a 50

year rainfall flooding and the likely submersion due to

drainage congestion;

ii. Buildings of Priority 2 should be located outside the 25

year flood or a 10 year rainfall contour, provided that the

buildings if constructed between the 10 and 25 year

contours should have either high plinth level above 25

year flood mark or constructed on columns or stilts, with

ground area left for the unimportant uses;

iii. Activities of Priority 3 viz. play grounds, gardens and parks

etc. can be located in areas vulnerable to frequent

floods.

Note: In natural hazard prone areas identified under the land use zoning

regulations, structures buildings and installations which cannot be avoided,

protective measures for such construction/development should be properly

safeguarded.



Thus, it can be summarised that generally tourism cannot be promoted without

basic infrastructure especially, transportation and water supply. Whilst, transport

is key for travel, water supply is generally most essential for any tourist service

facilities. Accommodation establishments and restaurants cannot exist without

water. Other utilities and services are important not only for visitors, but also for

tourism service industries. Future tourism development should be coordinated

with existing infrastructure capacities, and future infrastructure development

plans. Types of tourism development largely depend on the service level of

these infrastructures.



BACKGROUND

he State of Uttarakhand with holy shrines, rivers, the Himalayas and stunning landscapes, is

popularly called the Devbhumi i.e. the Land of Gods and is an important destination for pilgrims

and tourists from all over the world. Two of the most revered rivers of the country, the Ganga

and the Yamuna, originate from Gaumukh (Gangotri), and Yamunotri respectively; and Shri

Badrinath and Shri Kedarnath, the holy places of Lord Vishnu and Lord Shiva respectively are an

important part of the Char-Dham pilgrimage circuit. Another prominent pilgrimage destination is

the holy town of Haridwar, where the prestigious Kumbh Mela is held every twelve years,

attracting millions of pilgrims from all over the world; while the pilgrimage of Kailash-Mansarovar

Yatra trek route passes through the eastern edge of the State, the State is also home to Sri

Hemkunt Sahib Shrine (the highest located Gurdwara in the world). Apart from

religious/pilgrimage tourism, Uttarakhand also provides great opportunities for nature based

tourism and adventure sports like mountaineering, trekking, skiing and water sports.

During June 15-17, 2013, significant part of both regions of Garhwal and Kumaon of state of

Uttarakhand received heavy torrential rains, cloudburst and unexpected floods from probable

glacial meltdown (e.g. glacial lake burst/overflow related flash floods at Kedarnath) which led

to large scale devastations. The aftermath experienced as: long stretches of roads washed out

or caved in; complete loss of road connectivity and communications; loss of human lives; large

scale damage to personal and civic infrastructure property; natural alteration in local ecology;

complete disruption of civic services in affected towns; impacts on local and regional livelihood

and loss of tourism footprint; complete disruption in pilgrimage; etc. In this context, it has been

observed that presently there does exist some guidelines/directive circulars issued from time to

time by Uttarakhand State Government through Forest Department as well as those under

Tourism, Urban Development, Housing, and T&CP Departments. However, these need to be duly

studied and holistically integrated and made comprehensive in nature towards meeting

sustainable tourism infrastructure development in such Himalayan terrain.

Thus, as per the loan covenant of Asian Development Bank (ADB) provisioned in para 7,

Schedule 5 of the Loan Agreement of Uttarakhand Emergency Assistance Project (UEAP)‖, it‘s

imperative that ―With regard to tourism infrastructure rehabilitated and reconstructed under the

Project, without limiting the generality of Project requirements, the EA in particular shall (a)

prepare guidelines for new infrastructure to be developed under the sector…‖ The guidelines

has thus been prepared as “Infrastructure Development Guidelines: Developing new

infrastructure under tourism sector, including any rehabilitated and reconstructed tourism

infrastructure (UTDB-IDG-01), March 2015” and discussed amongst several stakeholders finalised.

1 PROJECT SUMMARY

The State of Uttarakhand was carved out of Himalayan and adjoining

districts of Uttar Pradesh on 9 November 2000 becoming the 27th state of

the Republic of India, and was initially known as Uttaranchal when the

state was so formed, up-till the end of year 2006.

Uttarakhand borders Tibet to the north, Nepal to the east, and the states of

Himachal Pradesh and Uttar Pradesh in the west and south respectively.

The region is traditionally referred to as Uttarakhand in Hindu scriptures and

T



old literature, a term which derives from the Sanskrit for Northern Country or

Section. Uttarakhand by virtue of its geographical setting is vulnerable to

minor ecological changes. Hence any activity disapproved by mountain

ecosystem triggers a disaster. We cannot stop disaster to happen but can

certainly take some steps to reduce its effects. Disasters are synonymous to

damage of property, life and psyche of the people. If disasters cannot be

averted, then reduction of losses of any type, caused by disaster becomes

a focal point of the policy for disaster. So far, in the recent June 2013

Uttarakhand has experienced major natural calamities in districts

Rudraprayag (Kedarnath), Chamoli, Uttarkashi, Bageshwar and

Pithoragarh (Dharchula).

Being part the Himalayan region1, Uttarakhand is a disaster prone state.

Landslides, forest fires, cloudbursts and flash-floods are seasonal in nature

and this strike at a certain period of the year with high frequency. Natural

disasters in the mountains are the most devastating and are unpredictable.

Natural disaster of June 2013 resulted in huge damage of life, roads,

tourism assets/infrastructure, rural & urban infrastructure in the state of

Uttarakhand. This event also recorded a glacial lake (Chorabari Lake)

burst/overflow2 related flash flood causing a great number of loss of lives

and severe damage of property at Kedarnath & further downstream

enroute, e.g. settlement of Rambara was completely washed away.

The Government of Uttarakhand (GoUK) launched a massive emergency

rescue and evacuation operation with assistance from the Indian Army,

Indian Air Force (IAF), Indo-Tibetan Border Police (ITBP), the National

Disaster Response Force (NDRF) and the local Police evacuating more than

110,000 people from these flood affected areas. The need to immediately

start the recovery and reconstruction work, especially in the most affected

areas prompted the need for a rapid assessment to understand the nature

of damages post-disaster (as described below). The Uttarakhand

Government is committed to ensure the safety and well-being of its people

and recognizes the necessity to continuously improve disaster risk reduction

and management within the State. This report is a forward looking report

incorporating a post-disaster recovery framework that proposes immediate

1 Inhabitants in the Himalayan region are exposed to many natural hazards. The mountain ranges are young with an

unstable geology, steep slopes, and a climate that is difficult to predict. As a result, the region is highly susceptible to

natural hazards such as floods and flash floods, landslides, and earthquakes. (ICIMOD, 2008, Sharing Knowledge on

Disaster Risk Reduction in the Himalayan Region: Proceedings from two workshops on planning processes, social

inclusion, and local knowledge for disaster preparedness) 2 Chorabari Lake is reported as glacier moraine dammed lake adjoining the Chorabari Glacier terminus. ―The Chorabari

Lake is a snow melt and rain fed lake, located about 2 km upstream of Kedarnath town which is approximately 400 m

long, 200 m wide having a depth of 15–20 m. The bursting of this lake led to its complete draining within 5–10 min as

reported by the watch and ward staff of the Wadia Institute of Himalayan Geology (WIHG) who were present in WIHG

camp at Chorabari Glacier on 16 June and early morning of 17 June 2013. The heavy rainfall together with melting of

snow in the surrounding Chorabari Lake washed off both the banks of the Mandakini River causing massive

devastation to the Kedarnath town.‖[Dobhal et al 2013, Scientific Correspondence on ―Kedarnath disaster; facts and

plausible causes‖ published in Current Science, Vol. 105, No.2, 25 July 2013, pp 171-174.]



measures of ‗building-back-smarter‘ to improve the resilience of the State‘s

infrastructure and its communities from impacts of future disasters and

climate change(s).3

The Asian Development Bank (ADB) on receiving a request from the

Department of Economic Affairs (DEA), Government of India (GoI), fielded

a Joint Rapid Damage and Needs Assessment (JRDNA) Mission with World

Bank, within the State. The JRDNA team visited the State during July 29 to

August 07, 2013, and in collaboration with GoUK undertook a multi-sectoral

assessment of the damages and laid the grounds for an immediate

recovery and reconstruction needs framework. The said report noted that a

high percentage of precipitation coupled with the large influx of tourists

and pilgrims around the same time of the disaster stretched the existing

public infrastructure and public services beyond its limits; and suggests

several recommendations for recovery and way forward, for housing,

public infrastructure, transport, urban and rural infrastructures, productive

sectors and livelihoods, tourism infrastructure, energy, forest and

biodiversity, and urban disaster risk reduction and response preparedness,

along with cross cutting themes like full-fledged mitigation program for

landslides, cloudbursts, floods, avalanches, earthquakes., including safe

shelters in disaster prone areas, etc.

Thus, based on above suggestions and as per the advice of Asian

Development Bank (ADB) provisioned in para 7, Schedule 5 of the Loan

Agreement of UEAP, it‘s required that ―With regard to tourism infrastructure

rehabilitated and reconstructed under the Project, without limiting the

generality of Project requirements, the EA in particular shall (a) prepare

guidelines for new infrastructure to be developed under the sector…‖ The

guidelines has thus been prepared as “Infrastructure Development

Guidelines: Developing new infrastructure under tourism sector, including

any rehabilitated and reconstructed tourism infrastructure (UTDB-IDG-01),

March 2015” and discussed amongst several stakeholders and finalised.

ADB further advises the UTDB to incorporate these during preparation of

documents for UEAP implementation. The same can be followed in future

as well by Government of Uttarakhand through UTDB for general tourist

infrastructure development, as well through Forest Department (FD) for

ecotourism-based tourist infrastructure development.

3 INDIA: Uttarakhand Disaster June 2013-Joint Rapid Damage and Needs Assessment (JRDNA) Report. (The World Bank,

Government of Uttarakhand, and Asian Development Bank, August 2013)



2 INTRODUCTION, RATIONALE/NEED

The state of Uttarakhand is bounded by Uttar Pradesh on the south, Nepal

on the east, Himachal Pradesh on the west, and China on the northeast.

The Ganga and the Yamuna rivers take birth in the glaciers of Uttarakhand,

and are fed by innumerable lakes, glacial melts and streams in the region.

The topography of Uttarakhand is characterized by hilly terrain, rugged

and rocky mountains, deep valleys, high peaks, sharp streams and rivulets,

rapid soil erosion, frequent landslides and widely scattered habitations.

Char-Dhams, the four most sacred and revered Hindu temples: Badrinath,

Kedarnath, Gangotri and Yamunotri are nestled in the Mighty Mountains.

Capital of Uttarakhand is Dehradun which is also the rail-head in the

region. The High Court is situated in the district of Nainital.

2.1 People

Uttarakhand has traditionally been divided into two parts, the eastern

region going by the name of Kumaon and the western half known as

Garhwal. The native people of Uttarakhand call themselves Paharis (hill

people), the majority of whom are Hindus. Other ethnic communities in the

region include Gujjars and Nepalis.

2.2 Climate

The climate of Uttarakhand is temperate, marked by seasonal variations in

temperature but also affected by tropical monsoon. January is the coldest

month, with daily high temperatures averaging below freezing in the north

and near 70 °F (21 °C) in the southeast. In the north, July is the hottest

month, with temperatures typically rising from the mid-40s °F (about 7 °C) to

about 70 °F daily. In the southeast, May is the warmest month, with daily

temperatures normally reaching the low 100s °F (about 38 °C) from a low

around 80 °F (27 °C). Most of the State‘s roughly 60 inches (1,500 mm) of

annual precipitation is brought by the southwest monsoon, which blows

from July through September. Floods and landslides are problems during

the rainy season in the lower stretches of the valleys. In the northern parts of

the state, 10 to 15 feet (3 to 5 meters) of snowfall is common between

December and March.

2.3 Geography

Uttarakhand State is located in the northern part of India amongst the

Himalayan region between latitudes 28°43‘ N to 31°27‘ N and longitudes

77°34‘ E to 81°02‘ E. Uttarakhand has a total area of 53,483 sqkm, of which

86% is mountainous/hill (46,035 sqkm) and almost 65% is covered by forests

http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/390302/monsoon

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Forest



(34,651 sqkm). (General Information – Uttarakhand at a Glance, 2011,

Uttarakhand Tourism Website)

Most of the northern part of the state is covered by high Himalayan peaks

and glaciers, while the lower foothills are densely forested.

2.4 Drainage

The state is drained by various rivers of the Ganges (Ganga) system. The

westernmost watershed is formed by the Yamuna River and its major

tributary, the Tons. The land to the east of this basin is drained by

the Bhagirathi and the Alaknanda—which join to form the Ganges at the

town of Devprayag—and the Mandakini, Pindar, and Dhauliganga, all

principal tributaries of the Alaknanda. To the east again are the southward-

flowing Ramganga and Kosi rivers, and draining to the southeast in the

same region are the Saryu and Goriganga, both of which join the Kali at

Uttarakhand‘s eastern border with Nepal.

2.5 Soils

Uttarakhand has various types of soil, all of which are susceptible to soil

erosion. In the north, the soil ranges from gravel (debris from glaciers) to stiff

clay. Brown forest soil—often shallow, gravelly, and rich in organic

content—is found farther to the south. The Bhabar area is characterized by

soils that are coarse-textured, sandy to gravelly, highly porous, and largely

infertile. In the extreme southeastern part of the state, the Terai soils are

mostly rich, clayey loams, mixed to varying degrees with fine sand and

humus; they are well suited to the cultivation of rice and sugarcane.

2.6 Demography

According to the 2011 Census of India, Uttarakhand has a population of

10,116,752 comprising 5,154,178 males and 4,962,574 females, with 69.45%

of the population living in rural areas. The state is the 20th most populous

state of the country having 0.84% of the population on 1.69% of the land.

2.7 Literacy

As of the 2011 census the literacy rate of the state was 79.63% with 88.33%

literacy for males and 70.70% literacy for female.

2.8 Economy

Agriculture is one of the most significant sectors of the economy of

Uttarakhand. Basmati rice, wheat, soybeans, groundnuts, coarse cereals,

pulses, and oil seeds are the most widely grown crops. Fruits like apples,

oranges, pears, peaches, litchis, and plums are widely grown and

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Himalaya

http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/225359/Ganges-River

http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/651644/Yamuna-River

http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/63913/Bhagirathi-River

http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/322692/Kosi-River

http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/496048/region

http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/409152/Nepal

http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/213461/forest

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Oil_seeds



important to the large food processing industry. Agricultural export zones

have been set up in the state for leechi, horticulture, herbs, medicinal

plants, and basmati rice. Other key industries include tourism and

hydropower, and there is prospective development in IT, ITES,

biotechnology, pharmaceuticals and automobile industries. The service

sector of Uttarakhand mainly includes tourism, information technology,

higher education, and banking.

2.9 Tourism in Uttarakhand and Tourist Arrivals

As per the Report of ―Uttarakhand Sector Study, December 2006‖ by

German Technical Cooperation on the economic sectors for the

upcoming gtz sponsored RED program then, ―Tourism in Uttarakhand may

be classified into a number of important segments, such as:

Religious tourism in Garhwal accounts for the single largest volume of

traffic. This form of tourism is largely budget oriented, causes immense

strain on the local environment and moves on its own. The route is well

defined and the State administrative machinery is simply focused on

maintaining law and order and providing basic facilities.

Recreation tourism is popular with few destinations such as Corbett Park

and Nainital in Kumaon and Mussoorie in Garhwal. Several thousand

travellers keep on visiting these places, which are easily accessible from

the rail heads at Kathgodam or Dehradun. The infrastructure in these

places is mostly in place and during the season there are serious

capacity problems.

Nature tourism is popular amongst a new breed of travellers who wish

to experience the peace and quiet of the Himalayas and also escape

from the heat of the plains. This is the segment which visits a large

number of offbeat locations in Kumaon and a few in Garhwal. The

number of travellers is very small but growing steadily. The segment can

expand substantially if marketing and promotion efforts are increased.

Adventure tourism is what brings a number of international tourists and

high value domestic travellers from Indian metros in search of trekking,

rafting, mountaineering and wildlife viewing experiences. This form of

tourism employs a large number of locals in season, creates very little

strain on the system and brings good per head revenue.‖

Also as per the above-mentioned gtz RED program report, ―Broadly

speaking the tourist traffic into Uttarakhand can be categorized into the

following major segments:

Domestic:

o comprising resident Indians

o large cross section on pilgrimage and heritage tours

o predominantly low budget high volume traffic



o distinct difference in affordability between those on pilgrimage and

those on vacation

o a growing subset of younger, upwardly mobile residents seeking

elements of adventure and nature in vacation

o usually traveling together as a family with relatives and friends

o the upwardly mobile traveller demands a variety of serious and is

willing to pay for these.

o those on weekend trips tend to make frequent trips to few favourite

locations

o those on vacation spend around ten to fifteen days visiting a variety

of places.

Inbound:

o comprising foreigners seeking sunshine, heritage, wildlife and the

high mountains

o two major subsets comprising those at or near retirement age with

up market tastes and high affordability and those in early work life

with low budgets and willingness to rough it out

o comprising a growing subset of NRIs seeking renewal of ties and

wider understanding of country

o a small subset of expatriates working in cities like Delhi who are

familiar with Nepal, and are keen to explore Uttarakhand for

experiencing the Himalayas from this side of the border.

The region experiences large movements of tourist traffic but business is

very seasonal and often restricted to a narrow geographical spread. In the

context of increasing the volume and quality of tourist traffic flow into

Uttarakhand some important requirements are:

(a) The flow of inbound leisure tourist traffic comprising almost 2.0 million

out of a total inbound inflow of 5 million people is largely restricted to

our winter months when most of Uttarakhand remains inaccessible.

More efforts are needed to get some of the foreigners to extend their

trip from the plains to the Himalayas.

(b) The average ―quality‖ tourist seeks well cooked, hygienic food, tidy

accommodation and plenty of customer care (which is vastly different

from confronting simply caretakers in various lodges whether private or

public). Domestic travellers are well disposed to ―Eco-Tourism‖ provided

the ecolodges, rest houses etc. maintain good standards. Ecotourism

actually requires a big face lift.

(c) The inbound traveller from overseas is bombarded by the aggressive

selling features of Rajasthan, Kerala, Gujarat, Himachal Pradesh, such

that unless directly marketed more often than not Uttarakhand

escapes his prospective itinerary.



(d) The upwardly mobile domestic traveller is besieged with umpteen

options too and is constantly seeking good value for his money. For a

family of four located in Mumbai, used to air travel spending a

vacation in Mauritius could be quite cost-effective. For several Indian

executives used to incentive and bonus travel the economics and

relative excitement of a fifteen days‘ vacation in Europe often

outweighs the proposition of spending an equally long holiday in the

interiors of Uttarakhand, because in terms of cost there may not always

be a substantial difference.

The traveller is becoming more experienced and sophisticated. Despite

various handicaps in Uttarakhand there has been a strong growth of

demand for travel in both the domestic and international markets. A

noticeable trend is the emergence of the leisure traveller. Leisure travellers

share many characteristics of the business travellers, but there is one major

point of difference – leisure travellers usually pay their own expenses and

therefore the concept of ―value for money‖ is particularly important.

The traveller increasingly seeks to buy a package of arrangements – flights,

accommodation, excursion, car hire etc. In each of the categories, the

price and range of services is very wide and unless there is a conscious

move to benchmark both price and service quality there could be an

inadequate volume of the flow of quality tourists into Uttarakhand.‖

The overall tourist visitation in Uttarakhand State has been steadily

increasing since the beginning of current millennia, with some exceptions

of reduced arrivals in 2001, and 2011-2012. Moreover, the disaster of June

2013 too severely affected the tourist arrivals in that year. The tourist

statistics data as presently available on Uttarakhand Tourism Website is

given below in Table 2.1.

Table 2.1: Tourist Statistics of Uttarakhand (Year 2000 to 2012)

S. No. Year Domestic (in Lakh) Foreign (in Lakh) Total (in Lakh)

1 2000 110.79 0.57 111.36

2 2001 105.49 0.55 106.04

3 2002 116.52 0.56 117.08

4 2003 129.30 0.64 129.94

5 2004 138.30 0.75 139.05

6 2005 162.81 0.93 163.74

7 2006 193.58 0.96 194.54

8 2007 221.54 1.06 222.60

9 2008 230.64 1.12 231.76

10 2009 231.54 1.18 232.72

11 2010 309.72 1.36 311.08



S. No. Year Domestic (in Lakh) Foreign (in Lakh) Total (in Lakh)

12 2011 266.66 1.43 268.09

13 2012 282.92 1.41 284.33

Source: Uttarakhand Tourism Website

The said disaster has critically highlighted the issue of carrying capacities of

the sites/destinations in this difficult Himalayan terrain. This issue can also be

read in conjunction with current available status of tourist arrivals i.e. in the

year 2012 and the tourist arrival projections made in the Uttarakhand

Tourism Development Master Plan, UNWTO, 2008. It is observed that while

the projected tourist arrivals for 2012 was 20.56 million, the actual tourist

arrivals recorded as per above table was 28.43 million. The said Master Plan

has projected the tourist arrivals till the year 2022 as 69.72 million. Thus, as

per the learning from the impacts of the disaster of 2013, it is imperative

that any future tourist arrival projections and tourism management needs

be rather based on the carrying capacity assessments for tourism load that

such sites/destinations of Uttarakhand can sustainably bear. Also, the said

Master Plan cautions that ―While the occupancy statistics reported by the

accommodation establishments are important in assessing the adequacy

or otherwise of such facilities, the overall visitor arrivals reported by the

temple authorities are useful in area planning and assessing the transport

requirements. But mixing up of both sets of data creates problems of

multiple counting, comparability and interpretation.‖

2.10 Rationale/Need

The need for creating a range of infrastructure development

principles/recommendations/criteria with use of feasible best practices for

tourism sector has been identified for the State of Uttarakhand, for the

following reasons:

Natural Disaster of June 2013 has resulted in huge loss of lives of

tourists/residents and severe damage to conventionally created

infrastructural facilities in the region, highlighting the requirement to

strengthen the principles/criteria of tourism infrastructure development

proposals and their approval, so such tourism infrastructure is durable to

withstand natural elements and such eventualities in the difficult

Himalayan terrain, and yet are low-impact developments (LID) making

them energy efficient/climate resilient and cost-effective in long-term,

thus making them sustainable interventions for the immediate-

interventions.

The effect of climatic mishaps in Garhwal part of Uttarakhand is

maximum, while significant in Kumaon Region as well.



There are several most frequented destinations in India for religious and

adventure tourism located across Uttarakhand state. The most

frequented tourist destinations for adventure and pilgrim are situated

here in Garhwal Region, with the one of the most visited tourist

destinations in Kumaon Region being Nainital and Pithoragarh for

scenic/leisure/adventure tourism along with the famed Kailash-

Mansarovar pilgrimage yatra route passing through eastern edge of

the Pithoragarh district in an extremely treacherous terrain.

The acute need for exposure to environmental sensitivity in high-altitude

mountainous conditions, more so by the fact that tourists converge,

more or less at the same time every year, making it a large

congregation of visitors over a limited period of tourism primarily due to

climate-dependent accessibility.

Also, ―The RED Tourism Value Chain Selection, Strategy and Operational

Plan-Uttarakhand, October 2008‖ by International Tourism Consultancy for

gtz-RED program, Uttarakhand highlights the following on existing

ecotourism-based development:

―Over-construction in certain areas is creating serious damage because of

poor control of land use and exceeding carrying capacity in sensitive

zones. This is resulting in forests being depleted, views being obstructed and

visual pollution in natural areas. The design and the material used in the

construction of some of the properties that are promoted for ecotourism

are inappropriate and do not blend into the surroundings. In certain cases

interiors do not represent the ecological and cultural identity of the

environment in which they are located.

There was evidence of poor hygiene at some of the properties visited

during the study and the management of non-biodegradable waste is

poor in general because the waste collection system and recycling

measures are weak or non-existent. Natural areas are becoming

dangerously polluted, thus degrading the ecotourism experience that the

visitors have come to enjoy.

Whilst some properties have adopted energy management procedures

and use renewable energy, the majority have not and are utilizing

expensive sources of energy. Villagers who want to provide ecotourism

services need to be educated about environmental protection of their

area, trained so that they can deliver the quality of service required and

explained about energy management and the use of renewable energy.

This may require developing a system of incentives or grants to encourage

accommodation providers to install renewable energy equipment.

… Operators complain that there is nowhere to protect their clients during

periods of bad weather and shelters are needed on the trekking routes.



Trekking can cause environmental damage and there is a need for

carrying capacity studies on popular routes and strategies to divert trekkers

to other routes during the high season.‖

Thus, this guidelines document deliberates on the recommendations to be

made for when, where, and what type of construction should be followed

to conserve the fragile environment in the Himalayan region, and promote

climate resilient and overall environmentally sustainable tourism

infrastructure at such destinations in the state of Uttarakhand. It is felt

imperative and so recommended, to follow low-impact development (LID)

and safe tourism infrastructure development that has built-in mitigation

measures that eventually support the capacity of the Uttarakhand State

towards adaptation capabilities to meet climate change impacts/threats.

A summarized process checklist for ensuring due-diligence in tourism

infrastructure development process in the state of Uttarakhand is attached

as Appendix-1 in this main report, supplementing the set guidelines.



3 CRITERIA FOR INFRASTRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT GUIDELINES

The criteria in general has been suggested based on the existing technical

criteria provisioned in UEAP-PAM which is compliant with the basic terms of

internationally followed mandate of external-aided development including

referring provisions in FAM of ongoing IDIPT-UK project; as well as the bases

observed in the earlier mentioned JRDNA Report (June 2013), and other

national/international best practices being followed on development

which are primarily of low-impact/energy efficient/climate

resilient/integrated tourism-cum-culture or heritage context-sensitive in

nature, and other development practices that enhance quality of

experience of any tourism infrastructure usage.

3.1 Technical and Economic Criteria under ADB Investment Program/Project

Foremost, in general, this guideline in-principle recommends adopting the

existing provisions of subproject selection criteria defined in the UEAP-PAM

under Appendix 4, Section 2 (ii) to (vii) of the Technical Criteria, as below:

The subproject shall be technically sound, meeting design standards of

the Government of India or other equivalent technical authorities and

preliminary design will have been prepared.

The subproject will be designed and executed as seismic resistant

structure in accordance with relevant national standards, as

applicable.

The subproject shall be cost-effective based on a review of technical

options available to address the identified problems.

The subproject should be avoided in core zones of national parks,

wildlife sanctuaries and biospheres and the critical habitats. If

unavoidable, such subprojects should be strictly confined to minor

rehabilitation of existing infrastructure.

The design and construction standards will be raised to appropriate

level. The revised high flood levels of the rivers or the natural streams or

drainage channels shall be considered, while designing facilities, as

applicable. Geo-technical studies* shall be undertaken and slope

stabilization measures considered for slide zones, wherever applicable.

[* Identification of suitable land with NOC from District Administration &

individual title holder along with environmental & social screening for

sub-project implementation at the time of submission of Sub-project

Appraisal Report (SAR), and topographical/total station survey shall

precede the geo-technical studies. Also, ADB through its approvals on

SARs under UEAP has reaffirmed the advice that “Incorporate slope

stabilization measure during implementation based on geo-technical



investigation by the geo-technical expert/design and supervision

consultants.”]

The subproject shall be in compliance with all applicable local rules

and regulations. All required central and state government

approvals/clearances will be in place including those from state

disaster management authority/high powered committee. Additionally,

necessary statutory clearances should be in place before contract

award/commencement of works.

While, the Economic Criteria being as below:

Economic evaluation should cover the key areas of economic analysis

indicated in ADB‘s Key Areas of Economic Analysis of Projects – An

Overview. In particular, (i) the analysis should ensure that there is

sufficient demand for the critical public and social infrastructure; (ii) the

analysis is undertaken for the various alternatives; (iii) the subproject

demonstrates an EIRR of at least 12%, is not overly sensitive to changes

in key cost and benefit parameters and will likely be sustainable with

due provision for O&M, or the chosen technical option is the least cost

option for providing the particular service. If there is a justification that

the economic benefits cannot be entirely quantified, the economic

rate of return of 10% instead of 12% can be acceptable.

[i.e. as also suggested in the ―Uttarakhand Tourism Development

Master Plan 2007 – 2022‖ issued in April 2008 by Government of India,

Government of Uttarakhand, United Nations Development Programme,

and World Tourism Organisation–―Avoid tourist infrastructure projects

that create a burden to local taxpayers and businesses or drain

government budgets for questionable returns. Every project must

undergo a rigorous cost-benefit analysis at every planning stage.‖]

Similarly, the provisions made under the ongoing ADB IDIPT-UK Loan under

its FAM with respect to subproject selection and technical criteria are also

duly referred and incorporated.

3.2 Criteria suggested under JRDNA Report (June 2013)

Some the existing requirements for physical developmental activities that

were found relevant towards integrated tourism infrastructure & disaster

preparedness as observed in the JRDNA Report (June 2013) are

incorporated and further elaborated as follows:

The damaged assets need to be replaced with new ones (in some

cases), not only of equal value, but with upgrades to services and

infrastructure in order to reduce the previous inherent vulnerability or

change in land parcel siting/alignments.



During the upcoming season, the flood protection structures and

diversion bunds should be rehabilitated on a priority basis to avert

further losses and damages.

Besides the physical damages, the disaster has also severely affected

the livelihood of the people dependent solely on the flow of pilgrims

and tourists. With the destruction of infrastructure on one hand and the

loss of livelihoods on the other, the image of tourism in the State has

taken a severe beating and the tragedy has cascaded down to other

tourism destinations in the State as well. The hospitality industry suffered

a great set back due to massive cancellations of earlier bookings after

the disaster, even in the unaffected popular destinations of the State.

The damage and loss could be broadly classified as:

ii. Loss of Infrastructure (Government and Private)

iii. Direct Loss to stakeholders: Hotel and other service industries related

to tourism (tour operators, travel agents, taxi drivers, guides, shop

keepers etc.)

iv. Loss of Livelihoods along the entire chain dependent on the

pilgrimage and adventure tourism in the impacted areas.

v. Revenue and Tax Losses

vi. Loss to Tourism repute of the State as a whole.

The following table 3.1 highlights the district & category-wise damages to

the government tourism infrastructure for 115 numbers of properties/

development categories and corresponding physical losses to the tune of

US$ 19.44 million or equivalent INR 1166.10 million.

Table 3.1: District & Category-wise damages to the Government Tourism Infrastructure

S. N

o.

Dis

tric

ts

De

stin

atio

n

De

ve

lop

me

nt/

Site

s a

nd

Se

rvic

es

Gh

at

De

ve

lop

me

nt

Nig

ht

Sh

elte

rs

Mis

ce

lla

ne

ou

s*

Tou

rism

In

form

atio

n/

Co

nv

en

ien

ce

Ce

nte

r

Toile

t B

loc

ks/

Co

mp

lex

es

Tou

rist

Re

st H

ou

ses

Gra

nd

To

tal

INR

mn

Eq

uiv

ale

nt

No

‟s

US$ m

n

No

‟s

US$ m

n

No

‟s

US$ m

n

No

‟s

US$ m

n

No

‟s

US$ m

n

No

‟s

US$ m

n

No

‟s

US$ m

n

No

‟s

US$ m

n

1 Bageshwar 1 0.33 1 0.33 20.00

2 Chamoli 1 0.07 2 0.31 4 0.23 7 0.37 6 1.56 20 2.53 152.10

3 Pithoragarh 1 0.29 1 0.08 5 0.38 7 0.76 45.50

4 Rudraprayag 3 1.11 1 0.21 4 1.58 10 0.78 9 4.99 27 8.67 520.00

5 Uttarkashi 1 0.04 2 0.08 7 0.23 16 1.58 26 1.93 115.50

6 Almora 2 0.12 1 0.13 3 0.83 6 1.08 64.50

7 Dehradun 2 0.13 2 0.06 4 0.19 11.60

8 Haridwar 1 0.17 1 0.17 10.00

9 Nainital 1 0.03 2 0.09 3 0.13 7.50



S. N

o.

Dis

tric

ts

De

stin

atio

n

De

ve

lop

me

nt/

Site

s a

nd

Se

rvic

es

Gh

at

De

ve

lop

me

nt

Nig

ht

Sh

elte

rs

Mis

ce

lla

ne

ou

s*

Tou

rism

In

form

atio

n/

Co

nv

en

ien

ce

Ce

nte

r

Toile

t B

loc

ks/

Co

mp

lex

es

Tou

rist

Re

st H

ou

ses

Gra

nd

To

tal

INR

mn

Eq

uiv

ale

nt

No

‟s

US$ m

n

No

‟s

US$ m

n

No

‟s

US$ m

n

No

‟s

US$ m

n

No

‟s

US$ m

n

No

‟s

US$ m

n

No

‟s

US$ m

n

No

‟s

US$ m

n

10 New Tehri 3 0.71 4 0.92 4 0.15 1 0.04 12 1.82 109.00

11 Pauri Garhwal 1 0.03 4 0.38 1 0.08 1 0.02 7 0.51 30.50

12 General 1 1.33 1 1.33 80.00

Total 11 2.64 8 1.47 8 1.96 6 1.74 8 0.53 32 1.63 42 9.47 115 19.44 1166.10

* Miscellaneous: Trek routes, parking, replacement of damaged and washed away assets and fixtures, retaining walls

etc.

Source: JRDNA Report, June 2013 (Table 46 & 48)

As part of the JRDNA Report (June 2013), the following advice towards

development of tourism infrastructure and disaster preparedness has been

made:

Devise a strategy and develop guidelines for impact absorbing buffers

based on the bioshield approach for reducing the vulnerability of

frequently visited areas, such as the pilgrim routes [e.g. regenerate

ethnic biodiversity through bioshield of shrubs and trees that absorbs

water, holds soil/controls erosion, and minimizes forest fires].

The last extreme weather events of 15-17 June 2013 have clearly

indicated a need to undertake thorough assessments prior to the siting

of physical infrastructure, including road alignments and disposal of

debris and muck generated during large-scale infrastructure

development. The State should develop an environment strategy and

environment management plans/frameworks for infrastructure

development planned in the river valleys, silt disposal and deposits in

the rivers, extractive policy on river bed materials etc.

Promotion of climatically resilient tourism.

Strengthening of existing infrastructure of helipads and construction of

new helipads, ropeways and other supporting structures and multi-

purpose shelters.

Promotion of village- and community-based tourism.

Development of Tourist Bio-metrics & Regulation software at various

entry points for knowing and regulating the numbers of tourists.

Conduct studies to (i) define the carrying and absorption capacities of

higher reaches destinations; (ii) develop micro plans for the middle

reaches destinations to convert them into base camps for the higher

reaches destinations to stagger the number of tourists, and (iii)



enhance the facilities in surrounding towns and villages near the

Gateways to major destinations.

Comprehensive media campaign to revive the image of tourism in the

State.

Enhancement of planning, funding and implementation capacity to

undertake projects.

3.3 Criteria provisions under Disaster Management by Government of India

In addition, similar criteria provisions made by the Government of India

under the disaster management subject are also considered herein:

As part of strengthening of plan activities under disaster risk reduction,

and guidelines to the state governments, these measures to be

undertaken are4:

vii. Mitigation measures on individual structures can be achieved by

design standards, building codes and performance specifications.

Building codes, critical front-line defence for achieving stronger

engineered structures, need to be drawn up in accordance with

the vulnerability of the area and implemented through appropriate

techno-legal measures.

viii. Mitigation measures need to be considered in land use and site

planning activities. Constructions in hazardous areas like flood plains

or steep soft slopes are more vulnerable to disasters. Necessary

mitigation measures need to be built into the design and costing of

development projects.

ix. Every hazard prone district may draw up specific hazard related

plans. These plans may be reviewed/updated in the months of April

and May each year.

x. Every district located in area prone to hazard will need to maintain

an online inventory of resources available in the Government,

public and private sector. This will enable easy and quick

mobilization of resources in case of need. A State-wide online

resources inventory would enable the mobilization of resources from

neighbouring districts in cases of need.

xi. State in seismic zone V and IV may ensure that the BIS building

codes for these zones have been adopted and are rigorously

enforced by the municipal bodies. All construction in the

Government sector in these areas must conform to the BIS code.

As part of the proposed amendments to town and country planning

regulations, additional provisions for safety in development control

regulations, etc. prepared and issued in 2004 by the Committee of

4 Disaster Management in India, NDM Division, Ministry of Home Affairs, Government of India, 2004



Experts in constituted by the NDM Division, Ministry of Home Affairs,

Government of India, as per the Volume I Report (Proposed

Amendment in Town and Country Planning Legislations; Regulations for

Land Use Zoning; Additional Provisions in Development Control

Regulations for Safety; and Additional Provisions in Building

Regulations/Byelaws for Structural Safety–in Natural Hazard Zones in

India) the relevant provisions under the following heads are

incorporated:

i. Earthquake Prone Areas,

ii. Flood Prone Areas,

iii. Land Slide Prone Areas,

iv. Approach for Land Use Zoning,

v. Prioritisation,

vi. Land Use Zoning for Flood Safety,

vii. Planning in Hill Areas, and

viii. Identification of Open Spaces.

3.4 Introduction from Report of the Steering Committee on Tourism for “The

Eleventh Five Year Plan (2007-2012)”

The Report of the Steering Committee on Tourism for the Eleventh Five Year

Plan (2007-2012), Planning Commission, Government of India highlights the

following:

―Tourism is one economic sector in India that has the potential to grow at a

high rate and can ensure consequential development of the infrastructure

at the destinations. It has the capacity to capitalize on the country‘s

success in the services sector and provide sustainable models of growth.

Tourism has the potential to stimulate other economic sectors through its

backward and forward linkages and cross-sectoral synergies with sectors

like agriculture, horticulture, poultry, handicrafts, transport, construction,

etc. Expenditure on tourism induces a chain of transactions requiring supply

of goods and services from these related sectors. The consumption

demand, emanating from tourist expenditure, also induces more

employment and generates a multiplier effect on the economy. As a result,

additional income and employment opportunities are generated through

such linkages. Thus, the expansion of the tourism sector can lead to large-

scale employment generation and poverty alleviation. The economic

benefits that flow into the economy through growth of tourism in the shape

of increased national and State revenues, business receipts, employment,

wages and salary, buoyancy in Central, State and local tax receipts can

contribute towards overall socio-economic improvement and accelerated

growth in the economy.



With regards to the infrastructure it highlights that ‖Tourism is

overwhelmingly an industry of private sector service providers, although the

public sector has a significant role to play in infrastructure areas either

directly or through Public Private Partnership (PPP) mode. It is a multi-

sectoral activity characterized by multiple services provided by a range of

suppliers. It is quite similar to manufacturing industry, where the supply

chain is as important as the end product. The related sectors include

airlines, surface transport, hotels, basic infrastructure and facilitation

systems, etc.‖

3.5 Guidance Inputs from Uttarakhand Tourism Development Master Plan

(2007-2022)

The ―Uttarakhand Tourism Development Master Plan 2007 – 2022‖ issued in

April 2008 by GoI, GoUK, UNDP, and UNWTO suggests providing both

generic and area-specific physical planning, environmental management,

and urban development guidelines for well-defined tourism zones

promoting among others:

Development control by:

o Conservation and protection of valuable natural and cultural

environments, protection of traditional and historical architectural

and cultural values in the environment.

o Environmental management, pollution control, health and

cleanliness.

o Establishment of green belts and buffers around protected areas

and valuable built-environments.

o Creation of a sustainable and energy-efficient built-environment in

urban and rural areas inside and away from the tourism zones and

utilizing locally available building materials.

o Efficient transportation and a safe vehicular and pedestrian

environment in both rural and urban areas.

o Product uniqueness and enhancement; creating or enforcing an

areas ―sense of place.‖

Plan implementation guided by:

o Site specific Development Briefs identifying land use, access,

building set-backs, density, land cover, scale, style, infrastructure

services and utilities, landscape constraints, conservation and

protection or any other sector relevant standards or regulatory

measures applicable for a particular tourism spot.

Local community involvement by:

o Initiatives and measures to increase and add value to local

community participation in the tourism industry, thereby providing

better and relevant livelihood opportunities for the rural population.



o Focus on capacity building at the central and local level by

developing a train the trainer system for tourism industry workers

and villagers.

o Focus on local entrepreneur ship development based on up and

downstream activities and identification of measures and

instruments for mini financing.

o Development of a symbiotic relationship with towns and villages in

or close by tourism zones, circuits and specific development nodes.

o Fostering a policy of high quality tourism products with facilities

different standard and type from 0 star to 5 star, thereby increasing

livelihood opportunities for the local population and contributing

towards the eradication of poverty.

Marketing effectiveness by:

o Formulating marketing strategy for Uttarakhand State as a tourist

destination as well as for the various regions/tourism zones which will

position the State vis-à-vis the most appropriate target markets.

o Endowing Uttarakhand with a clear and unique image to ensure

that it is differentiated from its competitors and stands out in the

global market place.

o Identifying new tourism products to heighten visitor experience in

the State and to attract new markets.

o Enhancing the capacity of Uttarakhand‘s tourism stakeholders in

the field of tourism marketing and promotion.

o Supporting community based tourism initiatives by increasing

awareness of tourists about available community products and

services and providing a marketing platform for local communities

to promote and distribute their tourism products and related goods.

3.6 Guiding Principles/Inputs discussed with various Departments, GoUK

As part of these guidelines‘ development process, interactions with several

government departments in the State of Uttarakhand were held by

meeting senior officials and their other representative officials as further

directed, under the coordination of Secretary, Tourism, and Department of

Tourism‘s representative Tourism Officer, UTDB.

The below Table 3.2 lists these interactions and the guiding principles/inputs

as well technical/any other suggestions made, to be adopted in preparing

these infrastructure development guidelines for the overall tourism sector.



Table 3.2: Interactions held with several Government Departments in Uttarakhand

S.

No.

Officials met and

Department, Date met

Guiding Principles/Inputs Technical/Other Suggestions

1 Secretary, Tourism

(28.04.2014)

A) Guiding principles/inputs:

Refer Uttarakhand Tourism Development Master Plan, 2007-2022

(GoI, GoUK, UNDP, UNWTO)

While, UEAP is only limited to those infrastructural assets damaged for

reconstruction/rehabilitation of the same, these guidelines may help

in all future construction of tourism infrastructure

All structures that are re-built/newly constructed shall– be

environment/eco-friendly, comply with seismic zone requirements

and be earthquake resistant, comply with buffer distance to be

maintained from river banks (as per Hon‘ble High Court Order)

Carrying capacity-based planning & development shall be

considered

B) Refer regulatory provisions/byelaws and the guidelines should be

compatible

C) Prepare ―actionable guidelines‖

D) To be further followed-up with Additional Director Tourism, UTDB for

tourism related information

In general, the tourism

infrastructure design shall address

the needs of architectural

aesthetics with use of materials

that are compatible with

surroundings and environment-

friendly; being culturally sensitive;

being tourists friendly (including

barrier-free friendly); and be

commercially viable with

economic benefits to local

population

2 Secretary, Urban

Development, Housing

and T&CP

(02.05.2014)

Representation given, as several development authorities, municipal

bodies, housing, and T&CP department are involved for information to be

collected

Further directed to meet

Additional Secretary, Urban

Development, and Deputy

Secretary, Housing and T&CP on

16.05.2014

3 Additional Secretary,

Forest and Environment

(05.05.2014)

(telecon on 02.06.2014)

A) Prepare the guidelines complying with the provisions of the National

Acts applicable to Forests i.e. The Indian Forest Act, 1927, The Wildlife

(Protection) Act, 1972, Forest (Conservation) Act, 1980, and any

Clarifications issued by MoEF, GoI from time to time related to eco-

tourism in forest areas

B) Refer specific regulatory information as below:

Instructions to be followed provisioned in Conditions for

Research/Tourism etc. under The Wildlife (Protection) Act, 1972 w.r.t.

National Parks/Sanctuaries/Other Protected Areas & Conservation

Areas [as issued by CCF (CWLW Office) for Corbett National Park]

In general, only places identified

for tourism under applicable

master plans should be

developed / opened for tourism

infrastructure / activities; and

avoid violating new areas and

any over exploitation of existing

tourism areas beyond their

capacities

Safety Audit of



S.

No.

Officials met and



Instructions for High Altitude Trekking & Camping mainly in forest

areas (a State G.O. issued through Forest Wing)

Instructions on Control of No. of People visiting Gaumukh [as issued

by CCF (CWLW Office)]

Conservation Reserves‘ Management Plans implemented by

Conservation Reserve Prabandhan Samiti, which regulates tourism

activities as well (These are new types of protected areas, e.g. Asan

Barrage Area where migratory birds visit during Oct-Mar, and thus

certain regulatory provisions exist like, only pedal boats are permitted

in the bird watching season to avoid any water pollution and motor

boats can be permitted only for disaster management/emergency

assistance or for any patrolling, time for dredging is scheduled only

in remaining non-bird visitation months, etc.)

C) Process normally followed for tourism activity by Forest Department:

The long-term Working Plan for Forest Activity includes tourism

activities (as ancillary to forest activity) and is then undertaken, as

approved by MoEF, GoI including any further MoEF communications

in this regard from time to time [Note: MoEF vide its communication

F. No. 5-3/2007-FC dated 14 May 2010 under Subject ―Clarification

regarding the construction of permanent structures for Eco-Tourism in

the forest areas‖ has clearly stated that “,,, the Eco-tourism is

regarded as non-forest activity. As such taking up of non-forest

activity including permanent structures amounts to violation of the

provisions of the Forest (Conservation) Act, 1980.‖ This normally

means that only temporary tourism facilities like camping tents

pitched on ground etc. would be permissible (i.e. facilities without

any pucca base, as any pucca base/plinth of even 6‘‘ would be

treated as permanent structure and thereby would be a violation as

per the said Act).

D) Advice by the Forest Department for other Departments undertaking

tourism projects around forest areas:

In case of any confusion w.r.t. applicability of Forest Department

provisions, always refer the tourism project proposal to Forest

Department for any clarification/approval (The GoI projects

sanctioned to State Governments always have the provision to take

destinations/activities must be

undertaken (e.g. unless required

for any disaster

management/emergencies the

use of helicopter services shall be

in regulated manner considering

all the safety requirements like

presence of ATC assistance, fire &

rescue mechanisms etc. in such

an Himalayan terrain

Regulations for control of number

of tourists to destinations based on

carrying capacities

All tourism properties shall take

clearance from UEPPCB, and all

large tourism properties i.e. above

20,000 sqm area shall take

clearance from SEIAA

The tourism infrastructure design

shall ensure that following

technical aspects are duly

considered and provisions made

to that effect–their siting is at safe

distance/maintaining the

necessary buffer from river banks;

have waste-water & waste

management plan and systems,

and rain water harvesting; avoid

electricity supply line to be laid in

from far away and instead use

new & renewable energy

resources (as promoted by MNRE,

GoI; avoid noise pollution by use

of generators, music parties with

DJs etc.; avoid natural resource-



S.

No.

Officials met and



necessary clearance from Forest Department, State PCB, and other

Urban/Rural Body authorities. The relevant Acts are meant for

Regulation/regulatory approvals under permissible provisions. It‘s

preferable to seek such development approvals. Forest Department

normally gives such approvals in 2-months period, if the proposal is in

order.). Wherever required, it would then be sent to MoEF for

approval (in cases of disaster/emergency assistance requirements,

as special cases MoEF can be requested for expedited approval

instead of normal approval times of 1-year or so, depending on the

quantum of area of development proposal and type of

development proposed as per EIA Notification requirements). [Note:

Forest Department too has to take permission from MoEF for non-

forest activity in protected areas (excluding forest roads which are

fair-weather roads in natures constructed out of compacted river

bed material–for conservation activity and which can also be used

by villagers, and MoEF does not permit black topping of roads in

such forest areas).]

When other Departments are sure that no confusion exists in their

project proposals w.r.t. no forest-related conflicts or no need of any

clearance/approval requirements, they should not send such project

proposals to the Forest Department just for the sake of it.

E) When queried on ―Beach Camping Policy‖ it was informed that it a

Draft Policy was prepared beach camping activity in forest areas issued

by Forest Section-3, and after comments from UTDB in 2012, it was

further put-up to the Cabinet, but was not passed, and the approval

process thereafter on this Draft Policy has been stopped. Thus, there is

no Beach Camping Policy in effect at present.

intensive luxuries like swimming

pools etc.; avoid forest produce

like firewood for heating and

instead have own alternate

measures, toilets facilities; plan

visitor information centres/kiosks,

building height not to be above

the surrounding tree canopy

heights, architecture to be

compatible with local cultural-

heritage context (local materials

like wood which can be procured

from Forest Corporation, bamboo-

based compressed sheet already

being used by the Forest

Department, for example at Malsi

Deer Park/Zoo on Mussoorie Road,

can be incorporated in design of

roofing/false ceiling, walls, etc.),

and fencing layout/design shall

be such that does not interfere

with any safe passage of wild

animals.

Further directed to meet Chief

Conservator of Forests

(Ecotourism), Dalanwala area,

and Chief Conservator of Forests

(Office of Chief Wildlife Warden),

Chandrabani Road ahead of ISBT

4 Secretary, Rural

Development, and

Panchayati Raj

(05.05.2014)

A) Process normally followed for tourism activity in rural areas by the Rural

Development Department:

Currently the tourism infrastructure developed by Rural Development

Department is the construction of Tourist Rest Houses (TRHs) executed

through the following process–District level demand for TRHs in rural

Advised to meet Project Director-

ILSP (Integrated Livelihood

Support Program) under Rural

Development Department for the

tourism sub-component part in

rural areas (The Project Director-



S.

No.

Officials met and



areas is received; the budget is prepared by the Rural Development

Department in consultation with the implementing agency available

from either of the two – Rural Engineering Services, and Public Works

Department and by following their norms & standards; and post-

constructing handing over the TRH to the Panchayats for operation

and maintenance

B) As currently, the Rural Development and Panchayati Raj Departments

do not have any role in Tourism Departments‘ project proposals for

tourism infrastructure, interactions in planning stage can be proposed

wherein the Panchayat/SHGs requirements can be dovetailed with

such tourism infrastructure proposals/designs

ILSP further directed to meet &

discuss with Manager-Knowledge

Management and Innovations in

ILSP)

Advised to further meet Secretary,

Rural Engineering Services for their

norms & standards used in Rural

Department‘s tourism works

5 Chief Conservator of

Forests (Ecotourism),

Forest Department

(06.05.2014 and

28.05.2014)

A) General information:

Post-formation of Uttarakhand State, the Central Government in 2002

had given a package to the State which tax holiday for eco-tourism

development for 10 years (incentive criteria), although no guidance

was provided on what constitutes eco-tourism development

(regulatory criteria).

25% of the forest area in Uttarakhand State is under National

Parks/Sanctuaries/Protected Areas

The Sarai Act, 1867 controls only the type of tourism, but does not

control any construction type per se

There are three-types of control activities: Prohibited (e.g. mining),

Regulated (e.g. construction), and Promoted (e.g. new & renewable

energy resources)

Contact CWLW Office for Guidelines on tourism activities in forest

areas viz. mountaineering, trekking, high altitude trekking, and

angling

Obtain Rafting Guidelines from UTDB

B) Guiding Principles/Inputs:

When undertaking tourism infrastructure development in forest areas

e.g. Resorts etc., one may consider the following: site to be at a safe

distance/buffer of 500 m from river banks; temporary

establishments/facilities created; and not be sited above 2000 m

elevation above MSL

Else, Resorts or any large-sized tourism infrastructure should be only

Refer NTCA Comprehensive

Guidelines, MoEF, GoI

Refer giz-RED (Regional Economic

Development) Project Report on

Sustainable Tourism

Refer Survey of Resorts around

Corbett ( from IHM, Pusa)

Refer Management Plans that

prescribe/govern tourism activities

in forest areas

Refer UNWTO Guidelines on Resort

Development

Refer ―1998, Talacko, Jan., Being

green keeps you out of the red :

an easy guide to environmental

action for accommodation

providers and tourist attractions,

presented by Tourism Council

Australia and CRC Tourism in

association with the Department

of Industry, Science and Tourism

and Environment Australia‖

http://trove.nla.gov.au/people/Talacko%2C%20Jan.?q=creator%3A%22Talacko%2C+Jan.%22



S.

No.

Officials met and



allowed with – proper environmental impact study of the project

proposal is made and assurance for compliance is observed

including necessary mitigation measures incorporated; avoids water

to be brought from far away with water consumption requirement &

nearby availability of water source duly studied, public consultations

held, and no objection to the use of any external water source duly

obtained; etc. and such project approved at Chief Secretary level

Consider MoEF, GoI Orders/Notifications for Eco-sensitive Zones

Consider the need for role of climate-responsive materials vis-à-vis

the tourism infrastructure created & operated in a low occupancy

scenario at high altitudes (i.e. at such facilities to endure cold living

environment heating systems are required, and when the

occupancy is low, the cost of operating the infrastructure/cost-

recovery period becomes higher)

Keep a balance between incentives and regulation aspects when

framing these guidelines

Consider the following four (4) as aspects for development of Rural

Tourism/Ecotourism:

o Control of development in terms of permitting & promoting

tourism development in rural areas to be mainly through the

rural residents of that respective village through Homestays, trek

tours/guides activity etc. promoting nature- & culture-based

tourism experience, than to development by large private

tourism/luxury resort market players from outside, so that

economic opportunities that can be created through tourism for

the rural residents do not get exploited/overwhelmed by

external entrepreneurs (e.g. Bhakrakot Village near Corbett

National Park having presence of lot of private resorts);

o Access to rural tourism/ecotourism areas be controlled for

vehicular traffic, and be promoted for access through

scenic/environment-friendly pedestrian paths as last mile

connectivity to tourism sites, and not having motorable access

till tourism sites/accommodation/amenities etc. should not be a

discouraging criteria for any financial assistance like bank loans

etc.;



S.

No.

Officials met and



o Licensing after properly defining tourism activity categories with

norms & standards for quality of tourism sites, level of service

(LOS), standards monitoring etc. shall be duly looked into, to

ensure achievement of proper visitor satisfaction outcomes and

a positive image/brand of Uttarakhand in the tourism sector

experiences; and

o Financial sustainability of rural tourism/ecotourism enterprises

under the government sector shall be duly supported in tourism

development programs/schemes either by promoting self-

sufficient tourism enterprises wherein revenues earned are

reinvested in the O&M and sustainable management of such

enterprises or dedicated allocation of funds be made annually

by the Government of Uttarakhand to sustain such tourism

enterprises and offer quality services.

6 Chief Conservator of

Forest (Chief Wildlife

Warden Office), Forest

Department

(13.05.2014)

A) General information:

Forest Conservation Act, 1980 plays the overarching role with respect

to activities in Forest Areas, including any tourism

Be aware of MoEF communication dated 14 May 2010 which clearly

states that “,,, the Eco-tourism is regarded as non-forest activity.”

In case of eco-tourism in wildlife areas of National Parks/Sanctuaries,

the regulatory control is exercised including in the 10 km radius of

such protected areas

B) Specific Information:

A Set of 4-Directives/Rules and Regulations for Corbett Tiger Reserve

vide No. 1638/15-1 dated 02 December 2013, have been issued by

CWLW Office, Camp-Dehradun, Uttarakhand w.r.t.–1) Directives for

Nature Guide and Naturalist; 2) Directives for Registration of Light

Vehicles for Tourism Management; 3) Directives for Vehicle Operators

for Tourism Management; and 4) Rules and Regulations for Tourists

visiting Corbett Tiger Reserve; and the same can be studied for any

possible generalisation for the overall tourism sector

Gangotri National Park (High Altitude one) is the only protected area

in Uttarakhand wherein the Regulatory Control on Number of Visitors

that would be permitted has been introduced for the destination of

Gaumukh [Order No. 2930/37-1 dated 29 April 2008 issued by CWLW

Refer ―Guidelines for

mountaineering expeditions in

Uttaranchal‖ published by

Government of Uttaranchal, 03

July 2004

Refer MoEF, GoI issued EIA

Notification dated 14 September

2006, and its Amendment

SO3067€ dated 01 December

2009 for understanding different

types of clearances (forests /

wildlife / environment)-related

norms and processes/procedures

Refer ―Guidance document for

taking up non-forestry activities in

wildlife habitats‖ issued by the

Office of the Deputy Inspector

General of Forests (WL), MoEF, GoI

vide F. No. 6-10/2011 WL dated 19

December 2012 for National

Board of Wildlife (NBWL)



S.

No.

Officials met and



Office, Camp-Dehradun w.r.t.–1) To establish the process for issuing

permits to 150 numbers of pilgrims, tourists, and other visitors per day

in Gaumukh area; 2) For complete prohibition on movement of

mules, horses, and other animals plying under commercial purposes;

3) Directives to reduce the number of mountaineers in Gaumukh

area; 4) Research-related Instructions in Gangotri National Park; and

5) Arrangements to regulate onward travel from Gangotri (with entry

prohibited at 500 m peripheral distance from the Gaumukh)]

Follow the EIA Notification issued by MoEF dated 14th September

2006 and its amendments, as it clearly notifies the different levels of

clearance processes required for different environment category

conditions (e.g. case of environment category ―B‖ requires SEIAA

clearance)

Refer ―Comprehensive Guidelines for Tiger Conservation and Tourism

as provided under Section 38O(01)E of The Wildlife (Protection) Act,

1972‖, as per Notification dated 15th October 2012, NTCA

Clearances

The tourism infrastructure design

shall ensure that–waste

management issues are dully

addressed; it‘s a low-impact

development (instead of too

much of conventional

development wherein normally

built-up ground coverage is high,

use of concrete & iron is high,

etc.); respects environment-

friendly accessibility to protected

sites by stopping the entry of

vehicles at a safe distance that

does not pollute the site and helps

maintain the serenity of the site

with the neatly created

environment-friendly pedestrian

access to the last point, instead of

spoiling the site with lot of

concretisation/use of impervious

surfaces; avoids creating

infrastructure that eventually

becomes difficult to maintain/gets

vandalised in recreational areas

like picnic spots etc.; incorporates

efforts for interpretation means &

measures for natural conservation,

like interpretation centers/visitor

centers; and incorporate use of

environment-friendly materials

and permeable pavement design

(like use of Bamboo in

construction of tourist huts with

toilets, for example for Forest



S.

No.

Officials met and



Department created 4-set of

Bamboo Huts 8-bedded with

toilets at Dhanaulti and very well

run & maintained for last 6-7 years

through local participation of

Panchayat; refer work of

Uttarakhand Bamboo Board

which has its base in Kotdwar in

Kumaon Region and uses

Craftsmen from Manipur)

7 Additional Secretary,

Urban Development

(16.05.2014)

Directed further to meet the Deputy Secretary and then Section Officer-2

(Urban Development), and then to Deputy Director (Urban Development

Directorate):

It was informed by Deputy Director (Urban Development Directorate)

that in the case of Uttarakhand State, the Housing and T&CP

Department only have the power to make Planning Norms &

Standards/Development Control Regulations or Byelaws for

development in urban areas

-

8 Deputy Secretary,

Housing and T&CP

(16.05.2014)

Directed further to meet the Under Secretary, and then Section Officer

(Housing and T&CP), through which the prescribed Document Building

Construction and Development Byelaws/Regulations–2011‖ issued by

Housing Section-2 was obtained on 28.05.2014

-

9 Project Director, ILSP

(Telecon/message dated

08.05.2014/16.05.2014

respectively)

Manager- Knowledge

Management and

Innovations (ILSP), under

UGVS, Rural

Development

(17.05.2014)

As directed by Project Director, Integrated Livelihood Support Project (ILSP)

a meeting & discussion was held with Manager-Knowledge Management

and Innovations, ILSP under Uttarakhand Gramya Vikas Samiti (UGVS),

Rural Development Department, as summarised below:

A) General Information

The ILSP programme has commenced in 2013 and is of 7-year

duration till 2019, and ILSP succeeds the earlier programme

Uttarakhand Livelihoods Improvement Project for the

Himalayas (ULIPH), commonly known as "Aajeevika" (meaning

Livelihoods in Hindi), from October 2004 to 2012 with financial support

from the International Fund for Agricultural Development (IFAD). For

Minimize traffic to Home Stays

area to retain the serenity of the

destination and not to disturb the

daily lifestyle of village residents,

yet allow interactive-ness with

village residents for these tourists

from different cultural

backgrounds

When finalising a Home Stay, Own

Family-Own House criterion is

important for rapport building with

guests and cultural interactive-



S.

No.

Officials met and



managing ULIPH 2-bodies were created–i.e. UGVS, supported by a

Section 25 Company i.e. Social Venture Capital Company (SVCC)

known as Uttarakhand Parvatiya Aajeevika Sanvardhan Company

(UPASaC) that provides business development services.

Under ULIPH, 5-districts were covered (viz. Almora, Bageshwar,

Chamoli, Tehri, & Uttarkashi). Under ILSP, apart from these 5-districts.

6-more districts are covered (viz. Dehradun, Pauri Garhwal‘s one

Block, Rudraprayag, & Pithoragarh, and Champawat & Nainital

added under Watershed Management Directorate-WMD). Thus, ILSP

has coverage of total 11-districts.

While ULIPH had a main focus on agriculture, ILSP includes the rural

tourism component.

While ILSP is planning works under rural tourism/eco-tourism sector,

already under ULIPH Homestay program was initiated with activities

for Homestays Selection & Promotion and 36 Homestays were made

operational. A Grant of INR 1.20 Lakhs from IFAD funds was made per

HH/Homestay. The criterion adopted was: own house, 2-spare

bedrooms, toilet & kitchen if the product potential was assured and

with approach access. These Home Stays however are not

registered for operations under Department of Tourism through UTDB

for any licensing/maintaining Levels of Service (LOS) standards, etc.

71 Federations were created under ULIPH for implementation

support, some of these continue to support under ILSP, and SHGs

were also created. For example for forward linkages to be

established in Almora & Bageshwar, ―Village Ways‖ (A British NGO)

assists in implementing Home Stay regulations as envisaged including

attracting the Foreign Guest clientele, and initially they also provide

technical assistance for Home Stays

B) Specific information to be referred:

―Rural Tourism – A Snapshot in Uttarakhand – UGVS View‖ prepared

by ILSP, UGVS, March 2014 (including the Home Stay Standards and

―Draft Guidelines & Notification for Uttarakhand Homestay, 2012

(including Annexures I to III)‖ submitted to Tourism Department). The

Uttarakhand Tourism Development Board has published the

Uttarakhand Home Stay Rules 2015 and is annexed with this

ness to come into-being for a

satisfactory visitor experience

Forward market linkages in other

districts to get tourists/guest

clientele is lacking at present, and

the same could be improved by

thinking a Tie-up of Home Stays

with Hotel Groups for Clientele

and implementing Level of

Service (LOS) Standards (e.g. as is

done in Sikkim)

Integrate comprehensively the

tourism destination potential (viz.

culture/heritage, museum,

trekking, etc.) with the Home Stay

product presence for maximum

economic impact to the Home

Stay Owners/Village Residents



S.

No.

Officials met and



document as Appendix-2.

10 Secretary, Rural

Engineering Services

(21.05.2014)

Normally, Rural Engineering Services (RES) is only an executing agency in

the field for development of small tourism infrastructure as and when

requested by the Rural Development Department (RDD). Any

norms/standards based on which such infrastructure is to be built are given

by RDD only as per the District Administration‘s request for such

infrastructure (e.g. space/functional use requirements etc.).

Directed further to meet the Chief Engineer, RES, Off Tapovan Road, Raipur

area, Dehradun.

-

11 Chief Engineer, Rural


(22.05.2014 in the

presence of

Superintending Engineer,

RES)

A) General Information:

RES only executes Miscellaneous Works in rural areas as listed below

for various departments as per their requests of which tourism

infrastructure is one component:

o Border Area Development Program (BADP) for Districts with

Funds from MoRD, GoI to State RDD

o Work done in Districts being Schools, Revenue Police Chowki,

Health-care infrastructure, Tourist Rest Houses (TRHs),

Concrete/Bitumen Roads, etc.

It is confirmed that the infrastructure is constructed as per the

requirement norms provided by the RDD only. Thereafter, the RES

assists in preparing the drawings & estimate as per the standard PWD

Specification and Block- & District-specific SOR followed in

Uttarakhand. With regards to height norms, RES hired Architect

services are taken which follows the necessary BIS/NBC norms or

State norms as applicable for building construction (e.g. normally for

small rooms roof height is minimum 10‘, while for large rooms

including in cold climate & summer conditions roof height is higher

for proper ventilation.

Now, one has to follow the safe buffer norms prescribed by the

Hon‘ble High Court Order post-disaster in 2013 for permanent

construction from river banks (However, a rational balance is to be

made between infrastructure development needs and availability of

scarce land, and the said safe buffer requirements)


-



S.

No.

Officials met and



Any norms/standards/guidelines if made for tourism infrastructure

development should be flexible in range so as to meet the purpose

of development, else such infrastructure cannot be developed with

very strict norms as land available for development in this Himalayan

region is scarce

Prior to development, one should ensure about the following:

o Consult the local population about flood history so as to

maintain safe buffer from river banks

o geotechnical investigation should be conducted (part of design

& estimate preparation process)

o topographical survey (normally done if land is a hilly area

parcel, and if it‘s a flat parcel then normally it‘s not done)

o earthquake resistant design to be adopted

o optimal utilisation of land to be attempted by vertical

development as the land for development is scarce

o safe distance from trees to be maintained due to aspect of

building safety

o O&M budget allocation for tourism infrastructure should be duly

planned for sustenance of such infrastructure facilities (e.g. Auli

Ropeway is not-operational for several years)

For inter-department works, funds allocation/reimbursement system

should be properly functional so that payments are received in a

timely manner by the executing agency from the infrastructure

proposing department, else not only the financial sustainability of the

executing agency is affected the litigation process too may get

resorted to by the Contractor when timely payments are not

released even after a work is duly completed (e.g. previously, for a

work, as the funds were not given properly by RDD, the RES was

unable to pay the Contractor after the work was completed, a

Court Case was filed/Contempt of Court happened after the Court

Order, and finally even then when RDD did not release the balance

funds, the RES had to finally pay from its own funds taken out from

other RES Projects)

12 Additional Director A) Tourism-Specific Information: While planning for tourism

development consider current



S.

No.

Officials met and



Tourism, Uttarakhand

Tourism Development

Board (UTDB)

(31.05.2014 &

on 24.06.2014 in the

presence of DTDO, UTDB)

Uttarakhand Tourism and Travel Trade Registration Regulations, 2014

are effective from 24 January 2014, however, its likely to be

amended on request of affected stakeholders like Hotel/Restaurant

owners (one stakeholder meeting has already been held in past

dated 15 May 2014, and more are expected to be held in future)

On the Beach Camping Policy Draft prepared by the Chief

Conservator of Forests (Ecotourism), it was informed that UTDB

comments have already been submitted on 06 June 2012, and

further follow-up to be done from Section Officer, Tourism Section-1

at Secretariat

The Home Stay Rules 2015 have been published by UTDB at the time

of finalization of these guidelines and have been made a part of this

document.

Refer list of Rural Tourism Schemes including Tourism Villages under

CFA (for internal use of UTDB) that covers Schemes (Hardware and

Software Project components) for 13 Villages in 8 Districts, with 28

New Tourism Villages identified in 13 Districts

Refer excerpts from Presentation to the Government of Uttarakhand

dated 20 June 2014 by UTDB on:

o ―Details of Schemes being implemented for Tourism

Development – Rural Tourism covering Development of

Infrastructure Facilities (Hardware Project) and Training (Software

Project); and Financial Progress of Schemes implemented under

Rural Tourism under Hardware and Software Projects‖ and

o ―Hurdles in Tourism Development‖ – For example, quicker/safe

accessibility to arriving in State & Tourism destinations is required

whether by fast trains and/or proper quality roads (improved

after due studies for widening, rock fall/landslide arresting &

protection measures) and trek paths, duly integrated with

helipads for disaster preparedness; it takes a very long time for

transfer of Forest Lands (more than a year and times/in some

cases it has been observed to be much longer); inter-

departmental coordination and rapport in implementing tourism

activities needs improvement as every department has its own

priorities and a consensus for a priority to fully utilize the tourism

needs to appropriately meet:

o the tourism demand vis-à-vis

carrying capacity available

(after due carrying capacity

study) and accordingly

regulate the tourist visitation,

and

o quality of infrastructure

expectations for satisfactory

visitor experiences (e.g. by

making improvements in

tourism infrastructure facilities

like, rooms with good quality

finishing & furnishing, attached

toilets, etc.)

When designing tourism

infrastructure ensure the following:

o Architecture to be compatible

with surroundings i.e. following

hill architecture (e.g. room

frontage for valley view and

toilets to be on rear side) and

be environment-friendly

o Design to be complying to

earthquake resilience needs

and incorporating geological

survey results

o For the carrying capacity

arrived at a site/destination,

further planning for a proper

provision of all supporting

infrastructure/utilities shall be

worked out, and such

infrastructure design should be

able to cater to the peak



S.

No.

Officials met and



development is necessary to be achieved (e.g. while we may

have a tourism infrastructure built, we may not yet have proper

access to it, etc.); CFA implementation time limit is of 2 years

currently that needs to be extended because if a work is not

completed (due to season/construction window being limited in

Himalayan region of Uttarakhand) GoI does not release funds

unless evidence for Utilization of Previously Released Funds is

produced, as well as funds transferred under current Fund Flow

Chart as GoI–GoUK–Tourism Department–UTDB is considerably

time-consuming; the Annual Budget for Advertisement–

Promotion is limited (currently it is only INR 5 Crores out of the

total INR 12 Crores approved as Grant by GoUK which is less

than the annual outlay proposal submitted by UTDB to GoUK

covering several sub-heads like advertisement-promotion,

consultancy services, allocation for works under Char Dham

Commissioner, salaries & sages, etc. ), etc.


Earlier newer tourism activities were introduced as they were new to

the State to attract tourists, but not necessarily in a planned

manner/carrying capacity duly studied (e.g. river rafting undertaken

normally between 1 September to 30 June except in July-August

months due to monsoon season when the river water level rises

above safe limits, has been stopped this year from 15 June 2014

onwards due to raised water levels). The outlook post- disaster has

necessitated the need for planned development. Thus, it‘s

imperative to undertake tourism development in a planned manner,

with carrying capacity of sites/destinations/activities duly studied,

and with use of local materials.

tourism demand i.e. the main

season (of the three-tourism

seasons: off-, main-, and mean

seasons)

Control the extent of pucca

constructions to address the need

of minimizing the climate change

impacts in such an eco-sensitive

Himalayan region

13 District Magistrate,

Rudraprayag-cum-Chief

Executive Officer,

Kedarnath Development

Authority (20.06.2014)

Guiding principles/inputs suggested w.r.t. construction of tourism

infrastructure considering the disaster impacts observed in Kedarnath are:

Minimize construction using cement concrete

Prefer the use of Pre-fabricated/Pre-engineered structures in High

Altitude Regions

Use green technologies infrastructure design

-



S.

No.

Officials met and



Plan & provide for proper solid waste management (from segregation

to collection to proper treatment & disposal)

Study of river morphology/river flow pattern/glacial melting pattern etc.

based on which technical inputs for safe development planning to be

undertaken; and in addition, proper mitigation measures like flood

protection/river embankment strengthening measures and rock fall

arresting barriers/landslide protection measures should be undertaken

for safer sites with proper approach access

Master Plan to be prepared for development of Kedarnath town for

allocation of different land uses in a planned manner including

requirements of buildings of various departments/institutions like

transport, railways, etc., and which shall consider vertical development

upto G+2 storeys for judicious use of scarce land in this Himalayan

region

Planning for water supply development and waste water management

Provision of Helipads for disaster preparedness

14 Managing Director,

GMVN and Program

Manager, UEAP-PIU

(Tourism), GMVN

(25.06.2014 in the

presence of DGM-Civil,

GMVN)

Guiding principles/inputs suggested w.r.t. construction of tourism

infrastructure are:

Avoid construction that encroaches on river banks (as earlier most of

the private properties constructed in the past were encroaching the

river banks and hence most affected by the disaster of June 2013,

including some tourism assets located along river banks – e.g. Birahi TRH

in Chamoli district, etc.)

The structural designs must be earthquake resistant (it seems that the

damaged private properties as constructed in the past were of

conventional/sub-standard construction with flawed structural design –

e.g. properties with several storeys like 7-8 storeys supported only on 9‖

sized columns existed in Gaurikund area, and thus could not stand-up

to the disaster conditions)

Flood protection measures should be planned and implemented after

due geological and hydrological studies (the designs of such measures

undertaken by Irrigation Department should be suitable for hilly areas

considering river flow pattern & velocities, geology etc., i.e. be different

than as for plains)

-



S.

No.

Officials met and



Proper road-side & cross drainage works must be designed and

implemented as part of complete road and safe streetscape

construction works (currently the same does not seem to be properly

provisioned)

The roads connecting the Char Dhams, constructed & maintained by

Border Roads Organization (BRO) were initially constructed to provide

basic accessibility to border areas in Uttarakhand State for military

purposes, and when considering the current traffic to at least the main

Dhams of Kedarnath & Badrinath it seems that the traffic & bearing

capacity of these roads does not seem adequate, and thus requires

appropriate improvements to me made for comfortable ride/travel

time savings/safe visitor experiences

Rehabilitation/upgradation of tourism assets should be of improved

quality for safe & better visitor experiences

15 Superintending Engineer,

UEAP-PIU (PWD)

(02.08.2014)

A) General Information:

The development works undertaken by PWD are taken by adopting the

following: (i) CPWD Specifications and CPWD Specification-based

Block-wise Uttarakhand PWD Schedules of Rates (SORs); and (ii)

separate Specifications for Trek Routes, applicable since Government

of Uttar Pradesh times

With respect to their norms & standards used in Rural Department‘s

tourism works, it was formed that PWD normally does not do any rural

tourism related work except for trek routes under PWD jurisdiction

And for planning norms & standards, PWD follows the concerned local

body‘s norms & standards/byelaws issued by the Housing Department,

Government of Uttarakhand and/or as amended for customisation

w.r.t. local body‘s/development authority‘s needs (e.g. MDDA planning

norms & standards/byelaws)

B) Guiding principles/inputs suggested w.r.t. construction of tourism

infrastructure are:

Need to explore use of non-conventional construction that is light-

weight yet durable, environment-friendly, maintaining visual aesthetics

conforming to/ revival of traditional architecture of various hills regions,

etc.

Refer existing Specifications on

Development of Trek Routes,

issued by PWD, the then

Government of Uttar Pradesh



S.

No.

Officials met and



The scope of interventions required when developing/improving trek

routes-related tourism infrastructure may be limited, but should cover

the basic minimum needs for a safe trek travel (e.g. upgrading the

natural treks paths/trails where necessary (with retaining wall support,

slope gradient maintained in damaged paths with wood/bamboo

frame base-surface with landings at adequate distances, benches, rest

shelters with benches (pre-fab or wooden/bamboo with steel frame i.e.

temporary in nature and which can be assembled and disassembled

with ease, with wood sourced from Forest Development Corporation

Depots & bamboo from Uttarakhand Bamboo Board), suitable camp

site spaces, view-points & watch-towers for bird watching, pre-fab toilet

unit enroute and at camp sites, etc. Trek path lighting should be

avoided in wilderness areas.



3.7 Principles of Ecotourism Development (MOT, GoI, 1998)

The ―Ecotourism in India: Policy & Guidelines, 1998‖ issued by Ministry of

Tourism, GoI, under the Section of Policy and Planning highlights that ―The

developmental process itself should meet the following cardinal principles:

(i) It should involve the local community and lead to the overall

economic development of the area;

(ii) It should identify the likely conflicts between resource use for tourism

and the livelihood of local inhabitants, and attempt to minimise such

conflicts;

(iii) The type and scale of tourism development should be compatible

with the environment and socio-cultural characteristics of the local

community; and

(iv) It should be planned as a part of the overall area development

strategy, guided by an integrated land-use plan, and associated with

commensurate expansion of public services.

The biospheres, mangroves, coral reefs, deserts and mountains which form

the core resources of ecotourism, are fragile ecosystems5. Hence, decisions

for the development of tourism in such areas have to be based on a

thorough understanding of local resources, social and economic factors,

and other characteristics.

The objectives of tourism development in any specified area, as well as the

intended beneficiaries, dependency and scale of development have to

be decided on the basis of these factors, and discussion and negotiations

with those most directly concerned.

The development of physical infrastructure for tourism should be preceded

by the preparation of an inventory of resources and a

zoning/management plan to ensure preservation and public use of

valuable natural sites.

Whenever destruction or serious alteration of areas of high primary

productivity like wetland, seagrass beds, coral reefs or rainforests is

5 Two environments that are potentially more susceptible to tourism pressures are slow-growing, high-

altitude areas and marine areas… Fragile ecosystems are considered to be: those plant and animal

communities which are particularly vulnerable to damage by humans but those in slow-growing alpine

regions and those in high latitudes in particular that have suffered very considerable destruction due to

the low powers of regeneration and recovery. Wetland communities… are also considered fragile

communities in that they require very specific conditions of wetness and pH for their survival.

Fragile ecosystems are fragile either inherently (e.g., wetland communities) or in relation to human

activities (e.g., alpine and high-altitude ecosystems, and most desert and savannah ecosystems). The

fact that human beings have become agents of change at a global scale (e.g., human population

growth, urbanisation, industrialisation, pollution and climate change) has resulted in the term fragile

environments being used more generically in a global sense.

`[―Guidelines for Tourism in Parks and Protected Areas of East Asia,‖ issued by International Union for

Conservation of Nature and Natural Resources (IUCN), 2001]



contemplated, benefits and costs should be carefully assessed before

planning tourism development activities. Further, planning and promotion

of tourism should be undertaken as a component part of an integrated,

comprehensive resource management plan founded on sound ecological

principles.

The Tourism Management Plan should also establish standards for resort

development, covering among others, the style and locations of structures,

treatment of sewage and control of litter, preservation of open spaces and

public use of fragile areas. It should further lay down procedures to ensure

that sewage is not directed to the beach or the ground water, and solid

waste is systematically collected and disposed-off suitably. Adequate

precautionary measures should also be taken to avoid noise pollution. It

should also specify methods and material for construction activities, and

minimise any possible adverse impact on local environment.

Physical planning and design should integrate community services

including availability of potable water, transportation and tourism.

Transportation and aces should also be integrated with other purposes

such as industry and trade as communities are the termini for air, land and

water access. Physical planning for all travel modes, especially modern

tour buses, also needs to be integrated between segments outside and

inside the area of attraction.‖

Under Section of ―Operational Guidelines‖ of the above-mentioned MOT,

GoI, 1998 document on Ecotourism, the following provisions for separate

key players in the development of ecotourism were made:

The Government

o The management plan for each area should be prepared by

professional landscape architects and urban planners, in

consultation with the local community as well as others directly

concerned.

o Integrated planning should be adopted to avoid inter-sectoral and

cross-sectoral conflict.

o The architectural program for ecotourism centers should include

controlled access points and cabins, roads, self-guided nature trails,

transportation options, interpretive centers, signs, observation

towers and blinds, adequate but unpretentious lodging and dining

facilities, docks, garbage disposal facility and other utilities as per

requirement. If needed, suitable living quarters and facilities for

project personnel have to be provided.

o Structures creating visual pollution, un-aesthetic values and non-

compatible architecture should be controlled and temporary



structures using local building material and befitting the local

environment should be encouraged.

o Exclude developments in geologically unstable zones, and define

development and buffer zones after proper environmental impact

assessments.

o Establish standards, building codes and other regulations.

o Specify environmental, physical, and social carrying capacities to

limit development activities.

o Ensure continuous monitoring of adverse effects of tourism activities

and initiate suitable corrective measures.

o Recognise and award quality labels to ecotourism operators.

o Provide visitor information and interpretation services covering

particularly–(i) what to see, (ii) how to see, and (iii) how to behave.

It can be by way of brochures, leaflets, specialised guides, visitor

information centers and such.

o Prepare and widely distribute codes of conduct to all visitors.

o Launch training programs to ecotourism to tourism administrators,

planners, operators and general public.

Developers, Operators and Suppliers

o Respect and follow the planning restrictions, standards and codes

provided by the government and local authorities.

o Implement sound environment principles through self-regulation.

o Practice environmental impact assessment for all new projects, and

conduct regular environmental audit for all ongoing activities

leading to development of environmental improvement programs.

o Be sensitive to conservation of environmentally protected or

threatened areas, species, and scenic aesthetics, achieving

landscape enhancement wherever possible.

o Ensure that all structures are unobtrusive and do not interfere with

the natural ecosystem to the maximum extent.

o Recognise the optimal environmental capacity and sociological

use limits of the site in creating tourist facilities. They should also take

into account safety and convenience of tourists.

o Buildings should be designed strictly on functional and

environmental considerations, and avoid over-construction.

o Local material and designs should be used in all construction to the

extent possible.

o Physical planning, architectural design, and construction of tourist

facilities, should employ eco-friendly techniques, like solar energy,

capture and utilisation of rainwater, recycling of garbage, natural

cross-ventilation instead of air-conditioning, a high level of self-



sufficiency in food generation through orchards, ecological farms,

aquaculture and such.

o Energy and water-saving practices should be employed to the

extent possible. Fresh water management and controlled sewage

disposal should also be practised.

o Control air emissions–both chemical pollutants and noise.

o Control and reduce environmentally unfriendly products such as

asbestos, CFCs, pesticides, and toxic, corrosive, infectious, explosive

or flammable material.

o Respect and support historic or religious objects and sites.

o Provide information and interpretive services to visitors especially on

attractions and facilities, safety and security, local customs and

traditions, prohibitions and regulations, and self-conduct and

behaviour.

o Ensure adequate opportunities to visitors for communion with nature

and native cultures.

o In marketing ecotourism products, customers should be given

correct information, as the visitors who appreciate ecotourism

products usually belong to environmentally-aware groups.

o Training and research programs of the company should include

environmental issues.

o Prepare tourists to minimise possible negative impact while visiting

sensitive environments and cultures before their visit.

o Ensure safety and security of visitors and inform them of precautions

to be taken.

o Exercise due regard for the interest of the local population,

including their history, tradition and culture, and future economic

development.

o Involve the local community to the extent possible in various

activities and vocations.

The Visitors

The provisions made had been duly incorporated in the Do’s & Don’ts

sub-section ahead in this document.

The Destination Population/Host Community

o Realise and respect the value of the environment, the flora and

fauna, the monuments and the cultural heritage.

o Practise conservation of nature and culture as a way of life.

o Establish guidelines to protect valuable local resources and foster

tourism management.

o Realise and react to the threat of potential investors who see

opportunities in development but lack sensitivity to local values.



o Become effective nature guides and conservationists of natural

areas by enhancing the practical and ancestral knowledge of the

natural features of the area.

o Be friendly with the visitors and help them to practise ecotourism

codes.

Non-Governmental Organisations/Scientific & Research Institutions

o Create awareness, amongst all concerned, about the importance

of sound ecopractices in tourism development.

o Motivate the local community to increase their involvement in

sustainable tourism activities.

o Organise training programs to prepare the local people for taking-

up various vocations related to ecotourism.

3.8 Guidance for Taking-up Non-Forestry Activities in Wildlife Habitats (MoEF,

2012)

As per ―Guidance document for taking-up non-forestry activities in wildlife

habitats‖ issued by the Office of the Deputy Inspector General of Forests

(WL), MoEF, GoI vide F. No. 6-10/2011 WL dated 19 December 2012 for

National Board of Wildlife (NBWL) Clearances, which as a General Policy

states that ―National Parks, Sanctuaries and Conservation Reserves are

notified under The Wildlife (Protection) Act, 1972 as dedicated areas rich in,

and representing the unique biodiversity of a place. Such protected areas

are considered very important for conservation of biodiversity, and for

ensuring the healthy populations of its floral and faunal components, for

the present and future generations alike. However, the rising human

population and its growing demands for socio-economic development put

increasing stress on forests including protected areas both directly and

indirectly. This calls for a balance that has to be struck between

development and conservation implying that any activity involving use or

diversion of any part of a notified protected area may be considered only

under most exceptional circumstances, taking fully into account its

impending impact on the biodiversity of the area, and consequently on

the management of the Protected Area. A critical part of this balanced

approach is to spell out the feasibility of mitigation to address the impacts

without compromising the management objectives of the Protected Area.

The activities to be taken up in the identified wildlife habitats also need to

comply with the orders of the Hon'ble Supreme Court in addition to the

statutory requirements as provided in The Wild Life (Protection) Act, 1972.‖



4 DEVELOPMENT OF INFRASTRUCTURE FOR TOURISM – CERTAIN

SUGGESTIONS/RECOMMENDATIONS

4.1 Vision and Objectives

Uttarakhand‘s thriving economy has created many opportunities across

the State in the last few years. The growth of resources and business sectors

has brought more visitors to Uttarakhand‘s cities and regions. As the state

progresses, Government of Uttarakhand (GoUK) is determined to boost the

tourism industry in the state as well. GoUK has to look beyond mere tourist

numbers and make a strategic shift towards quality tourism. This will

emphasise hospitality, service standards, innovative developments and

rejuvenation of older tourist attractions, with the aim of offering visitors the

experience that will commensurate with higher expectations.

Quality tourism and its development aims to increase the tourism sector

contribution to state GDP and supports existing Government policies and

adopts an integrated approach for developing a sustainable tourism

industry in the state, backed by relevant infrastructure, effective

institutional mechanisms and enhanced capacities to deliver on these

targets. GoUK had already embarked on this journey in developing

Uttarakhand as a vibrant, sustainable and preferred tourism destination.

Tourism is one of the priority sectors identified in the Government‘s overall

growth strategy for the state. Uttarakhand should aim to be in the top 5

tourism destinations in India and top 50 in the world. The vision articulated

for the tourism sector post-impact scenario of Disaster of June 2013 is as

follows:

“To develop Uttarakhand as a dynamic, sustainable and most-favoured

tourism destination - by increasing domestic & international visitations,

offering high quality experience to visitors that is safe from the perspectives

of travel to tourism destination and siting & construction of tourism

assets/infrastructure, facilitating and accelerating investments and

improving livelihood opportunities at the local level.”

To achieve the vision and set the direction for the tourism industry over the

next five years, the following objectives are outlined:

Accelerate and facilitate private investments and promoting

entrepreneurship in the tourism sector.

Motivate and enthuse entities from different segments of the society

with substantial incentives to contribute towards development of the

sector.



Higher growth in visitations and duration of stay of different visitor

segments, through improved quality & safe infrastructure, products and

services.

Improve ‗total quality‘ experience to visitors, from before arrival till after

departure, by providing better access to information, greater choice in

destinations, compendium of services for eating, shopping,

participative safe and hassle-free experience at various travel stages.

Promote effective inter-departmental co-ordination to streamline

processes and increase sector performance.

Enhance tourism industry skills, knowledge and professionalism to

provide visitors a pleasant experience and promote local employment

opportunities.

Enhance faith of visitors that Uttarakhand is a safe tourism destination

through integration of tourism sites with the availability of enhanced

disaster preparedness capacities of the State (viz. emergency

evacuation and rescue & relief mechanisms in place through the

development of helipads/heliports/helidromes and multi-purpose

halls/shelters in their vicinity).

4.2 Definitions related to Integrated Tourism-Heritage Sector (UNWTO/TA/ETC,

2010/2011; IUCN, 2001, etc.)

Tourism Sector

Accommodation capacity. A measure of total accommodation stock

at a defined place or destination. It may be given by different

measures such as the number of establishments; number of rooms or

units within all establishments, or the total number of bed spaces.

Adventure/Sports Tourism. A form of tourism in natural areas that

incorporates an element of risk, higher levels of physical exertion, and

the need for specialised skills.

Although not strictly ecotourism per se, activities such as rafting and

mountaineering can also be combined with ecotourism, where an

appreciation and interpretation of the environment is undertaken as

part of the activity. The development of camping sites on river beaches

is one example of a product that can easily be turned into ecotourism.

This is also a potentially important market as ecotourism can easily be

combined with other forms of nature tourism. As well as the financial

benefits of introducing a new market to this tourism product, such an

initiative can also have important environmental benefits. Adventure

and sports tourism can sometimes have negative impacts on the

environment, which could be mitigated by the introduction of an



ecotourism element in the product. For example special routings for

mountain biking could be introduced where the intention is to combine

the sport with nature interpretation. Here environmental considerations

can be taken in the selection of routes that have the least adverse

impact on the environment and/or the choice of tracks that minimize

soil erosion. (Uttarakhand Tourism Development Master Plan, UNWTO,

2008)

Uttarakhand is a paradise for adventure sports. The sheer variety

ranging from mountaineering (Bhagirathi, Chowkhamba, Nanda Devi,

Kamet, Pindari, Sahastrataal, Milam, Kafni, Khatling, Gaumukh),

trekking, skiing (Auli, Dayara Bugyal, Munsyari, Mundali), skating, water

sports (in all the lakes and rivers in Uttarakhand) to aero sports like hang

gliding/para gliding (Pithoragarh, Jolly Grant, Pauri) make Uttarakhand

one of the most attractive destinations for adventure sports on only in

India but the world over. (Tourism Policy of State of Uttarakhand, UTDB,

2007)

Also, the current applicable ―Uttarakhand Tourism and Travel Trade

Registration Regulations, 2014‖ with effect from 24 January 2014,

includes the following under Adventure Tourism-related Unit to be

registered under the said Regulations: adventure tour operator,

kayaking/canoeing/sailing/yachting (Sail boat)/boating (water sports),

water skiing, snow skiing, trekking, mountaineering, rock/artificial wall

climbing, mountain biking, wildlife safari/bird watching, moto car/motor

cycle rally, parasailing/paragliding, bungee jumping, hot air ballooning,

flying fox, ice skating, adventure club, river rafting, etc.

Adventure Tour Operator (ATO). As per the Guidelines for Recognition /

Renewal or Extension as an Approved Adventure Tour Operator (ATO)

revised with effect from 2nd January 2012 by MOT, GoI, ―An ATO is the

one who is engaged in activities related to Adventure Tourism in India

namely, water sports, aero sports, mountaineering, trekking and safaris

of various kinds, etc. In addition to that he may also make

arrangements for transport, accommodation, etc.‖



includes ―Adventure Tour Operator‖ as part of Adventure Tourism-

related Unit to be registered under the said Regulations. While, for

safety standards/regulations in Aero Sports refer ―Instructions related to

temporary directives till the Permanent Regulations/Directives are

prepared for Aero Sports in Uttarakhand‖ issued by Tourism Section,



Government of Uttarakhand vide No. 112/T.O./2003-47 Tourism/2003

dated 28 Mar 2003.

Agent. One who acts or has the power to act as the representative of

another. Most frequently in travel anyone other than a principal, such

as a retail travel agent, receiving agent, ticket agent, local operator or

wholesaler.

Agri/Agro-tourism. Agri-tourism, as it is defined most broadly, involves

any agriculturally based operation or activity that brings visitors to

a farm or ranch. Agri-tourism has different definitions in different parts of

the world, and sometimes refers specifically to farm stays, as in Italy.

Elsewhere, agri-tourism includes a wide variety of activities, including

buying produce direct from a farm stand, navigating a corn maze,

picking fruit, feeding animals, or staying at a B&B on a farm. Agri-

tourism is a form of niche tourism that is considered a growth industry in

many parts of the world…… (Wikipedia)

As per Uttarakhand Tourism Development Master Plan, UNWTO, 2008,

the information centers at Jageshwar are proposed to include

itineraries for agro-tourism, including visits to farms making local

produce.

Attractions. Things to see. For example, a place, event, activity, building

or area (whether natural or man-made), which offers items of specific

interest to tourists.

Barrier-Free Friendly Built-Environment. Barrier-free environment is one

which enables people with disabilities to move about safety and freely

and to use the facilities within the built-environment. The goal of barrier-

free design is to provide an environment that supports the independent

functioning of individuals so that they can get to, and participate

without assistance, in everyday activities such as procurement of goods

and services, community living, employment, and leisure. Barrier-free

design standards should satisfy anyone who is hampered in his mobility

of functioning (as compared with a non-disabled person) as a result of

obstacles put in his way by the design of a building, the choice of

hardware and equipment, and the arrangement of outside space.

(Guidelines and Space Standards for Barrier-Free Built-Environment for

Disabled and Elderly Persons, CPWD, GoI, 1998)

Bed & Breakfast (B&B). Generally overnight accommodations in a

private home, with breakfast included in the rate.

Refer for details, the Guidelines for Approval and Registration of

Incredible India Bed & Breakfast/Homestay Establishments,‖ H&R

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Agriculture

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Farm

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ranch

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Farm_stay



Division, MOT, GoI on ―Incredible India Bed & Breakfast / Homestay

Establishments.‖ Also, the current applicable ―Uttarakhand Tourism and

Travel Trade Registration Regulations, 2014‖ with effect from 24 January

2014, includes ―Bread & Breakfast‖ as part of Accommodation-related

Unit to be registered under the said Regulations.

Carrying Capacity. The amount of visitor activity that a site or

destination can sustain.

As per the ―Guidelines for Tourism in Parks and Protected Areas of East

Asia,‖ issued by International Union for Conservation of Nature and

Natural Resources (IUCN), 2001 provides definitions on Use Levels

covering Limits of Acceptable Use and Types of Limits or Carrying

Capacities, as given below:

o Limits of Acceptable Use: A concept that is fundamental to the

management of sustainable tourism is the development of

desirable limits of acceptable use. Simply stated, it measures the

types and levels of use that are sustainable. Examples of questions

to consider when determining these limits are ―How much damage

can the environment take?‖ and ―How much degradation will be

acceptable to tourists?‖ There is evidence that as environments

become damaged or use levels and type changes, some tourists

go elsewhere (Valentine*, 1992). Three types of limits are: a)

environmental, b) cultural and social, and c) psychological.

[*Valentine, P. S. (1992). Review: Nature-based tourism. In B. Weiler,

& C.M. Hall (Eds.), Special interest tourism (pp. 105-127). London,

England: Belhaven.]

Environmental carrying capacity is the most traditional concept

of the three. Environmental limits are assessed according to the

―degree to which an ecosystem, habitat or landscape can

accommodate the various impacts of tourism without damage

being caused or without losing its ‗sense of place‘‖ (FNNPE^,

1993, p. 26). The assigned limits may vary depending on the

season. For example, wildlife is more sensitive at certain times of

the year, such as during breeding season, and weather

conditions and water levels can alter the ability for habitat to

withstand the pressures placed upon it.

[^Federation of Nature and National Parks of Europe. (1993).

Loving them to death? Sustainable tourism in Europe‘s nature

and national parks. Eupen, Belgium: FNNPE.]



Cultural or social carrying capacity refers to the ―level beyond

which tourism developments and visitor numbers adversely affect

local communities and their ways of life (FNNPE, 1993, p. 26 as

mentioned-above).‖ Tourism levels that are too high will interfere

with local people‘s ability to go about their necessary daily

routines, and after the initial curiosity and excitement associated

with potential economic benefits fades, the local people may

begin to resent tourists. Once communities become adversely

affected (i.e., a once peaceful place becomes very busy and

congested or a historic site is damaged), their ability to attract

visitors declines.

Psychological carrying capacity is the ―level beyond which the

essential qualities that people seek in the protected area (such

as peace and quiet, few other people, few signs of human

developments) would be damaged by tourism developments

(FNNPE, 1993, p. 26 as mentioned-above).‖ Each visitor to a

protected area has certain expectations, including

approximately how many other visitors he or she expects to

encounter. At a beach on a hot day a visitor can expect crowds

of people, whereas on a backcountry hike a visitor will expect

less people. Psychological carrying capacity addresses this

expectation. When visitors‘ expectations are not met, visitors may

leave feeling unsatisfied and unhappy with their experience.

Refer ―Guidelines for Ecotourism in and around Protected Areas (Draft)‖

introduced by MoEF, GoI dated 02 June 2011 or ―Comprehensive

Guidelines for Tiger Conservation and Tourism‖ as per Notification

dated 15th October 2012, NTCA for methods of deriving carrying

capacities.

Also, the said NTCA Guidelines, 2012, mentions that ―The

Encyclopaedia of Ecotourism* defines carrying capacity as ―the

amount of tourism-related activity that a site or destination can

sustainably accommodate; often measured in terms of visitor numbers

or visitor-nights over a given period of time, or by the number of

available accommodation units; management techniques such as site

hardening can be employed to raise a site‘s carrying capacity.‖ Also,

―The definition of Limits of Acceptable Change as defined by the

Encyclopaedia of Ecotourism* is ―a land management philosophy that

identifies specific indicators of environmental quality and tourism

impacts, and defines thresholds within which the conservation goals of



a protected area are met.‖ [*David B, Weaver (Ed.) (2001), ―The

Encyclopaedia of Ecotourism,‖ CABI Publishing, U.K.]

Corporate Tourism. As per Uttarakhand Tourism Policy, 2001 enormous

potential exists in Uttarakhand for corporate tourism. This involves

encouraging private sector participation in the establishment of high

class Convention Centers and facilities for conferences, seminars,

workshops, business-meets, etc.

Also, known as business/MICE tourism i.e. Meetings, Incentives,

Conferences, and Exhibitions (with the ―E‖ sometimes referring to events

and the ―C‖ sometimes referring to conventions) it is a type of tourism in

which large groups, usually planned well in advance, are brought

together for a particular purpose, viz. an agenda centered around a

theme or topic, such as profession trade organization, a special interest

group or an education topic. (Wikipedia)

Cultural Tourism. In its broadest and most accurate sense it is tourism

based on an interest or concern for the way of life of a place and how

this is experienced by visitors. It encompasses tourism subsets including–

arts, theatre, music, science and heritage tourism, events and

entertainment tourism, and indigenous/tribal area tourism.

If culture is developed it can provide additional interest for tourists

visiting the area. Tribal handicraft can be made available to tourists,

historical and cultural museums can be opened, cultural expression (i.e.

art, song and dance related folk-performances) can be presented to

tourists, as well as local food and culinary delicacies can be promoted.

Also, built-heritage can be restored along with adaptive reuse and be

added to cultural assets for use of tourists. (Uttarakhand Tourism

Development Master Plan, UNWTO, 2008)

Uttarakhand has a rich and vibrant cultural heritage. There are

innumerable local fairs and festivals like, Jhanda Mela (Dehradun),

Surkanda Devi Mela (Tehri), Madh Mela (Uttarkashi), Nanda Devi Mela

(Nainital), Chaiti Mela (Udham Singh Nagar), Purnagiri Mela

(Champawat), Piran Kaliyar Mela (Haridwar), Jauljibi Mela

(Pithoragarh), and Uttarayani Mela (Bageshwar). (Tourism Policy of

State of Uttarakhand, UTDB, 2007)

Destination Brand. A unique combination of product characteristics

and added values, both tangible and non-tangible. The brand is not

only a trademark (logo, strapline or icon), but an experience and

image that signals a value system and positioning. It establishes the kind

of experience that the visitor can expect from the destination.

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Convention_(meeting)



Domestic Tourism. It comprises the activities of a resident visitor within

the country of reference, either as a part of a domestic tourism trip or

part of an outbound tourism trip.

Ecolodge. As per ―Ecotourism: Principles, Practices & Policies for

Sustainability‖ by Megan Epler Wood, UNEP-TIES, 2002, the Ecolodge

definition as adapted from ―Mehta et al, 2002 – International Ecolodge

Guidelines‖ is ―An ecolodge is a tourism accommodation facility that

meets the following criteria:

o It conserves the surrounding environment, both natural and cultural.

o It has minimal impact on the natural surroundings during

construction.

o It fits into its specific physical and cultural contexts through careful

attention to form, landscaping and colour, as well as the use of

localised architecture.‖

o It uses alternative, sustainable means of water acquisition, and

reduces water consumption.

o It provides careful handling and disposal of solid waste and

sewage.

o It meets its energy needs through passive design and combines

these with their modern counterparts for greater sustainability.

o It endeavours to work together with the local community.

o It offers interpretative programs to educate both its employees and

tourists about the surrounding natural and cultural environments.

o It contributes to local sustainable development through research

programs.‖

Ecotourism. ―Responsible travel to natural areas that conserves the

environment and improves the well-being of local people.‖ (The

International Ecotourism Society-TIES, 1990)

―Ecotourism in India: Policy & Guidelines, 1998‖ issued by Ministry of

Tourism, GoI, had mentioned that ―The key elements of ecotourism

include a natural environment as the prime attraction, an optimum

number of environment-friendly visitors, activities which do not have

any serious impact on the ecosystem, and the positive involvement of

the local community in maintaining the ecological balance. Ecotourism

can take many forms and magnitudes. For example, ‗losing‘ oneself in

a beautiful natural forest or landscape–watching animals, birds and

trees in a forest, corals and marine life in sea, engaging in trekking

boating or rafting, wandering amongst sand dunes–these are some of

the common forms of ecotourism.‖



As per ―Ecotourism Policy, 2003,‖ Center for Ecotourism, Forest

Department, GoUK, it is stated that ecotourism was identified as one of

the main strategies for self-employment and poverty alleviation6 in the

Uttaranchal Forest Policy–2001, and similarly, ecotourism development

is one of the important activities in the Action Plan of Uttaranchal

Tourism Policy–2001. However, the above-mentioned ―Ecotourism

Policy, 2003,‖ clearly emphasises that ―Only those tourism activities as

part of nature tourism can be considered as ecotourism that comply

with the following standards:

o through which tourists can have close and true experience nature

and culture, resulting in increased understanding;

o which can increase the environment-related awareness of tourists

and local communities, leading to protection of and improvement

in environment;

o through which conservation of nature, natural and cultural

resources is encouraged, and private conservation efforts get

enhanced;

o which assist in enhancing local development, and allow

appropriate distribution of benefits of ecotourism at local, regional

and national level; and

o which assist in creation of alternate livelihoods opportunities for

local people, and enhance the capability of ecotourism

management of local communities.

o And, ecotourism is promoted as a form of strategy for conservation,

and ecotourism can lead to increase in environment protection.‖

o Also as per the above-mentioned ―Ecotourism Policy, 2003,‖ one of

the purposes & activities of the ecotourism programme is

―Developing of need-based local basic infrastructure facilities for

ecotourism:

6 In line with the National Forest Policy, 1988 applicable in all states, the Amendment for Uttarakhand in

1989 for a State Forest Policy, emphasises few of the main purposes of the State Forest Policy in

Uttarakhand as:

Attempt to reduce the gap between the need and availability for local requirements of rural poor for

fuel wood, fodder, minor forest produce and wood for building construction.

Attempt to reduce the bio-pressure by judicious use of timber and other forest produce along with use

of their alternative means.

While retaining the vegetation cover in the State, attempt to provide opportunities for self-

employment and poverty alleviation through programs like, forestry and ecotourism.

Strengthen the Van Panchayat mechanism with the purpose to re-establish fruitful relationship

between forests and local host community and to achieve local participation in forestry; joint forest

management and to develop ecotourism at wider level which includes to provide special roles to

women folk.

[National Forest Policy, 1988 with Amendment for Uttarakhand, 1989 (Text in Hindi), Forest Department

website]



Planning and management of basic infrastructure facilities for

environment protection in destination towns.

Development of roads for access to large settlements and

villages.

Enhancing the use of solar energy and other suitable

techniques.

Encouraging the construction of buildings in traditional style and

eco-lodge.

Development of management mechanisms for disposal of solid

waste at village-, large settlement- and town-levels.

Implementation of measures for prevention and treatment of

air, noise and water pollution.‖

The State of Uttarakhand offers diverse opportunities for ecotourism,

both from perspectives of biodiversity of flora and fauna (through its

protected areas of National Parks/Sanctuaries/Reserves, including

especially wildlife ecotourism within such eco-sensitive forest areas).

This makes it an ideal area for development ecotourism, projects

and activities like, jungle safaris, trekking on mountain and forest

trails, nature walks, catch and release angling for Mahaseer and

other fish species. All these activities have to be conducted in a

manner that promotes awareness of environment and helps

maintain the fragile ecological balance. (Tourism Policy of State of

Uttarakhand, UTDB, 2007)

Ecotourism is an important tool for conservation because it

generates economic benefits for the authorities managing the

protected area as well as local people who get employment. This

instils a sense of pride in the local people who now appreciate the

value of their natural and cultural heritage. Ecotourism also

influences visitors by providing an opportunity for a better, more

educative experience, thus sensitising them towards conservation.

[―Ecotourism‖ sub-section under ―Tourism‖ section, Park

Management & Conservation webpage, Corbett National Park

Website]

Ecotourists interested in Biodiversity. These are tourists specifically

interested in wildlife, both on a general basis and as specialist

enthusiasts such as birdwatchers. One particular animal or habitat

would usually attract both groups. Tiger or leopard viewing for example

would probably attract tourists with no particular specialist knowledge

but who are attracted by the exotic nature and rarity of these



mammals. They may exhibit more mainstream characteristics such as in

terms of spending or accommodation needs (although they would be

prepared to experience rough conditions over short periods of time to

see the animals in question). The specialist segment of this group of

ecotourists would usually have higher disposable incomes and be

prepared to experience conditions that are related to their special

interests. Although thus prepared to experience hardships, the higher

paying segments of this market would also expect high quality services

and accommodation after viewing activities. A combination of nature

watching with spa facilities would therefore be ideal for this group of

higher spending tourists. (Uttarakhand Tourism Development Master

Plan, UNWTO, 2008)

Ethical and Responsible Tourists. This is one of the fastest growing

markets in tourism, and perhaps one of the most lucrative. Originating

mostly from Europe and North America, they comprise tourists who wish

to contribute financially to the environmental sustainability and

consideration of destinations and/or help bring real improvements to

host populations. It is likely that this type of tourism will grow in Asia, as

city dwellers become more environmentally and socially conscious and

impacts of global warming are increasingly publicised. [Uttarakhand

Tourism Development Master Plan, UNWTO, 2008. Also, practiced by

Kingdom of Bhutan in the Asian Subcontinent.]

Experiential Tourism. Experimental tourism is a novel approach

to tourism in which visitors do not visit the ordinary tourist attractions (or,

at least not with the ordinary approach), but allow whim to guide them.

It is an alternative form of tourism in which destinations are chosen not

on their standard touristic merit but on the basis of an idea or

experiment. It often involves elements of humour, serendipity,

and chance. (Wikipedia)

Experiential Tourism … … ―to encompass travel interests and activities

that elevate and enhance the individual travellers‘ experiences by

providing personal enrichment, enlightenment, stimulation and

engagement. (Uttarakhand Tourism Development Master Plan, UNWTO,

2008.

General Ecotourists. Tourists with a general interest in nature who are

drawn by the allure of the Himalayas and who would wish to

experience the landscapes, major fauna and flora, and cultural

attributes of the region (often in combination). They can include

different age groups and have varied spending power according to

age. (Uttarakhand Tourism Development Master Plan, UNWTO, 2008)

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tourism

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tourist_attraction

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Humor

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Serendipity

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Randomness



Guest Houses. In order to meet the rising demand of hotel

accommodation for budget tourists both domestic and foreign, Ministry

of Tourism has decided to standardize and ensure good, clean,

hygienic, fair and upgraded facilities and practices in the large number

of Guest Houses and unregulated accommodation units that spring up

in cities and towns. These measures may not only augment hotel

accommodation in budget category but also generate employment

and revenue for the States. With this aim in view, Govt. of India, Ministry

of Tourism has a voluntary Scheme for approval of Guest Houses in the

country. (Guidelines for Approval of Guest Houses (Revised)‖ issued by

H&R Division, MOT, GoI, 2009)



includes ―Paying Guest House‖ as part of Accommodation-related Unit

to be registered under the said Regulations.

Home Stay. The primary intent of a home stay is to provide for foreign

and domestic tourists a hygienic and cheap and at village level an

accommodation facility of a certain standard level. This would allow

foreign tourists as well to stay with an Indian family, and an excellent

opportunity to experience their culture and understand their traditions,

and get a taste of cuisines of India/Uttarakhand. [Uttarakhand Home

Stay Rules, 2015].



includes ―Home Stay‖ as part of Accommodation-related Unit to be

registered under the said Regulations.

House Boats. A house boat is a boat that has been designed or

modified to be used primarily as a home. Some house boats are not

motorized, because they are usually moored, kept stationary at a fixed

point and often tethered to land to provide utilities. However, many are

capable of operation under their own power. (Wikipedia)

The current applicable ―Uttarakhand Tourism and Travel Trade


includes ―River/Lake Cruise/House Boats‖ as part of Accommodation-

related Unit to be registered under the said Regulations. Also, as per

Uttarakhand Tourism Development Master Plan, UNWTO, 2008, ―The

house boats can be motorized like those in Kerala, if permissible as per

existing laws and court rulings or can be stationary at a specific

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Boat

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Home



location as in the case of Kashmir‖ as per feasibility/proposition possible

at Tehri Lake Water Sports Complex.

Inbound Tourism. It comprises the activities of a non-resident visitor

within the country of reference on an inbound tourism trip.

Inbound Tour Operator. Travel operator who serves or works with

international wholesalers packaging holidays for travellers arriving from

another country (usually groups), in liaison with destinations' suppliers.

Infrastructure. Facilities, services, assets and plant that support the

delivery of tourism experiences.

Internal Tourism. It comprises domestic and inbound tourism.

International Tourism. It comprises inbound tourism plus outbound

tourism, that is to say, the activities of resident visitors outside the

country of reference, either as part of domestic or outbound trips and

the activities of non-resident visitors within the country of reference on

inbound tourism trips.

Interpretation. Communicating ideas, insights and information in

pleasurable, relevant, accurate, imaginative, organised and thematic

ways.

Mainstream Tourism. Mainstream tourism captures the largest market

segment of tourism. It consists of people looking for rest, novel

experiences and recreation, and often occurs at beaches and in cities.

These travellers desire comfortable hotels and the presence of other

tourist accommodations, such as a resort complex that offers shopping,

recreation, restaurants, entertainment and other facilities and services.

This tourism often occurs in high volumes, which is why it is often referred

to as mass tourism. [―Guidelines for Tourism in Parks and Protected

Areas of East Asia,‖ IUCN, 2001. While, as per Wikipedia, ―A resort is a

place used for relaxation or recreation, attracting visitors for vacations

and/or tourism. Resorts are places, towns or sometimes commercial

establishment operated by a single company.‖]

Market Segmentation. The process of dividing a broad market into

smaller, specific markets based on customer characteristics, buying

power and other variables, such as adventure tourism, cultural/heritage

tourism, indigenous/tribal area tourism, food and wine tourism, agri-

tourism, etc.

National Tourism. It comprises domestic tourism and outbound tourism.

Nature-based Tourism. Nature in tourism involves experiencing natural

places, typically through outdoor activities that are sustainable in terms

of their impact on the environment.



As per ―Guidelines for Tourism in Parks and Protected Areas of East

Asia,‖ IUCN, 2001, ―It is a general class of special interest tourism whose

common factor is a link to nature. A relatively simple definition is that

―nature-based tourism is primarily concerned with the direct enjoyment

of some relatively undisturbed phenomenon of nature‖ (Valentine, 1992

as mentioned-earlier, p. 108). The degree to which a visitor‘s

experience depends upon nature can vary. There are activities:

a) which are dependent on nature (e.g., people seeking to observe

animals in the wild require a natural environment to enjoy their

experience);

b) which are enhanced by nature (e.g., people prefer to camp in a

forest but the activity might be possible with equal satisfaction for

some users without a purely natural setting); and

c) for which the natural setting is incidental (e.g., if a person‘s interest is

a cooling swim then the setting may be relatively unimportant,

assuming unpolluted water). (Valentine, 1992 as mentioned-earlier,

p. 110)

However, nature-based tourism is not automatically ecologically

sustainable. In general, for such tourism to be ecologically sustainable,

it must be appropriate for the specific location and should produce no

permanent degradation of the natural environment.‖ Sustainable

tourism, rural tourism, ecotourism etc. are considered component terms

under nature-based tourism.

The Queen of the Hills - Mussoorie, the Lake District of India - Nainital,

Kausani, Pauri, Lansdowne, Ranikhet, Almora, Pithoragarh, Munsyari,

and many more attractive tourist destinations are part of Uttarakhand.

(Tourism Policy of State of Uttarakhand, UTDB, 2007)

Outbound Tourism. It comprises the activities of a resident visitor outside

the country of reference, either as part of an outbound tourism trip or

as part of a domestic tourism trip.

Outbound Tour Operator. A company that takes groups from a given

city or country to another city or country.

Paying Guest Scheme. It means that a private house owner would

provide a part of own home (few rooms) to tourists on rental basis. The

house owner apart from providing rooms would also be able to provide

breakfast/meal service to tourists, and would be able to collect

prescribed amounts for room rent and food charges, etc. from the

tourists. (Introduction of Paying Guest Scheme for Development of



Tourism in the State, Tourism Department, the then State of Uttar

Pradesh, 1994)

Protected Areas. The World Conservation Union (IUCN) defines a

protected area as an ―area of land and/or sea especially dedicated

to the protection and maintenance of biological diversity, and of

natural and associated cultural resources, and managed through legal

or other effective means.‖

Recreation, Amusement and Leisure Tourism. Recreation is an activity

of leisure, leisure being discretionary time. The "need to do something

for recreation" is an essential element of human biology and

psychology. Recreational activities are often done for enjoyment,

amusement, or pleasure and are considered to be "fun." An

amusement park or theme park is a group of entertainment attractions,

rides, and other events in a location for the enjoyment of large numbers

of people. Amusement parks have a fixed location, and are more

elaborate than simple city parks or playgrounds, usually providing

attractions meant to cater specifically to certain age groups, as well as

some that are aimed towards all ages. Theme parks, a specific type of

amusement park, are usually much more intricately themed to a

certain subject or group of subjects than normal amusement parks.

(Wikipedia)

As per Tourism Policy of State of Uttarakhand, 2007, ―The clean, fresh

and invigorating environment makes Uttarakhand a preferred

destination to relax and unwind. From the modern facilities at Mussoorie

and Nainital to the untouched pristine beauty of its snow clad peaks,

rivers and forests, Uttarakhand provides all that a tourist could possibly

seek for amusement and leisure.‖ While, as per Uttarakhand Tourism

Development Mast Plan, UNWTO, 2008, promotional incentives for

setting up of amusement parks have been made.



includes ―Recreation/Theme/Amusement Park‖ as part of

Entertainment-related Unit to be registered under the said Regulations.

Rural Tourism. Any form of tourism that showcases the rural life, art,

culture and heritage at rural locations, thereby benefiting the local

community economically and socially as well as enabling interaction

between the tourists and the locals for a more enriching tourism

experience can be termed as rural tourism. Rural tourism is essentially

an activity which takes place in the countryside. It is multi-faceted and

may entail farm/agricultural tourism, cultural tourism, nature tourism,

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Leisure

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Happiness

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Amusement

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Pleasure

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Fun

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Entertainment

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Rides

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Playground



adventure tourism, and eco-tourism. As against conventional tourism,

rural tourism has certain typical characteristics like; it is experience

oriented, the locations are sparsely populated, it is predominantly in

natural environment, it meshes with seasonality and local events and is

based on preservation of culture, heritage and traditions. (Rural Tourism

Scheme for Infrastructure Development – Scheme Guidelines (Revised

as on 09.12.11), Ministry of Tourism, GoI, 2011]

As per Tourism Policy of State of Uttarakhand, UTDB, 2007, ―Action will

be taken for development and promotion of village tourism and tourist

villages at different places in the State. This would include development

of basic facilities of clean and healthy food, and comfortable

accommodation to tourists in these villages. Together with mountain

tourism activities in the surrounding areas, the historical traditions of the

villagers, folk arts/culture and cuisine will be promoted as special

attractions.‖

As per excerpts from Presentation to the Government of Uttarakhand

dated 20 June 2014 by UTDB on ―Details of Schemes being

implemented for Tourism Development – Rural Tourism‖ covers the

following:

o Development of Infrastructure Facilities (Hardware Project):

beautification of village surroundings, landscaping work,

development of parks, compound wall and fencing, upgradation

of all streets joining a village within Panchayat limit, lighting in

villages, solid waste management and sewerage system provision,

placing signage, construction of reception room, construction of

accommodation facility, etc.; and

o Training (Software Project): photography/videography, awareness

training, hotel industry and guide, skill development, initial training

for English Language, Women Self-Help Group, natural resources

and environmental conservation, health and hygiene, hospitality,

etc.

Community-based Rural Tourism (CBT) has been identified as a viable

option for providing livelihood opportunities to the communities residing

in villages near the forest areas and to provide visitors a glimpse of rural

hill village life. In the interior regions of the Uttarakhand State, CBT has

been introduced as a means of employment and income generation

for the local communities. (Experience village life: Community-based

Tourism (CBT), CCF-Ecotourism Division, Forest Department, GoUK)



Community-based tourism is planned and managed by local people.

As such, it is a positive means of inculcating cultural pride and creating

strong local communities who recognize and nurture the goals of the

collective. By contrast, pro-poor tourism is a strategy that aims at

poverty reduction of the most disadvantaged sections of the

community. It utilizes tourism as an intervention against poverty. Instead

of assuming that tourism benefits the poorest sections in rural areas, it

spells out practical strategies to ensure their inclusion. (Uttarakhand

Tourism Development Master Plan, UNWTO, 2008)

Seasonality. A phenomenon created by either tourism supply or

demand (or both) changing according to the time of the year.

Special Interest Tourism. It consists of people who possess a common

special interest that influences their travel choices*. These visitors are

segmented by specific interests or motivations rather than by other

characteristics such as age or social class. The type of travel

experience that they seek is strongly related to their special interest.

Nature-based tourism, in all its specialised forms, is an example of

special interest tourism. *For example, bird watchers of all ages will

choose travel destinations that offer opportunities to view bird species

unique to the area. [―Guidelines for Tourism in Parks and Protected

Areas of East Asia‖, IUCN, 2001]

Supply (the supply side of tourism 'supply and demand'). The means of

accessing and the tourism experiences and products found at the

tourism destination.

Sustainable Tourism. Sustainable tourism combines conservation

principles with tourism development. Sustainable tourism development

is about making tourism more compatible with the needs and resources

of a destination area. It should:

o make optimal use of environmental resources, that constitute a key

element in tourism development, maintaining essential ecological

processes, and helping to conserve natural resources and

biodiversity;

o respect the socio-cultural authenticity of host communities,

conserve their built- and living-cultural heritage and traditional

values, and contribute to intercultural understanding and

tolerance;

o ensure viable, long-term economic operations, providing socio-

economic benefits to all stakeholders that are fairly distributed,

including stable employment and income-earning opportunities,

social services to host communities, and contributing to poverty

alleviation; and



o also maintain a high level of tourist satisfaction and ensure a

meaningful experience to the tourists, raising their awareness about

sustainability issues and promoting sustainable tourism practices

amongst them.

Tourism. Tourism is about people travelling for a wide range of purposes

together with the services and facilities required to enable and support

travel. It is defined as ―The activities of persons travelling to and staying

in places outside their usual environment for not more than one

consecutive year for leisure, business, education, and other purposes‖

(UNWTO & TA, 2010).

Tourism Activities or Tourism Product. Things to do. Types of tourism

activities may include the following, and as permitted in the State of

Uttarakhand:

o Adventure. Uttarakhand State is also a major destination for

adventure sports lovers. Many national and international

competitions of Skiing, Mountaineering, Water rafting, Rock

climbing etc. are held annually. The many thrills the State has on

offer range from treks to white water rafting to paragliding to biking

are sufficient to entice the adventure-bound souls to explore and

experience the newer highs. (―Things to do‖ webpage, Uttarakhand

Tourism Website)

o Angling. However, the act of catching fish using a rod and line in

India and many other countries is seen mainly seen as a method of

food capture rather than a genuine recreation. Consequently

angling in India as a sport is a relatively new phenomenon. The

methods used to catch fish are many and success is dependent on

a large number of variables. Many of these variables are not

controllable (weather, water quality etc.) and as such, perception

of success can also be variable. (Uttarakhand Tourism Development

Master Plan, UNWTO, 2008)

As per ―Ecotourism in Uttarakhand‖ issued by Ecotourism Division,

under Ecotourism Menu on Forest Department‘s website, ―To

promote angling, areas replete with Mahaseer rivers like

Ramganga, Kosi, Ganga, Kali, Nayar, Tons have been identified.

Sites on Ramganga (Kalagarh Forest Division) and Ganga attract a

large number of anglers. Pancheswar located at the confluence of

Saryu and Kali river has camping sites and is 40 km from Lohaghat.

It is an ideal site for Mahaseer angling. Home Stays at nearby

villages under community-based tourism are also on offer. Permits

for angling are issued by the respective Divisional Forest Officer.



Angling tourism has been promoted for the conservation of

Mahaseer a popular game fish in the Mountain Rivers.‖

Angling as an activity shall be undertaken as permitted, e.g. within

a prescribed period/season; between sunrise and sunset; on catch

and release basis only; with expectation from anglers and their

gillies to observe, complete silence, minimum movement, proper

dress, proper cover and offer least disturbance to the environment;

the catch shall always be handled in wet sack slings that have

been properly cleaned prior to use and the fish catch shall be

returned to the water without any damage or shock; angling

without permit (prescribing fishing beats) is prohibited and shall not

be permitted in National Parks and Sanctuaries; no person shall fish

except by rod and line; etc. (Angling Rules for Mahaseer

Conservation in Ram Ganga river through P.P.P. Mode in

Uttarakhand, CWLW, Forest Department, GoUK)



includes ―Angling (Fish Hunt)‖ as part of Entertainment-related Unit


o Bird Watching. Bird watching or birding is the observation of birds as

a recreational activity. It can be done with the naked eye, through

a visual enhancement device like binoculars and telescopes, or by

listening for bird sounds. Bird watching often involves a significant

auditory component, as many bird species are more easily

detected and identified by ear than by eye. Most bird watchers

pursue this activity for recreational or social reasons,

unlike ornithologists, who engage in the study of birds using formal

scientific methods. (Wikipedia)

Bird watchers have been identified as comprising the largest group

of nature-based tourists in the world. Even in more remote areas,

the impact of bird-watching can generate important revenues for

local economies. Potential revenue from this ecotourism activity

does not emanate purely from the sighting of birds, but from a

whole range of ancillary facilities and services that can be

developed around bird watching. As a segment of ecotourism, bird

watching has especially great significance in regions of the world

that have a rich variety of birds, including exotic or endangered

species. Uttarakhand is one such region as it has both a wide range

of native and migratory birds, including many exotic species that

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bird

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Binoculars

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Telescopes

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ornithology



migrate from Siberia to spend the winter months south of the

Himalayas. Uttarakhand has four biomes: Eurasian High Montane;

Sino-Himalayan Temperate Forest; Sino-Himalayan Subtropical

Forests; and Indo-Malayan Tropical Dry Zone. Over 632 species of

birds have been recorded in the state of which the Oriental White-

backed and Slender-billed vultures are critically endangered.

Furthermore, 13 species are vulnerable and 15 are near threatened.

The Cheer Pheasant and the Pallas Fish Eagle (both vulnerable) and

another critically endangered bird, the Himalayan Quail, are

important endemic species. The rarity of the avifauna, which would

attract serious bird watchers, is made more important by the

presence of 11 restricted range species. There are fourteen

Important Bird Areas (IBAs) in Uttarakhand. Six of these lie in the

national parks of the State and therefore benefit from the

protection afforded to these national parks or sanctuaries by the

Forest Department. Three sites do not receive such protection (Asan

Barrage, New Forest Campus and Upper Pindar Catchment) as

these are outside the national parks and sanctuaries. (Uttarakhand




includes ―Bird Watching‖ as part of Adventure Tourism-related Unit


o Boat Paddling. Paddling with regard to watercraft is the act of

manually propelling a boat using a paddle. The paddle, which

consists of one or two blades joined to a shaft, is also used to steer

the vessel. The paddle is not connected to the boat (unlike

in rowing where the oar is connected to the boat). (Wikipedia)

As per Uttarakhand Tourism Development Master Plan, UNWTO,

2008, ―Under the general term of boating there will be many

different forms of propelling a vehicle and many different types of

boat themselves. There will also be different levels of

competitiveness with each type of boating. For example Rowing

Boat Racing, by its very nature, is competitive, (unless training),

whereas the provision of simple boats for recreational boating does

not necessarily involve competition. For simplicity we have divided

the general category of boating into the following sub-categories:

In view of the ‗environmentally friendly‘ image that the State should

portray, Jet Skiing, Knee/wake and ski-boarding has not been

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Watercraft

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Paddle

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Watercraft_rowing

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Oar



included at this stage due to the noise and environmental pollution

factor: Rowing, Sailing, Cruising, Kayaking, and Canoeing.‖



includes ―Boating (Water Sports)‖ as part of Adventure Tourism-

related Unit to be registered under the said Regulations.

o Bungee Jumping. It is an activity that involves jumping from a tall

structure while connected to a large elastic cord. The tall structure is

usually a fixed object, such as a building, bridge or crane; but it is

also possible to jump from a movable object, such as a hot-air-

balloon or helicopter, that has the ability to hover above the

ground. The thrill comes from the free-falling and the rebound.

When the person jumps, the cord stretches and the jumper flies

upwards again as the cord recoils, and continues to oscillate up

and down until all the kinetic energy is dissipated. (Wikipedia)



includes ―Bungee Jumping‖ as part of Adventure Tourism-related


o Burma Bridge. A hanging bridge often part of a Ropes Course that

consists of a single wire or rope to walk on and two others to hold

on to [Wikipedia]. The name ‗Burma Bridge‘ is said to be acquired

from hanging bridges used extensively in Burma during World War II

to cross numerous rivers. The Burma rope bridge is reported as a

classic rope walking activity for the thrill seekers. This classic 3-rope

construction has reportedly a 3/4" foot line, 5/8" hand lines and 3/8"

connecting struts. The bridge in the Burma Bridge is represented by

three parallel cables/ropes set in a triangular fashion–bottom foot

cable with two hand lines about four feet above that foot cable. As

with any high traversing element, an overhead belay cable

parallels the lower cables. This is said to be one of the easiest high

elements to complete, thus providing a good choice for those

feeling highly challenged just by being at elevation. It is said to be a

confidence building exercise which calls for concentration.

As per ―Experience village life: Community-based Tourism (CBT)‖

issued by Ecotourism Division, under Ecotourism Menu on Forest

Department‘s website, ―Jungle Adventure group (Rishikesh), Shivpuri

undertakes activities of rock climbing, rappelling, trekking and

Burma Bridge experience. The group is formed by the local

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bungee_cord

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bridge

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hot_air_balloon


http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Helicopter

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hover_(helicopter)

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Adrenaline_rush

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Free-fall

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bungee_cord

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ropes_course



communities who have received training from the National Institute

of Mountaineering, Uttarkashi.‖

o Camping. Camping is possibly the finest way to enjoy the serenity of

nature with the company of one‘s friends and family. It is the best

mode to spend time in the lap of nature and forget the mundane

affairs of an otherwise hectic life. It also provides an opportunity to

spend quality time with the loved ones and understand them

better. The Himalayan region in Uttarakhand State in India is one

such place that offers fantastic range of camping. Whether it is

wildlife camping or normal camping, Indian topography offers

everything for the adventure enthusiasts. It can prove to be very

beneficial for the growing and budding mind of the children.

Camping is a recreational activity and there is no age limit. Anyone

who likes to explore nature can take up this camping expedition.

Camping in forest areas may require obtaining due prior permits,

and following the applicable regulations of the Forest Department.



includes ―Tent Colony/Nature Camp‖ as part of Accommodation-


o Canoeing and Kayaking. A canoe can be defined as a relatively

small, human powered boat propelled by one or more people,

sitting or kneeling, using single bladed paddles (the major

differentiating feature between kayaking and canoeing). Canoes

are often open at the top and are always pointed at both ends.

Modern canoes are made of fibreglass or aluminium depending on

the nature of the water to be used. Originally they were made from

the hollowed trunk of a tree. Canoes are inherently unstable and it

is important that the paddles person(s) keep a low centre of gravity

to avoid capsizing the vessel. Steering is achieved by using the

paddle on either side of the boat. The tranquil nature of this

recreation attracts a lot of people who are interested in enjoying

passive recreation. A kayak is a light narrow canoe covered at the

top. There are a number of different types of kayak depending on

the use they are put to. Different types of kayak include white water

kayaks, which are extremely manoeuvrable and are designed to

become almost part of the kayaker‘s body. Recreational kayaks

are stable, all-purpose vessels that are easily paddled and are, in

the main used for inland waters especially lakes. More recently ‗sit

on top kayaks‘ have been developed which you, literally, sit on top



of. These can be great fun for beginners. In recent years inflatable

kayaks have been developed but generally the best boats are

made of fibreglass, plastic, wood and in better kayaks, Kevlar. For

large numbers of people their first experience of a water sport will

be in a form of kayak. There are a number of techniques that must

be learnt before approaching competitive kayaking not the least of

which is what happens when the kayak capsizes. This technique of

righting a capsized boat is called an ‗Eskimo Roll‘ and involves

complete immersion under the water. Water sports like canoeing

and kayaking can be included or developed, though only when

the issue of water quality has improved, in viz. Nainital Lake, Saattal

Lake, Naukuchiyatal Lake, Bhimtal Lake, and Khurpatal Lake.

(Uttarakhand Tourism Development Master Plan, UNWTO, 2008)



includes ―Kayaking/Canoeing‖ as part of Adventure Tourism-


Also, for a brief on applicable kayaking regulations refer the

definition sub-section ―River Rafting‖ and for full details refer

―Uttarakhand River Rafting/Kayaking Regulations, 2014‖ issued by

Tourism Department vide No. 160/VI/2013-01(03)/2013 dated 24

January 2014.

o Excursion. A short journey or trip, especially one taken as a leisure

activity. (Oxford Dictionaries Website)

As per ―Things to do‖ webpage, Uttarakhand Tourism Website, the

State offers excursion activities in 11 must visit destinations, and in

another 34 popular destinations.

o Flying Fox. A flying fox is a small cable car, often propelled

by gravity, and used as an item of children's play equipment and

more rarely for other purposes. The term ‗flying fox‘ is Australian

English and New Zealand English. In other countries, it is also known

as a ‗zip-line or zip-wire.‘ The toy should not be confused with

a ‗foxtail (or fox tail),‘ which is a children's toy consisting of a ball

with a rope attached to it, allowing it to be thrown like a sling.

(Wikipedia)



includes ―Flying Fox‖ as part of Adventure Tourism-related Unit to be


http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Aerial_lift

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Gravity

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Child

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Play_(activity)

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Australian_English

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Australian_English

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/New_Zealand_English

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Zip-line

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Foxtail

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sling_(weapon)



o Golf. Golf is a precision club and ball sport in which competing

players (or golfers) use many types of clubs to hit balls into a series

of holes on a course using the fewest number of strokes. Golf is

defined, in the rules of golf, as "playing a ball with a club from the

teeing ground into the hole by a stroke or successive strokes in

accordance with the Rules." It is one of the few ball games that do

not require a standardized playing area. Instead, the game is

played on a course, in general consisting of an arranged

progression of either 9 or 18 holes. Each hole on the course must

contain a tee box to start from, and a putting green containing the

actual hole. There are various other standardized forms of terrain in

between, such as the fairway, rough, and hazards, but each hole

on a course, and indeed among virtually all courses, is unique in its

specific layout and arrangement. Golf competition is generally

played for the lowest number of strokes by an individual, known

simply as stroke play, or the lowest score on the most individual

holes during a complete round by an individual or team, known

as match play. Stroke play is the most commonly seen format at

virtually all levels of play. (Wikipedia)

Golf has been identified as a potential market for the future. There

are a few golf courses in Uttarakhand, notably in Nainital,

Narendranagar, Pithoragarh, and Ranikhet. (Uttarakhand Tourism




includes ―Golf Course‖ as part of Entertainment-related Unit to be


o Horse Riding. Equestrianism more often known as riding, horseback

riding (American English) or horse riding (British English) referring to

the skill of riding, driving, steeplechasing or vaulting with horses. This

broad description includes the use of horses for practical working

purposes, transportation, recreational activities, artistic or cultural

exercises, and competitive sport. (Wikipedia)


2008 locations for horse riding activity interest are at Mussoorie,

Dhanaulti, Ranikhet, Askot, Ghangharia (as a base for additional

activities in nearby mountains other than the primary activity of trek

in two-different directions to Valley of Flowers National Park and Shri

Hemkunt Sahib), and Jageshwar.

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sport

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Lists_of_golfers

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Golf_club

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Golf_ball

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Golf_course

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Rules_of_golf

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ball_game

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Stroke_play

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Match_play

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Horse

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Working_animal

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Animals_in_sport



o Hot Air Ballooning. It is the activity of flying hot air balloons.

Attractive aspects of ballooning include the exceptional quiet

(except when the propane burners are firing), the lack of a feeling

of movement, and the bird's-eye view. Since the balloon moves

with the direction of the winds, the passengers feel absolutely no

wind, except for brief periods during the flight when the balloon

climbs or descends into air currents of different direction or speed.

(Wikipedia)



includes ―Hot Air Ballooning‖ as part of Adventure Tourism-related


o Ice Skating. It is moving on ice by using ice skates. It can be done

for a variety of reasons, including exercise, leisure, traveling, and

various sports. Ice skating occurs both on specially

prepared indoor and outdoor tracks, as well as on naturally

occurring bodies of frozen water, such as lakes and rivers.

(Wikipedia)



includes ―Ice Skating‖ as part of Adventure Tourism-related Unit to

be registered under the said Regulations. Currently, it is reported

that ice skating activity can be undertaken at viz. Maharana Pratap

Sports Stadium‘s Ice Skating Rink (indoor) at Dehradun / Auli Ski

Resort Complex.

o Mountain Biking. It is the sport of riding bicycles off-road, often over

rough terrain, using specially designed mountain bikes. Mountain

bikes share similarities with other bikes, but incorporate features

designed to enhance durability and performance in rough terrain.

Mountain biking can generally be broken down into multiple

categories: cross country (XC), trail riding, all mountain, downhill,

freeride, slopestyle, dirt jumping, and trials. The vast majority of

mountain biking falls into the recreational XC, Trail Riding and

Enduro categories. This individual sport requires endurance, core

strength and balance, bike handling skills, and self-reliance.

(Wikipedia)

Mountain biking is all about speed, control and thrill and is one of

the latest ways of exploring and discovering new vistas of the

Himalayan landscape. The rugged terrain and steep slopes, though


http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Balloon_(aircraft)

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ice

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ice_skate

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ice_rink

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Frozen_water

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sport

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bicycle

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mountain_bikes

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cross-country_cycling

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cross-country_cycling

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Freeride

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bike_trials_riding



risky at times, provide great mountain biking experience in

Uttarakhand. The cycle trails in this region are best traversed

between October and December. In India, this sport is still in its

nascent stage, surviving on some financial support from the

government. Blessed with rare and diverse flora and fauna,

Uttarakhand is an ideal place to develop adventure sports and

eco-tourism. After paragliding, mountain biking is the second most

popular adventure sport in the state. The sport attracts many

national and international tourists and adventure sports enthusiasts,

which in turn boosts tourism activities in the state. Mountain biking

and cycling can be great ways to explore the towns and villages

that fringe the foothills of the Himalayas. It also gives tourists the

opportunity to understand the challenges that mountains have in

store for them. (―Adventure/Mountain-Biking‖ webpage,




includes ―Mountain Biking‖ as part of Adventure Tourism-related Unit


o Motor Car/Motor Cycle Rally. Rallying, also known as rally racing is a

form of auto racing that takes place on public or private roads with

modified production or specially built road-legal cars. This

motorsport is distinguished by running not on a circuit, but instead in

a point-to-point format in which participants and their co-drivers

drive between set control points (special stages), leaving at regular

intervals from one or more start points. Rallies may be won by pure

speed within the stages or alternatively by driving to a

predetermined ideal journey time within the stages. There are two

main forms: stage rallies and road rallies. Since the 1960s, stage

rallies have been the professional branch of the sport. They are

based on straightforward speed over stretches of road closed to

other traffic. These may vary from asphalt mountain passes to rough

forest tracks, from ice and snow to desert sand, each chosen to

provide an enjoyable challenge for the crew and a test of the car's

performance and reliability. The entertaining and unpredictable

nature of the stages, and the fact that the vehicles are in some

cases closely related to road cars, means that the bigger events

draw massive spectator interest. Road rallies are the original form,

held on highways open to normal traffic, where the emphasis is not

on outright speed but on accurate timekeeping and navigation

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Auto_racing

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Race_track

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Special_stage_(rallying)

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Road_rally



and on vehicle reliability, often on difficult roads and over long

distances. They are now primarily amateur events. There are several

types of road rallies testing accuracy, navigation or problem

solving. (Wikipedia)



includes ―Motor Car/Motor Cycle Rally‖ as part of Adventure

Tourism-related Unit to be registered under the said Regulations.

o Mountaineering. The State of Uttarakhand wears a mantle of

mountain ranges in the Himalayan region which endow it with a

breath-taking natural beauty and sheer range of diversity, and 83

peaks in Uttarakhand are open to mountaineers. While

mountaineering is emergency as one of the popular adventure

sports activity in Uttarakhand, it offers a major challenge to ensure

a balance between allowing mountaineering activities in such a

geographical area with the need to preserve fragile Himalayan

environment for posterity, and the need of mountaineering activity

to be promoted in a regulated manner with adequate

environmental safeguards so that the world will have sustained

tourism interest in high mountain areas of Uttarakhand within

permissible limits. (Guidelines for mountaineering expeditions in

Uttaranchal, CWLW, Forest Department, GoUK, 2004, and

Guidelines for Mountaineering Expeditions in Uttarakhand, UTDB,

2007)



includes ―Mountaineering‖ as part of Adventure Tourism-related Unit


o Nature Walk. A walk in nature can give you the small dose of

wilderness you need to refresh your spirit. Whether you see nature

walks as a time for introspection or a chance to learn about wildlife,

make the most of your stroll into wilderness. The best way to enjoy

nature walks is to take your time. An ideal pace lets you appreciate

nature‘s tranquility and subtle gifts while still getting some exercise.

Walking in the woods can actually increase your ability to focus

and concentrate. (The Wilderness Society, Washington DC, USA,

http://wilderness.org/)


2008, several destinations and their environs are ideal for nature



walks, viz. Chaukori, Gwaldam, Dhanaulti, Ranikhet, Ghangharia,

Pokhri, Chakrata, Barsu & Raithal villages, and New Tehri/Tehri Lake.

o Paragliding. It is a recreational and competitive flying sport, which is

recently getting much popular. A foot-launched aircraft, a

paraglide falls in the category of un-powered fixed-wing aircraft. All

that makes up the paraglide is an arc of nylon cloth shaped

aerodynamically. The pilot has to sit in a harness suspended below

a fabric wing. The suspension lines and air pressure entering the

vents in front of the wing help form its shape. The pilot after going

through pre-flight checks begins running down a slope. The cloth

canopy gets inflated and comes overhead and in few more steps

the pilot becomes air borne. The glider is controlled by

manipulating the control lines.

Paragliding in Uttarakhand can be done at Ranikhet, Mukteshwar,

and Naukuchiayatal in Kumaon region. Some other ideal gliding

places are Dayara and Bedini Bugyal (Uttarkashi-Gangotri road),

Pratap Nagar, and Dhanaulti Ridge.

Paragliding is like any other adventure sport where you feel the rush

of adrenalin and the element of risk is not any more than probably

swimming. A pilot attitude and good judgmental skill are of

paramount importance to ensure safety. Though the equipment is

built so that it will almost never fail, still, a great amount of caution

needs to be observed as you are thousands of feet in the air and a

minor glitch can result in terrible consequences.

The essential equipment consists of a glider and a harness that

attaches the paraglider firmly and safely to the pilot. Additionally

you will require a helmet specially made for gliding (light and

sturdy), shoes & gloves, a reserve parachute and a variometer (may

or may not contain a GPS) to gauge the ascent or descent of the

glider. (―Adventure/Paragliding‖ webpage, Uttarakhand Tourism

Website)



includes ―Paragliding‖ as part of Adventure Tourism-related Unit to

be registered under the said Regulations.

o Parasailing. Also known as parascending or parakiting, parasailing is

a recreational kiting activity where a person is towed behind a

vehicle (usually a boat) while attached to a specially designed

canopy wing that reminds one of a parachute, known as a parasail

http://uttarakhandtourism.gov.in/mukteshwar

http://uttarakhandtourism.gov.in/naukuchiatal

http://uttarakhandtourism.gov.in/dhanaulti

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Kite_types

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Parachute

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Parasail



wing. The manned kite's moving anchor may be a car, truck, or

boat. The harness attaches the pilot to the parasail, which is

connected to the boat, or land vehicle, by the tow rope. The

vehicle then drives off, carrying the parascender (or wing) and

person into the air. The parascender has little or no control over the

parachute. The activity is primarily a fun ride, not to be confused

with the sport of paragliding. (Wikipedia)



includes ―Parasailing‖ as part of Adventure Tourism-related Unit to


o Pilgrimage. Home to a myriad holy shrines, the name Uttarakhand is

aptly associated with Devbhumi i.e. Land of Gods. Pilgrims from far

and wide visit this Himalayan state, seeking salvation and self-

purgation. Two of the most revered rivers of the country, namely

Ganga and Yamuna originate from Gaumukh (Gangotri) and

Yamunotri. The most esteemed pilgrimage circuit of the country

incorporates Shri Badrinath and Shri Kedarnath, the holy seats of

Lord Vishnu and Lord Shiva respectively. Another prominent pilgrim-

destination in Uttarakhand is the holy town of Haridwar, where the

prestigious Kumbh Mela is held every twelve years, attracting

millions of devout people from all over the world. Situated close to

Haridwar, on the banks of the divine Ganga is Rishikesh, a major

centre for Yoga and Meditation – people from several parts of the

world have been visiting this town for decades.

There are countless other temples and shrines in the state, homes to

local deities and various manifestations of Lord Shiva and Durga. It is

not as though Uttarakhand is a pilgrimage destination exclusively for

Hindus–there are several important shrines related to other religions

too, keeping in line with the secular traditions of our country. These

include Hemkunt Sahib, Nanak Matta Sahib, Meetha-Reetha Sahib,

Piran Kaliyar Sharif near Roorkee, the Mind Rolling Monastery and its

Buddha Stupa in Dehradun. (―Things to do‖ webpage, Uttarakhand

Tourism Website)

Many important religious yatras, of which Nanda Devi Raj Jat and

Kailash Mansarovar Yatra are the most popular, also take place in

Uttarakhand. (Tourism Policy of State of Uttarakhand, UTDB, 2007)

o River Rafting. Rafting or white water rafting is the recreational

outdoor activity of using an inflatable raft to navigate river or other

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Manned_kite

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Paragliding



bodies of water. This is often done on white water or different

degrees of rough water, in order to thrill and excite the raft

passengers. The development of this activity as a leisure sport has

become popular since the mid-1970s, evolving from individuals

paddling 10 feet (3.0 m) rafts with double-bladed paddles to multi-

person rafts propelled by single-bladed paddles and steered by a

tour guide at the stern. It is considered an extreme sport, and can

be fatal. Otherwise known as the International Scale of River

Difficulty (as created by American Whitewater Association for the

purpose of evaluating rivers throughout the world), below are the six

grades of difficulty in white water rafting. They range from simple to

very dangerous and potential death or serious injuries (Wikipedia,

and also as per Uttarakhand River Rafting/Kayaking Regulations,

2014 under Chapter-10):

Grade 1: Very small rough areas, might require slight manoeuvring.

(Skill level: very basic)

Grade 2: Some rough water, maybe some rocks, might require

some manoeuvring. (Skill level: basic paddling skill)

Grade 3: Whitewater, small waves, maybe a small drop, but no

considerable danger. May require significant manoeuvring.

Grade 4: Whitewater, medium waves, maybe rocks, maybe a

considerable drop, sharp manoeuvres may be needed.

Grade 5: Whitewater, large waves, large volume, possibility of large

rocks and hazards, possibility of a large drop, requires precise

manoeuvring.

Grade 6: Class 6 rapids are considered to be so dangerous that

they are effectively unnavigable on a reliably safe basis. Rafters

can expect to encounter substantial whitewater, huge waves, huge

rocks and hazards, and/or substantial drops that will impart severe

impacts beyond the structural capacities and impact ratings of

almost all rafting equipment. Traversing a Class 6 rapid has a

dramatically increased likelihood of ending in serious injury or death

compared to lesser classes.

Rafting is the most popular adventure sport in Uttarakhand. Swift-

moving rivers offer a thrilling experience for white water rafters.

These rivers flow through deep forests, rocky terrains, mountains and

sometimes even along snowy slopes. Stretches along Alaknanda,

Dhauliganga and Kali rivers have several challenging rapids. One

can opt for a simple half-day tour or a four to five-day experience

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/White_water

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Extreme_sport



of rafting. Do make sure you have an experienced guide's services.

Choose between simple or expert levels - whether you choose to

negotiate fast and furious river currents or to gently float along the

hillside. The Alaknanda and Bhagirathi are the main tributaries of

the Ganga that confluence at Devprayag. Their waters are of

Grade 4 to 5. Mori is where you go tossing in the turbulent Tons River.

The power trip continues till Khunigad from where you can drive

back to Mori for campfire and dinner. You can also raft from Barkot

to Lakhamandal and Damta to Yamuna Bridge, near Mussoorie.

Over the years, many rafting camps have come up in these

locations. The two stretches are absolutely safe for beginners.

Rafting courses are conducted by trained and qualified river guides

of the Garhwal Mandal Vikas Nigam (GMVN). The courses includes,

rafting, river-guide services, boarding and lodging. Rafting trips are

also organized by privately-run adventure clubs. Most camps are

usually located between Shivpuri and Kaudiyala, upstream from

Rishikesh on the way to Devprayag during the season. Riding with

life-jacket on is a must for safety when rafting (―Adventure/Rafting‖

webpage, Uttarakhand Tourism Website)

As per Uttarakhand River Rafting/Kayaking Regulation, 2014 issued

by UTDB, the rafting/kayaking season permitted is as follows: (a)

Rivers Ganga, Alaknanda, and Kali – 15th September to 15th June;

(b) River Yamuna – 15th September to 30th November and 01st

April to 15th June; (c) Tons/Gori/Sarayu/Kosi/Pindar rivers – 15th

September to 15th June; (d) Ramganga East & West rivers – 15th

September to 30th November; and (e) or as per the prescribed

period issued from time to time by the UTDB based on the

availability of water flow in any river. As per these regulations a

Raft/Kayak means such a structure that floats in river, and is used

like a boat to travel downstream in a river. Also, the off-season refers

to a period in which during monsoon in all rivers, all rafting/kayaking

activities will be fully prohibited. River rafting/kayaking activities

would be undertaken only in daytime from sunrise to sunset

(―Permission for River Rafting in the Forests of Hill Areas‖ issued by

Forest Section-2, Government of Uttar Pradesh vide letter dated 25

September 1999 specifies the time of 6.00 pm after which no raft

would be operated in the river, no lighting would be permissible

after 9.00 pm in the night in the temporary camps established for

supporting river rafting purposes, and no camp fire permitted

beyond 11.00 pm in the night). Tourists with age less than 14 years

and more than 60 years will not be permitted to undertake river



rafting; and tourists with age less than 18 years and more than 50

years will not be permitted to undertake kayaking. During river

rafting/kayaking activity, consumption of alcohol/smoking is not

permitted. Each operator/river guide shall ensure that all

rafting/kayaking participants including guide are wearing life jacket

of appropriate size and helmet mandatorily during the

rafting/kayaking operations.



includes ―River Rafting‖ as part of Adventure Tourism-related Unit to


o Rock Climbing and Abseiling. Rock climbing is an activity in which

participants climb up, down or across natural rock formations or

artificial rock walls. The goal is to reach the summit of a formation or

the endpoint of a usually pre-defined route without falling. To

successfully complete a climb, one must return to the base of the

route safely. Due to the length and extended endurance required,

accidents are more likely to happen on descent than ascent,

especially on the larger multiple pitches (Class III-IV and/or multi-

day grades IV-VI climbs). Rock climbing competitions have the

objectives of either completing the route in the quickest possible

time or attaining the farthest point on an increasingly difficult

route. Rock climbing is generally differentiated by its sustained use

of hands to support the climber's weight as well as to provide

balance. Rock climbing is a physically and mentally demanding

sport, one that often tests a climber's strength, endurance, agility

and balance along with mental control. It can be a dangerous

sport and knowledge of proper climbing techniques and usage of

specialised climbing equipment is crucial for the safe completion of

routes. Because of the wide range and variety of rock formations

around the world, rock climbing has been separated into several

different styles and sub-disciplines. Upon completion of a route,

climbers can walk back down if an alternate descent path exists,

or rappel (abseil) down with the rope. Abseiling/rappelling is the

controlled descent down a rock face using a rope. Climbers use this

technique when a cliff or slope is too steep and/or dangerous to

descend without protection. Many climbers use this technique to

protect established anchors from damage. (Wikipedia)

Rock climbing and artificial wall climbing are becoming

increasingly popular in Uttarakhand and courses and competitions

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Climbing

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Rock_(geology)

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Climbing_wall

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Summit_(topography)

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Pitch_(ascent/descent)

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Climbing_competitions

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Climbing_technique

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Climbing_equipment

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Abseiling

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Climbing

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Anchor_(climbing)



are arranged on a regular basis by the Nehru Institute of

Mountaineering, the Himalayan Adventure Institute at Kempty and

the OSD, Adventure Sports in Almora. Rock climbing sites exist at

Burans Khanda; George Everest Estate at Mussoorie; Auli; Singtali at

Tehri and Khirsu in Garwhal and Barapathar at Nainital; Munsyari;

Sigri; Phal Seema and Kasar Devi at Almora; Ranikhet and

Bageshwar in Kumaon. (Uttarakhand Tourism Development Master

Plan, UNWTO, 2008)



includes ―Rock/Artificial Wall Climbing‖ as part of Adventure


o Ropeways/Cable Cars. A cable car is any of a variety of

transportation systems relying on cables to pull vehicles along or

lower them at a steady rate. The terminology also refers to the

vehicles on these systems. The cable car vehicles are motor-less

and engine-less pulled by cable that is rotated by motor off-board.

They are advantageous for transit of mountains, valleys, steep

slopes and bodies of water. (Wikipedia)


2008, there are several prospective destinations for installation of

ropeways. Also, promotional incentives for installation of ropeway

systems have been made. The only ski lifts in Uttarakhand are at

Auli.



includes ―Ropeways‖ as part of Entertainment-related Unit to be


o Rowing. Rowing can be loosely described as the propulsion of

specially designed boats by the provision of oars. The boats (or

shells) are basically of two types and reflect the two forms of

rowing, sweep rowing and sculling. In sweep rowing each rower

handles a single oar, whereas in sculling each rower uses two oars.

The word ‗shell‘ is used for each boat, as these vessels are

notoriously thin (about 6mm). Most shells today are made of

composite materials such as carbon fibre, fibreglass or Kevlar. Few

companies now manufacture the traditional wooden shells. Within

sweep rowing categories there are further sub-divisions to take

account of the number of rowers involved e.g. coxed pairs (two

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wire_rope



rowers with a coxswain who steers the boat), coxless fours, up to the

coxed eights (which can involve shells of up to 18.5 m long). Sculling

rarely uses the services of a Cox. Steering is generally achieved by

exerting more pressure on one side of the boat that the other. As

with sweep rowing, sculling has a number of different categories,

mostly involving different numbers of rowers. Other designations are

used to reflect the weight of the rowers. The minimum stretch of

water required for competitive racing is 800 m long by 30 m wide.

Major competitions require a straight stretch of water of 2000 m and

a width of 90 m with a minimum depth of 3.5 m. Water sports like

rowing can be included or developed, though only when the issue

of water quality has improved, in viz. Nainital Lake and

Naukuchiyatal Lake. (Uttarakhand Tourism Development Master

Plan, UNWTO, 2008)

o Sailing. Sailing is the propulsion of boats by use of a sail to harness

the force of the wind. There are basically seven different types of

sailing boats, which are differentiated by their sail pattern: (i) Sloop –

one mast, two sails, (ii) Catboat – one mast, one sail, (iii) Sunfish –

one mast, lateen type sail, (iv) Catamaran – two hulls, (v) Schooner

– two masts, (vi) Ketch – two masts, mizzenmast, three or four sails,

and (vii) Yawl – two masts, similar to ketch. Within each type of

sailing vessel there are a number of different classes, all of which

display varying degrees of manoeuvrability, speed and ease of use.

For most recreational sailing the most commonly used sailing boats

are dinghies and within the dingy class there are a number of

subdivisions which emphasise the speed, stability and handling

aspects of sailing. Dinghy sailing is the activity of sailing small boats

on much smaller lakes, by using the sails, adjustable centreboard

and rudder. It also involves adjusting the trim and balance of the

sails by changing the body position of the crew (which can be

single or many). Sailing on inland waters has a number of

advantages over coastal sailing, most notably the safety aspects

and the lack of tide to take into account. Requirements for

effective sailing include a minimum depth of 1.5 metres, and

because of the distances that can be achieved in a relatively short

time, this activity requires large open expanses of water with a

minimum of 50 hectares being the norm. For recreational (non-

competitive sailing) a boat density of 3 – 6 boats per hectare is

acceptable, for sailing boat racing, no more than 3 per acre is

suggested. Firm slipways and adequate road access for towing

portable sailing dinghies (e.g. ―Toppers‖) are also a pre-requisite if



touring boats are to be encouraged. Most areas that encourage

sailing also have some form of marina type facilities with a

clubhouse, changing rooms and toilet facilities. Water sports like

sailing can be included or developed, though only when the issue

of water quality has improved, viz. Lake Tehri (with both larger and

smaller vessels), Saattal Lake (with smaller vessels), Naukuchiyatal

Lake (with smaller vessels), and Bhimtal Lake (with smaller vessels).




includes ―Sailing‖ as part of Adventure Tourism-related Unit to be


o Sightseeing. The activity of visiting places of interest in a particular

location. (Oxford Dictionaries Website)

Under the ―Sight Seeing‖ menu of the Uttarakhand Tourism Website,

six destinations are highlighted for sightseeing viz. Almora (cultural

capital of Kumaon region), Nainital (Lake District of India), Mussoorie

(Queen of the Hills), Kausani (Window to the snow-crested Trishul,

Nanda Devi, Nandakot and Panchchuli peaks), Haridwar (Gateway

to the four pilgrimages of Uttarakhand), and Auli (Ski resorts and

stunning natural vistas).

o Skiing. It is a recreational activity and competitive sport in which the

participant attaches skis to boots or shoes on the feet and uses

them to travel on top of snow. Alpine skiing, also called downhill

skiing, typically takes place at a ski resort or dry slope. It originated

in the European Alps, and is characterized by fixed-heel bindings

that attach at both the toe and the heel of the skier's boot. Sub-

genres of alpine skiing include: Freestyle, Snowboarding, and

competitive classes include–slalom, giant slalom, Super-G, downhill,

and disabled skiing. (Wikipedia)

It wouldn‘t be wrong to call Auli the Ski capital of India. Located at

2,500 to 3,050 meters, in Chamoli District of Uttarakhand, the Auli Ski

Resort is close to the famous religious shrine of Badrinath. The month

of December heralds the beginning of the skiing season, which

bears witness to the commencement of several ski festivals, along

with the National Skiing Championships. The snowy excitement goes

on all the way till March. Run and maintained by the Garhwal

Mandal Vikas Nigam, the resort provides skiers with necessary

equipment and all state-of-the-art facilities. Facilities of chair lift and

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Snow

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ski_resort

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Artificial_ski_slopes

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Alps

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Alpine_skiing

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Freestyle_skiing

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Snowboarding

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Slalom_skiing

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Giant_slalom

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Super-G

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Downhill

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Disabled_skiing



a ski lift are available for skiers with the objective of conserving their

time and labour. Auli also hosts formally winter sports at different

levels.

Snow-covered slopes aren‘t just to be admired, but to be enjoyed.

Snow skiing has gained popularity as an alternative sport in the

winter months. At an elevation of 2,915 - 3,049 meters above MSL

with five kilometers expanse of snow, Auli is offers perfect grounds

for beginners and seasoned skiers alike. Coniferous and oak forests

line the slopes. The peaks of Nanda Devi, Kamet, Mana Parvat and

Dunagiri can be seen from the location. Its importance as a venue

of adventure sports lies in its natural advantages enhanced by

state-of-the-art facilities. The adventurous skier can go for cross

country runs covering 10 - 20 kilometers. For the less adventurous, ski

touring the glaciers is another enjoyable option.

Besides Auli, other ski spots include Dayara Bugyal, Munsyari and

Mundali. Mundali is situated in Dehradun, 129 kilometres from the

main Dehradun town. Mundali‘s enormous skiing rings offer

incredible sights of the Himalayan slopes. (―Adventure/Skiing‖




includes ―Snow Skiing‖ as part of Adventure Tourism-related Unit to


o Slalom Kayaking. Whitewater slalom (canoe/kayak slalom since

November 2008) is a competitive sport where the aim is to navigate

a decked canoe or kayak through a course of hanging gates

on river rapids in the fastest time possible. (Wikipedia)

o Son et lumière. A French phrase literally meaning sound and light

show, is a form of night-time entertainment that is usually presented

in an outdoor venue of historic significance. Special lighting effects

are projected onto the façade of a building or ruin and

synchronized with recorded or live narration and music to dramatize

the history of the place. The invention of the concept is credited to

Paul Robert-Houdin, who was the curator of the Château de

Chambord in France, which hosted the world's first son et lumière in

1952. (Wikipedia).

The ―Revised Guidelines of Scheme for Product/Infrastructure

Development for Destinations and Circuits‖ issued by Ministry of

Tourism, GoI, covers provisions for the activity of son et lumière

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Spraydeck

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Canoe

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Kayak

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Whitewater

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Lighting

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ruin

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Narration

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Curator

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ch%C3%A2teau_de_Chambord

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ch%C3%A2teau_de_Chambord



shows. Also, the current applicable ―Uttarakhand Tourism and Travel

Trade Registration Regulations, 2014‖ with effect from 24 January

2014, includes ―son et lumière‖ as part of Entertainment-related Unit


o Spirituality Seeking. Traditionally spirituality has been defined as a

process of personal transformation in accordance with religious

ideals. Since the 19th century spirituality is often separated from

religion, and has become more oriented on subjective experience

and psychological growth. It may refer to almost any kind of

meaningful activity or blissful experience, but without a single,

widely-agreed definition. (Wikipedia)


2008, spirituality and wellness seekers are estimated to make up

about 5% of total domestic tourists, with 80% of all being foreigners.

There is a concentration of ashrams in Rishikesh and Haridwar, but

also around the State in general.

o Swimming. Human swimming is the self-propulsion of a person

through water or another liquid, usually for the purpose of

recreation, sport, exercise, or survival. Locomotion is achieved

through coordinated movement of the limbs, the body, or both.

Humans are able to hold their breath underwater and undertake

rudimentary locomotive swimming within weeks of birth, as an

evolutionary response. Swimming is consistently found to be among

the top recreational activities undertaken by the public. (Wikipedia)

To be able to swim in a natural lake will undoubtedly have its

attractions, but not if swimming requires the navigation of

contaminated water! Water sports like swimming can be included

or developed, though only when the issue of water quality has

improved, in viz. Lake Tehri, Nainital Lake, Saattal Lake,

Naukuchiyatal Lake, Bhimtal Lake, and Khurpatal Lake. People will

always see natural watercourses as ‗free‘ and in the absence of the

supply of any equipment swimming should be allowed to develop

naturally. The sight of large numbers of swimmers in the lakes may

also serve to convince other water sport users that the water quality

is good. The only equipment likely to be needed may be a platform

anchored some 100 m offshore where people can sit and relax

after a swim. (Uttarakhand Tourism Development Master Plan,

UNWTO, 2008)

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Animal_locomotion



o Trekking. A trek is a long, adventurous journey undertaken on foot in

areas where common means of transport are generally not

available. Trekking should not be confused with mountaineering. In

North America the equivalent is backpacking, while New

Zealanders use the word tramping. (Wikipedia)

The hilly terrain of Uttarakhand provides plenty of opportunities for

mountaineering, trekking and rock climbing. The easternmost hill

district Pithoragarh, bordering Nepal and Tibet, often dubbed as

‗Miniature Kashmir,‘ is abundant in natural beauty, making it the

perfect base for many an exciting trek. Several interesting treks

interlace the Gori Valley with some of the well-traversed trekking

routes running along the Munsyari – Martoli – Milam – Ralam Glacier.

These treks are not just walks of adventure, but are also an

interesting way to interact and understand the social and cultural

life of the people in the Chaudans, Byans and Darma Valleys. The

Bageshwar – Sunderdhunga – Pindari – Kafni Glacier trek is another

highly preferred trekking route in the area.

The Garhwal region also offers several thrilling treks, some of them

being the Panch Kedar trek, Kedarnath – Vasuki Tal trek, Gangotri –

Kedarnath trek and the Gangotri – Gaumukh – Nandanvan –

Tapovan trek. The Panch Kedar trek passes through the five Kedars

represented by Kedarnath, Madmaheshwar, Tungnath, Kalpeshwar

and Rudranath. The fascinating routes are profusely intermingled

with the widest range of flora and fauna. The Valley of Flowers and

Hemkunt Sahib trek start from Govindghat and lead to Badrinath.

Other treks like the Kalindikhal trek, the Khatling – Sahastrataal –

Masartal trek, Har Ki Dun trek, Rishikesh – Pauri – Binsar trek and

Roopkund trek are equally invigorating for both the eager amateur

and the veteran mountaineer. (―Adventure/Trekking‖ webpage,




includes ―Trekking‖ as part of Adventure Tourism-related Unit to be


o Triathlon. The triathlon was ‗invented‘ in the early 1970‘s by a

University Track Club in the USA as an alternative workout to the

boring and exhausting training schedules that ‗super fit‘ athletes

have to conform to. Originally the three parts to the triathlon were a

10km run, followed, without stopping except to change clothes, by

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Walking

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Transport

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mountaineering



an 8km cycle ride and a 500m swim. It is this last discipline that may

be restricted by the water quality in the lakes. The current official

triathlon schedule is a 1.5 km swim, a 40 km cycle race, followed by

a 10 km run, and is an Olympic sport. A Tehri lake or the Nainital

Lake district triathlon is a possibility though only when the issue of

water quality has improved, especially with the ability to have the

cycling and the running around the fabulous natural sceneries.

Whilst the triathlon, in itself, not a high individual participation sport,

the promotional effects are enormous. (Uttarakhand Tourism


o Water Skiing. Water skiing is a surface water sport in which an

individual is pulled behind a boat or a cable ski installation over

a body of water, skimming the surface on two skis or one (slalom)

ski. The sport requires sufficient area on a smooth stretch of water,

one or two skis, a tow boat with tow rope, three people, and a

personal flotation device. In addition, the skier must have adequate

upper and lower body strength, muscular endurance, and good

balance. Skiing is a fun pastime that allows people of all skill levels

and ages to enjoy. (Wikipedia)


2008, water skiing is one amongst the several water sports activities

offered in Uttarakhand. Also, the current applicable ―Uttarakhand

Tourism and Travel Trade Registration Regulations, 2014‖ with effect

from 24 January 2014, includes ―Water Skiing‖ as part of Adventure


o Wellness. With a long history of Ayurveda, Yoga and Meditation,

Uttarakhand has become an ideal destination to learn, practice

and master these ways of life. The state has lately come to be

known as the Yoga Country on account of the number of ashrams,

health centres, retreats and high-end spas, it is home to. These

institutions have retained the essence of an age-old wisdom of the

land in order to cater to the novel needs of an ever-evolving

society. There are people who come to learn Yoga as a way of life,

and then there are those who come to seek ayurvedic treatment

for a range of their maladies. Whatever the reason, each visitor

invariably finds an apt solution to his problem and goes back with a

sounder mind and healthier body. Also, stress management as well

as preventive and curative therapy for a range of heath disorders

are the most vital factors of contemporary treatments for physical,

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Surface_water_sports

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Boat

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cable_skiing

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Body_of_water

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Personal_flotation_device

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Fun

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Recreation



mental and emotional wellbeing of individuals. (―Things to do‖


o Wildlife. National parks and wildlife sanctuaries are a prime feature

of Uttarakhand. Wildlife lovers, naturalists, eco-tourists and

holidaymakers keep flocking to the region all the year round. The

State is known for its diversified flora and fauna. It is in this region

that travellers get to see some of the most endangered and rarely

seen animal species in the world. Not only for animal lovers but for

bird watching enthusiasts as well, Uttarakhand has a number of

surprises in store to satiate their thirst for wildlife watching. Major

wildlife species to be watched here include the Indian Tiger, deer,

Sloth bear, Black bear, Indian elephant, leopard, Jungle cat, Rhesus

monkey, langur, ghoral (goat antelopes), wild dog, common otter,

porcupine, python, King cobra and a variety of resident and

migratory bird species.

Uttarakhand has 12 National Parks and Wildlife Sanctuaries7

covering 13.8 percent of the total area of the state where you can

capture the indisputable expressions of various animals and birds.

The various Parks and Sanctuaries are located at different altitudes

varying from 800 meters to the high altitude Protected Areas at

5400 meters. Apart from these there are two Conservation

Reserves–The Asan Barrage and Jhilmil Tal Conservation Reserves8,

7 Nandhour Wildlife Sanctuary is the newly declared Wildlife Sanctuary in the State of Uttarakhand. It is the

seventh Wild life Sanctuary in the State and lies in the two districts- Nainital and Champawat. It comprises

269.95 sq.km. areas of Reserve Forests of Haldwani and Champawat forest division. The natural

uniqueness of the area has been recognized since a long time ago. It has captured the imagination of

many with its diverse wildlife and breath-taking landscapes. The most famous of the Nandhour wild

residents are Royal Bengal Tigers and the Asiatic Elephants, but with about 325 species of birds, Nandhour

is one of the richest bird regions of India. [―Protected Area Network webpage on Uttarakhand Forest

Department website that provides the latest list of National Parks, Sanctuaries, Conservation Reserves,

and Biosphere Reserve] 8 Asan Barrage is located at the confluence of River Yamuna and Asan near Dhalipur village. The 444.40 ha

of area has been declared as a Wetland Conservation Reserve. It is an ideal habitat to a large number

of migratory and resident birds. It is marked by presence of Brahminy ducks, Rudely Shel duck, Dabbling

Duck, Diving Duck birds, Herons, Egrets, storks, Ibises, Geese, which can be easily spotted during winter

season (Nov to Feb).

Jhilmil Tal conservation reserve is in 3783.5 ha area in Haridwar forest Division. The swampy habitat due to

the overflow water of river Ganga is an ideal location for swamp deer.

[―Wildlife Ecotourism in Uttarakhand,‖ under Ecotourism Menu on Forest Department‘s website]

Pawalgarh Conservation Reserve in Nainital district is an area of 5824.76 ha of Reserve Forest. The altitude

of the area varies from 300 to 700 meters above MSL. It is located between the Ramnagar-Haldwani

Highway and the natural course of the river Dabka and river Kosi. The Pawalgarh area is the sub-

landscape flanked by River Kosi in the west and River Baur in the east and intersected by River Dabka

which flows east to west in the northern area and then turn south to cut the landscape into two before

disappearing in the tarai area. Though there are many rivers in this landscape, but Kosi is the most

significant among them and also is the only one which is perennial with substantial water. It also has large

swathes of undisturbed forests which have virtually scant habitation. [―Protected Area Network webpage

on Uttarakhand Forest Department website that provides the latest list of National Parks, Sanctuaries,

Conservation Reserves, and Biosphere Reserve]



two World Heritage sites of the Nanda Devi Biosphere reserve and

Valley of Flowers National Park.

The high altitude National Park in Uttarakhand includes the Nanda

Devi National Park and the Valley of Flowers National Park (part of

Nanda Devi Biosphere Reserve-NDBR) which are regarded as

unique creation of nature. They have become popular with trekkers

and mountaineers. Almost 300 species of wild flowers bloom here

and attracts nature lovers, botanists, ecologists, zoologists,

ornithologists and trekkers. Other National Parks and Sanctuaries

include Binog Wildlife Sanctuary near Mussoorie, Govind Pashu

Vihar and National Park, Askot Wildlife Sanctuary, Kedarnath Wildlife

Sanctuary, Sonanadi Wildlife Sanctuary, Binsar Wildlife Sanctuary

near Almora, Gangotri National Park. (―Things to do‖ webpage,


Along with the world-famous Corbett National Park, Uttarakhand

has several other breath-taking designations for Wildlife Tourism.

These include the Rajaji National Park, Govind Pashu Vihar, Asan

Barrage, Chilla, and Spatarishi Ashram, the last four being a delight

for bird watchers. (Tourism Policy of State of Uttarakhand, UTDB,

2007)

Wildlife Safari is an overland journey, usually a trip by tourists to

natural areas/reserves. Traditionally, the trip was a big-game hunt

(e.g. in Africa), but today, safari often refers to trips to observe

and photograph wildlife—or hiking and sight-seeing. (Wikipedia)

The Eco-sensitive active of safari viz. Elephant Safari is permitted in

Corbett National Park from Durgadevi Gate in the North East (the

only entrance that permits elephant safaris). (Uttarakhand Tourism

Development Master Plan, UNWTO, 2008. Also, the current

applicable ―Uttarakhand Tourism and Travel Trade Registration

Regulations, 2014‖ with effect from 24 January 2014, includes

―Wildlife Safari‖ as part of Adventure Tourism-related Unit to be


Regulated tourism in Corbett Tiger Reserve gives visitors a chance to

view wild animals in their natural environment and experience the

beauty of Nature. This is the only way to help people from all walks

of life appreciate the true value of wildlife preservation. [―Tourism‖

section, Park Management & Conservation webpage, Corbett

National Park Website]

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Big_Five_game

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hunting#Safari

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Photograph

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wildlife



o Windsurfing. Windsurfing is a surface water sport originated in 1965

that combines elements of surfing and sailing. It consists of a board

usually 2 to 3 meters long, with a volume of about 60 to 250 liters,

powered by wind on a sail. The rig is connected to the board by

a free-rotating universal joint and consists of a mast, 2-

sided boom and sail. The sail area generally ranges from 2.5 m2 to

12 m2 depending on the conditions, the skill of the sailor and the

type of windsurfing being undertaken. However, starting in the

2000s, wind surfing began experiencing a decline in participation as

many avid windsurfers took up the similar sport of Kitesurfing.

Kitesurfing or kiteboarding is a surface water sport combining

aspects of wakeboarding, windsurfing, paragliding, and gymnastics

into one extreme sport. A kitesurfer or kiteboarder harnesses the

power of the wind with a large controllable power kite to be

propelled across the water on a kiteboard similar to a wakeboard

or a small surfboard, with or without foot-straps or bindings. The

terms kiteboarding and kitesurfing are interchangeable, although

kiteboarding may also refer to kite landboarding or kite

snowboarding. There are different styles of kiteboarding, including

freestyle, freeride, downwinders, speed, course racing, wakestyle,

jumping and wave-riding. (Wikipedia)


2008, water sports like windsurfing (would also include subtle

variations of the sport such as kite-surfing) can be included or

developed, though only when the issue of water quality has

improved, viz. Lake Tehri (including kite-surfing), Naukuchiyatal Lake

(windsurfing), and Bhimtal Lake (windsurfing).

o Yachting. It refers to using water vessels, called yachts, for sporting

purposes. If the vessels are sailboats, it's known as sailing, and if the

vessels are motorboats, it's known as power-boating. A yacht is a

recreational boat or ship. Yachts are different from working ships

mainly by their leisure purpose, and it was not until the rise of the

steamboat and other types of powerboat that sailing vessels in

general came to be perceived as luxury, or recreational vessels.

Yacht lengths generally range from 10 metres (33 feet) up to dozens

of metres (hundreds of feet). (Wikipedia)


2008, the long established Nainital Yacht Club offers smaller sail

boats as yachting service. Also, the current applicable

―Uttarakhand Tourism and Travel Trade Registration Regulations,

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Surface_Water_Sports

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Surfing

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Gimbal

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mast_(sailing)

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Boom_(sailing)

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sail

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Kitesurfing

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Yacht

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sailboat

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sailing_(sport)

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Motorboat

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Powerboating



2014‖ with effect from 24 January 2014, includes ―Yachting (Sail

Boating)‖ as part of Adventure Tourism-related Unit to be registered

under the said Regulations.

Tourism Destination. A local tourism destination is a physical space in

which a tourist spends at least one overnight, It comprises the following:

o many products within the overall destination;

o involves many stakeholders with differing objectives and

requirements;

o is both a physical entity and a socio-cultural one;

o is a mental concept for potential tourists;

o is subject to the influence of current events, natural disasters,

terrorism, health scares etc.;

o is subject to historical, real and fictitious events;

o is evaluated subjectively in terms of what represents value-for-

money e.g. based on reality compared with expectations; and

o differs in size, physical attractions, infrastructure, benefits offered to

visitors and degree of dependence on tourism–in fact no two

tourism destinations can be treated the same, each offering its own

unique and authentic attributes.

Tourism Enterprises. As per Uttaranchal Tourism Development Board

Act, 2001, ―Tourism enterprises means all or any of the following:

(a) Any business which provides national or international carriage for

passengers;

(b) Any business which either wholly or in part, provides or arranges

services for visitor in Uttaranchal by way of transport,

accommodation, tours or guides, whether or not such services are

provided within or outside Uttaranchal;

(c) Any business which either wholly or in part, distributes for the

purpose of trade or retails tourism-related products such as

handicrafts, souvenirs, etc. in the State of Uttaranchal; and

(d) Any other undertaking, including any convention centres,

restaurants, amusement parks, ropeways, exhibitions, shows, fairs,

publicity campaigns or theme parks, etc., intended wholly or in part

for the benefit of or for the purpose of attracting visitors to

Uttaranchal.‖

Tourism Expenditure. It refers to the amount paid for the acquisition of

consumption of goods and services as well as valuables of own use or

to give away for and during tourism trips.

Tourism Industries. The activities that typically produce tourism

characteristic products.



Tourism Product. Can include natural or man-made attractions, hotels,

resorts, restaurants, theatres, activities, festivals and events etc.

Tourism Product Development. A process whereby the assets of a

particular destination are moulded to meet the needs of national and

international visitors.

Tourism Sector. The cluster of production units in different industries that

provide consumption goods and services demanded by visitors.

Tourism Value Chain. Illustrates the many entities directly supplying or

indirectly linked to tourism in each of the three phases of planning,

development and operations & management.

Tourist. A visitor is classified as a tourist if his/her trip includes an

overnight stay.

Tourist/Visitor Experience. The overall impression a visitor attaches to

their encounter with a specific place, event, holiday, or activity.

Tourists Visiting Friends and Relatives. These may primarily not stay in

commercial accommodation. However, there is a substantial market

linked to the well-known schools that Uttarakhand is famous for. It is

reported that parents visit their boarding children up to 10 times during

the year. They tend to stay at good quality hotels and enjoy leisure

pursuits and facilities during their stay. (Uttarakhand Tourism


Tour Operator. Develops, markets and operates group travel programs

that provide a complete travel experience for one price and includes

transportation (airline, rail, motor coach, and/or ship),

accommodation, sightseeing, selected meals and an escort. Tour

operators market directly to the consumer through travel agents and

are beginning to be listed on computerised reservation systems.

Tour Wholesaler. An individual or company that sells tour packages and

tour product to travel agents. Tour wholesalers usually receive a 20%

discount from accommodation, transportation companies and

attractions and pass on a 10% to 15% discount to the retail agent.

Trekking Ecotourists. This segment comprises tourists whose prime

motivation is to experience the mountain environment through trekking.

This is already a well-established product in Uttarakhand but the

combination of ecotourism products with trekking can potentially

increase the size and viability of this market. The market can consist of

budget trekkers as well as higher spending tourists, the latter being

potentially major contributors to conservation initiatives. These types of

tourists are currently dominated by young, fit people although

opportunities for softer activities for older age groups are also an



important segment. (Uttarakhand Tourism Development Master Plan,

UNWTO, 2008)

Visitor. A traveller making a trip to a main destination outside his/her

usual environment, for less than a year, for any main purpose (business,

leisure, or other personal purpose) other than to be employed by a

resident entity in the country or place visited. A visitor is classified as a

tourist if his/her trip includes an overnight stay, or as a same day visitor

otherwise. An international visitor is any person who travels to a country

other than that in which he/she has his/her usual residence but outside

his/her usual environment for a period not exceeding 12 months and

whose main purpose of visit is other than the exercise of an activity

remunerated from within the country visited. Overnight visitors are those

visitors who stay at least one night in a collective or private

accommodation in the place visited. Same-day visitors are those

visitors who do not spend the night in a collective or private

accommodation in the place visited.

Visitor Demand. Understanding visitor demand will provide you with

essential data to plan for future tourism infrastructure needs and

develop destination management strategies. An essential starting point

in understanding the needs of visitors is to have a clear definition of

what is meant by the visitor industry. In general terms the visitor industry

is understood to include international and domestic overnight and day

excursionists. These three categories can be further refined as ……:

International – overnight, day trips; Domestic – overnight, day trips; and

Local – day trips. The visitor demand components helps you to answer

the questions of – who comes, why they come, what services they

utilise, how long they stay, their level of satisfaction with their visit, and

the economic benefit generated.

For tourism planning and provision, especially when peak volumes are

a crucial issue (e.g. for water provision), there is a need to develop

reliable measures of local visitor demand. Until an inventory of

attractions, activities, accommodation and transport has been

completed and matched with an understanding of visitor demand and

satisfaction, destinations will be unsure whether they are meeting visitor

expectations.

Obtaining real micro data for visitor demand on a town‘s infrastructure

such as water consumption, wastewater and solid waste production

can be difficult and costly. The demand is seasonal and depends on

the nature of the activities of the visitor (for example type of

accommodation used). There are certain services that are shared



between visitors and permanent residents; for example restaurants,

cafés and visitor attractions. In such circumstances identifying and

quantifying the sector demands can be complicated. It is

recommended that snapshot studies be used to provide representative

micro-level data. The snapshot study method involves four 1-week

snapshot studies carried out in the town. The purpose is to obtain the

necessary daily data to be able to create a reliable picture of the

demand visitors place on the town‘s water, wastewater and waste

services. (Tourism Planning Toolkit for Local Government, TRREC, New

Zealand, 2006)

Heritage Conservation & Revitalization

Based on an unpublished document prepared by ADB TA as Consultant to

an earlier project viz. ―Implementation Guidelines‖ as Part of DPR for

Conservation and Revitalization of Rambagh Garden (2007-08), Amritsar,

Punjab, the following definitions for heritage conservation & revitalization

integrated with the visitor infrastructure & new developments, building use

& space usage, and museum management and special experiences are

given below:

Adaptation/Adaptive Re-use. Adaptive reuse means adapting a

historic place to requirements of a new sustainable compatible use,

while respecting its significance and historic fabric.

Alteration. Alteration is the work, the objective of which is to change or

improve the function of a place or to modify its appearance.

Authentic Interpretation: Organized information that reflects a region‘s

or local heritage through an accurate, objective, and culturally

sensitive portrayal of people, sites, services, or events. The presentation

of this information must not sacrifice historical accuracy for the sake of

entertainment or popularity. This information must be made easily

accessible to visitors through signage, printed materials or other media,

exhibits, or tours.

Authentic Resource: A site, service, or event which reflects a region‘s

heritage by retaining features which existed during its period of

significance, and by demonstrating an association with historic events,

persons, architecture, engineering, or technology. It is not necessary for

a site, service, or event to retain all of the features which it had during

its period of significance, but it must retain enough of these features to

present a clear picture of local heritage.



Carrying Capacity. Carrying capacity means the physical or optimal

tolerance limit of an activity or a building which it can bear for minimal

impacts on the services and resources.

Collection: A set of artifacts or objects which are acquired and

preserved because of their value as examples, as reference material,

or as objects of aesthetic or educational importance.

Compatible Use. Compatible use means a use which involves no

change to the culturally significant fabric, changes which are

substantially reversible, or changes which require a minimal impact.

Conservation. Conservation is the action to secure the survival or

preservation of places, cultural artefacts, natural resources, energy or

any other entity of acknowledged value for the future. The process of

conservation includes documentation, research, and assessment of

significance, interpretation, intervention, management and monitoring

of historic places.

Conservation Management Plan. Conservation management plan is a

document which sets out the significance of a place and explains how

the significance will be retained in any future use, repair, alteration,

development or management. It defines a detailed programme of

work and recommends policies to ensure the value of the place is

maintained while allowing a variety of future uses. It also describes how

policies can be implemented and advises on maintenance and

management.

Heritage: A legacy passed down from preceding generations. This

legacy encompasses physical features and the cultural perspectives

which define them. Elements of this inheritance include natural

features, landscape, history, culture, art, architecture, religion, folklore,

and other social systems.

Historic Fabric. Historic fabric is the physical material of which a historic

place or artefact is made.

Historic Places. The term ‗historic places‘ encompasses historic

buildings, heritage sites, historic landscapes, natural sacred sites, historic

structures/objects, historic precincts, historic cities and cultural

landscapes. Historic places are valued because they are associated

with phases of history, or people/events of great importance, or are of

architectural/archaeological significance, or of spiritual/religious

importance. A historic place must be regarded as a document of

history and must be treated in a holistic manner. It refers to following:

o Heritage sites are the immovable physical remains that were

created during the history of humankind and that have historical,

associational or social significance attached.



o Historic buildings possess authentic features and unique

construction techniques of a particular historic style or period of

construction. A building may be categorized historic owing to its

associational value with a significant event/person in history.

o Historic cities have layers of history existing, generally with

continued usage.

o Historic precincts comprise concentrations of heritage buildings of

intrinsic architectural, historic and streetscape value as also a strong

urban character.

o Historic structures and objects are movable elements of heritage

that are irreplaceable assets. Significance may be attributed to

them for reasons of historicity, association or unique techniques

from history.

o Landscapes include historic landscapes as well as areas of

environmental significance. Historic landscapes comprise the

designed landscaped sites of historic importance, such as ancient

gardens and landscaped complexes of historic buildings.

Environmentally significant areas include sites of scenic natural

beauty and ecologically important landscapes.

Cultural landscape is the sum of all the elements, linkages and

associations between people or culture groups, natural framework

and constraints of landform, geology, soils, climate, etc.

o Natural sacred sites are natural elements that may hold importance

by way of being associated with revered events, persons or periods

in history or mythology.

Intervention. Intervention is any action which has a physical effect on

the fabric of a building or artefact. The concept of minimum

intervention in conservation is well established.

Landscaping and Open Spaces. Landscaping and open spaces refers

to the all non-buildable spaces open to sky with proper access to

visitors. This refers to the kind of treatment to the open space that is

envisaged.

Maintenance. Maintenance means the continuous protective care of

the fabric, contents and setting of a place.

Museum: A gallery-based institution which maintains exhibits, displays,

or collections. A museum is a functional house of interpretation,

awareness and records of history, evolution and existence.

Nature/Type of Use. The nature or type of use refers to the kind of

building or land-use that is designated for the new activities proposed

within the buffer area.



New Constructions. New construction means all below and above

grade structures, temporary or permanent, as well as ground surface

treatments built for facilitating certain activities. These might include

ancillary structures and services for the buildings.

New Proposals. New proposals in this document refer to projects that

are proposed for revitalization of certain parts of a historic place. They

may be additions to historic buildings or new structures in historic

places. All new proposals must conform to guidelines for designing in

context of historic places, as well as design controls.

Ownership/Occupancy/Tenancy. Ownership/ Occupancy and

Tenancy refer to the title holder of new proposed activity.

Parking and Access. Parking refers to the vehicular parking for

occupant and visitor cars and two wheelers and tourist buses. Access

means the planning for the visitor movement within the site.

Period of Significance: The span of time that has made the greatest

contribution to the historical importance of a resource. In most cases,

the physical features of a Heritage Site or Heritage Service should draw

attention to that era.

Regular, Established Hours: A schedule of appointed times when a

Heritage Resource is open to the public. Seasonal hours are

acceptable, as long as the resource is open at least once per week for

three months of the year. One-time events are excluded from this

requirement.

Repair. It is the work beyond the scope of regular maintenance to

remedy defects, considerable decay or damage caused deliberately

or by accident, neglect, normal weathering or wear and tear. The

objective of repair is to return the place to good order, without

alteration or restoration.

Research Facility: An institution whose primary purpose is to promote

scholarship about local heritage. These institutions often provide

archival information, historical documents, and research assistance.

Significance. Significance of a historic place represents its value for

past, present or future generations; the value may be historical,

architectural, archaeological, art / aesthetics related, associational /

social, religious / spiritual, and natural.

Site Interpretation and Visitor Experience. Site interpretation

encompasses the quality of visitor experience and the communication

methods adopted that broadcasts the significance of the site to the

visitors. Site interpretation is central to develop the identity of the place

and enhance the aesthetic quality of the existing environment in

compliance to the predominant character of the place. The following



components which determine the quality of site interpretation broadly

are:

o Site Signage (historical description, site orientation, identity signage,

facility signage, etc.)

o Visual Improvement (existing signage control in and around the site,

removal & relocation of intrusive services)

o Street Furniture (benches, bollards, cloak stalls, waste bins, etc.)

o Lighting and Illumination (exterior lighting of monuments, public

places, landscaped areas, son et lumière, etc.)

Special Experience: A set of particular experiences observed by the

visitor which is based on particular theme or significance. The

experiences which bear an impressive and long-term impact on the

visitor memories are the referral points of interpretive observations.

Sustainability. Sustainability refers to the self-ability to sustain the fiscal,

physical, mechanical, economical and human resources for managing

and maintaining the site.

Technical „Expert Committee.‟ The Technical ‗Expert Committee‘ is a

technical heritage advisory committee. This committee must comprise

of qualified multidisciplinary specialists from the field of heritage

conservation and management. Other qualified experts must be taken

on as consultants to the committee for decisions specific to historic

places.

Theme: A recurrent, coordinated motif which intentionally creates an

atmosphere of a specific place, time, activity, or culture. This motif is

often expressed through a combination of cuisine, décor, and printed

materials.

Visitor Amenities. Visitor amenities encompass all the necessary civic

conveniences required for visitors. They include toilets, drinking water

facilities, garbage bins, etc.

Visitor Facilities. Visitor facilities encompass all the ancillary functions to

support visitor requirements. They include eateries, open amphitheatre,

rain shelters, first-aid facilities, refreshment kiosks, information kiosks and

space for belongings, etc.

Other related general definitions as per ―The Burra Charter, 1999: The

Australian ICOMOS Charter for Places of Cultural Significance‖ are:

Places. Places means site, area, land, landscape, building or other

work, group of buildings or other works, and may include components,

contents, spaces and views.

Preservation. Preservation means maintaining the fabric of a place in its

existing state and retarding deterioration.



Reconstruction. Reconstruction means returning a place to a known

earlier state and is distinguished from restoration by the introduction of

new material into the fabric.

Restoration. Restoration means returning the existing fabric of a place to a

known earlier state by removing accretions or by reassembling existing

components without the introduction of new material. However, certain

specific provisions of ―The Ancient Monuments and Archaeological Sites

and Remains Act, 1958‖ vide Notification dated 28 August 1958, which was

amended as ―The Ancient Monuments and Archaeological Sites and

Remains (Amendment and Validation) Act, 2010‖ vide Notification dated

29 March 2010‖ would hold precedence with respect to the following

definitions in their use for heritage conservation context:

Construction. Construction means any erection of a structure or a

building, including any addition or extension there to either vertically or

horizontally, but does not include any re-construction, repair and

renovation of an existing structure, or, construction, maintenance and

cleansing of drains and drainage works and of public latrines, urinals

and similar conveniences, or, the construction and maintenance of

works meant for providing supply of water for public, or the

construction or maintenance, extension, management and supply and

distribution of electricity to the public or provision for similar facilities for

public.

Prohibited Area. Prohibited area means any area specified or declared

to be a prohibited area under Section 20A (of the said amended Act).

Protected Area. Protected area means archaeological site and

remains which is declared to be of national importance by or under this

Act.

Protected Monument. Protected monument means an ancient

monument which is declared to be of national importance by or under

this Act.

Re-construction. Re-construction means any erection of a structure or

building to its pre-existing structure, having the same horizontal or

vertical limits.

Regulated Area. Regulated area means any area specified or

declared under Section 20B (of the said amended Act).

Repair and Renovation. Repair and renovation means alterations to a

pre-existing structure or building, but shall not include construction or re-

construction.



4.3 Strategic Framework

GoUK endeavours to achieve the above objectives and position

Uttarakhand as a visible global brand in tourism for visitors as well as

investors, by encouraging development of relevant infrastructure and

support mechanisms through partnerships between private sector,

Government and the community.

To realize the core objectives and achieve the larger vision outlined for the

sector, the GoUK has identified the following strategic intervention areas:

Facilitate improvement of infrastructure, tourism products and service.

Create institutional structures that harness and compliment such

initiatives.

Create streamlined processes for obtaining clearances.

Offer attractive incentives for various tourism products and services as

well as to the operators/entrepreneurs–whether private or government.

Prioritise Human Resource Development & Capacity Enhancement.

A set of actions have been identified for each of the strategic intervention

areas, which are elaborated in the following sections. Detailed guidelines

for undertaking activities in the identified areas are elaborated under

Section 5.

4.3.1 Improve Infrastructure, Tourism Products and Services

To achieve growth in visitor numbers and elongate duration of stay that

directly contributes to the local economy, the government shall pursue the

actions highlighted below, some of which are already being

implemented by the tourism department and other departments in the

state.

i. Assist and facilitate development & maintenance of basic tourism

infrastructure and facilities at destinations.

ii. Promote new and innovative tourism products and services.

iii. Improve connectivity infrastructure.

iv. Improve access and delivery of tourism information services.

v. Improve interpretational standards for nature- and culture-based

tourism products.

4.3.1.1 Basic Tourism Infrastructure facilities at Destinations

The planning and design of the facilities must be undertaken in a manner that it

provides barrier free space and environment to the physically handicapped.

Tourist Accommodation



v. Promote quality accommodation through Hotels/Resorts/Eco-

lodges/Camping Sites (Regular Camping Tents as well as Swiss

Tents and Log Huts category), Tourist Rest Houses (TRHs)/Yatri

Niwas along with Dormitories, including other stay facilities like

home stays/B&Bs. The definition of home stays includes traditional

home stays developed at various locations (e.g. at Jageshwar,

Mukteshwar, Sakri Village, etc). The Home stays Policy /

Guidelines should be strengthened to encourage registered

home stays across the State. A mechanism for inspection,

certification and licensing of the home stays is also to be defined.

vi. Encourage adaptive reuse of non-notified or unprotected

heritage buildings for use as heritage hotels assuring minimal

impact and risks are mitigated therein.

vii. Facilitate development of accommodation for all customer

segments through serviced apartments, cottages, camping sites,

dormitories, youth hostels & Yatri Nivas at tourist destinations.

viii. Promote private sector participation in asset creation,

management and operation of commercial proponents of

tourism products.

At Destination and Wayside Amenities

i. Promote wayside amenities including universal access or barrier-

free friendly built-environment compliant toilets, cafeteria, mini-

store/pharmacy/ATMs/ information kiosks/souvenir booth at

appropriate intermittent intervals along connecting roads

leading to major tourist destinations.

ii. Where possible as per the land/space availability environment-

friendly pre-fabricated bio-toilet units/pre-engineered building

toilet complex with bio-digester system should be promoted.

Wayside amenities economically benefitting local communities

shall be encouraged. This specific intervention should be

proposed only after assurances that the viability and sustainability

of such proposals have been evaluated diligently.

iii. Retail for local produce, crafts, adult literacy programmes,

access to internet etc. should be encouraged, wherever

possible.

iv. Amenities including parking at the entrance of major tourist

destinations shall be promoted to regulate vehicular movement,

with special access for the physically challenged. Thrust should

be given to provide information centres/kiosks at all major tourist

destinations.



v. Community kitchens, community-run tourist facilitation centre

and cluster of public conveniences at rural locations should be

encouraged, largely through Community-based Organisations,

Voluntary Community Organisations, Non-Governmental

Organisations, Micro-Initiatives, Self-Help Groups, etc.

4.3.1.2 New and innovative tourism products and services

Meetings, incentives, conferences, and exhibitions (MICE)

MICE is a type of tourism in which large groups, usually planned well

in advance, are brought together for a particular purpose. Most

components of MICE are well understood, perhaps with the

exception of incentives. Incentive tourism is usually undertaken as a

type of employee reward by a company or institution for targets

met or exceeded, or a job well done.

i. World-class exhibition and convention complexes through

appropriate PPP framework should be promoted in Dehradun,

Nainital and other important cities in the state.

ii. Private enterprise, in collaboration with international exhibition

companies, will be encouraged to establish these exhibition

complexes backed by Government support and incentives.

Theme Parks

i. Theme and Entertainment parks owned and run by the private

entrepreneurs should be promoted in select places in

Uttarakhand post-assurance that those shall have adequate

infrastructure to meet the visitor demands as well as counter the

detrimental impacts (viz. traffic & transportation, waste

generation, environment, socio-cultural and economic) from

this activity.

ii. Placement and siting of such activities shall be in consultation

with the relevant planning authorities and compliant with their

existing land-use plans.

Heritage Zones and Clusters

i. Better utilization of existing market and research data will be

made to identify and develop the heritage zones and clusters

only for non-notified and/or unprotected areas. Such

delineated zones should be complimentary but not contrary to

the existing legal frameworks for heritage.



ii. Heritage zones be earmarked around the sites and controlled

and adaptive tourism development should be promoted in

accordance with the existing master plans. Such delineations

intent should indicate alleviations in deprivations and should

help in social and economic regeneration, renewal and revival

of that place. For historic places, such delineations should

contribute towards the rejuvenation of cultural practices and

way of life.

iii. Strategic endeavours would be made to include more heritage

sites into UNESCO‘s World Heritage Sites list for bringing in

significant international recognition and tourist traffic through

preparation of integrated Site Management Plans, proposals to

Government of India etc. The GoUK shall pursue nominations for

significant heritage sites, zones and clusters that represents the

local unique cultural identity, vernacularism, archetypical styles,

traditional practices, etc.

iv. To improve the maintenance of existing tourist destinations,

adoption/management/sponsorship programs shall be

promoted to create ownership between government, host

community and private entrepreneurs for monuments, temples

and destinations.

v. To increase length of stay of visitors, development of tourist

villages near existing attractions, shall be encouraged.

Eco-Tourism

i. Eco-Tourism shall be promoted as a core tourism activity in close

collaboration with the Forest Department and Rural

Development Department (e.g. through ILSP under UGVS).

ii. An eco-tourism zone at important hill stations which are located

in middle Himalayas should be identified and a chain of nature

camps shall be encouraged and promoted as Jungle Trails in

the zone.

iii. The local community/Van Panchayats should be encouraged

to participate in the eco-tourism activities.

Health & Wellness

Thrust should be provided to promote Uttarakhand‘s traditional

systems of medicine and wellness like Yoga, Ayurveda, etc. and

efforts would be made to position the State as a unique destination

for spiritual healing and wellness tourism.

Adventure Tourism



The Government shall promote adventure tourism activities in

Uttarakhand, like - White Water Rafting, Trekking (nature walks,

pilgrimage trails, National Park, etc.), paragliding & parasailing,

mountaineering, Skiing slopes, etc.

4.3.1.3 Connectivity Infrastructure

Transport and Aviation

i. The Government shall endeavour to increase entry points and

improve direct access to different destinations across the State

for international, interstate and intrastate visitors by encouraging

development of new routes, expanding existing airport

capacity, etc.

ii. Development of low-cost terminals, transport nodes/heads, use

of smaller and viable transport modes transit-oriented

development shall be encouraged for sites, destination and

regions of touristic significance.

Last-mile Connectivity

i. Improving last-mile road/rail connectivity to tourist destinations

will be a priority area and Government should co-ordinate with

other government agencies/departments in facilitating these

tourism development activities.

ii. Intermodal transport connectivity such as link from railway

stations and bus terminals to tourist destinations where required,

should be developed in collaboration with respective

government agencies/departments.

Zero Pollution Modes of Transport

Environment-friendly vehicles having a minimum impact on the

ecology of the destination shall be promoted.

4.3.1.4 Access and Delivery of Tourism Information and Other Services

The Government in context to the tourism infrastructure that it envisages

to create shall endeavour to provide a ‗Total Quality Experience‘ to the

visitors – before arrival till after departure, by promoting the following

initiatives:

Tourist Amenities

Amenities like information kiosks, trained guides/audio guides,

interpretation centres, tourist scouts, medical aid, and barrier free



space and environment for the physically challenged/differently-

able will be promoted at all major tourist destinations.

Information, Communication & Technology (ICT)

iv. Initiatives should be encouraged to provide adequate and

reliable information about destinations, accommodations,

itinerary, events, online bookings and other offerings through

various modes such as online web portals, tourism offices,

booklets, flyers, brochures, maps etc.

v. Provision of audio guides, mobile technology, wi-fi at major

tourist destinations should be encouraged. Technology

interventions for social networking and data management shall

be supported by the GoUK.

vi. Apart from promoting a digital marketing and information

collateral, the Government shall support other initiatives for

branding and promotion such as development of information

and interpretation centres at tourist destinations.

Provision shall be made to have a dedicated fund for technology

development under the State Budget awarded for tourism projects.

Safety and Security of Visitors

iv. The ―tourist scouts‖ shall be deployed at key tourist destinations

for keeping a vigil on the gathering thus ensuring safety and

security of visitors.

v. Visitor monitoring and management plan should be developed

for rationalizing the flow of visitors. Registration of tourist and

vehicles arriving in the state from any of the gateways /

entrance should be done to manage overcrowding and traffic

congestion at tourist destinations. The wireless communication

based methods which provide real time information about the

tourist numbers and location at various tourist destinations

should also be studied and feasibility of introducing any of these

shall be looked into.

vi. A Disaster Management Plan, in collaboration with State

Disaster Management Authority (SDMA), should be developed

for major tourism destinations to enhance preparedness for any

eventuality. A dedicated helpline number will be launched

exclusively for the convenience of tourists. In addition, based on

the carrying capacity and tourism regulation studies (including

those undertaken as per UEAP loan covenant requirements)



measures thereof for visitor numbers through registration (e.g.

bio-metric registration for important pilgrimages) & control of

visitation permitted from one registration control point at a lower

level to the respective destination enroute. This is expected to

facilitate disaster management during any eventuality and

would not unnecessarily invite the visitors at risk beyond the

carrying capacity of a travel route/destination.

4.4 Position Uttarakhand as a Preferred Tourism Destination at State, National

and International Levels

Prioritising activity in key markets (local, domestic and international) and

across market segments is critical to achieve the objectives set out in this

document. The Government shall undertake the following actions to

position Uttarakhand as a preferred tourism destination within the state,

and at national and international levels.

Increase branding, marketing and promotional activities across

different visitor groups.

Create a Calendar of Events to support marketing and promotional

activities.

Develop data/information repositories.

4.4.1 Marketing and Promotional Activities

An integrated marketing approach for the envisaged infrastructure and

asset development investments should be adopted to ensure that relevant

events are communicated to target markets and can be factored into

downstream product development and in-bound tour offerings.

Other promotional activities through conferences, road shows, craft

bazaars, fairs and festivals and other exchange programs will be

undertaken.

4.4.2 Branding

Uttarakhand offers a lot in Nature and Wildlife tourism, while offering

tremendous potential in Adventure tourism/sports. The challenge is to

mesh these different streams and strengths into a cohesive Uttarakhand

brand that promotes tourism.

Likeother successful tourism branding in the country, Uttarakhand needs to

rope in an internationally renowned personality to be its Brand Ambassador

to espouse the various tourism destinations of the State on Television, Radio,



Print Media, Hoardings and Social Media to create greater awareness of

the availabilities here.

The properties that are valuable assets that could be branded to fruition

are three in number:

i. Brand Destinations (significant cities and towns that shall be the core of

developing tourism destinations and circuits)

ii. Heritage Uttarakhand

iii. Ecotourism.

Each of these has a dimension to offer that is distinctive, unique and

different. While Brand Destinations shall emerge to be a magnet city/town

that has an attraction quotient led by various trans-industry infrastructure

and supporting paraphernalia to tourism products and activities. Heritage

Uttarakhand remains an undersold story in brand names. The richness of

world renowned National Parks, Cultural Heritage Sites and other

destinations in Uttarakhand offers rich branding opportunities. The third

frontier of branding lies with Ecotourism. Ecotourism is slated to emerge as

most of the visitors worldwide prefer recluse, authentic experience and

getaways from their daily urbane routine as well as from the synthetic

environment and way of life they lead.

4.4.3 Calendar of Events

i. A Five-Year calendar of events across Uttarakhand shall be drawn up,

including 4-5 hallmark events that will be organized annually.

ii. Various regional and indigenous tourism products shall be offered as a

part of the Event Calendar to integrate business with leisure tourism.

iii. Major event zone processes shall be simplified on trading hours, liquor

licenses etc. to cater to visitor expectations.

4.4.4 Tourism Industry Profile & State Tourism Database Repository

i. The Department of Tourism shall endeavour to create a ‗Tourism

Industry Profile,‘ to aid in planning and decision-making for both

industry and Government. The profile will be created based on quality

research (quantitative & qualitative assessment) studies.

ii. The Department shall also strive to set up a State Tourism Database

Repository, publish an annual state of the industry report and organise

annual industry outlook conferences.



4.5 Spatial/Site Planning Approach

For spatial planning at macro-level in the hilly terrain (i.e. the Himalayan

Region) of the Uttarakhand State for the purpose of tourism

development, considering the fact that the Himalayan mountain range

is young with unstable & weak geology and is ecologically sensitive

with availability of land for development being scarce (e.g.

Uttarakhand State is endowed with 64.76% of its area under forests),

capacity-based planning is a must for sustainable development

approach. Also, since this endowment supports rich biodiversity with a

variety of flora and fauna, which in turn attracts thousands of tourists, it

becomes imperative for the State to conserve its rich biodiversity while

at the same time promote ecologically-sustained tourism which not

only aims at providing livelihood for its people but also is based on the

carrying capacity of the tourism destinations.

The carrying capacity studies undertaken for the tourism destinations

prior to any future tourism development9 will facilitate in the following:

o Understanding of traffic capacities and subsequent needs for

strengthening/improvement of transportation infrastructure for

accessibility that provides a comfortable ride, results in travel time

savings and a safe travel in such a difficult terrain;

o As part of making the accessibility safer and to meet the ecological

conservation/protection needs, the requirements for circulation of

traffic/visitor movement flow and parking along with turnover time

studied in integration with the carrying capacity of the land/sites at

each destination with coverage of tourism development/tourism

activities & activity supporting resources–will facilitate the

understanding of regulating the visitor numbers, and subsequently

to plan the visitor regulation mechanism supported by integrated

appropriate technological means and management measures at

each tourism site/destination [refer on carrying capacity

―Guidelines for Ecotourism in and around Protected Areas (Draft)‖

introduced by MoEF dated 02 June 2011 or ―Comprehensive


dated 15th October 2012, NTCA]; and

o Understanding the spatial extent of planning/development areas

available in conjunction with the population (i.e. the resident

population and the floating population including the regulated

visitor numbers during the peak tourism season), will further facilitate

9 Special attention will be given to the aspect of carrying capacity while preparing tourism development

plans. (Tourism Policy of State of Uttarakhand, UTDB, 2007)



in appropriate planning for infrastructure requirements

(accommodation* capacity, physical and social infrastructure

including disaster preparedness amenities like multipurpose

halls/shelters, apart from transportation) to be provisioned. [*The mix

would depend on the type of destination branding of or

marketing/promotions efforts for the tourism in the State is

envisaged. For example, there is no use in promoting Uttarakhand

as a high-class destination if the necessary hotels are not available.

At present accommodation on offer is predominantly low to mid-

range with a few luxury hotels as an exception.]

Also, signage, amenities, kiosks, interpretation centres are important

for tourism development. However, it is necessary that these

facilities are not planned without keeping the big picture in mind:

They must be embedded in a wider context and defined by the

Tourism Action Plans and subsequent area projects, with proper

support for their operation & maintenance/management control if

operated on contract. Mistakes such as the construction of

information centres at locations where no tourists pass by and

which cannot be maintained should be avoided. Also,

conveniences centres constructed at several locations for providing

tourism information as well as basic toilet and communication

facilities are reportedly not operational (e.g. Barsu in Uttarkashi

etc.). The reasons for such non-operations may be studied and

appropriately addressed. The Uttarakhand Tourism Development

Master Plan, UNWTO, 2008 already suggests the following:

o A possible method of making use of these buildings for the benefit

of the tourists is to hand them over to the respective village

communities. The educated unemployed women in each of the

villages in which the buildings are located may be organized into

Self Help groups (SHGs) and given training in behavioural skills,

hygiene, guiding, entrepreneurship and use of telephones and

internet. The group can take up the following activities in each of

the centres apart from providing toilet and wash facilities to tourists:

Sale of refreshments

Sale of souvenirs/ handicrafts

Sale of information brochures/maps

Telephone and internet facility

Booking of accommodation

Airline/ railway reservations through internet

Guide services for local sight-seeing.



The specific activities to be undertaken can be decided on the

basis of the interests, educational background and skills of the

women in the SHG and an assessment of the needs of the tourists

and local community. If all the activities are undertaken ten women

can be employed on a part-time basis. The distribution can be as

follows:

Managing the toilet facility including its regular cleaning and

maintenance in top hygienic condition: 2 persons

Sale of refreshments: 2 persons

Sale of souvenirs, handicrafts, brochures, etc.: 2 persons

Booking of accommodation, transport, etc.: 2 persons

Guide services for local sightseeing: 2 persons.

To support the finalization of carrying capacities, reference is required

to necessary geological investigations (through Geological Survey of

India), and hydrological & river morphological studies (already existing

or if new studies to be conducted) of glacier melting/river flow

pattern/flood data etc. (undertaken by Irrigation Department in

consultation with/assistance of expert bodies and other expert research

institutes of Government of India on Himalayan Region like–Central

Water Commission, Wadia Institute of Himalayan Geology/G. B. Pant

Institute of Himalayan Environment and Development/Nehru Institute of

Mountaineering etc. or other such institutes of the Uttarakhand State).

For spatial planning at micro-level i.e. site planning for tourism

assets/infrastructure requirements based on the existing inventory of

resources and gap to be addressed based on the need/demand

assessment, the following must be undertaken prior to preparation of

any architectural and engineering designs:

o Topographical surveys (using Total Station Survey equipment) and

the topographical survey map/contour map output should cover

marking–contour lines (surveyed at an interval of maximum 0.30 m

for flat land parcels and maximum 0.50 m for parcels in hill slopes,

and levels identified with reference to a benchmark and

subsequently reduced level i.e. RL with respect to the MSL), physical

features including trees of girth 0.20 m & above, areas under utilities

& their distribution network laid at site, any structures & other built-

up areas, signage, etc. existing on the land parcel to be surveyed;

o Geo-technical/soil investigation studies with report covering the

(i) physical characteristics i.e. soil strata (soil classification with

depth of strata), depth at which bedrock available to provide

stable foundations, any ground water exposure causing humid

conditions for foundations, and CBR value (for pavement



design) and rate of settlement & bearing capacity (for

foundation design), and

(ii) chemical characteristics/composition of soils that might affect

the choice of construction materials for foundation design;

o Based on the above-surveys and investigations, where necessary,

appropriate soil stabilization measures and climate change impact

mitigation measures required to be incorporated in the site

planning towards soil stabilization needs/retaining wall, breast wall

& toe wall planning needs as felt necessary should be duly

considered, and detailed designs with technical details & drawings,

and cost estimates be prepared as part of the tourism

assets/infrastructure development; and

o Based on the above-surveys and investigations, the site planning

should also explore considerations for the incorporation of

international/national best practices of green infrastructure

concepts to minimize the ecological footprint when preparing plans

& designs for:

(i) water supply & distribution systems with water consumption

reduction measures (like low-flow/aerated-flow faucets and

low-flush cisterns);

(ii) management of storm water drainage (through environment-

friendly designs like bio-swales, bio-retention ponds/trenches,

permeable pavements, green roofs, etc. integrated with rain

water harvesting systems);

(iii) waste water disposal (like artificial wetlands, Package STPs,

and recycling of waste water for flushing & landscaping

purposes for tourism assets premises); and

(iv) solid waste disposal (including concept of ―avoid & rethink–

reduce–reuse–recycle–treatment–disposal,‖ and energy

recovery through bio-digester systems where feasible based on

meeting the suitable temperature conditions).

o For micro-level accessibility to the tourism destinations/sites in

remote locations in the Himalayan Region of the Uttarakhand State,

depending on the need to protect the ecological sensitivity and

serenity of the sites, the balance between providing the approach

access through–bituminous road/concrete pavement & parking

surface or an environment-friendly permeable pavement etc. as

pedestrian pathway & parking needs to be maintained.



4.6 Site Finalization/Subproject Selection Criteria

For site finalization/subproject selection post-spatial planning, consider

the following international/national best practice for–new projects or

those which require redevelopment/rehabilitation/restoration:

o The selection of sites as attractions/destinations along a priority

tourism circuit must be connected to at least one main gateway

centre that is, in turn, connected either by air, rail, road or water

transportation to one or more domestic or international

transportation hubs. The attractions/destinations should follow

criteria like:

(i) Be located along the identified state tourism circuits as defined

in the State Road Map/Tourism Master Plans (State-level like

Uttarakhand Tourism Development Master Plan 2007 –

2022/Circuit or District-level Tourism Master Plans)and adhere to

the relevant Land-use Plan(s) and Zoning Regulation(s) as

applicable;

(ii) form part of a thematic attraction cluster to be justified by

current and projected segmented tourism patterns and market

demand based on surveys of existing and potential tourism

markets;

(iii) be so located that it contributes towards a emergence of clear

sub-circuits in the State;

(iv) qualifies for at least two of the following categories:

cultural heritage (pilgrimage heritage/tribal heritage/rural

tourism as applicable);

natural heritage with potential for leisure, recreation, and

adventure sports; and

theme parks like ski resorts, hot water sulphur spring/spa

resorts, etc., amusement parks, leisure resorts with/without

ropeway feature, etc.

(v) have the potential to draw a large number of tourists to the

tourist destinations;

(vi) contribute to offering a diverse set of tourist destination activities

that complement the tourist destination theme, build market

appeal, and increase each tourist‘s length of stay and

expenditure (with the exception of mass pilgrimage

destinations, wherein the need to regulate flow of visitors would

be applicable in the context of existence of such destinations in

remote location/accessible through treacherous terrain in the



Himalayan Region of Uttarakhand State, such need more so

imperative post-disaster of June 2013); and

(vii) be able to contribute to the growth of the tourism value chain

and provide forward market linkages and benefits for

surrounding local communities.

Also, as specified in the ―Revised Guidelines of Scheme for

Product/Infrastructure Development for Destinations and Circuits‖

issued by Ministry of Tourism, GoI, after tourist sites/destinations are

carefully selected based on its tourism potential, the focus shall be

on the integrated infrastructure development of the tourist sites. The

aim will be to provide all infrastructure facilities required by the

tourists within such destinations and circuits. Master Planning of

these destinations and circuits will have to be undertaken so as to

develop them in an integrated/holistic manner. The aim would be

convergence of resources and expertise through coordinated

action with State Governments/UTs and Private Sectors. Tourist

Destinations and Circuits in each State would be identified in

consultation with the State Governments and would be taken up

for development. This would include activities ranging from

preparation of a master plan to implementation of the master plan.

Projects to be taken up under this scheme should follow an

integrated, project-wise, area development approach.

Comprehensive DPRs should be prepared for each project after

consultations with all the stakeholders.

The Scheme prescribes the following activities under the State/UT‘s

and Central component:

a) Activities/items under State/UT component: The State/UT

Governments will be fully responsible for the following

components of the project:

(i) Making the land available for development.

(ii) Implementation of rehabilitation package, where shifting

of dwellings or commercial units is required. However, the

Government of India would provide assistance for

construction of Tourist Reception Centres including

shopping complexes to house the displaced shops.

(iii) Operation, maintenance and management of the assets

created.

(iv) External infrastructure like Water Supply, Electricity and

Roads [not covered under para b) (iv) below].



b) Activities/items under Central component: The assistance under

this Scheme will be focussed on development of public goods

instead of private goods. There should also be convergence

with other programmes of Government and duplication should

be avoided. The following works may be taken up under the

Scheme under the Central component:

(i) Improvement of the surroundings of the destination. This

would include activities like landscaping, development of

parks, fencing, compound wall etc.

(ii) Illumination of the Tourist destination and the area around,

and SEL Shows etc.

(iii) Providing for improvement in solid waste management and

sewerage management, Public Conveniences, etc.

(iv) Improvement of road connectivity leading to the tourist

sites, especially from the National Highways/State highways

and other entry points.

(v) Construction of Wayside Public Conveniences.

(vi) Construction of Budget Accommodation, Restaurant &

Wayside Amenities including one-time assistance for its air-

conditioning and furnishings. This component will be

supported only in selected places of Jammu & Kashmir and

all North Eastern States, and Eco-tourism projects where

private sector investment is not forthcoming or not possible.

(vii) Procurement of equipments directly related to tourism, like

Water Sports, Adventure Sports, Eco-friendly modes of

transport for moving within the Tourism Zone and

equipments for cleaning of the tourist destination will be

eligible for 25% grant.

(viii) Construction of public buildings which are required to be

demolished because of implementation of the Master Plan.

o The selection of tourist gateway centres for inclusion in subprojects

must be based on the following eligibility criteria:

(i) must connect the destination and attractions as a domestic or

international transportation hub that is either located in the

State or in an adjoining State within adequate distance to

ensure access and connectivity within a reasonable access

time; and

(ii) must contain significant concentrations of tourist

accommodation, restaurants, travel operations services with

room for expansion to support a increasing flow of tourists, and

tourist support services such as tourist information centres



including tourism flow control centres especially for mass

pilgrimage destinations (like for registration & issuing visitor token

no., pilgrimage information update and accordingly as required

visitor number regulation by temporary diversion to other tourism

destinations nearby thus enhancing the coverage of other

tourism destinations as well and supporting their sustainability

needs).

o The selection of local communities for participation in the

subproject(s) must be based upon the following criteria:

(i) preferably comprise clusters of villages within or adjacent to, a

tourist attraction site;

(ii) must be accessible through an existing road including that

which has the potential to enhance access to other tourist

attraction(s), and gateway centre(s), through minimum

upgrading;

(iii) There is strong support and commitment from key stakeholders

(e.g., local community members, ULB/Panchayat, SHG, tourism

and related concerned agencies, private sector tour operators

and carriers, and development partners and NGOs); and

(iv) Cost recovery mechanisms for recurrent operating costs are in

place or there is a clear willingness to put them in place.

o There is a strong interest among the domestic and international

markets in community-based tourism (CBT) experiences and flow of

CBT through rural tourism/eco-tourism already exists, which could

be enhanced with modest interventions, resulting in substantial

additional economic activities. CBT development will, therefore,

create significant flow of benefits to primary and secondary

beneficiaries, which can contribute to significant poverty reduction,

a more sustainable environment, and enhanced protection of the

value of tourist attractions. Local community participation in the

tourism value chain may include CBT activities, such as

establishment of Bed & Breakfasts (B&Bs)/Home Stays, as well as

direct or indirect participation in the broader tourism value chain,

such as employment in a hotel outside the village, and production

and sale of food and handicraft to tourism enterprises, guides &

interpretation activities, etc.

Similar perspective is observed in the ―Revised Guidelines of

Scheme for Product/Infrastructure Development for Destinations

and Circuits‖ issued by Ministry of Tourism, GoI, that ―… the stresses

of urban lifestyles have led to a "counter-urbanization" syndrome.

This has led to growing interest in the rural areas. At the same time



this trend of urbanization has led to falling income levels, lesser job

opportunities in the rural areas leading to desertion of villages. Rural

Tourism is one of the few activities which can provide a solution to

these problems. Besides, there are other factors which are shifting

the trend towards rural tourism like increasing levels of awareness,

growing interest in heritage and culture and improved accessibility,

and environmental consciousness. In the developed countries, this

has resulted in a new style of tourism of visiting village settings to

experience and live a relaxed and healthy lifestyle. This concept

has taken the shape of a Rural Tourism Product. Under this Scheme,

thrust will be to promote village tourism as the primary tourism

product to spread tourism and its socio-economic benefits to rural

and new geographic regions. Key geographic regions would be

identified for development and promotion of Rural Tourism. The

implementation would be done through a Convergence

Committee headed by the District Collector. Activities like

improving the environment, hygiene, infrastructure etc. would be

eligible for assistance. Apart from providing financial assistance the

focus would be to tap the resources available under different

schemes of Ministry of Rural Development, State Govts and other

Ministries/Departments of the Govt. of India.‖ This Scheme also

provides a Definition of Rural Tourism as ―Any form of tourism that

showcases the rural life, art, culture and heritage at rural locations,

thereby benefiting the local community economically and socially

as well as enabling interaction between the tourists and the locals

for a more enriching tourism experience can be termed as rural

tourism. Rural tourism is essentially an activity which takes place in

the countryside. It is multi-faceted and may entail farm/agricultural

tourism, cultural tourism, nature tourism, adventure tourism, and

ecotourism. As against conventional tourism, rural tourism has

certain typical characteristics like: it is experience-oriented, the

locations are sparsely populated, it is predominantly in natural

environment, it meshes with seasonality and local events, and is

based on preservation of culture, heritage and traditions.‖ Also, with

regards to Permissible Activities under Rural Tourism, the said

Scheme prescribes the following:

(i) Improvement of the surroundings of the village. This would

include activities like landscaping, development of parks,

fencing, compound wall etc.

(ii) Improvements to roads within the Panchayat limits. This shall

not include any major road which connects the village.



(iii) Illumination in the village.

(iv) Providing for improvement in solid waste management and

sewerage management.

(v) Construction of Wayside Amenities.

(vi) Procurement of equipments directly related to tourism, like

Water Sports, Adventure Sports, Eco-friendly modes of transport

for moving within the tourism zone.

(vii) Refurbishment of the Monuments.

(viii) Signage.

(ix) Reception Centres.

(x) Other work/activities directly related to tourism.

(xi) Tourist Accommodation.

The Scheme also prescribes that ―The sustainable maintenance

plan for the assets to be created must be built into the project

proposal for this purpose.‖

Also, earlier as per ―Introduction of Paying Guest Scheme for

Development of Tourism in the State‖ issued by Tourism Department,

the then State of Uttar Pradesh vide No. 2187/41-94-41/86 dated 08

August 1994, after the directions of Government of India, had

identified several locations for introducing Paying Guest Scheme.

The tourism-strength areas identified in the hill region that are now

part of Uttarakhand were: adventure sports areas, and Pithoragarh

& other tourist areas-Ranikhet, Kaudiyala, Auli, Chamba, etc.; and

Traditional Hill Yatra Trek Routes, including Gangotri, Yamunotri,

Badrinath, and Kedarnath. The scheme was kept non-commercial.

The scheme would provide the tourists at appropriate rates with a

good-opportunity to stay and be aware of/interact with hill culture,

with the families of hill areas in the Uttar Pradesh State. The purpose

of the Scheme at tourist destinations in the identified tourism-

strength areas of the Uttar Pradesh State is to increase the

necessary accommodation facilities for tourists, as well as to

provide such building owners those who have extra rooms available

for stay of tourists, an additional source of income. This will enhance

self-employment. The implementation of this Scheme would also

provide an opportunity in existing tourist destinations that presently

do not have any type of accommodation facilities, to provide stay

facilities to domestic/foreign tourists. This would create other

direct/indirect employment as well.

The existing 36 Nos. of Home Stays (created under ULIPH Program,

under UGVS, RDD with the assistance of IFAD grants–1 No. in Almora



district, 5 Nos. in Bageshwar district, 17 Nos. in Chamoli district, 11

Nos. in Tehri Garhwal district, and 2 Nos. in Uttarkashi district) are

presently not registered under any regulation. The Uttarakhand

Home Stay Rules 2015 have been notified by UTDB and therefore

these existing Home Stays should be integrated with these

registration requirements. So, would be the other Home Stay(s) in

operation at Village Bhakrakot in Almora district and 10 Home Stays

at Agora Village in Uttarkashi district [―Experience village life:

Community-based Tourism (CBT)‖ issued by Ecotourism Division,

under Ecotourism Menu on Forest Department‘s website].

o The subproject shall be technically sound, meeting design

standards of the Government of India or other equivalent technical

authorities, and a conceptual/preliminary design should be

prepared prior to finalization of subproject by the State

Government departments.

o The subproject should be designed and executed as seismic

resistant structure in accordance with relevant national standards,

as applicable.

o The subproject shall be cost-effective at the same time

environment-friendly in nature based on a review of technical

options available to address the identified problems/climate-

resilient intervention needs.

o The subproject should be avoided in core zones of national parks,

wildlife sanctuaries and biospheres and the critical habitats. If

unavoidable, such subprojects should be strictly confined to minor

rehabilitation of existing infrastructure.

o The design and construction standards shall be raised to

appropriate level. The revised high flood levels of the rivers or the

natural streams or drainage channels shall be considered, while

designing facilities, as applicable. Geo-technical studies shall be

undertaken and slope stabilization measures considered for slide

zones, wherever applicable.

o The subproject shall be in compliance with all applicable local rules

and regulations. All required central and state government

approvals/clearances will be in place including those from state

disaster management authority/high powered committee.

Additionally, necessary statutory clearances should be in place

before contract award/commencement of works.

o An economic analysis of projects should be undertaken addressing

particular the following aspects:



(i) the analysis should ensure that there is sufficient demand for the

critical public and social infrastructure;

(ii) the analysis is undertaken for the various alternatives; and

(iii) the subproject demonstrates an EIRR of at least 12%, is not overly

sensitive to changes in key cost and benefit parameters and will

likely be sustainable with due provision for O&M, or the chosen

technical option is the least cost option for providing the

particular service. If there is a justification that the economic

benefits cannot be entirely quantified, the economic rate of

return of 10% instead of 12% can be acceptable.

o The subproject selection criteria should ensure that safeguards

impacts (both environmental and social) will be avoided or

minimized. The subproject shall adopt the following systems &

procedures:

(i) As per the applicable environment categories notified in the

MoEF, GoI issued EIA Notification dated 14 September 2006, and

its Amendment SO 3067E dated 01 December 2009, the

safeguards assessments like Rapid Environment Assessment

(REA) at the time of subproject selection/Initial Environmental

Examination (IEE) or Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) as

applicable including an Environmental Management and

Monitoring Plan (EMMP) prior to any project execution shall be

duly undertaken, and be included as part of bid & contract

documents for effective implementation of such safeguard

requirements.

(ii) The subproject will, to the extent possible, not require land

acquisition or involuntary resettlement (including the

displacement of squatters or encroachers from the rights of way.

Involuntary Resettlement (IR) Impact and Indigenous Peoples (IP)

Impact Categorization & Checklist screening (a best practice of

ADB) may be adopted from social safeguards perspective when

finalising the site/subproject. The IR and IPs impacts due to these

subprojects should be verified by the Social/Resettlement Expert

of the State (e.g. under SDMA etc.). In case of any such impact

duly filled-in checklists (IR and/or IPs) should be submitted to State

(e.g. under SDMA etc.) for any re-categorization. If land

acquisition or involuntary resettlement is required for a

subproject, a Resettlement Plan (RP) shall be prepared in

accordance with applicable laws and regulations of the

National and State Government. Similarly. if any indigenous

peoples/scheduled tribes are likely to be affected significantly by



a subproject, an Indigenous Peoples Plan (IPP) shall be prepared

in accordance with applicable laws and regulations of the

National and State Government. The RP and IPP then shall be

submitted for State‘s approval (e.g. under SDMA etc.) prior to

awarding contract for the civil works for project execution.

Also, the concerned Department will translate the resettlement

plan in the local language and disclose it to the affected people

and incorporate the results of the consultation, before State‘s

approval. The final RP will also be disclosed on the State

Government‘s website and the website of the concerned

Department.

Advisory Note: In addition to compliance with applicable laws

and regulations of the National and State Government, for any

current/future subprojects under the funding assistance of Multi-

lateral Funding Institutions (MFI) like The World Bank, ADB, etc.,

the respective MFI‘s latest applicable safeguards policy

statement/guidelines will have to be adopted for compliance of

above-mentioned safeguard documents, and approvals on

these documents will have to be taken from such MFIs.

4.7 Technical Criteria for Development of Sites/Subprojects

General

o General technical requirements that must be followed in selecting,

undertaking and developing the sites/subprojects for tourism

infrastructure are set out below:

(viii) Proposed works under the subprojects shall conform to each of

the safeguard frameworks (i.e. both environment and social);

(ix) Proposed works should give preference to the use of local

materials and labour;

(x) Building/streetscape/community market‘s designs, materials

and scale must be compatible to the local vernacular

architecture, and physical and cultural heritage landscape;

(xi) Proposed works should result in significant improvements to the

quality of the site environment and enable it to host tourists in a

safe, healthy/comfortable, and secure manner;

(xii) Design of environmental infrastructure and last-mile road

connectivity should comply to nationally-accepted

benchmarks and standards including the international best

practice of ―complete streets‖ concept which adopt green

infrastructure principles, have proper road-side drainage &



cross-drainage works and are protected with crash barriers (as

per actual requirements for the whole alignment), are inclusive

in nature for pedestrian use with appropriate spaces & surface

markings, are barrier-free built-environment compliant, and

have signage (regulatory, warning, directional, and information-

related) etc. and practice should be made preferably

complete the road in all respects prior to the road being

opened for public use (especially–presence of temporary

warning signage when partially under maintenance shall be

ensured; and immediately after any clearing of road

blocks/repair work is over, all the affected signage must be

restored at the earliest);

(xiii) Environmental infrastructure including water supply, drainage

and flood control, sanitation, and solid waste management

shall be provided where existing provisions are assessed to be

insufficient for both community and projected tourism use, and

should explore the options of adopting green infrastructure

practices; and

(xiv) Responsible organization exists or can be established to

maintain and operate the tourism assets/tourism infrastructure to

be created.

Utilities/Infrastructure Services

o The type of environmental-friendly utilities/infrastructure services

eligible at tourist attractions/destinations, gateway centres and CBT

village sites, and on main access roads between these (where

wayside facilities are proposed) include: water supply, sanitation,

solid waste management, drainage and flood control, and use of

renewable energy applications. Description of each type of

infrastructure and services, and the guidelines that should be

followed in selecting, undertaking and operating these subprojects

are set out below:

(i) Water Supply works will generally involve provision, upgrade,

rehabilitation and expansion of existing water sources, storage

facilities, pumping facilities, treatment systems, reticulation pipes

and metering, or the provision of new water supply systems. The

proposed works must not result in excessive abstraction of

ground water impairing ground water quality. The water supply

& distribution systems should incorporate water consumption

reduction measures (like low-flow/aerated-flow faucets and

low-flush cisterns), and be integrated with rain-water harvesting

system. Also, if any separate water supply subproject is



undertaken, the subproject should ensure availability of potable

water as per service level standards to the beneficiaries, with

medium-term planning horizon in any post-disaster case, and

long-term planning horizon in case of regular upgradation

cycle;

(ii) Drainage and flood control works and improvements will

include upgrading and maintenance of existing drainage,

provision and maintenance of solid waste traps, and primary

treatment of grey water where required, prior to release into

streams and rivers. The proposed works must cater to a

watershed or drainage zones and not individual drains, ensure

effective drainage of the tourist attraction and avoid any

impacts associated with flooding in downstream areas, or areas

not covered. Also, explore best practices for management of

storm water drainage through environment-friendly designs like

bio-swales, bio-retention ponds/trenches, permeable

pavements, green roofs, etc. including provision of rain water

harvesting systems.

(iii) Sanitation facilities and waste water management works

comprise provision, upgrade and expansion of public toilets,

septic tanks, septage de-sludging and disposal facilities, waste

water disposal and treatment systems or package sewage

treatment plants (in the case of large tourist attractions or

destinations). The proposed works must not result in pollution of

surface and ground water or cause overflows to and flooding of

surroundings, especially the tourist attraction. Also, best

practices like artificial wetlands may be explored, and recycling

of waste water for flushing & landscaping purposes for tourism

assets premises may be undertaken; and

(iv) Solid waste management will include waster segregation at

source, waste collection, sorting and treatment, recycling and

sanitary disposal as well as awareness programs and initiatives

designed to reduce waste at source and engage local

communities in livelihood based on waste recycling. The

proposed works must not result in nuisance due to noise, odour,

and influx of insects, rodents, etc., degradation of aesthetics in

the vicinity of the tourist attraction or impair downstream water

quality from release of leachate. Best practices like, energy

recovery through bio-digester systems where feasible based on

meeting the suitable temperature conditions should be

explored.



Tourist Support Infrastructure and Services

o Tourist support infrastructure and services are a key element in

ensuring that tourists are able to fully appreciate and enjoy tourist

destinations and attractions in a safe, convenient/comfortable and

healthy manner, thus helping to increase the attractiveness of the

tourist destinations, and thus length of stay and expenditure by the

tourists. Such infrastructure and services include: visitor information

and interpretation facilities; public toilets; signage, lighting and

landscaping; community markets; and CBT facilities and services at

tourist attractions/ destinations and gateway centres. Description of

each type of infrastructure and services, and the guidelines that

must be followed in selecting, undertaking and operating these

subprojects are set out below:

(i) Visitor information and interpretation facilities can range from

small-scale facilities like kiosks and booths located in public

transportation facilities such as airports/railway stations/bust

terminals, to information bays along roads connecting tourist

attractions, and tourist information rooms in mixed-use buildings,

medium-scale full-fledged stand-alone information and

interpretation centres (best practice of Visitor Center* concept)

located in gateway centres and at tourist attractions. Any larger

centres must be close to a public transportation facility, such as

airport, railway station and bus terminal linking multiple modes

of transportation, with adequate parking facility;

[* As per Uttarakhand Tourism Development Master Plan,

UNWTO, 2008 with regards to visitor centres it is mentioned that

―The Central Department of Tourism has developed the design

of a generic visitor centre model. The core area of the model is

about 100 sqm consisting of a hall of about 70 sqm with a

waiting area, refreshment centre, reception, and touch screen

display area; a caretaker‘s room and toilets. In addition, there is

a passage of 2 m wide around the core area with pillars all

around. The total area of the passage is about 96 sqm. The total

area of the visitor centre thus comes to196 sqm. the model will

work only if adequate revenue earning activities are integrated

with the centre so as to make it self-sustaining.

Visitor centres at the lowest level take the shape of a

computerized kiosk, placed in a traffic node or waiting hall for

providing information about tourist facilities available at

different tourist centres in the state. At the next higher level, a

visitor centre can take the shape of a way side amenity with



facilities for refreshments, information, purchase of souvenirs,

toilets, etc. At a still higher level, in major city centres and tourist

places visited by a large number of tourists, a visitor centre can

take the shape of a full complex covering various activities like

restaurants, museums, interpretation centres, souvenir shops,

booking counters for tourist facilities, bus/car parking, toilets etc.

The revenue earning activities to be included in each centre

will, however, depend on the specific characteristics of the area

and the aptitude of the persons managing the centres.]

(ii) Public toilets may range from simple pit latrines/waterless urinals

(assembled in pre-fabricated FRP booths) situated in remote

trekking areas to large stand-alone toilet blocks designed to

service the needs of a large number of tourists in gateway

centres, at wayside facilities, and at tourist attractions, and shall

be located in areas where most tourists transit. Public toilets must

not be located near water intakes or other water usage points,

or areas prone to flooding or water logging or on steep slopes.

Public toilets must be provided along with appropriate human

waste treatment arrangements, including connection to septic

tanks or sewage treatment systems as appropriate, to avoid

release of untreated sewage to the surroundings, especially the

tourist attraction, and pollution of ground water. The functional

design of public toilets and quality of fixtures/fittings should

ensure proper operation, low-maintenance requirements, and

hygiene. Like other tourism assets/infrastructure, the built-

environment of public toilets should also adopt vernacular

architecture and aesthetics;

(iii) Street Signage, lighting and landscaping are a key element in

ensuring that the environments of tourist attractions, destinations

and gateway centres are attractive, easy to navigate, safe and

secure. Their locations must be based upon a tourist circulation

development and management plan. The lighting can be

explored through use of renewable energy sources like solar

energy or through energy recovery integration if a bio-digester

system meeting suitable temperature conditions is used;

(iv) Community market is a key element in improving the linkage

between local communities and tourism, especially where

communities are unable to undertake CBT activities due to lack

of tourist attractions. Community markets are created in tourist

destinations and gateway centres so that locally-produced

handicraft and food can be sold there. The locations of these



markets must be adjacent to and/or within walking distance

from tourist information and interpretation centre in tourist

attraction, destination or gateway centre; and

(v) CBT facilities and services provide key opportunities to promote

CBT activities at the selected CBT sites in tourist destinations and

may include parking at trail heads, trails for trekking, campsites

and tourist rest houses, as well as equipment for adventure

activities such as boating, rafting, trekking, fishing and other

adventure sports, and participation in services like guides,

interpretation services, etc. The types of CBT facilities and

services to be provided must have a strong market support and

shall be based upon a CBT tourism development and

management plan prepared in close consultation with the local

community. Engagement of private sector partners who can

provide technical operational support and marketing inputs is

encouraged.

Tourist Destination Connectivity Infrastructure

o Connectivity is a key element in effectively linking tourist attraction

site(s) within a tourist destination and linking tourist destinations and

gateway centre(s) along a tourism circuit/sub-circuit. Eligible

infrastructure and services include helipad/heliports/helidromes

(which also provide capacity development for disaster

preparedness when integrated with multi-purpose halls/shelters for

facilitating any disaster-based/emergency evacuation, rescue and

relief services), last-mile connectivity improvements (by

roads/pedestrian paths), wayside facilities, and traffic management

infrastructure (circulation and parking). Description of each type of

infrastructure and services, and the guidelines that must be

followed in selecting, undertaking and operating these subprojects

are set out below:

(v) Helipads/heliports provide the opportunity to bring tourists to

more remote locations as well as provide emergency medical

evacuation services to enhance tourists‘ safety and security.

Post-disaster of June 2013, helidromes may be developed near

selective large tourism destination/urban centers as felt

necessary for disaster preparedness coverage needs, and those

already existing may be upgraded as felt required. The site shall

be finalized based on required land area availability,

obstruction analysis report for FATO alignment, and safeguard

screening (both environment and social) completed. Land

required for helipad/heliport/helidrome development, and



passenger and freight services should be made available by the

State. Willingness to operate regular services between the site

and main gateway centre(s) must be confirmed and

guaranteed with one or more private helicopter service

operators. These facilities should be developed as per

applicable norms & standards/regulations viz. DGCA CAR, ICAO

Heliport Manual, etc. Also, associated facilities with each

helipad/heliport/helidrome category as applicable like apron,

helicopter parking, taxiway, any hangar/terminal building,

approach road access & vehicle parking, surface markings,

fencing, and equipments like–windsock/lighting & any

navigational aid/fire-fighting and rescue & relief mechanism,

etc., should be provided; and an integrated amenity of

multipurpose hall/shelter within 500 m distance (as per land

availability) should also be thought off to strengthen disaster

preparedness capacity;

(vi) Last-Mile Connectivity Improvements include improvements to

last-mile road access to tourist attraction sites and provision of

road signage. Road upgrading must follow existing alignments

as far as practicable and must not lead to alteration of surface

water hydrology of rivers/streams/waterways. Where required to

protect the ecological sensitivity and to maintain the serenity of

the tourism site, last-mile connectivity may also be explored

through the provision of environment-friendly constructed

pedestrian pathways/trails;

(vii) Wayside facilities/amenities are essential where travel distance

between tourist gateway centre and destination, or between

two tourist destinations, is significant. Wayside facilities include

off and on-highway ramps, parking for cars and buses, public

toilets and restrooms with lockers, refreshment centre offering

food and beverage, information, fuel and vehicle

maintenance, etc. The location of wayside facilities must be

determined by the length of vehicle travel times between tourist

gateway centre and destination, or between two tourist

destinations (typically one for a vehicle travel interval of

between 45 minutes and 1.5 hours) as well as by ―through

traffic‖ requirements, if any, based on traffic flow studies. Land

required for the wayside facilities should be made available by

the State (if land transfer is required between two state

departments, the same should be done in a well-coordinated

and timely manner to achieve the purpose of tourism



asset/infrastructure creation in time). In principle, wayside

facilities should be operated on a PPP basis by the private

sector; and

(viii) Traffic management and transportation infrastructure,

especially circulation and parking, is essential for ensuring

attractive environment and quality experience for visiting

tourists. As a long-term measure integrated traffic management

plan and/or comprehensive mobility plan (CMP) should be

prepared for tourist attractions/destinations and gateway

centres to provide a framework for investments in traffic

management infrastructure. Traffic management infrastructure

such as multi-storey parking, which is well suited for PPP or

private sector investment, should be encouraged. Such parking

structure may also be integrated with one tourism information

kiosk/booth, one small cafeteria, and where felt required one

PCO booth as well (as access to all mobile networks may not be

available at all sites, especially in the upper reaches of the

Himalayan Region in Uttarakhand State).

Thus, it can be summarised that generally tourism cannot be promoted

without basic infrastructure especially, transportation and water supply.

Whilst, transport is key for travel, water supply is generally most essential for

any tourist service facilities. Accommodation establishments and

restaurants cannot exist without water. Other utilities and services are

important not only for visitors, but also for tourism service industries. Future

tourism development should be coordinated with existing infrastructure

capacities, and future infrastructure development plans. Types of tourism

development largely depend on the service level of these infrastructures.

4.8 Infrastructure Design Norms & Standards

4.8.1 Technical Standards and Regulations

Except where otherwise specified, materials and workmanship shall comply

with the requirements of the Central Public Works Department (CPWD)

Specifications, relevant Indian Standards (hereinafter referred to as IS)

issued by the Bureau of Indian Standards (BIS), safety manuals and National

Building Code (NBC). Also, GRIHA, an acronym for Green Rating for

Integrated Habitat Assessment, is the national rating system for green

building in India [GRIHA has been conceived by TERI and developed jointly

with the Ministry of New and Renewable Energy, Government of India. It is

a green building 'design evaluation system', and is suitable for all kinds of

buildings in different climatic zones of the country].



In the absence of any IS or specifications, equivalent International

Standard Specifications such as those issued by the International

Organization for Standardization (ISO) or British Standards (BS) or the

International Electro-technical Commission (IEC) or American Society for

Testing and materials (ASTM) or American National Standards Institute

(ANSI) or Japanese Industrial Standards (JIS) any other international

standard, specifications or Manual may be followed or proposed by the

developer at the sole discretion of the Executing Authority or as may have

been agreed in the Contract.

All standards and specifications, whether national or international, applied

and used shall be with latest amendments / correction slips. In the event of

conflict between any of these Specifications and the Codes referred, such

specifications shall be defined, prepared by the Developer and submitted

to the Executing/Implementing Authority for approval. The decision of

Executing/Implementing Authority in such case shall be final and binding

on the Developer.

In referring to the Standards, Specifications, Manuals, Guidelines, etc. the

following abbreviations are used but not limited to these only:

ANSI : American National Standards Institute

APA : American Planning Association

AWS : American Welding Society

AGMA : American Gear Manufacturer’s Association

AS : Australian Standards

ASME : American Society of Mechanical Engineers

ASTM : American Society of Testing and Materials

AWWA : American Water Works Association

BIS : Bureau of Indian Standards

BS : British Standard

CEN : Comité Européen de Normalisation or European Committee for Standardization

CPHEEO : Central Public Health Environmental and Engineering Organization.

CPWD : Central Public works Department

DIN : Deutsches Institute fur Normung

EN : European Standards

GRIHA : Green Rating for Integrated Habitat Assessment

ICOMOS : International Council on Monuments and Sites

IEC : International Electrotechnical Commission

IEE : Institution of Electrical Engineers

IEEE : Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers

ISO : International Organisation for Standardisation

IP Ratings/IP code : Ingress Protection Ratings

IRC : Indian Road Congress

IS : Indian Standard



JIS : Japanese Industrial Standards

MORTH : Ministry of Road, Transport and Highways

NBC : National Building Code

NEMA : National Electrical Manufacturers Association

NZS : New Zealand Standards

All materials, plant and equipment shall be new and all materials and

workmanship not fully specified herein or covered by an approved

standard shall be of such kind as is used in first class work and suitable to

the environment and climate in the project area. All details, materials and

equipment supplied and workmanship performed shall comply with these

Standards.

4.8.2Design Guidelines - Recommendations




Punjab, which integrates the aspects of visitor infrastructure & new

developments, and building use & space usage, certain design guidelines

related recommendations/suggestions are given below:

Design Objectives

o New Constructions

Control the type and character of development

Maintain hierarchy of space and usage sensitive to the heritage

environment

Contain the cultural spirit & historical aspects

Determine building guidelines (F.A.R., F.S.I., height regulations,

ground coverage, setbacks) sensitive to the historical character

of the place

Ensure quality visitor experience

o Visitor Amenities

To improve site environment conditions

To discourage public nuisance

o Visitor Facilities

To facilitate the by-functional activities of information, rest &

recreation etc.

To create a complete experience of visit

To create secondary activity support to the proposed facilities

o Parking and Access



The following design guidelines are intended as a reference to assist

the designer in understanding the project goals and objectives for

parking and loading design. These guidelines complement the

mandatory parking and loading regulations contained in the legal

provision by the local government. The design guidelines are

generally recommended and may be interpreted with some

flexibility in their application to specific projects. The specific

objectives are as follows:

to facilitate visitors on parking their vehicles and taking

pedestrian routes

to limit traffic to the edges of the historic site

to establish an overall movement structure within the site

to establish physical linkages with the significant parts of the site.

o Site Interpretation and Visitor Experience

The principal objective of site interpretation is to communicate the

significance of the site in clarity to the visitor and to enhance the

visitor experience in terms of comprehensive understanding of the

site, security within the site, take-back memory qualities, quality of

oral propagation, and identity of the site and clarity of actions. The

specific objectives are as follows:

to facilitate visitors to interpret the site easily

to integrate the fragmented components in the site

to provide clarity of services and location

to facilitate organized movements within the site

to harmonize and retain the basic character of the site

to minimize visual hazards to the visitors

to determine and establish the structure and purpose of visits to

the site

to design visitor-friendly environment

to provide readily accessible communicative information

to control the other factors like commodification issues,

branding issues, etc.

o Nature/Type of Use

To adhere to the broader objectives of the zoning plan which

delineates the kind of supporting activities

To enhance the existing use character of the place

To control commodification and commercialization

o Ownership/Occupancy/Tenancy

To see that the activity contributes to the larger social good



To control market speculation and provide equal opportunity

To adhere to the basic principles of site management and

control

o Sustainaibility

To overview that the quality condition of the site does not

deteriorate

To verify the long term investment

o Carrying Capacity

To restrict overburdened activities within the site

To ensure the safety of the visitors and minimize risks in disasters

To minimize wear and tear of the existing site fabric

o Landscaping and Open Spaces

To integrate the fragments of the built-environment to the visitor

experience

To enhance the foreground, background and viewing corridor

within the site

Design Principles

o New Constructions

The principle that must be followed while undertaking design of

any new building/feature in context of a historic setting would

be: to respect the past and embrace the present without

creating a false sense of history.

The setting and significant views of historic places must not be

compromised or obstructed by any new development or

construction.

Any new construction must not undermine the character of the

development/heritage zone.

Proposals for new development in the buffer zone of heritage

areas must respect the context of the historic place in

mass/volume, size, scale, form, materials, quality, grain, typology

and general character.

A new building in a historic area should be in harmony with, or

complementary to, adjacent historic buildings in terms of

pattern, rhythm, detail, style, scale, continuity and composition.

This does not indicate that new building designs should merely

imitate the features of historic buildings.

All new construction should conform to the prerequisite of

verification of archaeological remains prior to execution.



It is recommended that traditional building materials be used in

the construction of the new buildings.

Any new construction should not create problems of traffic,

parking, noise or environmental degradation in the historic area.

o Visitor Amenities

Visitor amenities should be planned at convenient intervals from

each-other and from the built resources.

The amenities should be planned keeping in mind the

anticipated number of visitor to the proposed functions.

The amenities should be appropriately located near access

points (such as parking lots, etc.).

The size of the structures for amenities should not be

overpowering.

The proposed amenities must be easily serviceable and should

follow the standards of operation.


The design and location of facilities must respect the cultural

value and aesthetics of the historic places.

Improving the overall visitor experience.


A well designed parking facility depends on a variety of

desirable elements, including:

Ease and convenience to all parkers;

The best utilization of available space;

Ease of access;

Good internal circulation;

Easy parking manoeuvres;

Public transit;

Safety; and

Aesthetics.

Vehicular access and approach roads must be supported with

sufficient parking areas that do not hinder views or interfere with

significant spaces of the historic places.

Spaces that have been demarcated for proposed public uses in

the historic places must be accessible to the general public at

designated timings.

The planning must cater to easy movement of the visitors to the

various cultural edifices of the places.



Universal access to handicapped persons, children and older

citizens.

o Site Interpretation and Visitor Experience

Aesthetically harmonized information points must be provided

within the historic places to facilitate a visitor-friendly

environment and to link the individual site to the other historic

places and the entire circuit. The interpretative material about

the place must not impact the features of significant value in

the historic place.

Respond to the cultural calendar and events linked to the site

and disseminate this information to the visitors.

The visual interpretation of the site should be responsive to the

chronology and itinerary of the visitor plans.

Site interpretation components should be compatible with the

character and architecture of the individual building as well as,

to the extent appropriate, with other historical edifices in the

place. This principle is particularly important for historic buildings

and places. The addition or replacement of visual interpretation

for buildings not having notably historic or architectural features

should still be carefully considered and be seen as an

opportunity to significantly enhance the appearance of the

buildings and their visualscapes.

To design a visitor environment, it is mandatory that the briefs of

design should necessarily attend to the upfront needs and

should not conflict to the visitor mandates.

Site Signage Guidelines

The manual prepared by UTDB regarding signage types, suitable

locations for their installation, etc shall be followed and other

departments are also encouraged to adopt the same.

The types of permissible signage within the zone are:

Historical Description Interpretive Signage: A sign

permanently attached to the ground on its own supportive

structure independent of any building or backing support.

This should describe the historical narrative of the significant

building or structure supported by plans, pictures, text on

history, event & personalities, narrative & notional linkages,

artwork conveying significance, project logo & title, tourist

circuit information, etc. This signage should be located near

the important building or site. The signage should

accommodate the logo & title of the public agencies and



sponsor logo & title of private entrepreneurs (if any selected

for maintenance). The signage should be in bi-lingual script

(Roman and Devanagri).

Integrated Site Facility Interpretive Signage: A sign

permanently attached to the ground on its own supportive

structure independent of any building or backing support.

This should describe the location of the visitor in the plan of

the entire site, highlight important places, locate visitor

services & amenities, features and facilities and businesses

and indicate the project title and logo. This signage should

be located near the important nodal points, entrance and

vantage points within the site. The signage should only

locate the public services and should not indicate any

private facilities. The signage should accommodate the

logo & title of the public agencies and sponsor logo & title of

private entrepreneurs (if any selected for maintenance). The

signage should be in bi-lingual script (Roman and

Devanagri).

Visitor Directional Signage: A sign erected on a pole, or a

pylon independent of any building, provided it is not

designed or used as a poster panel (billboard). This signage

should indicate the direction of the visitor movements

towards the important facilities and places of interest. The

signage should contain only textual information with

directions sign. This signage should be located at crossroads

of facilities, bifurcating points, parking and pedestrian

intersections within the site. The signage should be in bi-

lingual script (Roman and Devanagri).

Way-Finding Signage: A sign mounted on built structures or

freestanding on low-single post (below the eye level of

visitor). The signage should display the name and direction

of the particular facility located near to its installation place.

The signage should be placed at a point where the visitor

might end up in multiple facility zone and they should be

able to identify the further route to the specific service. The

signage should be in bi-lingual script (Roman and

Devanagri).

Historic Building Identity Signage: A sign painted on or

attached parallel to the wall or window of a historical

building or structure or horizontally projected from the wall of

the building supported by a bracket indicating the name of



the building. The authenticity of the name should be

determined from the Historic Property Inventory. The signage

apart from the name text should indicate the ownership &

maintenance agency logo and title. The signage should be

in bi-lingual script (Roman and Devanagri).

Visitor Amenities Signage: A sign painted on or attached

parallel to the wall or window of a building indicating the

name of the service or amenities like toilets, drinking water

fountains, rest rooms, handicap information, first aid facility,

rain shelter, phone charging deck, ramps, lifts, staircase, etc.

The signage should be in bi-lingual script (Roman and

Devanagri).

Community/Public Facility Signage: A sign painted on or

attached parallel to the wall or window of a building

indicating the name of the community service swimming

pool, lawns, gardens, open air theaters, skating rink, milk

booth, information kiosk, son et lumière, etc. The signage

should be in bi-lingual script (Roman and Devanagri).

Notification Signage: A sign permanently attached to the

ground on its own supportive structure independent of any

building or backing support. The signage indicates the

statutory act under which the building or the property is

notified by the government agency and statutory warnings

to the visitors and commoner about the banned action

which shall be prosecutable. The sign should be in

accordance to the government norms and code and the

language should be officially approved. The background

colour and content should as per the norms. The signage

should be placed immediately to the protected monument

or building and if it encompasses the particular expanse of

site than the location should be at the principal entrances.


Devanagri).

Statutory Signage: A sign required or specified by statute;

and a sign relating to safety of pedestrians, traffic, warning

signs, prohibition information, refraining activities, etc. The

sign should usually carry visual graphics according to the

conventions and should carry text information if only

required.

Business Directory Signage: A sign for a building in multiple

tenancies which identifies the name of the business and its



location within the building and does not contain any

product or other advertising. The signage should be in bi-

lingual script (Roman and Devanagri).

Cultural Event and Public Function Identification Signage: A

structure permanently attached to the ground, designed to

accommodate small bill directory signage posters and

public notices, the messages of which may be changeable

and variable. This type of signage may also fulfill the dual

function of an item of public artwork. This signage should be

located near to the place where the event is organized. The

use of scripts is liberal for such signage because of the

diversity of information it is supposed to disseminate.

Wall Mural Signage: A graphical or pictorial painted design

which does not convey a defined advertising message but

the artwork of significant activity or history of the place. The

use of text materials should be refrained.

Arcade Signage: A sign suspended from or attached to the

ceiling of an internal pedestrian area of public building or

museums or historic buildings. This signage should indicate

facilities, conveniences and attractions housed within the

building. The signage should contain name of the facility

with direction sign. The signage should be in bi-lingual script

(Roman and Devanagri).

Internal Display Signage: Generally display of goods,

services, or produce within a building or structure. The size of

such signage should not overawe objects or display. The

signage should carry catalogue no. if displayed in museum.


Devanagri).

Screen Signage: Messages, product or proprietary logos, or

other graphics printed or displayed on screens used in

association with outdoor seating or on service fronts private

or public such as vendor identity, shop identity, etc. The

design of the signage should be sensitive to the character of

the site and should not carry contrasting colours,

exaggerated brand logos or slogans. The information should

be in at least bi-lingual script either of the any two from the

above-mentioned list of compulsory script.

Temporary Sign: A sign displayed for a total of more than

five days but less than four months in any given year. This

signage is for caution or notice to the visitor for maintenance



and repair works carried out in the site. It should be portable

and non-descriptive and small in size. The signage should be

in at least bi-lingual script, Roman being compulsory.

Route/Trail Marker Sign: A sign a mainly used for tourist and

themed tourist routes. The signs are generally placed before

and after a major intersection and reinforced by route

numbering shields at intervals to reassure the visitor that they

are still traveling along the designated route/trail.

The types of signage non-permissible in the site are as following:

Awning fascia Signs: A sign on the fascia or return ends of

suspended awnings.

Above Awning Sign: A sign attached to and supported

above an awning.

Below Awning Sign: A sign attached to and suspended

below an awning.

Banner Sign: A vertical or horizontal fabric sign attached at

one or both ends.

Bunting: A string of small flags, or streamers strung in a line

from or otherwise attached to a building or other structure.

Cabinet Sign: A cabinet with a transparent face attached to

the wall of a building or structure for the display of

information within (e.g. Menus).

Portable Sign: A sign not on a public reservation and not

permanently attached to the ground or to a (sandwich

board) building or other structure.

Poster Panel (Bill Board): A structure either freestanding or

attached to a building designed to accommodate

standard Poster Panels, the message of which may be

changeable and variable.

Roof Sign: A sign erected on the roof or parapet of a

building with the highest point of its base not exceeding a

vertical distance of 300 mm above the roof or parapet.

Sun Blind Sign: A sign incorporated into the fabric or

structure of a sun blind or canopy situated over a door or

window.

Vertical Projecting Wall Sign: A sign projecting from the wall

of a building with a vertical dimension greater than or equal

to its horizontal dimension.



Outdoor Portable Sign: A freestanding sign indicating the

information of any activities and propagating ambush

marketing.

Non-permissible conditions for erection or installation of signage

are as follows:

If it obstructs the view, from a street or public place, traffic in

the same street or public place;

If it is likely to be confused with, or mistaken for, an official

traffic light or sign, or so as to contravene the Traffic Act, or

the Traffic Regulations;

On any building of which the stability is, likely to be effected

by the sign, as determined by the relevant authority; and

In any position wherein it unreasonably obstructs or obscures

the existing view from a place of a significant visual feature

such as manmade or natural.

While designing the permissible signage following criteria have

to be considered:

The aggregate number of signs on the building to be

minimized

Compliance with required objectives of this design guideline

Consideration of existing signs, including signs on buildings

and outdoor uses that constitute a sign

The dimensions and location of the sign

The content and style of the sign

The historic cultural values of the building

The impact of the sign on pedestrian and traffic safety

Compatibility with surroundings.

While designing a signage the designer has to follow the

conventions or standards of graphic design for the following

components:

Signage Design Process in consultation with the Client and

within the brief

Appropriate Signage Orientation

The type of Location & Mounting Considerations demanded

by the viewer

Viewing Distances in fore ground of the signage

Determining the Number of Sign permissible for business

Signage Legibility and viewing clarity for better

interpretation



Following standards of Layout & Minimum Clear Space

Standards for Reserved Layout of Design for handicapped

Preferred Colour selection for aesthetic purposes

The permissible and mandatory Script Type

Range of Wording and Typeface permissible in the layout

Defined Arrow Styles

Size of the signage that is not overwhelming

Shape of the signage whose design should not be out of

local context

Construction Material used in the signage should be

vernacular

Provisions for Authority or Endorsement within the layout

space

There should not be any distortion in the original style and

type of the significant Symbol or Logo

Standard Pictograms adhering to the international styles

should be used for conveying messages to the visitor

The Finish of the signage should consider the local

weathering conditions, ease of assembly and installation

and chances of vandalism.

Visual Improvement Guidelines

Visual improvements can be achieved through removal or

relocation of negative factors that affect the historic visual

character of the place, such as obtrusive hoardings,

unsightly poles, banners and overhead wires.

Any services that are above the grade such as overhead

water tanks, air conditioning units, plumbing lines, etc.

should screened within the parapet height of the proposed

building.

The advertisement billboards should not exceed the

allowable building heights and should comply to the

signage design guidelines.

No services should be visible on the face of the buildings

(proposed and existing).

The historic views and vistas should be clear of any service,

advertisement or any other obtrusive visual elements.

In a long-term measure, urban design guidelines should be

framed for the immediate neighbourhood of the historic site

devising control on signage, heights, usage and typology.



The outer and inner public areas in and around the historic

site should be designed in context to the cultural value of

the place.

No private brand promotion or campaigns should be

allowed in vicinity of the site.

Street Furniture Design Guidelines

The street furniture like garden benches, fountains, bollards,

children play equipments, waste bins, etc. should be placed

necessarily wherever required by the proposed function.

Necessary provisions should be made to accommodate

temporary structures (during festivals and special occasions)

in the ground surface so that the built environment is not

damaged or desecrated.

The street furniture should adhere to the anthropometrics

and ergonomic standards as prescribed internationally.

The design of the street furniture should have local design

influences and should not superimpose contemporary out of

context identity.

The street furniture should have 10% of its visual surface

reserved for advertisement for the entrepreneurs

maintaining and managing it.

The street furniture should be strong and non-portable but

should be modular or knock-down in assembly.

The furniture should be able to resist vandalism and

weathering conditions.

The materials used in the furniture should be vernacular and

non-contrasting to the historic character of the place.

Lighting and Illumination Guidelines

A coordinated and comprehensive lighting strategy is

recommended on a site-wide basis both to achieve a

hierarchy of lighting that makes the site more legible and

attractive at night, and to identify a palette of lighting

fixtures for all categories of appropriate lighting needs. This

lighting study should address energy efficiency to achieve

sustainability and power-smart objectives in a balanced

approach with heritage conservation standards.

Lighting should contain consistent, unifying elements

throughout the entire area. In specific areas, lighting can be

specialized to create a sense of identity as long as they

contain the unifying elements.



Lighting should be designed to accommodate the scale of

the user. Thus, there should be taller lighting fixtures for

vehicular traffic and shorter lighting fixtures for pedestrian

movement. For places with both types of movement,

multiple types of lighting should be used concurrently.

Wherever required the old lighting fixtures should be

retained and preserved that contribute to the overall historic

character of a building, site, or streetscape.

The maintenance and repair of lighting should be easy and

mechanical.

If replacement of a missing or deteriorated historic exterior

lighting fixture is necessary, replace it with a fixture that is

similar in appearance, material, and scale to the original, or

with a fixture that is compatible in scale, design, materials,

colour, finish, and historic character with the building and

the streetscape.

Introduce new site and street lighting that is compatible with

the human scale and the historic character of the district.

Consider the location, design, material, size, colour, finish,

scale, and brightness of a proposed fixture in determining its

compatibility.

Locate low-level or directional site lighting and motion

detectors with care to ensure that the light does not invade

adjacent properties.

It is not appropriate to introduce indiscriminate area lighting

in the historical areas.

It is not appropriate to introduce or eliminate exterior lighting

fixtures if doing so will detract from the overall historic

character of the building, site, or streetscape.

It is not appropriate to introduce period lighting fixtures from

an era that predates the structure in the historic district in an

attempt to create a false historical appearance, or that are

stylistically inappropriate or anachronistic.

It is not appropriate to diminish the historic character of a

site by introducing incongruous lighting, such as creating a

runway effect with multiple footlights along front walks.


The proposed building or land-use must be an unifying

experience to the historic site and should enhance the overall

visitor experience.



The use character should contribute to the overall vision for the

place.


While deciding the ownership/occupancy or tenancy it should

be mandatory evaluate the risks and responsibilities in

management of the entire site.

The credentials and public standings of the potential title

holders(s) should be verified in terms of an institutional set-up.

The potential title holder should be a nodal agency widely

representing it in the field of operation.

o Sustainability

The institution which shall be the potential owner should design

its resources optimally, neither undermining nor overburdening

the resources required for the specific activity.

The institution should have a hierarchical set-up to coordinate

efficiently with the other nodal agencies.

o Carrying Capacity

The carrying capacity of the activity or the site should be

calculated on basis of the peak visiting hours in ratio to the

available services within the site.

The optimal carrying capacity should define the optimal and

maximum intake of services and visitors to the site.


The landscaping should be done determining the character of

the buffer zone and the edge of the historic core zone.

The landscape should be fluid and permeable in nature and

should follow the principles of the historic layout.

Landscaping should be used as a buffering technique to soften

the impact of adjacent land-uses which may be different in

scale, use, or design.

Within the parameters of the unifying desert landscaping design

theme, distinctive landscaping for specialized sub-areas of the

cultural landscape is encouraged.

Landscaped areas should be designed with the objective of

minimizing long term water use. The use of native and drought

tolerant plant materials and water efficient irrigation practices is

recommended.



Signature vernacular plants and distinctive tree selection should

be used to enhance the special identity of the buffer area.

The other general design principles that could be considered are:

o As the vital means of presenting Uttarakhand‘s living heritage, a

number of amphitheatres should be constructed as the piece de

resistance of socio-cultural initiatives aimed at urban and cultural

renewal in towns of significant tourist interest. The design of

amphitheatres should be simple and the emphasis should be on

architecture in a vernacular idiom. Such initiatives can catalyse a

renewed effort at urban renewal centered on socio-cultural

occupational communities willing to give of their best to cultural

and tourism development in the state. (Uttarakhand Tourism


o Mobile phone companies should be instructed to share masts rather

than building one for each operator. The visual impact of each one

these antennae must be considered before a construction permit is

issued. Masts can be camouflaged quite well and even if one or

two additional repeaters have to be provided, the cost is negligible

if compared to potential losses from tourists staying away.


o For specific signage design & placement standards in the

tourism/recreational and cultural interest areas the provisions in

―Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD), 2009, USA

under Chapter 2M, Recreational and Cultural Interest Area Signs,‖

and as per ―Guidelines and Space Standards for Barrier-Free Built-

Environment for Disabled and Elderly Persons, 1998,‖ CPWD, GoI

can be followed as an international/national best practice

references.

Building Controls/Planning Directives or Guidelines, Placement, Design

Controls and Standards

o New Constructions

Location: The location of a building should respect the following:

Zoning Plan

Site conditions (topography, geology, vegetation,

archaeology)

Access to proposed activities.

Ground Coverage: The maximum ground coverage should not

exceed provisions in municipal/ local building bye-laws. It should

be calculated on area basis of the parcel of land designated to

specific functions.



F.A.R.: The FAR should be as per the local Municipal/State bye-

law for applicable land-use zone. The FAR should not exceed

the ratio as mentioned in the bye-laws.

Height: The height of a new building must not exceed the

mentioned bye-laws.

Setback: The minimum setback of the proposed building from

the outer extent of the historic structure or site should be 50 mts

and the front setback (from the main road) should not be less

than 10 mts. The side setbacks will be determined in

accordance to the existing bye-laws.

Provision of Basements: The minimum height of the habitable

(for non-residential and non-commercial use) basement should

be in accordance to the building bye-laws.

Projections: The maximum allowable projection including the

chajjas and balconies whether covered or non-covered should

not exceed the permissible bye-laws.

Typology: The character of the historical built within the site

determines the typology for the proposed building. Courtyard

type built (enclosed from all four sides), entrances from sides to

the built, any non-vernacular architectural features, overstated

architectural design, etc. will be considered detrimental to the

historic environment and hence might not be permissible.

Orientation: The orientation of the buildings should respect the

historic and contemporary cardinals of the site such as the axis

of site, the extents of site, the outer boundary edges, etc.

Construction Material: The construction material should be in

compliance to the traditional materials prevalent in the region

and should not place the aesthetic value of the built to be out

of place.

Colour & Texture: The finishes on the newly built structures should

be in compliance to the existing finishes used in the historic

structures. No contrast and deconstructive form of finishes will

be permissible

Grain Size of the Building: The grain size is inferred as the sizes of

the single footprint (maybe the part of the building proposed for

the activity) of the building. The maximum continuous elevation

length of the building should not exceed more than minimum

dimensions of any existing historical structure. The minimum

length will be determined by the standard requirements of the

functions.



Openings: All openings designed for the built should be

harmonious to the existing character. The maximum allowable

openings (door and windows) should be less than 25% of the

total elevation area (excluding the vendor fronts, shop fronts,

gateways and non-secured openings). There should be

minimum use of glazing in doors and windows, refraining the use

of aluminium or steel sections.

Circulation areas: The internal circulation of the proposed

building should not be less than 15% of the ground coverage

with clear access to every part of the building. The proposed

internal corridors should not be less than 2.10 meters. The outer

circulation area should be calculated on the following formula

and should not be less than the area calculated:

TCA = O1+O2+O3+O4…. + DOX x 2.10 (meters)

Wherein, TCA denotes the total area required for external

circulation, O1+O2+O3+O4…. denotes the summation of

shortest distance of main opening from the main entrance and

the shortest distance from the previous ones respectively. DOX

denotes the shortest distance of the exit from the building to the

exit from the site.

Controls on Ground Surface Treatments

Planning of Walkways & Pavements: While planning the

pavement and hard landscaped areas within the historic

site, the planning must address to the following needs:

The proposed walkways and pavements should preserve

the natural topology of the place.

The location of the pavement will be determined by the

kind of use and should be sensitive when planned in

proximity to the historical building.

The new planning should maintain the continuity of

historical context.

All walkways & pavements should be designed

accordingly for the handicapped persons‘ access.

Paving Material: The paving material should be impervious in

nature and should not be glazed. The material should be

vernacular to the site context and should not be in contrast

to the existing range of materials historically used in the site.

The appropriate materials used for paving can be stone,

marble, gravel and granite and the paving materials like



asphalt, PCC and glazed tiles should be refrained from

being used.

Paving Texture and Colour: The texture of the paved

material in a heavy pedestrian traffic zone should be

dressed and should have minimal vertical offsets or height

differences. Though at slow movements areas the textures of

the paving can be undressed but only if maintenance is

considered as the design parameters. No paving should be

glazed or polished in finish. The colours of the paving should

be from the available colour family of the historic built in the

heritage area.

Paving Patterns & Design: The pattern, configuration,

dimension and spacing of the paved areas should

contribute to the overall historic character of the place. The

design of the paving should highlight the important features

in the proposed design, should be in harmony with the scale

of the existing historical built and proposed built. The paving

should have appropriate kerbs and drainage facilities.

Maintenance and Repair: The material, design and layout of

the paving should be serviceable, easy to maintain and

carry out repair works. Paving in event areas of the site

should have provisions for crowd management equipments

such as pole holes, soft uncovered patches, hooks, u-

anchors, etc. wherever as demanded by the design.

Minimum Height Control: The minimum permissible height

from the immediate level of paving or ground surface should

not exceed 15 cm (excluding the substructure which should

not exceed 9‖ depth below the ground level). In case of

open amphitheatre the paving of the highest point should

not exceed 1/3rd of the total height of the proposed built.

All paving in vicinity to the historic structure should flush to

the original ground level of the building.

o Visitor Amenities

The placement interval of the public toilets and drinking water

fountains should not be less than 100 mtrs in the walkable area

in the plains, and not less than 10 mtrs in the walkable area

considering the hilly area context. The toilets and drinking water

facility should be appropriately placed near the transit zones,

alighting points, etc. The placement of garbage bins should be

maximum 125 feet c/c along walkways.



The toilet area should be determined by the number of visitors

to the activity area and separate provisions for men and

women (including the barrier-free friendly built-environment

compliant toilet) should be considered in the same toilet

complex/unit. The overall look and architectural character

should comply with the building controls mentioned earlier. The

toilets should have the urinals (including low-height ones), WCs,

bidets, Bathroom (as required), wash basins (including at low-

height), baby changing station, janitors, lockers, etc.

adequately provided in anticipation to the crowd numbers. The

drinking water fountain design should be sleek and avoid using

tank connections. The container size of the waste bin will be

determined according to the ergonomics and the volume of

waste collections.

For standards of design refer to the national/international

standards as practised by Municipal Authorities [e.g. ―Guidelines

and Space Standards for Barrier-Free Built-Environment for

Disabled and Elderly Persons, 1998,‖ CPWD, MoUAE, GoI as

national best practice, or one of the international best practices

being ―2010 ADA (American Disability Act) Standards for

Accessible Design‖ issued by Department of Justice, USA].

For waste bins the following directions should be considered:

Meant for waste collection at the important sites

Height and size as per the operational standards

The material assigned for the construction should be durable

and maintenance friendly

Its design and installation should be preventive to vandalism,

acute weathering, fire disaster, etc.

Should have provisions plaque for advertisements on two

sides

Easy to handle.


Except outdoor activities all other visitor facilities if not housed in the

proposed building design should be considered as standard and

isolated modular temporary structures in the form of kiosks to serve

the purpose (for open amphitheatre, refer New Constructions

clause as mentioned earlier). These can be planned as below:

The kiosks should be considered as the front office to the

proposed facility.

The kiosk shall have space capacities for information stationary

(brochures, promotion magazines, etc.).



It should have working space for two people.

It should be modular in design so that it can be installed at any

site facing any direction.

It shall have provisions for hoardings, advertisements, brand

image, etc.

The aesthetic appearance should be universally defined.

The services (like electricity supply, electrical and illumination

fittings, etc.) should be considered while designing.

The size of the kiosk should not be more than 3 x 3 meters.

The maximum permissible height shall be 2.5 m.

It structure should be of light-weight material with minimal use of

masonry.

The material assigned for the construction should be durable

and maintenance friendly.

Its design and installation should be preventive to vandalism,

acute weathering, fire disaster, etc.

It should be easy to assemble/disassemble for any relocation.


Number of Parking Bays: this should be determined from by

calculating the maximum traffic generated during the normal

and peak days by a particular activity.

While designing the parking, the Occupant Car Ratio (OCR)

and Visitor Car Ratio (VCR) have to be calculated and the total

area of the parking will be determined by the volume of visitors

and occupants to the site.

The paving material used for the parking should be impervious in

character. Paver‘s performance will depend on site conditions.

Soils should allow 0.5 inches per hour of percolation. Extremely

pervious soils, like sandy soil, may not provide adequate

treatment (depending on groundwater depth). Augment soil

that is too sandy with a peat liner.

While designing the parking the accessible parking spaces for

barrier-free friendly built-environment compliance should be

duly incorporated as per earlier mentioned

national/international best practice standards.

The parking design should be in accordance to the

performance required for storm water treatment keeping in

mind the installation and maintenance. Where feasible based

on land availability adopt green infrastructure principles for



storm water management using permeable pavements, bio-

swales to manage site overflows, etc.

The economics of parking design should be determined by the

optimal usage of kerb, gutter and storm water system which

adds to the cost of maintenance.

The specific design controls which should help the designer to

design the parking in context to the existing conditions in and

around the site are as follows:

Access to parking

Locate driveways with left-turn movements with special

attention to spacing driveways relative to the nearest

point of street traffic control, especially a signal.

Locate driveways with right-turn entry movements with

special attention to their location relative to street traffic

control. Such movements may impede through traffic.

Driveway design shall be directly related to the layout of

the parking area, amount of reservoir space (e.g. drive-

in service facilities), type of loading facility, circulation

pattern, building placement, and relation to the design

of the public street, traffic control devices, traffic

volumes and placement of other driveways.

Avoid locating entry and exit points where vehicles

entering or leaving the site would conflict with large

numbers of pedestrians.

The number of access points should be limited to only

those absolutely necessary to serve the property and to

minimize the number of potential conflict points with

public streets.

Driveway throat distance should be sufficient to minimize

any effect on traffic movements on adjacent streets.

Driveway distance shall be sufficient to prevent vehicles

from backing into the public street.

Access roads and aisles for parking should be kept at the

maximum distance possible from residential units.

Parking Lot Layout

When possible, segregate employee parking from visitor

parking. Employees will generally walk further from

parking to their work destinations than visitors will walk

from parking to the site. Reduced size parking spaces

may be allowed for long term employee parking. The

nearest parking bays/stalls (as per number of accessible



parking spaces derived as mentioned eralier) from the

entrance of the building should be earmarked for

barrier-free friendly built-environment compliance.

Larger parking lots should be broken into smaller parking

modules to reduce the size and visual impact of

expansive parking areas.

Minimize the number of continuous parking spaces

without interruption.

Consolidated parking lots for multiple uses are

encouraged where practical.

Parking shall be designed so that backing and turning

movements associated with parking layout will not

obstruct or conflict with traffic, either on- or off- site.

Parking lots shall be designed with adequate room to

allow vehicles to turn around within the parking lot and

enter an adjoining street in a forward direction.

Parking shall be provided with kerbs, wheel stops or other

barriers to prevent vehicles from extending beyond the

perimeter of the parking lot and to prevent vehicles from

contacting a wall, a fence or a sidewalk.

Access aisles should be designed to allow the user to

walk directly toward, rather than parallel to, the building

front.

End islands should be used to enhance the functional

and aesthetic qualities of a parking lot in the following

ways:

- Delineating on-site circulation roadways;

- Ensuring adequate sight distance at the intersections

of the parking aisles and driveways;

- Defining the area and geometry of intersections of

parking aisles and driveways;

- Protecting the vehicle at the end of a parking bay;

and

- Providing aesthetic enhancement of the site design.

Designing Parking Stalls

In cultural site parking lots, parking stalls should be

located to ensure the sanctity of the place by providing

buffers, e.g. fences, walls or landscaping, from the

effects of engine noise, automobile headlights and

vehicle fumes.



Whenever possible all parking stalls should be aligned

with the same orientation. Having one section at right

angles to another tends to create confusion and can

produce accident-prone intersections.

Loading in Parking Area

Loading and unloading facilities shall take place on site

and not on public right-of-way. There shall be no

backing of vehicles onto the public right-of-way from

loading areas.

Loading areas should be screened from entrances and

other highly visible areas of the site. Adequate turn

around and backing areas shall be provided without

disruption of circulation or parking facilities.

Lighting in Parking Area

All parking lots and loading facilities shall be shielded so

that substantially all the directly-emitted light falls within

the property line.

No illumination is to be designed or used which produces

direct, incident or reflected light that interferes with the

safe movement of motor vehicles on public streets,

including:

- Any light fixture not designed for street illumination

that produces light that could interfere with the

operation of a motor vehicle;

- Any light that may be confused with or construed as

a traffic control device; or

- Any animated, flashing or changing intensity lights,

except for temporary holiday displays.

Pedestrian System in Parking

A system of interior pedestrian paths or sidewalks

integrated with the parking lot should link the different

parts of the site with one another and with transit stops.

Provide clearly discernible pedestrian walkways where

there is adequate vehicular sight distance. The use of

textured or coloured pavement and signage should be

used.

Transit Integration

Large scale institutional usage should provide transit

access as near as possible to the main entrance to the

facility.



Transit stops should be designed as an integrated

component of the site and feature pedestrian amenities

and shelter. Secured transit information centers or kiosks

with bus routes and schedule information should be

provided.

When parking areas separate the front or main entrance

to the facility from the transit facility a separate

pedestrian walkway or sidewalk should be provided.

Bicycles and Two-Wheeler Facilities

Bicycle and two-wheeler parking facilities should be

located outside of a vehicular or pedestrian way and be

protected and separated from motor vehicle traffic and

parking lots by either a five-foot separation distance or a

curb or other physical barrier.


made out of a durable and strong material, be

permanently anchored to the ground and be designed

so as to allow bikes to be locked to it.


sufficiently illuminated.

Landscaping

Precast and other masonry planters may be used to

provide for some buffering for existing parking areas.

Landscaping should be used to enhance the safety of

parking lots by guiding the circulation of cars and

people and by ensuring that the driver's vision is

unobstructed.

Use landscaping to control access to parking lots, to

make traffic diverters prominent and to direct the flow of

traffic within the lot.

Parking lots should be screened from surrounding public

streets, sidewalks, parks and other public properties.

Berms, walls, fences, plants, planters or similar means

should be used to create the parking lot screen.

Whenever structures such as walls or fences are used to

create a screen, plants should be located on the sides of

the structure which can be seen from surrounding streets,

sidewalks, parks and other public properties.

All areas within the perimeter of parking lots not used for

parking, loading, circulation, transit or pedestrian

facilities should be landscaped to minimize the feeling of



expansive hard surfaced areas, to improve the parking

lot appearance. Landscape design shall provide for

adequate plant aeration and traffic safety.

Plant materials should be placed on islands, entry drives,

and pedestrian walks, and along end islands which

separate parking from driveways.

Two feet at the end of landscape islands should be left

unplanted. The end points of islands are often run over

by cars. The use of cobbled stone, patterned concrete,

or brick pavers should be considered in these end areas,

considering the surroundings context.

Protect the root zones of trees at maturity by retaining a

planted area encompassing the drip line.


The proposed use character should be homogenous to the

historic character of the place or to the existing predominant

non-detrimental activities within the site.

The proposed use character should adhere to the minimal

change in current activity structure of the site.

Planning for pure commercial or private purpose should be

discouraged.

Should comply with the public and universal character of the

place.

Should be theme based cultural, social, recreational or

educational activity with complementary usages for the visitor

purpose.

Should be a public attraction or magnet or gateway to the

historical precinct.

The proposed usage should act as a transition activity between

the existing urban structure and the historical precinct parting

memorable experiences to the visitors.

The usage should create a sense of place and strengthen its

linkages to the other cultural edifices of the city.

Should have lively, walkable areas, pedestrian-friendly

environment and dynamic use.


The space should be leased and not awarded freehold titles.

The potential owner should be a public institution, semi-

government, quasi government, community-based organisation



or any other state level initiative (such as arts and crafts

organisation, cultural forums, trust, etc.)

The potential owner should not be allowed to sub-lease the

space or hand it to a tenant for a period.

The potential owner should adhere to the legal framework of

the custodian of the site and not to its own memorandum.

The owner should be allowed to promote the institutional cause

and should not be allowed to physically expand the

infrastructure.

The owner should not use the space as their administrative

centre and should limit to tangible activities of common interest.

o Sustainability

The space or building or activity planning or design should

address the optimal resource usage and should refrain from

over employment of mechanical and human resource.

The revenue generated by the activities should be sufficient

enough for disbursing salaries to employees, incur recurring

expenditures, pay for maintenance and management of the

site, and invest in further planning for the activity.

o Carrying Capacity

For visitors the parking, circulation and access should be

calculated as per the guidelines mentioned earlier.

For equipments, machines, installation, etc. the time span of

pauses to the services should be calculated accordingly.

For public amenities the adequate stalling facilities should be

calculated.

For rush hours the crowd management method should be

devised.

The number of visitors to each historic place should be

managed keeping in mind the mechanical wear and tear,

structural stability and impact on the micro-environment within

the buildings. The environmental impact of visitors should be

continuously monitored.

[For site carrying capacity calculations method, a reference could

be made to the “Guidelines for Ecotourism in and around

Protected Areas (Draft)” introduced by MoEF dated 02 June 2011.]


For roads and pathways asphalt should not be used and local

stone paving be used as the surfacing for all roads within the



entry and historic core zones and for major roads within the

buffer zone. Stabilized gravel or light stone paving should be the

surfacing of all minor roads providing access. Unit pavers or

other special paving treatments should not be used within

roadways to ensure that the current simple, consistent

treatment is maintained.

For kerbs, new curbing should be minimized within the site.

Where curbing is used it should be the traditional, low barrier

form in plain concrete rather than rolled to minimize its surface

area. When roadway work is undertaken, consideration should

be given to the feasibility of removing curbing in lower traffic

areas and to removal of related catch basins and associated

sub-surface piped drainage in favour of directing surface water

into ditches or swales.

For paths, continued use of gravel or local stone surfaces for

most pedestrian pathways is recommended. Crushed local

aggregates with stabilizer to provide good binding and

reasonably smooth surfaces, particularly in consideration of

universal access, should be used.

For plazas, while recognizing that plazas and courtyards should

relate to the design and materials of the building with which

they are associated, a consistent overall palette of paving

materials is desirable to bring cohesiveness to the site. Preferred

paving materials for plazas and courtyards include well detailed

concrete and stone, preferably in large modules.

For parking lots, generally parking areas on the site should be

dispersed into small discreet pockets wherever possible and

sited to the side or rear of the front façade of buildings. Where

large parking lots occur, their visual impact should be mitigated

with extensive plantings of trees. One appropriate design

expression is a regular planting on a grid that references the

orchards that once grew as demonstrations within the core

area of the Farm that would give visitors a sense of parking

within an orchard. Care should be given to minimizing the

extent of impermeable paving, including consideration of

permeable pavers and grass-pave systems, and to the removal

of any parking lots that are not needed due to building

demolition or changes in use. Surface drainage from parking lots

should be managed with reference to sustainable best

practices.



For drainage, wherever possible, runoff from hard surfaces

should be directed into areas of soft landscaping to achieve

sustainability objectives and avoid curbs and drains.

For walls, should be used only within the entry and core portions

of the Buffer and should be made of limestone, keeping with

the existing walls within the landscape. Low walls may be suited

to seating and signage applications.

For fences, a fence detail should be refined that references

historical architectural forms and uses lightweight iron grills but

with a more accurately detailed post. This type of fencing is

cost-effective and appropriate to the cultural landscape,

particularly within the buffer zone and at the interface between

the support zone and the core zone. Fences should not be

introduced in the entry zone and the interface between the

entry zone and the core zone, where they were not present

historically. The only exception would be immediately adjacent

to some of the buildings, where there were some board fences

designed to a higher level of finish and detail. These historic

precedents could be used for small areas of fencing adjacent

to buildings in the core.

For type and location of street trees, all trees located on the

edge shall be of deciduous species. The minimum caliper size

allowed to be planted shall be 4" and shall have a decorative

steel fence installed around the tree for protection. The

decorative fence shall have a powder coated finish and shall

be at least 42" above finished grade in height. Trees must be

placed a minimum of 30‘-0" and a maximum of 45‘-0" apart. This

will allow for the proper maturation of the tree. Trees should not

conflict with the street lighting.

For landscape trees, landscape buffer trees may be a

combination of different varieties. If deciduous trees are used,

at least 50% of the deciduous trees must be ornamental

flowering trees. The remainder of the deciduous trees may be a

non-flowering over story species. No conifers will be allowed in

the buffer zone area

For sidewalk and cross walk width, paver sidewalks should be

12‘-0" minimum width from the face of the building to the back

of the existing curb. Paver crosswalks shall be 8‘-0" in width and

have a 1‘-0" wide band of concrete on either side. Total width

of crosswalk shall be 10‘-0". Where possible, widen sidewalks to

create small plazas for seating and fountains.



For pedestrian cueing areas, to encourage safety for pedestrian

traffic across Main Street, there should be control to crosswalks

with the addition of cueing areas. Cueing areas bring the curb

and sidewalk out from behind the parking lanes to the drive

lanes. This provides a better view for pedestrians to see the

vehicular traffic. In addition to the cueing areas, a crosswalk

made of pavers adds a definable area for pedestrians to cross

Main Street. Both the cueing areas and crosswalk will also add a

traffic calming affect to vehicles.

For plant beds and plantings locate plantings in traditional areas

of the site.

For fencing, maintain traditional fence lines where they existed

and preserve historic fences in their original location.

o Environmental Engineering/Utility Serivices

Drainage and Rain Water Harvesting

The design of the new proposal should analyse the existing

natural conservation areas within the site, determine

ecological boundaries, and follow principles of site planning.

The proposed built-enviornment and new development

should complement the existing natural drainage and

watershed areas within the site. It shall duly integrate the

green infrastructure principles of international best practices.

Under no circumstances areas long primary drains be

encroached-upon for any construction.

All new buildings should have appropriate rainwater slopes

in the terraces, gutters, and collection chamber and

settlement tanks within the area of the site boundary.

The proposed built-environment activity should not cut

across the natural slopes and contours of the site.

All ground surface treatments should have adequate slopes

and gutters at the edges. Even landscaped areas and

pedestrian pathways shall be designed for proper storm

water drainage management.

Sewage Disposal

The proposed activity should have appropriate sewage

disposal scheme and should connect to the city level

feeder. While in the hilly area context, utilising the sloped

terrain conditions the gravity-flow based environment-

friendly intervention of bio-digester systems (with/without

energy recovery as felt required) may be considered for



installation. Also, in plains/urban areas wherein if sloped

terrain is not available, then pumping-station based bio-

digester systems with energy recovery may be installed for

cluster-based developments (viz. tourist accommodation,

staff accommodation, tourism office, tourist information

center or tourist convenience center, etc.).

The sewage disposal system should have intermediate

maintenance points accessible to man force or suction

pumps, wherever fest required.

The waste water should be separated from the sludge and

the waste water should be treated for irrigation purposes

only.

No sewage lines or pipes should be visible above the

average grade (ground level) of the site.

No sewage connections should pass through and through

beneath the proposed development.

No sewage collection chamber should be left uncovered.

The sewage disposal system planning should follow the invert

levels of the site.

Electrical Safety and Network Design

The proposed activity should appraise the current electrical

supply system and network in the site.

The proposed activity should calculate the existing and

peak loads and plan for the same. Wherever feasible, use of

renewable energy resources should be resorted to (e.g. solar

photovoltaic panels, energy recovery from bio-digester

systems, etc.)

The proposed electrical network should not be visible above

grade.

No electric poles should hinder or obstruct view of the

proposed or existing building.

No cable should hang or be fitted to the elevation of the

building.

The proposed network should be risk and hazard free.

Fire Safety

Fire safety and emergency vehicular access (EVA)

requirements must be adhered to in a sensitive manner,

without causing any impact to the significant values of the

place. Requirements of National Building Code (NBC) should

be strictly followed in this regard.



The certain specific building materials/controls already being adopted

for construction/reconstruction works of tourism sector, under UEAP, are:

o Foundation Concrete

For the purpose of concrete work, the provisions of IS 456:2000 with

respect to Table 5 for Minimum Grade of Plain Concrete and

Reinforced Concrete read in conjunction with Table 3 for

Environmental Exposure Conditions, must be strictly followed at the

minimum, when planning for concrete design at a site. The found

structure design upto the plinth level shall duly meet the site

condition requirements as per the outputs of topographical survey

and go-technical investigation report.

In case the foundation is exposed to water and the superstructure is

light-weight (e.g. jetty, watch-tower etc. sited in environmentally

sensitive areas), alternative materials that are environment-friendly

may be used (e.g. seasoned wood in foundation and bamboo-

based products in wall/roof panels of superstructure).

o Superstructure Materials

The Himalayan Area of Uttarakhand State is prone to floods, cloud

bursts and other natural calamities. The area is also subject to cold

climatic conditions and for many places there is no road

connecting the site. The conventional structures for shelters etc.

need time, water, labour, regular supply of raw material etc. Thus,

light-weight pre-engineered buildings (PEB)/pre-fabricated (Pre-

Fab) building construction using FRP Panel / Hybrid (PUF Panel) with

steel frame / LGFS Structures & Panels, etc. are proposed through

these infrastructure development guidelines, and also use of such

structures is already have been recommended & approved

through Sub-Project Appraisal Reports (SARs) under UEAP.

A comparative table of characteristics of FRP & Hybrid panel with

conventional structure is listed below:

Characteristics Conventional

Structure FRP Panel Hybrid (PUF Panel)

Movability None Truck carries 1300

Sq.ft

Truck carries 1100

Sq.ft

Insulation Required Not required (28+

R factor) Semi required

Earthquake

Proof None

Flexible due to

light Panels None



Characteristics Conventional

Structure FRP Panel Hybrid (PUF Panel)

High Altitude

Erection Difficult

Ideal Ready home

and quick Easy

Maintenance 10% Annual 0% Approx. 10% Annual

Erection Time 2-3 months 4-6 hours 15-30 days

Dismantling None 3-4 hours None

Repair if

damaged Difficult

Ready home

fiberglass repair Yes

Energy

Efficiency Low

30% more due to

shape & insulation Low

Corrosion

Resistance No Superior Reasonable

Source: SARs for FRP & Hybrid Huts in Garhwal and Kumaon Region, UEAP

Note: In case Glass Wool or Rock Wool is used as an alternative insulation material after

due assessment of their properties vis-à-vis PUF material in the site-specific context (e.g.

climate condition, building usage, etc.), the variation in their respective densities would

relatively affect the weight requirements of movability/cartage of Panels with Glass Wool

or Rock Wool Insulation to the site.

Other general requirements as per the above-mentioned SARs,

when using such building materials is as below:

(b) FRP & Hybrid Huts/Shelters

Panels of PUF insulation bounded by FRP Laminated Sheet

on both sides for FRP Huts offers healthy with, hygienic and

supporting good living standards, durable in high altitude

and snow bound regions, while Panels with PUF insulation

sandwiched between Pre-coated GI Sheet for Hybrid Huts

also offer suitable living environment at relatively lower

altitude regions of the Himalayan Area.

Easy to be assembled as well as disassembled.

Should have resistance in all weather conditions (± 40 °C or

better).

Should be possible to re-use them within its minimum service

life.

Easy to maintain and low-cost effective.

Should meet ISO 9001: 2000 standards, and respective

IS/BS/ASTM etc. standards.

Panels should be thermally insulated (R-28 or more).

Should be light-weight, high flexural strength and impact

resistant.

Surface should be ideal for painting/coating/laminating, if

desired.



Can be nailed, screwed, drilled, glued, sawn, tapped and

welded.

Should have low thermal conductivity.

Should be resistant to chemical substances and non-

corroding.

Should be waterproof, termite proof and fungal proof.

Warranty period should be at least 10 years or more.

Should be installed and transported at site by the

company/manufacturer.

Weight of any panel shouldn‘t exceed 50 Kg so that it can

be handled easily by workmen without any mechanical

support.

The shelters are 100% opaque to make it suitable for living.

The shelters once erected have a high load bearing

capacity.

The shelters should be inert in nature: Non-reactive to acids

and alkali.

The Shelters are easily re-locatable without any loss to the

shelters. (c) LGFS Structures/Panels

Light-Gauge Steel Frame System-based structure/building

weighs less than the Reinforced Cement Concrete buildings

in the same size, therefore the load affecting the building

during earthquake is less which increases the LGFS

structure‘s Earthquake Resistance.

Internal & external wall covering including the roof and floor

are covered with high density boards such as Cement Fiber

Boards or OSB (Oriented Stranded Boards) which wraps the

structure and also provides the tensile strength.

The panels are light-weight and can be erected quickly on

the site.

Panels should be thermally insulated.

This prefab structure comes with various options for the

external wall finishes depending on the site designs, usability

and durability such as Aluminium Cladding Panels (ACP),

Stone Veneers, etc.

The prefab structures come with various options for the

roofing depending on the site designs, usability and

durability such as Stone Coated Roof Tiles, GI Pre-coated

Sheets, etc.

Flooring in LGFS structures can be as Laminated Wooden

Flooring or in Vitrified Tiles as per site requirement; while in

toilets like in conventional structures Ceramic Tiles can be



easily used. These are put in place using adhesives over the

base panel of Cement Fiber Board laid over the steel frame.

This steel framing system comes with standard holes for the

Electrical and Plumbing pipelines. The procedure is same as

traditional construction. All the pipelines run through the

center of the structure thus making it a conduit. No Electrical

or Plumbing pipelines are visible after the steel walls are

covered with boards giving the same look and feel of

traditional construction.

No maintenance is required for the upkeep of LGFS

structures.

Should meet ISO 9001: 2000 standards, and respective

IS/BS/ASTM/AS/NZS etc. standards.

Warranty period should be at least 50 years or more.

The LGFS structure can withstand high pressure, doesn‘t get

spoilt in water/acids/alkali. These shelters don‘t need any

maintenance as well, like painting, seepage etc.

The LGFS structure-based shelters can easily be moved in

cases of emergency. The light panels (<50 kg.) can easily be

transported by men or helicopters.

Note: In general, whether its conventional construction or modern

materials as above, the layout of tourism accommodation

assets/other supporting visitor infrastructure should incorporated

duct system for laying utilities on vertical surfaces, to attain proper

visual aesthetics. Also, to conserve water, an attempt to reduce

consumption of water should be made by adopting sanitary fixtures

that support low-impact development (e.g. use of low-

flow/aerated-flow faucets, low-flow cisterns, etc.)

As mentioned earlier in the above-mentioned visitor infrastructure, certain

other high-end tourism assets that may need to be developed as part of

products in tourism sector are Resorts. As per ―An Integrated Approach to

Resort Development: Six Case Studies,‖ by Edward Inskeep and Mark

Kallenberger in A Tourism and the Environment Publication, World Tourism

Organization, published in 1992, it states ―Sustainable tourism development

is one of the major issues facing the world‘s travel and tourism industry in

the 1990s. Not only are tourists becoming more concerned about different

froms of environmental pollution in their holiday destinations; there is also a

growing number of tangible examples of environmental pollution

translated into a loss of tourism income. … The costs are impossible to

quantify, but they are enormous. And it is already clear that tourists are



beginning to shun operators and destinations that have received bad

publicity over their environmental record. Leading tour operators

themselves are increasingly appointing Environmental Advisors to monitor

the environmental practices of hotels and resorts to avoid losing valuable

clients.‖ As per the said document, the following is further recommended in

general to be followed when planning and developing resorts:

―As far as new resort development is concerned, the problems are perhaps

less acute–but only on the condition that concerted efforts are made on

the part of both the governments and the operating sector to ensure an

integrated approach to the resort‘s development. Only in this way will the

development be sustainable and avoid placing undue strains on the

carrying capacity of the resort or the destination.

An ‗integrated approach to resort development‘ implies the controlled

planning and implementation of resort projects in order to achieve a

balanced development that satisfies economic, environmental and social

objectives. In general, it implies to long-term project development–at times,

over a perid of many years–and constant monitoring and control at the

different phases of development ensure that the basic concept can be

adapted to changing circumstances and market demand. Application of

specific land-use, development and design standards is also necessary to

maintain resort‘s character and quality.

The success of an integrated tourist resort depends on a number of factors.

These include a good transportation infrastructure with easy access to and

within the resorts for guests and staff, and architectural design that blends

into the surrounding natural environment, reflecting traditional local

designs and using as many local materials as possible. Specific natural

geographical attractions should be preserved and incorporated into the

resort wherever feasible, and it needs adequate utility services, such as

water supply, electric power, telecommunications, sewage and solid

waste disposal systems.

Successful integrated resorts are also planned within the framework of their

regional environmental, economic and socio-cultural setting, as well as

overall developmental policies and plans, so that they are well related to

the region.

Carefully planned and properly implemented integrated tourist resorts can

bring substantial economic and social benefits, while also minimising those

environmental, socio-economic and marketing problems often associated

with uncontrolled tourism development.



A high quality of tourism product and services is essential from the outset,

and this should be maintained through continued good management and

application of development and operational standards.

Resort development must take into consideration employee training, and

the provision of housing and community services for the employees and

their families. Special organisational structures with effective leadership and

a competent technical staff are necessary to develop and manage

resorts. A high level of coordination is required between the manty different

agencies involved in a resort‘s development, as well as between the public

and private sectors.

Adequate financing is required for the resort and related regional

infrastructure, which can be expensive to develop, as well as for the

superstructure of accommodation and other facilities. Resorts need to

provide a wide range of tourist facilities, attractions and services, both

within the resort environment and in the surrounding region, in order to

maintain visitor satisfaction levels and diversify market sources.

Detailed planning of the area around the resort, or even the entire region

in which the resort is located is necessary to guide future development that

may take place as a result of the resort‘s impetus to tourism growth.‖

Further to the above-mentioned general recommendations, it is suggested

that the number of resorts in a rural area or cluster of villages near a

destination be developed in a controlled manner so as not to adversely

affect those opportunities that could provide direct economic benefits to

village residents viz. owning & operating Home Stays (by an independent

family or if community-based); and due diligence be ensured for type of

access to be provisioned when considering accessibility in eco-sensitive

areas (e.g. pedestrian pathways/bridled trails with suitable gradient for

walkable distances of minimum 500 meters i.e. equivalent to about 7-

minutes‘ walk or as per applicable buffer distance on case-by-case basis

may have to be preferred from the road end-cum-parking area to reach

the built-environment of the resort‘s facility units instead of extending a

bituminous road till each unit), availability of water for any consideration

required to limit the resort size/features (e.g. features that consume lot of

water for luxurious use beyond usage in accommodation units &

landscaping may have to be avoided in the resort development proposal

if local water resource availability is not sufficient and haulage of water

through vehicular means contributes to air & noise pollution in such eco-

sensitive areas), etc.

Planning and Engineering Design



o Uttarakhand State falls primarily in seismic zone V and some parts in

seismic zone IV and thus all areas in the State are considered prone

to earthquake hazards. The State shall ensure that the BIS building

codes for these zones have been adopted and are rigorously

enforced by the ULBs/Panchayats and PWD/District Administration.

All new construction (single- or multi- storeyed) in the Government

sector in these areas for tourism infrastructure integrated with

disaster preparedness infrastructure measures must conform to the

BIS code for earthquake resistant framed-structure design. All new

construction in Private sector under Tourism Sector (i.e. tourism

assets/supporting tourism infrastructure) in Uttarakhand State must

conform to the BIS code for earthquake resistant framed-structure

design, without any exception to number of storeys proposed

during process of approval from ULBs/Panchayats, and for

registration under Department of Tourism (through

UTDB/GMVN/KMVN) for operating such tourism services. The State

departments participating in creation of tourism assets/tourism

infrastructure directly (UTDB/GMVN/KMVN) or as an assisting body

(RDD/PWD/RES/UPRNN etc. including for rural areas) must follow the

criteria proposed by NDM Division, MoHA, GoI10 in 2004 for

―Earthquake Prone Areas‖ recommended and reproduced

herewith:

f) Intensities of VII or more on Modified Mercalli or MSK intensity

scale are considered moderate to high areas under seismic

zones III, IV and V as specified in IS 1893. Therefore, all areas in

these three zones will be considered prone to earthquake

hazards.

g) In these zones the areas which have soil conditions and the

level of water table favourable for liquefaction or settlements

under earthquake vibrations will have greater risk to buildings

and structures which will be of special consideration under Land

Use Zoning.

h) Under these zones, those hilly areas which are identified to have

poor slope stability conditions and where landslides could be

triggered by earthquake or where due to prior saturated

conditions, mud flow could be initiated by earthquakes and

10

Volume I Report (Proposed Amendment in Town and Country Planning Legislations; Regulations for Land

Use Zoning; Additional Provisions in Development Control Regulations for Safety; and Additional Provisions

in Building Regulations/Byelaws for Structural Safety–in Natural Hazard Zones in India), NDM Division,

Ministry of Home Affairs, Government of India, 2004



where avalanches could be triggered by earthquake will be

specially risk prone.

i) Whereas, earthquake hazard prone areas defined in ‗a‘ above

are identified on the map given in IS 1893 to small scale and

more easily identified in the larger scale state wise maps given

in the Vulnerability Atlas of India, the special risky areas as

defined in ‗b‘ and ‗c‘ above, have to be determined

specifically for the planning area under consideration through

special studies to be carried out by geologists and geo-

technical engineers.

j) If an active fault trace is identified by GSI (Geological Survey of

India), a structure for human occupancy should not be placed

over the fault trace and must be set back by a minimum of 15

m on either side of fault trace.

o The provisions proposed by NDM Division, MoHA, GoI as mentioned-

above in 2004 including for ―Flood Prone Areas‖ are recommended

to be followed in Uttarakhand State (as reproduced herewith):

d) The flood prone areas in river plains (unprotected and

protected by bunds) are indicated in the Flood Atlas of India

prepared by the Central Water Commission and reproduced on

larger scale in the state-wise maps in the Vulnerability Atlas of

India.

e) Besides the above areas, other areas can be flooded under

conditions of heavy intensity rains, inundation in depressions,

backflow in drains, inadequate drainage, failure of protection

works, etc.

f) Whereas, the flood prone areas under ‗a‘ are identified on the

available maps as indicated, the areas under ‗b‘ have to be

identified through local contour survey and study of the flood

history of the planning area. Such studies may be carried out

through Survey of India or local survey teams, and by reference

to the Central Water Commission and the departments of the

State or UT dealing with the floods.

o Since the Uttarakhand State located in the young Himalayan

mountain range, the provisions proposed by NDM Division, MoHA,

GoI as mentioned-above in 2004 including for ―Land Slide Prone

Areas‖ are recommended to be followed in the State (as

reproduced herewith):

d) While it is known that most hilly areas are prone to

landslides/landslips, the susceptibility of the various areas to

landslide varies from very low to very high. Landslide zoning



naturally requires mapping on large scale. Normally medium

scale of 1:25000 is at least chosen. In preparation of the

landslide zone map, two types of factors are considered

important as listed here below:

2) Geological/Topographic Factors/Parameters

- Lithology

- Geological Structures/Lineaments

- Slope-dip (bedding, joint) relation

- Geomorphology

- Drainage

- Slope angle, slope aspect and slope morphology

- Land use

- Soil texture and depth

- Rock weathering

3) Triggering Factors

- Rainfall

- Earthquake

- Anthropogeny

e) Whereas the factors listed under geological/topographic

parameters have been considered as basic inputs for the

landslide potential model, the three triggering factors namely,

Rainfall, Earthquake and Anthropogeny were considered

external factors which trigger the occurrence of a landslide.

f) Whereas, the landslide prone areas under ‗a‘ are available for

some parts of the country on the maps given in Landslide

Hazard Zonation Mapping in the Himalayas of Uttaranchal and

Himachal Pradesh States using Remote Sensing and GIS

Techniques, published by National Remote Sensing Agency,

Department of Space, Government of India, Hyderabad and

Landslide Hazard Zonation Atlas of India – Landslide Hazard

Maps and Cases Studies prepared by Building Materials &

Technology Promotion Council, Ministry of Urban Development

& Poverty Alleviation, Government of India, the risky areas in

other parts of the country have to be determined specially for

the planning areas under consideration through special studies

to be carried out by the State/UT governments and the

concerned Competent Authorities.

o Mitigation measures need to be considered in land use and site

planning activities. Constructions in hazardous areas like flood plains

or steep soft slopes are more vulnerable to disasters. Necessary



mitigation measures need to be built into the design and costing of

development projects.

o The provisions proposed by NDM Division, MoHA, GoI as mentioned

above in 2004 including for ―Approach for Land Use Zoning‖ are

recommended to be followed in Uttarakhand State (as reproduced

herewith):

Having identified the hazard prone areas the following alternatives

can be adopted for dealing with the disaster risk problems:

4) Leaving the area unprotected: In this case it will be necessary to

specify Land Use Zoning for various development purposes as

recommended under herein (next four bulleted sub-sections

below).

5) Using protection methods for the areas as a whole or in the

construction of buildings, structures and infrastructure facilities to

cater for the hazard intensities likely in the Planning Area.

6) It will be appropriate to prioritise buildings, structures and

infrastructures in terms of their importance from the point of view

of impact of damage on the socio-economic structure of the

society.

o Prioritisation (recommended as proposed in above-mentioned

NDM Division, MoHA, GoI report in 2004, and as reproduced

herewith):

In regard to Land Use Zoning, different types of buildings and utility

services are grouped under three priorities as indicated below:

Priority 1. Defence installation, industries, public utilities, life line

structures like hospitals, electricity installations, water supply,

telephone exchange, aerodromes and railway stations;

commercial centres, libraries, other buildings or installations with

contents of high economic value.

Priority 2. Public and Semi-public institutions, Government offices,

and residential areas.

Priority 3. Parks, play grounds, wood lands, gardens, green belts,

and recreational areas.

o Land Use Zoning for Flood Safety (recommended as proposed in

above-mentioned NDM Division, MoHA, GoI report in 2004, and as

reproduced herewith):

2) Recommendations for Land Use Zoning of Flood Prone Areas

(a) Preparation of Flood Contour Maps



The following actions should be taken to prepare the flood

contour maps by taking up special studies/surveys as found

necessary in the Development Area:

v. Prepare detailed contour plan of the area liable to flood

on a scale of 1 in 15000 or larger scale showing contours

at interval of 0.3 to 0.5 metre;

vi. Fix reference river gauges or maximum flood levels due to

heavy rains with respect to which the areas are likely to

be inundated;

vii. Demarcate areas liable to flooding by floods in rivers of

return periods of 5, 25, 50 and 100 years or by excessive

rainfall of return period of 5, 10, 25, and 50 years; and

viii. Mark on the maps the submersion contours for these

flood stages.

(b) Regulation for Land Use Zoning

iv. Installations and Buildings of Priority 1 should be located in

such a fashion that the area is above the levels

corresponding to a 100 year flood or the maximum

observed flood levels, whichever higher. Similarly, they

should also be above the levels corresponding to a 50

year rainfall flooding and the likely submersion due to

drainage congestion;

v. Buildings of Priority 2 should be located outside the 25

year flood or a 10 year rainfall contour, provided that the

buildings if constructed between the 10 and 25 year

contours should have either high plinth level above 25

year flood mark or constructed on columns or stilts, with

ground area left for the unimportant uses;

vi. Activities of Priority 3 viz. play grounds, gardens and parks

etc. can be located in areas vulnerable to frequent

floods.

Note: In natural hazard prone areas identified under the land

use zoning regulations, structures buildings and installations

which cannot be avoided, protective measures for such

construction/development should be properly safeguarded.

o Since Uttarakhand State‘s geographical condition is predominantly

a hilly area, the provisions proposed by NDM Division, MoHA, GoI as

mentioned-above in 2004 for ―Planning in Hill Areas‖ are

recommended to be followed (as reproduced herewith):



In order to ensure environmentally sound development of hill towns,

the following restrictions and conditions may be proposed for future

activities:

1) An integrated development plan may be prepared taking into

consideration environmental and other relevant factors

including ecologically sensitive areas, hazard prone areas,

drainage channels, steep slopes and fertile land.

2) Water bodies including underground water bodies in water

scares areas should be protected.

3) Where cutting of hill slope in an area causes ecological

damage and slope instability in adjacent areas, such cuttings

shall not be undertaken unless appropriate measures are taken

to avoid or prevent such damages.

4) No construction should be ordinarily undertaken in areas having

slope above 30º or areas which fall in landslide hazard zones or

areas falling on the spring lines and first order streams identified

by the State Government on the basis of available scientific

evidence.

5) Construction may be permitted in areas with slope between 10º

to 30º or spring recharge areas or old landslide zones with such

restrictions as the competent authority may decide.

Advisory Note:

The planning norms & standards provision in USA, wherein the

American Planning Association (APA) having published in 2006 one

of the largest compendium of planning norms & standards titled

―Planning and Urban Design Standards‖ has highlighted a

maximum range of slopes on which physical development is

undertaken in USA ―is often between 5 percent and 10 percent‖

(i.e. equivalent to 2.86º and 5.71º). If a comparison is made, it can

be seen that in this comparison the above-mentioned limits of 10º to

30º (i.e. equivalent to 17.63 percent to 57.73 percent slopes) as

provisioned by NDM Division, MoHA, GoI seem extremely liberal,

and may need to be moderated to lower values for consideration

in a terrain which is well-known for being located in young &

unstable Himalayan mountain range with weak geological

conditions and considering learnings from post-Disaster June 2013

scenario. Thus, keeping in mind the context of Uttarakhand with

reportedly scarce availability of developable land and yet located

in a disaster-prone physical environment, a moderated value of

slopes upto which physical development can be undertaken is



suggested through this infrastructure development guideline, which

is–maximum slope of 15 percent (i.e. equivalent to 8.53º) in rather

plain areas of Uttarakhand (e.g. Bhabar belt areas), and maximum

slope of 30 percent (i.e. equivalent to 16.70º) in hilly areas, with such

restrictions as the competent authority may decide. It is further

reaffirmed that as emphasised in the said ―Planning and Urban

Design Standards, 2006 (APA)‖ the following must be ensured ―It is

also necessary to know a site‟s slope to design appropriate

vegetation plans to hold soils in place after final grading is

complete. In steeply sloped areas, an erosion control fabric is often

used to retain soils until the vegetation takes hold.‖ Also, as

mentioned elsewhere in this infrastructure development guideline

document the necessary man-made slope stabilisation measures /

mitigation measures towards climate change impact adaptation

have to be duly incorporated in the site planning & design of

physical development located on such graded slopes.

Also, it is equally important to be understood that in general

whenever a construction/reconstruction is undertaken in the long-

term as part of any regular tourism infrastructure development

initiative, it should follow the conventional construction using

traditional material resources and adopting architecture that

retains vernacular design/aesthetics. However, certain exceptions

would be permitted, like in post-Disaster scenarios when with

respect to the needs of rebuilding the tourism infrastructure in the

immediate/short-term for restoring the affected tourism activity and

reviving the tourism economy at the earliest, the following

recommendations for what type of construction may be resorted to

have been made:

FRP structures (hemispherical shaped for very-high altitude with

predominantly snow conditions), while very small-FRP

booths/any other light-weight Pre-fab building units with slightly

sloped roof surface which are easy to assemble & construct

may be permitted for housing environment-friendly single bio-

toilet units (WCs/Urinals) along high-altitude trek routes;

Hybrid Huts and/or LGFS Structures, as felt required, but only with

sloped roof and its pitch meeting the needs of climatic

conditions and its exterior finish/aesthetics meeting the

vernacular architecture needs may be permitted. Such a

construction should be permitted only upto the maximum slope

of 30% in the hilly areas.



Wherever, concrete foundation is used, the foundation must be

properly designed and should safely support the superstructure

by anchoring the foundation as duly extended to the desired

hard surface/bedrock level as observed in geo-technical

investigation report, or using pile-method as felt required.

Thus, “no construction” whether conventional or otherwise (as

mentioned-above that use modern materials & technology) should

be permitted either above the 30% slope in the hilly areas or in any

low lying areas considered as environmentally-sensitive terrain for

developing any tourism accommodation assets/other tourism

infrastructure that facilitates tourist visitation.

o Regarding the availability of open spaces for use of shelters during

emergency/natural hazard, the provision proposed by NDM

Division, MoHA, GoI as mentioned-above in 2004 for ―Identification

of Open Spaces‖ is recommended to be followed (as reproduced

herewith):

Out of the open spaces ear-marked as district parks,

neighbourhood parks and local parks in the development plan,

zonal plans and local plans, suitable and approachable parks/

open spaces should be identified for the use during the emergency

to provide shelter and relief caused by a natural hazard. Such

pockets should be clearly marked on the city maps.

Similarly, such cases of available open spaces in rural areas if duly

identified, including integration with any provision of helipad and

multi-purpose hall/shelter, shall be clearly marked on the village

revenue map for easy reference during emergency/natural hazard.

o Post-Disaster of June 2013, it has been made aware that two-

directives had been issued that shall be followed (till they are in

effect i.e. unless amended by a new/amended direction issued

from time to time or any withdrawal of such directives or an

exemption is permitted from such directives on case-by-case

basis/any product-specific exemption under a development

project proposal that is treated temporary in nature and does not

invite any permanent habitation at such development site (e.g. for

a disaster preparedness activity like construction / upgradation of

helipads as ‗Temporary Landing Areas‘ used for ―emergency

evacuation, rescue & relief operations,‖ etc.). These are:

Directions passed regarding to ―Loss of Lives-Money due to

Natural Disaster in State, Rescue and Relief Works and



Reconstruction‖ that ―no permission to be given until G.O. is

issued with regards to any reconstruction on river banks,‖ issued

by Irrigation Section under the authority of Principal Secretary,

Irrigation Department, Government of Uttarakhand vide No.

1973/11-2013-17(12)/2013, dated 03 July 2013; and

Directions passed regarding to ―The Order passed by The High

Court of Uttarakhand at Nainital on Writ Petition (PIL) No. 25 of

2013 stating–The State of Uttarakhand, through its Chief

Secretary, is directed to ensure that, henceforth, no construction

of permanent nature is permitted within 200 meters from the

bank of any flowing river in the State, Order dated 26th August

2013‖ for the implementation of this High Court Order, and issued

by Urban Development Section-2 under the authority of Principal

Secretary, Urban Development Department, Government of

Uttarakhand vide No. 1247/IV(2)-UD-13-38(Court Case)/13, dated

19 September 2013 communicated to Heads of All Nagar Nigams

and Nagar Palika Parishads (NPP)/Nagar Panchayats (NP).

o With regards to the development of any land parcel,

redevelopment, sub-division or building construction, in case of

reconstruction or changes made in remaining part of construction

after demolition of whole of the building or self-sufficient part of

building, and for all parts of the affected building in case of land-

use change, the applicable provisions for byelaws/regulations

would be as per the provisions of the ―Building Construction and

Development Byelaws/Regulations–2011‖ issued by Housing

Section-2 vide No. 2009/V-2011-55(H)/2006-TC, dated 17 November

2011 under the authority of Principal Secretary, Housing

Department, Government of Uttarakhand and communicated to

Development Authority – Dehradun/Haridwar/Tehri (These

Byelaws/Regulations are applicable for all Regulated Areas,

Development Areas & Special Development Areas located in the

State; and areas located outside these in the whole State) and as

amended for above-mentioned respective areas including

applicable master plans/zonal plans/lay-out plans provisions from

time to time; except for the following improved norms & standards

for tourism infrastructure development suggested herewith (as

addition/replacement/revision, as applicable after due deliberation

with concerned stakeholder authorities):

Table 4.1: Recommended Provisions for Tourism Infrastructure Development to

be included in Building Construction and Development Byelaws/Regulations–

2011 for Effective Implementation



S.

No.

Relevant Clause/

Sub-clause No.

Existing Provision Recommended Provision

1 Volume-1,

Chapter-2, Sub-

clause

2.1.2(2)(7),

second para:

Regarding other

requirements

In hilly areas, the road edges

would be made pucca, and

till the road edges, cover

channel drain would be

constructed so that potential

land-erosion due to seepage

of water can be stopped.

Revise provision as:

In hilly areas, the road carriageway

edges would be protected by

making the road edge supported by

pucca surfaces constructed as per

area/space feasible (on valley side

with hard edge to address both–the

severe risk since drivers can be

tempted to manoeuvre too close to

the edge while passing, believing that

they still have solid ground under their

tires, and for use as pedestrian

pathway; and on hill side as open V-

shaped drain or covered channel

drain so that potential land-erosion

due to seepage of water can be

stopped). The provision of road safety

features of thermoplastic paint

reflective surface marking along road

edges indicating separation of

carriageway / pedestrian pathway or

road-side drain edges; and the

provision of crash-guard rail/masonry

barriers along the valley side as per

actual requirements (i.e. not built only

at sharp curves to protect at the most

dangerous locations), along with

warning & regulatory signage would

be mandatory at the minimum.

2 Volume-1,

Chapter-3,

Clause 3.5,

Regarding hotel,

motel, resorts,

and amusement

park related

requirements

- As part of ensuring that premises

developed under tourism

development purposes have

aesthetic external presentation, add

provision as:

3.5 (6) Along with site plan/premises

layout plan, landscape plan duly

integrated with applicable provisions

of parking and circulation plan shall

be presented as part of development

approval [in conjunction with

provisions under Clause 5.2(II) of

Chapter 5 of these

Byelaws/Regulations], and

compliance of provisions of such

approved landscape plan shall be a

pre-requisite criterion for issuing an

approval.

3 Section 3, Clause

3.6, Regarding

hostel / boarding

/ guest house /

lodging house /

- As part of ensuring that premises

developed under tourism

development purposes have

aesthetic external presentation, add

provision as:



S.

No.

Relevant Clause/

Sub-clause No.


dharamshala /

inn related

requirements

3.6 (5) Along with site plan/premises

layout plan, landscape plan duly

integrated with applicable provisions

of parking and circulation plan shall

be presented as part of development

approval [in conjunction with

provisions under Clause 5.2(II) of

Chapter 5 of these

Byelaws/Regulations], and

compliance of provisions of such

approved landscape plan shall be a

pre-requisite criterion for issuing an

Occupancy Certificate.

4 Annexure-1,

Standards for

providing

facilities for

physically

handicapped

persons, Clause

3:

3.2 (a) Surface parking for

two car spaces shall be

provided near entrance for

the physically handicapped

persons with maximum travel

distance of 30 meters from

building entrance.

3.2 (c) The information stating

that the space is reserved for

wheel chair users shall be

conspicuously displayed.

It is recommended to adopt the

minimum number of car parking

spaces as the higher value amongst

the provision as per ―Guidelines and

Space Standards for Barrier-Free Built-

Environment for Disabled and Elderly

Persons, 1998,‖ CPWD, MoUAE, GoI

under ―Parking‖ and as per one of

the international best practices‘ i.e.

provisions made in the ―2010 ADA

Standards for Accessible Design‖

issued by Department of Justice, USA,

Clause & Table 208.2 ―Minimum

Number‖ and Clause 502.5 ―Vertical

Clearance‖ are recommended to be

adopted/suitably adapted, and add

provision as:

3.2 (a-1) Minimum numbers of car

parking spaces shall be provided in

accordance with table below. Where

more than one parking facility is

provided on a site, the number of

accessible parking spaces provided

on the site shall be calculated

according to the number of spaces

required for each parking facility. The

required number is not to be based

on the total number of parking

spaces provided in all of the parking

facilities provided on the site.

Parking Spaces

Total Number of

Parking Spaces

Provided in

Parking Facility

Minimum Number

of Required

Accessible Parking

Spaces

1 to 25 1

26 to 50 2

51 to 75 3

76 to 100 4

101 to 150 5



S.

No.

Relevant Clause/

Sub-clause No.


151 to 200 6

201 to 300 7

301 to 400 8

401 to 500 9

501 to 1000 2 percent of total

1001 and over

20, plus 1 for each

100, or fraction

thereof, over 1000

Note: Adopt the minimum number of

car parking spaces as the higher

value amongst the provision made

above in (a) and (a-1). This minimum

number of car parking spaces

criterion would be applicable for all

the parking areas developed under

these Byelaws/Regulations.

Vertical clearance at accessible

parking spaces and access aisles and

vehicular routes serving them shall

provide a vertical clearance of 2400

mm minimum [in conjunction with

provisions under Clause 2.1.4(1) of

Section 2, and Clause 3.11 of Section

3 of these Byelaws/Regulations].

In addition it is recommended to

revise the Clause 3.2 (c), Annexure-1

with an added provision, and replace

existing provision as:

3.2 (c) The information stating that the

space is reserved for wheel chair users

shall be conspicuously displayed.

And, such signs shall be so located

that they cannot be obscured by a

vehicle parked in the space.

5 Annexure-1,

Clause 4,

Standards for

providing

facilities for

physically

handicapped

persons

4.1.1 Ramped Approach:

Ramp shall be finished with

non-slip material to enter the

building. Minimum width of

ramp shall be 1800 mm with

maximum gradient 1:12,

length of ramp shall not

exceed 9.0 meter having 600

mm high hand rail on both

sides extending 300 mm

beyond top and bottom of

the ramp. Minimum gap from

the adjacent wall to the

hand rail shall be 50 mm.

4.1.2 Stepped Approach: For

stepped approach size of

tread shall not be less than

300 mm and maximum riser

shall be 140 mm. Provision of

Revise the provision as per

―Guidelines and Space Standards for

Barrier-Free Built-Environment for

Disabled and Elderly Persons, 1998,‖

CPWD, MoUAE, GoI, and replace

existing provision as:

4.1.1 Ramped Approach: Ramp shall

be finished with non-slip material to

enter the building. Minimum width of

ramp shall be 1800 mm with

maximum gradient 1:12, length of

ramp shall not exceed 9.0 meter

having 800 mm high hand rail on both

sides extending 300 mm beyond top

and bottom of the ramp. Minimum

gap from the adjacent wall to the

hand rail shall be 50 mm.

4.1.2 Stepped Approach: For stepped



S.

No.

Relevant Clause/

Sub-clause No.


300 mm high hand rail on

both sides of the stepped

approach similar to the

ramped approach.

approach size of tread shall not be

less than 300 mm and maximum riser

shall be 150 mm Provision of 800 mm

high hand rail on both sides of the

stepped approach similar to the

ramped approach.

6 Annexure-1,

Clause 4,

Standards for

providing

facilities for

physically

handicapped

persons:

Regarding

proper

communication

signage

Signs should be designed and

located so that they are

easily legible by using suitable

letter size (not less than 20

mm high). For visually

impaired persons, information

board in braille should be

installed on the wall at a

suitable height and it should

be possible to approach

them closely. To ensure safe

walking there should not be

any protruding sign which

creates obstruction in

walking. Public Address

System may also be provided

in busy public areas.

It is recommended that as per the

provision under ―Guidelines and

Space Standards for Barrier-Free Built-

Environment for Disabled and Elderly

Persons, 1998,‖ CPWD, MoUAE, GoI (in

conjunction with the graphic

illustration under Entrance/Exit Door

section on Page 34) and as per one

of the international best practices‘ i.e.

provisions made in the ―2010 ADA

Standards for Accessible Design‖

issued by Department of Justice, USA,

Clause 703.4/Sub-clauses & Figures

703.4.1 & 703.4.2, and Clause

703.6/Sub-clauses 703.6.1 (including

Figure) to 703.6.3 are recommended

to be adopted/suitably adapted,

and revise the existing provision as:

Signs should be designed and

located so that they are easily legible

by using suitable letter size (not less

than 20 mm high). For visually

impaired persons, information board in braille*/** should be installed on the

wall at a suitable height and it should

be possible to approach them

closely.

*Installation Height and Location: Signs

with tactile characters shall comply with

provisions made herewith:

(i) Height above Finish Floor or Ground:

Tactile characters on signs shall be

located 48 inches (1220 mm) minimum

above the finish floor or ground surface,

measured from the baseline of the lowest

tactile character and 60 inches (1525

mm) maximum above the finish floor or

ground surface, measured from the

baseline of the highest tactile character.

Exception: Tactile characters for elevator

car controls shall not be required to

comply with this provision made above.

(ii) Location: Where a tactile sign is

provided at a door, the sign shall be

located alongside the door at the latch

side. Where a tactile sign is provided at

double doors with one active leaf, the

sign shall be located on the inactive leaf.



S.

No.

Relevant Clause/

Sub-clause No.


Where a tactile sign is provided at double

doors with two active leafs, the sign shall

be located to the right of the right hand

door. Where there is no wall space at the

latch side of a single door or at the right

side of double doors, signs shall be

located on the nearest adjacent wall.

Signs containing tactile characters shall

be located so that a clear floor space of

18 inches (455 mm) minimum by 18 inches

(455 mm) minimum, centered on the

tactile characters, is provided beyond the

arc of any door swing between the

closed position and 45 degree open

position.

Exception: Signs with tactile characters

shall be permitted on the push side of

doors with closers and without hold-open

devices.

** Pictograms: Pictograms shall comply

with provisions made herewith:

(i) Pictogram Field: Pictograms shall have

a field height of 6 inches (150 mm)

minimum. Characters and braille shall not

be located in the pictogram field.

(ii) Finish and Contrast: Pictograms and

their field shall have a non-glare finish.

Pictograms shall contrast with their field

with either a light pictogram on a dark

field or a dark pictogram on a light field.

Note: Signs are more legible for persons

with low vision when characters contrast

as much as possible with their

background. Additional factors affecting

the ease with which the text can be

distinguished from its background include

shadows cast by lighting sources, surface

glare, and the uniformity of the text and

background colours and textures.

(iii) Text Descriptors: Pictograms shall have

text descriptors located directly below the

pictogram field, as per applicable

standards for Braille Signs [Braille shall be

contracted (Grade 2)], including

specifications for raised characters, and

above mentioned installation height and

location requirements.

To ensure safe walking there should

not be any protruding sign which

creates obstruction in walking. Public

Address System may also be provided

in busy public areas.

For any planning norms & standards not covered in the above-

mentioned bye-laws/regulations, the provisions of UDPFI Guidelines,

1996 of MoUAE, GoI/Model Building Byelaws of TCPO including any



amendments proposed by National Disaster Management Division,

MoHA, GoI. While, for any building design standards not covered in

the above-mentioned byelaws/regulations, the provisions of latest

applicable edition(s) of National Building Code (NBC)/IS Codes of

Bureau of Indian Standards (BIS) shall be followed as mentioned

earlier.

o Improvement in Built-Environment: A successful ecotourism strategy

needs to be supported by a presentable, safe and attractive built-

environment, especially in those towns designated as gateways to

undertaking ecotourism in surrounding natural areas (these notably

include Dehradun and Nainital) or in urban areas which display

authentic culture, and in all smaller towns and villages that have

been earmarked as having gateway functions (for example where

interpretation facilities are recommended). The quality of the urban

environment at present can be seen as seriously deficient in

appearance, safety and hygiene. It is important therefore that

environmental improvements be undertaken in these towns. As well

as cleaning up the environment this would help encourage

investment, persuade tourists to spend more time in the urban area

and lead to a healthier environment for residents and visitors alike.


For example, an attempt must be made for the streetscape to be

drastically improved/retrofitted duly with barrier-free friendly built-

environment compliances, provision of raised crosswalks with

surface marked for junctions of narrow streets (that would increase

safety at such intersections and reduce noise pollution that

happens currently due to incessant use of horns), landscaping,

covered drainage, a range of standard signage,

warning/regulatory signs along with other traffic management

measures, etc. with high quality surface finishing, as best feasible

within the available right-of-way (ROW) meeting the international

best practice of ―Complete Streets‖ concept, and ultimately

providing picture postcard i.e. highly aesthetic visual appearances

of the built-environment.

o Ensure adequate capacity building is available for proper

maintenance of the physical infrastructure, so that it operates well

during the applicable tourism seasons and does not cause

inconvenience to visitors in the difficult Himalayan terrain.

o Ensure budgets for new infrastructure include adequate funds for

maintenance and upkeep, towards operational sustenance of such



infrastructure. For tourism accommodation assets ensure proper

tariff, food charges, etc. are arrived at, keeping in mind the capital

investment, recurring costs, occupancy rates, horizon period

considered for EIRR viability when the tourism development project

proposal was approved, tourism growth rates, etc. Encourage and

ensure that proper cost recovery mechanisms be in place for set of

tourism infrastructure created for supporting destinations/tourism

accommodation assets e.g. an amenity charge for cluster of

facilities at one place or a user charge for a single facility enroute,

etc. This is recommended in general to inculcate the feeling of

participation of users for respect to properly use such facilities for

their longevity and to keep operation & maintenance of such

facilities financially sustainable, as far as possible.

o The use of earthquake resistant technology and techniques in

construction of buildings, and use of local materials will be

promoted and encouraged. (Tourism Policy of State of


o It is generally understood that in the historical times, the structures

for habitation in the Himalayan region were built in wood etc. which

was lighter in terms of putting load on the Himalayan terrain (well

known for its unstable terrain/weak geological conditions/being

earthquake prone) as well as wood offered elasto-plastic properties

to safely bear structural movement due to any earthquake/high

wind pressure, the structure having placed on a strong foundation

that was resting on hard rock/extended upto bedrock, and thus

structurally it was a stable habitat expected to last fairly long, and

having for proper solar orientation the placement of functional

spaces of living areas/kitchen to south-east direction ensured

proper day-lighting & ventilation and thus overall presence of

healthy living environment. In the present times with the need of

natural resource conservation (although use of timber made

available through Uttarakhand Forest Development Corporation

can be encouraged with such produce being available as regular

forestry produce/as re-forestry cultivated produce, to strengthen

the culture of conservation and reuse of natural resources for a

sustainable human habitat development), with constraints of

finding large-size flat land parcels emphasised often, development

practices now have also to be thought using other modern

materials/technology that are not only light on a base of

earthquake resistant foundation/slope stabilization measures/with

other supporting mitigation measures, yet allow vertical



development upto 2-3 storeys, that albeit are environment-friendly

in their composition/thermal properties/later removal & disposal

after their design life-cycle period is over with minimal/no

environmental pollution, and also offer the flexibility of having

finishing textures representing construction in natural materials with

much higher standardisation yet with low maintenance

requirements, and thus still being compliant as best as possible with

requirements of vernacular/hill architectural designs. Such light-

weight, yet strong structures, build-in modular fashion and with as

required size of wall panels, also offer the flexibility of pre-fabrication

ex-situ in manufacturing facilities (which facilitates in reducing

construction duration for each structure compared to conventional

construction requirements), and ease of transportation,

assembly/dis-assembly & re-installation if any, as felt required.

This guideline thus, recommends and incorporates the work already

being undertaken through the use of materials & methods of light-

weight/environment-friendly/time-saving construction with modular

layout flexibility/etc. which also allows to achieve higher standards

of uniform quality & surface finishing even in construction of

buildings for ordinary use viz. pre-engineered building (PEB)/pre-

fabricated (Pre-fab) building systems for tourism sector

reconstruction like, use of FRP & Hybrid Huts and LGFS Structures for

providing tourism accommodation, meditation/yoga center, night

shelters, etc. under UEAP‟s post-disaster reconstruction works, as

one of the best practices for development in the difficult Himalayan

terrain with limited land parcels available for development for

rebuilding tourism assets /restoring damaged infrastructure in the

immediate/short-term in post-Disaster scenario.

However, at no time even if making such construction using

PEB/Pre-fab systems the importance of the following basic/minimum

steps shall be ignored, i.e. (i) safe siting of a project proposal with

necessary slope stabilization measures/mitigation measures

wherever required duly assessed and provisioned, (ii) undertaking

necessary basic surveys & investigations viz. topographical surveys

and geo-technical investigations to make site-specific designs and

project cost estimation, and (iii) earthquake-resistant foundation &

structure frame for design including adequate strength for wind

pressure on walls with proper locking of wall panels, roof etc.). The

intent shall remain at all times to create safe assets in the first place



that do not put/invite lives at risk when being present at tourist

sites/destination due to availability of such tourism infrastructure.

o Road/Pavement Strengthening

The approach/methodology for investigating/understanding the

pavement failure is suggested to be as follows:

Field Investigation: Pits of neat/formal shape and necessary

depth are to be made at the problematic area or patch of

road. Samples of earth at required levels and other materials of

road crust at each component layer are to be taken. Condition

of sub-surface drainage is to be examined. CBR values of soils

(soaked and unsoaked state), sub-grade and sub-

base/drainage layer (i.e. granular sub-base) if applicable, are

to be found out. If CBR value is very less (i.e. less than 3) then

special soil treatment should be carried out. Special soil

treatment is also required for slushy soil. Also, the ageing and

oxidation of bituminous films lead to deterioration of bituminous

pavements.

The localized settlement of any one of the component layer of

the flexible pavement structure could be enough to cause

pavement failure. This demands that each one of the layers

should be carefully redesigned and laid. To design remedial

measures for road pavement failure when confirmed after

detailed investigation, it may be required to understand the

reasons of failure at each layer level.

Failure in Sub-grade: One of the prime causes of flexible

pavement failure is excessive deformation in sub-grade soil,

leading to settlement/depressions. Some remedial measures,

like to remove extremely bad part of soil/slushy soil and to

lay new layers with selected soil having higher CBR value

(i.e. more than 6), and if required to lay second layer of sub-

base (granular material of CBR value more than 15) on the

sub-grade followed by granular sub-base (i.e. drainage

layer). In case, the soil below sub-grade is found to be very

poor (i.e. less than 3) then some soil treatment like lime-soil or

cement-soil treatment may be required. The thickness of

these layers shall be as per design parameters defined w.r.t.

CBR values. Also, in addition an underground drainage

system may be required.



Also, apart from inherent weakness of the soil itself (i.e. low

CBR value) the reason of inadequate stability may be due

to improper compaction or excessive moisture. If pavement

improvement is required in small patches and for which

regular rolling/compaction equipment suitable for each

layer would not be feasible to be used, then suitable small-

sized equipment like plate vibrators/compactors could be

thought off. In any case, it is essential to check compaction

at each layer of any earth filling, sub-grade, sub-base, base

courses by carrying out field density tests to check

compliance with minimum Procter Density/Maximum Dry

Density (MDD) levels. Moisture contents of soil are also to be

checked at the time of compaction of each layer of earth if

any/sub-grade and corrective step if there is deficiency in

test results is to be taken.

Failure in Sub-base/Base Courses: The following types of sub-

base/base course failures may be applicable (to be

confirmed during detailed investigation):

Inadequate thickness or poor mix proportioning are the

main reasons for lack of stability or strength of the sub-

base/base course layer. Soft varieties of stone aggregates

also make the base course layer weak, and thus impact test

is very important in this regard with impact value must be

within 30. Proper tests on stone aggregates (i.e. correct

sampling and testing with properly calibrated test machines)

and random checks by a senior engineer are important.

Due to internal movements of aggregates in sub-base/base

course layers under repeated stress applications, the

composite structure of the layers gets disturbed, which may

lead to loosening of the total mass, formation of cracks on

the bituminous surface and loss of overall binding action,

resulting in low stability. Hence it is required to use crushed

stone aggregates (instead of hand broken stone metal or

river washed stones), to carry out proper dry rolling of WBM

for interlocking, followed by wet rolling till the slurry surfaces

up which when dried is to be properly scrapped before

laying next layer. Also, for WBM, the good quality binding

material (i.e. having Plasticity Index value less than 6) is to be

used.



Wherever wearing course has been damaged, there is

possibility of water (on account of climatic variations mainly

rains and frost action, or even water supply

leakages/overflows) getting percolated to the base course,

which may also be a cause for loosening of the mass of

road crust and subsequent loss of binding action. As

upgradation of technology, the use of ―micro-surfacing‖

could be adopted for proper wearing course improvement,

which is said to be very effective if cracks have developed

on the existing bituminous surface or if disintegration of road

surface has occurred. The grade of micro-surfacing to be

chosen as needed is from Type-I Light Grade (thickness of

mat is about 2-3 mm), Type-II Medium Grade (5-7 mm thick),

and Type-III Heavy Grade (about 8 mm thick). Type-I is

applied when initial stage of cracks (i.e. fine cracks) begin

to appear, and thus is good for preventive maintenance

work so that cracks do not develop further, water does not

penetrate road surface and damage the road crust.

However, few important points need to be kept in mind that:

laying new bituminous concrete wearing course and micro-

surfacing together is not recommended as it is not

economical; laying of micro-surfacing shall not be

undertaken if air temperature is below 10 0C and when it is

raining; shall be undertaken when the surface is cleaned &

prepared properly after milling/scraping out to the next

base layer of bituminous macadam/cement concrete (like

surface of cross-drainage works).

Failure of wearing course is observed due to lack of proper

―mix design,‖ and inferior type of binder also results in a poor

bituminous surfacing. Besides the design aspect, the

bituminous construction requires a high degree of quality

control since over or under quantity of binders are both

greatly damaging to the resulting paving mix, including

temperature controls. Volatilization and oxidation of binder

also make the bituminous surfacing brittle and cause cracks

on the pavement surface, which if not remedied further

allows water seepage if any that would harm the layers

underneath. Thus, special care needs to be taken to carry

out mix design of bituminous pavement mix correctly and

strictly as per technical specifications; and quality control i.e.

skilled workmanship, temperature control during laying mix



at site and its rolling/compaction immediately thereafter

before cooling of mix, are to be ensured.

Lack of proper binding with lower layer means a situation

where surface course is not keyed / bound with the

underlying base, which leads to slipping and opening up

and loss of pavement materials. This condition may get more

pronounced when the tack coat in between two-layers is

lacking. As a remedial measure, it is required to scrap the

old bituminous surface of the damaged road patch in a

neat/formal shape before laying any new WBM layer and

also to spray bitumen tack coat of required quantity

uniformly in hot condition.

Thus, many failures, mainly structural failures of road

pavement, are attributed due to use of inferior materials.

Some materials may exhibit satisfactory characteristics

initially, but may show rapid deterioration due to

weathering. Hence, as mentioned earlier, it is essential to

carry out various tests of all paving materials (e.g. at the

minimum-the shape tests covering elongation & flakiness

index and angularity number for each Grade of metal,

aggregate impact test & crushing value, and bitumen

ductility test for satisfactory binder performance), with

correct sampling, proper testing using properly calibrated

testing machines, random checking by senior engineer, and

also some tests should be undertaken through

certified/reputed outside laboratory/independent authority

(like an engineering college) using confidential code

number of samples of materials and not mentioning the

name of work/source of samples etc.

As mentioned earlier, it can be summarized that depending

upon the failure of a given layer, the flexible pavement (either

road crust or up to sub-grade) would be reconstructed in a

neat/formal shape of patch or stretch right from the defective

base level (as international best practice), after carrying out

field investigation by excavating pits and taking samples of

materials as well as soil and carrying out the requisite tests. Since

the above factors are advised to be carefully observed in

replacement of defective layers, the road pavement

patch/stretch so constructed may offer not only pavement

durability but also better riding quality.



o And last, but not the least is the emphasis to ensure that due

diligence to proper detailing in a DPR is done with respect to the

drawings including specifications illustrative of what higher

standards of uniform quality and surface finishing are proposed to

be achieved for proper realisation of performance objectives when

implementing tourism development projects–be it the site planning

first for accommodating built-footprint appropriately having been

duly integrated with topographic contours including slope

stabilization measures/access ways/landscaping, then a building

asset in vernacular architecture above-ground, or access through

trek routes–proper streetscape with street furniture and street-level

& site-specific signage/helipad for access & disaster preparedness–

both cases built-on surface duly integrated with landscaping

details, or other utility infrastructure laid appropriately below the

ground, etc.

Environmental Requirements

o The fundamental responsibility of GoI of protecting and improving

the environment of India is enshrined in the Article of the Indian

Constitution. These articles provide that the State will protect and

improve the environment and safeguard forests and wildlife of the

country; and every citizen is bound to protect and improve the

natural environment and to have compassion for living creatures.

o The Ministry of Environment and Forests (MoEF) is the prime

regulatory body of GoI for formulating environmental policies, laws

and rules.

o The primary legislations governing environmental assessment of

projects in India is the Environment (Protection) Act (No. 29 of 1986)

and rules and notifications issued thereunder. Several other

legislations govern the protection of natural resources and

clearance requirements on projects and activities that have a

bearing on such resources. These legislations include (but are not

limited to) the Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1974

as amended; the Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Cess

(amendment) Act (No. 19 of 2003) as amended; the Air (Prevention

and Control of Pollution) Act 1981 as amended; The Wildlife

(Protection) Act 1972 as amended; The Wildlife (Protection)

Amendment Act (No. 16 of 2003) as amended; the Forest

(Conservation) Act 1980 as amended, the Forest (Conservation)

Rules, 1981 as amended; the Biological Diversity Act (No. 18 of 2013)

as amended; the Costal Regulation Zone Notification of 2011 as

amended; and the Nosie Pollution (Regulation and Control) Rules,



2000 as amended. Apart from these, there are technical guidelines

and specifications issued by different ministries such as

Environmental Impact Assessment Guidelines for Rail, Road &

Highway Projects, 1989; and the Indian Road Congress Guidelines

for Environmental Impact Assessment (IRC: 104-1988) of highway

projects. Similarly there are technical Manuals on water supply and

treatment issued by the Central Public Health and Environmental

Engineering Organisation (CPHEEP). There are several important

standards for drinking water, discharge of wastewater, air emission,

and noise levels. The environmental assessment review for any

development activity will address the requirements of applicable

acts, rules, notifications and standards referred.

o The provisions made in the Environment Impact Assessment

Notification issued by the Ministry of Environment and Forests,

Government of India, S.O. 1533 (E) dated 14th September 2006

including its amendment vide S.O. 3067 (E) dated 1st December

2009 shall be followed in general, but specifically the following

paras and SCHEDULE shall govern the requirements of prior

environmental clearance with regards to environmental

considerations/impacts in any building construction/development

proposals falling under Category ‗A‘ & ‗B‘ over and above any

provisions made in the Building Construction and Development

Byelaws/Regulations–2011 applicable in Uttarakhand State [except

for lower built-up area cases–from > 7,000 sqm (considering the

development level of cluster–level scheme onwards starting from >

2.0 ha with maximum ground coverage of 35%) to < 20,000 sqm,

wherein it is hereby suggested that in the interest of an appropriate

quality of spatial development to take place even at such a mid-

level development scale, the prior environmental clearance shall

be obtained from State Pollution Control Board (SPCB) which in

Uttarakhand context is UEPPCB, including for any specific-tourism

infrastructure project types as per Check-lists issued by UTDB for

compliance when seeking permissions/approvals of Department of

Tourism through UTDB, and/or GMVN/KMVN as applicable]:

Para 2, Requirements of Prior Environmental Clearance (EC): The

following projects or activities shall require prior environmental

clearance from the concerned regulatory authority, which shall

hereinafter referred to be as the Central Government in the

Ministry of Environment and Forests for matters falling under

Category ‗A‘ in the Schedule and at State level the State

Environment Impact Assessment Authority (SEIAA) for matters



falling under Category ‗B‘ in the said Schedule, before any

construction work, or preparation of land by the project

management except for securing the land, is started on the

project or activity:

(i) All new projects or activities listed in the Schedule to this

notification;

(ii) Expansion and modernization of existing projects or activities

listed in the Schedule to this notification with addition of

capacity beyond the limits specified for the concerned

sector, that is, projects or activities which cross the threshold

limits given in the Schedule, after expansion or

modernization; and

(iii) Any change in product-mix in an existing manufacturing unit

included in Schedule beyond the specified range.

Para 4, Categorization of Projects and Activities:

(i) All projects and activities are broadly categorized in to two

categories - Category ‗A‘ and Category ‗B‘, based on the

spatial extent of potential impacts and potential impacts on

human health and natural and man-made resources;

(ii) All projects or activities included as Category ‗A‘ in the

Schedule, including expansion and modernization of existing

projects or activities and change in product mix, shall

require prior environmental clearance from the Central

Government in the Ministry of Environment and Forests

(MoEF) on the recommendations of an Expert Appraisal

Committee (EAC) to be constituted by the Central

Government for the purposes of this notification; and

(iii) All projects or activities included as Category ‗B‘ in the

Schedule, including expansion and modernization of existing

projects or activities as specified in sub paragraph (ii) of

paragraph 2, or change in product mix as specified in sub

paragraph (iii) of paragraph 2, but excluding those which

fulfil the General Conditions (GC) stipulated in the Schedule,

will require prior environmental clearance from the

State/Union territory Environment Impact Assessment

Authority (SEIAA). The SEIAA shall base its decision on the

recommendations of a State or Union territory level Expert

Appraisal Committee (SEAC) as to be constituted for in this

notification. In the absence of a duly constituted SEIAA or

SEAC, a Category ‗B‘ project shall be considered at the

Central Level as a Category ‗B‘ project.



SCHEDULE: List of Projects or Activities requiring Prior

Environmental Clearance

Project or Activity Category with Threshold Limit Conditions, if any

„A‟ „B‟

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

7 Physical Infrastructure including Environmental Services

7 (f) Highways i) New National

Highways; and

ii) Expansion of

National Highways

greater than 30 km,

involving additional

right of way

greater than 20m

involving land

acquisition and

passing through

more than one

State.

i) All State

Highway projects;

and

ii) State Highway

expansion

projects in hilly

terrain (above

1,000 m AMSL)

and/or

ecologically

sensitive areas.

General condition shall

apply.

Note: Highways

include expressways.

7(g) Aerial ropeways (i) All projects

located at altitude

of 1,000 mtr. and

above.

(ii) All projects

located in notified

ecologically

sensitive areas.

All projects

except those

covered in

column (3).

General condition shall

apply.

7 (h) Common Effluent

Treatment Plants

(CETPs)

All projects. General condition shall

apply.

7 (i) Common Municipal

Solid Waste

Management

Facility (CMSWMF)

All projects. General condition shall

apply.

8 Building/Construction Projects/Area Development Projects and Townships

8 (a) Building and

Construction

projects

> 20,000 sq.mtrs

and < 1,50,000

sq.mtrs. of built-up

area.#

#(built-up area for

covered construction;

in the case of facilities

open to the sky, it will

be the activity area).

8 (b) Townships and Area

Development

project

Covering an area

> 50 ha and/or

built-up area >

1,50,000 sq.mtrs.++

++All projects under

Item 8(b) shall be

appraised as Category

B1.

Source: Notification dated 14th September 2006, MoEF, GoI

Note:



The projects requiring an Environmental Impact Assessment

report shall be termed Category ‗B1.‘

General Condition (GC):

Any project or activity specified in Category ‗B‘ will be treated

as Category ‗A,‘ if located in whole or in part within 10 km from

the boundary of: (i) Protected Areas notified under the Wild Life

(Protection) Act, 1972, (ii) Critically Polluted areas as notified by

the Central Pollution Control Board from time to time, (iii) Eco-

sensitive areas as notified under Section 3 of the Environment

(Protection) Act, 1986 such as, Mahabaleshwar-Panchgani,

Matheran, Pachmarhi, Dahanu, and Doon Valley, and (iv) inter-

State boundaries and international boundaries:

Provided that the requirement regarding distance of 10 km of

the inter-State boundaries can be reduced or completely done

away with by an agreement between the respective States or

UTs sharing the common boundary in case the activity does not

fall within 10 kilometers of the areas mentioned at item (i), (ii)

and (iii) above.

Environment Management Plan for post environmental

clearance monitoring shall be followed.

Advisory Note:

In case of Multilateral Funding Institution-assisted projects such as

ADB, the Policy Paper of ADB titled ―Safeguard Policy Statement,‖

June 2009 (or as amended from to time) currently makes provisions

under Appendix 1, ―Safeguards Requirement 1: Environment, D.

Requirements, 1. Environmental Assessment, para 9‖ as ―Depending

on the significance of project impacts and risks, the assessment

may comprise a full-scale environmental impact assessment (EIA)

for category A projects, an initial environmental examination (IEE) or

equivalent process for category B projects, or a desk review.‖

Thus, with regards to the monitoring and mitigation measures

required under each sub-project assisted by ADB, the prescribed

Environmental Management and Monitoring Plan (EMMP) shall be

followed which is a part of the Initial Environmental Examination

(IEE) conducted by the Executing/Implementing Agency (EA/IA)

and approval obtained from ADB prior to award of any contract(s)

for each sub-project. The EMMP is also a mandatory part of the

Bid/Contract Document such an ADB-assisted project.



o As per ―Guidance document for taking up non-forestry activities in

wildlife habitats‖ issued by the Office of the Deputy Inspector

General of Forests (WL), MoEF, GoI vide F. No. 6-10/2011 WL dated

19 December 2012 for National Board of Wildlife (NBWL)

Clearances, mandatorily follow the provisions made therein, e.g.

for:

Activities inside–Wildlife Sanctuaries, National Parks, Tiger

Reserves, Conservation Reserves. For example:

―As per the proviso under Section 33 (a), no construction of

commercial tourist lodges, hotels, zoos and safari parks can be

undertaken inside a Sanctuary or National Park except with prior

approval of the Standing Committee of NBWL.‖

Activities in areas other than protected areas:

Activities within 10 kms from the boundaries of National Parks

and Wildlife Sanctuaries:

―In pursuance to the order of Hon'ble Supreme Court dated

4th December 2006 in Writ Petition (Civil) No. 460/2004, in

case any project requiring Environmental Clearance, is

located within the eco-sensitive zone around a Wildlife

Sanctuary or National Park or in absence of delineation of

such a zone, within a distance of 10 kms from its boundaries,

the User Agency/Project Proponent is required to obtain

recommendations of the Standing Committee of NBWL.‖

Activities within areas connecting the Tiger Reserves, notified

by the NTCA for controlling the land use as per Section 38 O

(g) of The Wildlife (Protection) Act, 1972:

―Section 38 O (g) of The Wild Life (Protection) Act, 1972

entrusts the responsibility to NTCA to ensure that areas

connecting Tiger habitats are not diverted for ecologically

unsustainable habitats except in public interest and with the

approval of NBWL. Proposals for any activities in such areas

duly notified by NTCA, and recommended by it in

accordance with these provisions, to be covered under

such regulation will be permitted only after seeking

recommendations of the Standing Committee of NBWL.

Violation of this provision is required to be dealt with by the

NTCA.‖

In case any kind of survey work and/or Environment Impact

Assessment (EIA) studies, that is a prelude to future diversion of



land, are to be taken up in areas involving a wildlife habitat,

then also the entire procedure, as prescribed in paragraph 4

above (of this “Guidance document for taking up non-forestry

activities in wildlife habitats”, ICUN, 2001) would need to be

followed.

o MoEF vide its communication F. No. 5-3/2007-FC dated 14 May 2010

under Subject ―Clarification regarding the construction of

permanent structures for Eco-Tourism in the forest areas‖ has clearly

stated that “… the matter has been examined in the Ministry and

the Eco-tourism is regarded as non-forest activity. As such taking up

of non-forest activity including permanent structures amounts to

violation of the provisions of the Forest (Conservation) Act, 1980.”

This normally means that only temporary tourism facilities like

camping tents pitched on ground etc. would be permissible (i.e.

facilities without any pucca base, as any pucca base/plinth of

even 6‘‘ would be treated as permanent structure and thereby

would be a violation as per the said Act). Thus, it is necessary that

any Department that makes such project proposals of ecotourism in

forest areas and/or improvement of trek routes & tourism

infrastructure along trek routes shall be cautious, and make project

proposals that invite need-based minimal interventions in

conjunction with carrying capacity perspective, and whatever

intervention is chosen for implementation it shall be only those that

are eco-friendly in nature during the construction as well as during

their life cycle.

o As per Uttarakhand Tourism Development Master Plan, UNWTO,

2008 a recommendation on preparing & implementing a Tourism

and Environmental Management Plan (TEMP) inclusive of an

integrated transportation plan for wider Johar Valley is presented

with the intent of the Guiding Principles being that ―the purpose of

the TEMP is …… to increase sustainable tourism flows in the area

through better co-ordination between agencies, environmental

management and adherence to carrying capacities,‖ and the

same shall be continued for immediate implementation for each of

other valley zones in the 7-Tourism Zones identified in the said Master

Plan. The benefits which the TEMP aspires to in the said Master Plan,

are summarised as:

Environmental: protecting sensitive areas at risk from

development or excessive tourism flows, and achieving a

balanced distribution of tourists which also enhance the value

of natural areas through eco-tourism;



Social: ensuring that traditional livelihoods such as agriculture,

production of local products and other distinctive cultural

features are sustained and strengthened by tourism; and

Economic: introducing new sustainable forms of tourism in areas

currently isolated from tourism and facilitating higher value

products to provide local communities opportunity to

participate directly or indirectly in tourism.

o The guiding principles when preparing a tourism and environmental

management plans, as provisioned in the Uttarakhand Tourism

Development Master Plan, UNWTO, 2008, shall be continued further

as a best practice in general, when planning for the tourism

development in such eco-sensitive areas, viz.:

Good land management is a prerequisite to increasing

ecotourism and ensuring that more people can visit mountains

and forests in a sustainable and responsible manner. If more

people visit natural areas without damaging the environment

considerable economic benefits can be derived, which if wisely

managed, can also contribute to the conservation and

enhancement of the area. It follows therefore that any

development, tourism or otherwise must be compliant to the

wider objective of conservation and enhancement of the

natural environment. This will comply with the overall

conservation policies of the Forest Department although

departing from these in occasional circumstance where limited

and fully sustainable access into forest areas is deemed

desirable.

A beautiful and pristine environment need not be hidden or shut

away from visitors for the sake of conservation. On the other

hand it should be protected from unsustainable practices or

human influences that cause permanent damage to its

landscape, biodiversity and geo-diversity and/or detracts from

the quality of life of its residents. Good management of visitor

access into the area and the sustainable movement of tourists

within it, are essential to allow a maximum number of people to

enjoy the special qualities of the environment, contribute to its

conservation and enhancement, and provide socio-economic

benefits to local people.

Everyone living in, working in and visiting the valley areas should

take pride in its environment and understand the need for its

conservation and enhancement. In this respect all relevant

authorities and public bodies having authority in the area must



take collective responsibilities towards its planning. This means

working in partnership with local residents, visitors and all actors

involved in the planning and use of land resources of the area,

including the Forest Department, Rural Development

Department, Public Works Department, Irrigation Department,

telecom communication companies and local government

departments responsible for local works (i.e. all actors that bear

an influence on the valley‘s land use and landscape). Actors

may also include NGOs, international donor agencies and the

private sector. Awareness programmes, active participation in

planning by all major stakeholders and transparency in

preparing and implementing the TEMP should make everyone

aware of the unique qualities and opportunities of the area and

the need for responsible planning and development.

Economic development should be encouraged in the wider

valley areas taking into account the importance not only of

tourism but also opportunities to produce and enhance local

products for sale within and outside the area. These may

include viz. distinctive pashminas, angora shawls, and other

sheep wool products, local honey production, local foods,

natural herbs, dress, Tibetan and local jewellery and antiques,

etc. These traditional products can be supplemented by new

products that can be served or sold to tourists, as well as the

promotion of different services.

o Through the provisions of ―Uttarakhand Tourism and Travel Trade

Registration Regulations, 2014‖ issued by UTDB, the Department of

Tourism shall ensure that the hotel developments provide for proper

sewage treatment. This could be widened through grants and

incentives to also treat the wastewater of adjacent village(s). This

facility could be either built large enough from the onset or

designed with room for expansion to allow the treatment of

effluents from the village(s). In order to accomplish such a linkage

between tourism, environmental upgrading and service provision

for the local population it is important to prepare plans before

development is being started. No investor is willing or able to put a

project on hold for a year to wait for an environmental plan to be

prepared. Only if a plan is ready and available, well

communicated to and understood by local officials such a scheme

can be successful.

o For solid waste management, ―Micro-Incinerators‖ are becoming

increasingly popular and their emissions have been reduced



drastically in recent years. These systems can be combined with

power generators and/or hot water generation to gain additional

benefits of energy recovery. Recycling should be enhanced at such

sensitive sites, but the best method is prevention. Some items,

notably plastic bags and one-way bottles should be restricted in

sensitive areas and national parks. It will be difficult to ban water

bottles along a trekking trail/hiking path but a deposit scheme

where all bottles brought into a National Park are subject to a cash

deposit could convince pilgrims and tourists to return these to

environmental-waste collection points rather than disposal of these

in the wild.

o Energy supply is an important topic since the State is plagued by

frequent brownouts. However, energy supply at all costs should be

avoided and not all locations must be connected to the grid. For

example, very small tourism development sites at high altitudes can

generate its own energy using energy recovered from bio-digester

units (for waste management) for any outdoor camp site lighting

(including room heating, if found socio-culturally acceptable) along

with hand-held solar lanterns with solar photovoltaic charging unit

for internal lighting; or a small settlement can generate its own

energy with solar photovoltaic systems and/or micro-hydropower

stations; or when a settlement‘s micro-hydropower station does not

generate enough power, such settlement may need to be

connected to the grid as well.

o With regards to increasing the number of tourists into wildlife

reserves it is imperative that management of tourism flows is

improved and that codes of conduct are introduced (i.e. tourism

flows can be directed to where the natural environment can best

be enjoyed by visitors in a sustainable manner, thereby creating a

high quality and responsible product). This will help increase the

carrying capacity of the parks. In strategic terms management can

be improved by increasing the number of ecotourism attractions

both inside and outside the reserves (for example through the

allocation of interpretation facilities at gateway towns); by planning

new circuits to redistribute and disperse tourists more evenly around

the national parks; and by improving the circulation and

management of tourists around the park (for example by increasing

numbers of tours and limiting independent travel). Management

must include awareness building on the need to conserve and

follow strict codes of conduct. This can best be introduced at

interpretation centres.



Also, as used in Australia, wildlife trails can promote a variety of

wildlife tourism experiences to visitors. Where fauna is not rare or not

easily disturbed, visitors can proceed independently whereas in

other areas of more rare or dangerous fauna, trails should be

experienced as part of guided tours with trained personnel (e.g.

eco-guides). The trails would be shown on simple maps or brochures

and marked on the ground through footpaths, and signage. Each

trail would have an index of ecotourism attractions and possible

sightings of wildlife. They could be combined with trekking

attractions/destinations (Uttarakhand Tourism Development Master

Plan, UNWTO, 2008)

o To turn trekking routes into ecotourism products the following

facilities may be considered (Uttarakhand Tourism development

Master Plan, UNWTO, 2008):

Establishment of Interpretation and Information Centres: These

should be introduced at the beginning of the treks or in the

designated gateway towns or villages. They should be facilities

of international standard. Interpretation of the natural

environment should be a key feature of each Visitor Centre. For

example, at Gangotri an interpretation centre could focus on

the Ganga River, highlighting its cultural and ecological role not

only along the river‘s stretch in Uttarakhand (which would

notably include its famous glacier source) but also along the

whole of its course to the sea. This would be of great interest to

international as well as to domestic tourists and fulfil an

important educational function, which can be combined with

ecotourism.

As well as interpretation of the natural environment (fauna and

flora to be observed), the centre should be totally interactive in

terms of environmental protection, allowing tourists to actively

contribute to the conservation of the mountain environment or

other environmental protection initiatives in the wider area. For

example, in Gangotri, attention could also be made to the solid

waste problems arising from pilgrimage and tourist visits to the

area. This issue should be highlighted together with the

measures that are proposed to clean up the problem, its main

cost components and how tourists can contribute towards the

effort. To maximise the commercial value of such activities the

centre could also sell various equipment (waterproof clothing,

walking sticks, books, detailed maps, guidebooks etc.) the



proceeds of which could be used to run the centre and

contribute towards conservation efforts. Indeed monies raised

from attractions or sales of guidebooks, t-shirts, maps etc. should

be ploughed back into maintaining and expanding the

conservation of the area and fund other worthwhile wildlife

conservation efforts which should be highly publicised to the

visitors so that they are made aware of the trekking

management‘s responsibilities towards protection of the

environment. Tourists should be able to see how entrance fees,

eco-taxes or voluntary donations are funding pro-active and

responsible actions that will lead to real results, and, when the

programme has been on-going, see through monitoring the

results how improvements made through time are reaching

quantifiable objectives (tonnage of refuse cleared, areas

restored in hectares, number of households receiving modern

waste water or solid waste treatment etc.).

Information Signs and Look-out Points: These should be planned

at designated points along the trek providing ecotourists with

further interpretation and advice concerning what to observe

on the treks. At special features separate circuitous boardwalks

could be planned (with sections short enough to

accommodate older or unenergetic tourists) as well as other

walks, such as the wildlife trails as discussed above, which can

also lead to features such as waterfalls.

Development of Ecotourism Infrastructure and Facilities: The

following facilities should also be considered along trekking

routes at selected places:

Development of eco-lodges, both luxury and basic;

Signage made of local materials (e.g. engraved lettering on

stone slab or seasoned wood panels mounted on

wood/stainless steel pole supports, etc.) to inform visitors of

natural features and fauna and flora;

Hides to observe wildlife;

The development in the long-term of special eco-resorts on

specially designated conservation areas;

Where appropriate the development of highly selective

kayaking or rafting tours with interpretation through trained

guides of the rivers‘ ecology and natural features; and

Nature camps for students to enhance awareness of

environmental protection.



The extent of the facilities to be planned along individual treks

should be highly controlled vis-à-vis the nature of the treks (for

example wilderness treks would likely contain few facilities

perhaps limited to interpretation); the carrying capacity of the

environment along the treks; and the nature of ecotourists to be

attracted (for example general or highly specialised trekkers

and nature lovers). Many rural areas in Uttarakhand have old,

paved village tracks, some of which constitute ancient trading

routes. These provide excellent authentic footpaths for use by

tourists. Mapping of such routes should be carried out in

selected areas so that a greater variety of treks, some involving

cultural attractions, can be planned for tourism use.

o Assess carrying capacities of protected areas for tourism visitation

numbers and for those numbers that provide support for

accessibility within such areas like mules, porters, motorised vehicles,

water transport, etc. [refer on carrying capacity ―Guidelines for

Ecotourism in and around Protected Areas (Draft)‖ introduced by

MoEF dated 02 June 2011 or ―Comprehensive Guidelines for Tiger

Conservation and Tourism‖ as per Notification dated 15th October

2012, NTCA], and where already assessed strictly implement/follow

and monitor the same.

For example, provisions that shall be followed under Instructions /

Directives for the High Altitude ―Gangotri National Park‖ for any

travel to the destination of ―Gaumukh‖ [viz. Order No. 2930/37-1

dated 29 April 2008 issued by CWLW Office, Camp-Dehradun w.r.t.–

1) To establish the process for issuing permits to 150 numbers of

pilgrims, tourists, and other visitors per day in Gaumukh area; 2) For

complete prohibition on movement of mules, horses, and other

animals plying under commercial purposes; 3) Directives to reduce

the number of mountaineers in Gaumukh area; 4) Research-related

Instructions in Gangotri National Park; and 5) Arrangements to

regulate onward travel from Gangotri].

Some of the significant instructions/directives amongst others, as per

the above order have been highlighted herewith:

Since the decision of permitting entry only to the limited number

of 150 persons from Gangotri to National Park has been

undertaken, hence, in this regard the policy of ―First Come, First

Serve‖ basis will be adopted.



Deposit the following amounts at Kankhu Barrier for entry to

Gangotri National Park as ―Pollution Deposit,‖ which will be

returned on full compliance of rules stipulated:

For Plastic Bottle Rs 10 per Bottle

For Plastic Raincoat Rs 10 per Raincoat

For Other Inorganic Materials Rs 5 per Item.

For mountaineering expeditions in Gangotri area w.r.t. 31-

specific mountain peaks listed therein, the maximum number of

mountaineers in an expedition would be 8 instead of earlier

prescribed 10* mountaineers, and the number of porters too

would be estimated accordingly.

[*―Guidelines for Mountaineering Expeditions in Uttarakhand‖

issued by UTDB, 2007; Mountaineering Guidelines (Text in Hindi),

available on Forest Department website; ―Guidelines for

mountaineering expeditions in Uttaranchal‖ published by

Government of Uttaranchal, 03 July 2004]

Entry is prohibited upto 500 m peripheral distance from the

Gaumukh.

o The apparently high levels of fees and deposits for mountaineering

expeditions are justified in view of the need for limiting the

frequency of such expeditions to protect the highly sensitive and

fragile high altitude environments. It is also necessary to ensure that

garbage from the hill tops is removed to safe places and buried

(Uttarakhand Tourism Development Master Plan, UNWTO,

2008)/disposed-off appropriately.

o In order to reduce the large number of pilgrims going all the way to

an ever-receding Gaumukh (source of the Ganges), the

attractiveness of other trails in the sanctuary for drawing Gangajal

(Ganges water) should be signposted through a public service

campaign. A three-pronged campaign can: (i) attempt to sign-

post alternative trails leading down to the banks of the Ganges for

fetching water rather than heading towards the ever-receding

‗source‘ of the river; (ii) promote the idea of cleanliness in the river

environs and discourage the soiling/polluting of the Ganges by

discarding old clothes on its river banks; and (iii) encourage the

planting of saplings by tourists and pilgrims as part of a meaningful,

integrated and life-sustaining program for the region. (Uttarakhand


o The ―Guidelines for Mountaineering Expeditions in Uttarakhand‖

issued by UTDB, 2007, have already recommended the following,

which shall be duly followed: ―Every two years, the environmental



and socio‐ economic impacts will be monitored through ground

levels surveys in the three mountaineering hubs of Uttarkashi,

Chamoli and Pithoragarh Districts to determine the carrying

capacity of mountaineering/high mountain trekking activities in

Uttarakhand. The surveys will be conducted by independent

national and international expert agencies such as the Wadia

Institute of Himalayan Geology, Wildlife Institute of India, GB Pant

Institute of Himalayan Environment and Development and

International Centre for Integrated Mountain Development

(ICIMOD), among others. A portion of the Peak Fee and

Environmental Levy remitted by Indian Mountaineering Federation

(IMF) to the State Government will be utilized for this purpose.

International funding and technical assistance will be solicited for

the study of carrying capacity of higher Himalayan areas.‖

o In general, when undertaking any physical development, do

respect the basic natural resource management norms that may

have been already prepared/duly researched and made

applicable in the State for its natural resources of forests,

rivers/streams, lakes, etc., if such development/ any dumping of

material or debris is proposed at a place in or around such natural

resources including their buffer areas/riparian buffers etc. Any

impact that can affect the natural function of these resources by

any such physical development shall at best be avoided

conforming to the regulations; and if any such physical

development is deemed necessary and is permitted as an

exemption to existing regulations, such development shall be duly

supported with all the requisite mitigation measures for eco-

sensitivity considerations, slope stabilisation measures for protection

of development, ultimately contributing to the necessary climate-

change adaptation capacities when having built-such

infrastructure.

Thus, creation of environment-friendly, climate-resilient

development solutions shall remain at the heart of any physical

development process in future, having gone through the impacts of

severe disaster of June 2013, and many more in the past in the State

of Uttarakhand. Such solutions can save lives by not putting/inviting

them at risk, and can save the assets, and ultimately avoid the

notion of disservice by not wasting the tax-payer‟s money/public

exchequer funds by rather being due-diligent every time of “Doing

the Right Thing, the Very First Time.” It‟s our moral responsibility to do



so, towards fellow humans both residing in and those as

tourists/visitors to the State of Uttarakhand.

Keeping in mind the context of the above points, it can be very

rightly highlighted for the need of an overall environmental

conservation perspective when undertaking any physical

development, and as duly emphasised in the Citizens Charter of the

Forest Department, GoUK issued on 25 September 2010 that

“Forests, soil and river systems are the national treasures and it is the

responsibility of every citizen of this country to conserve and protect

it for posterity.” If this has to be truly taken care of in conjunction

with the question of physical development needs for continued

human existence in such a difficult Himalayan terrain, due diligence

and doing the right thing, the very first time are left with us as the

only options to do so, without adversely affecting the natural

conditions in which we have to co-exist.

Heritage Conservation Requirements

o The following provisions of the ―The Ancient Monuments and

Archaeological Sites and Remains Act, 1958‖ vide Notification

dated 28 August 1958, which was amended as ―The Ancient

Monuments and Archaeological Sites and Remains (Amendment

and Validation) Act, 2010‖ vide Notification dated 29 March 2010‖

must be strictly followed when planning any integrated tourism

development-heritage conservation projects near certain heritage

monuments/areas categorised in this Act as ―Prohibited and

Regulated Areas‖:

―Section 20A and Amendment of Section 20A. Every area,

beginning at the limit of the protected area or the protected

monument, as the case may be, and extending to a distance

of one hundred metres in all directions shall be the prohibited

area in respect of such protected area or protected

monument: Provided that the … …‖

―Section 20B. Every area, beginning at the limit of the

prohibited area in respect of every ancient monument and

archaeological site and remains, declared as of national

importance under Sections 3 and 4 and extending to a

distance of two hundred metres in all directions shall be the

regulated area in respect of every ancient monument and

archaeological site and remains: Provided that the … …‖

[For any specific exemptions, refer the full Section 20A & 20B of the

said Amended Act.]



―Section 20C(1). Any persons, who owns any building or

structure, which existed in a prohibited area before the 16th

day of June 1992, or, which had been subsequently

constructed with the approval of the Director-General and

desires to carry out any repair or renovation of such building or

structure, may make an application to the competent

authority for carrying out such repair or renovation, as the case

may be.

Section 20C(2). Any person who owns or possesses in building

or structure or land in any regulated area, and desires to carry

out any construction or re-constriuction or repair or renovation

of such building or structure on such land, as the case may be,

make an application to the competent authority for carrying

out construction or re-construction or repair or renovation, as

the case may be.‖

o As per the ADB‘s existing tourism investment program of IDIPT-UK

FAM documents, the guidelines that must be followed in

undertaking any heritage restoration and conservation work in

tourism sector projects are set out below:

(i) Foremost, any intervention for heritage restoration and

conservation works shall be made, only if absolutely necessary.

In case its absolutely necessary, observe the principle of not

altering the historic condition and involve in treatment of

damage caused by natural processes and human actions to

prevent further deterioration, using both technical and

management measures;

(ii) Promote in-situ conservation in principle and only in the face of

uncontrollable natural threats where relocation is the sole

means of saving elements of an asset, move them from their

historic locations;

(iii) Ensure that intervention is minimal. The conservation measures

and treatment shall include the following four categories11:

11

(i) Regular maintenance is a preventive measure to reduce damage from the cumulative effects of natural processes

and human actions; it is applicable to all sites. An appropriate maintenance program, which includes continuous

monitoring of potential problems and archiving of records, must be established and carried out in accordance with

the relevant standards. (ii) Physical protection and strengthening measures are intended to prevent or reduce

damage to a site or building. These measures themselves must not damage the original fabric and must as far as

possible retain the original character of the setting. New protective structures should be simple, practical, and as

unobtrusive as possible. (iii) Minor restoration comprises a general set of intervention measures which may be

undertaken provided the original structure is not disturbed, new components are not added, and the existing

condition is basically unaltered. This type of intervention most frequently involves rectifying components that are

deformed, displaced, or collapsed; repairing a small number of damaged elements; and removing later additions that

are without significance. (iv) Major restoration is an intervention involving the most impact to the original fabric. It

includes returning a structure to a stable condition through the use of essential reinforcing elements and repair or

replacement of damaged or missing components. The decision to restore through complete disassembly of the



regular maintenance; physical protection and strengthening;

minor restoration; and major restoration. Every intervention

must have clear objectives and use tried and proven methods

and materials;

(iv) Ensure that physical remains are conserved in their historic

conditions without loss of evidence. Respect for the

significance of the physical remains must guide any

restoration. Technical interventions must not compromise

subsequent treatment of the original fabric. The results of

intervention must be unobtrusive when compared to the

original fabric or to previous treatments, but still must be

distinguishable;

(v) Ensure preservation of traditional technology and

craftsmanship. New materials and techniques may be used

only after they have been tried and proven, and must in no

way cause damage to the site (i.e. any such intervention must

be reversible in nature, so that if in any case of its later failure,

the said intervention can be reversed without causing any

damage to the intervened surface);

(vi) Ensure that the setting of a heritage site is conserved. Natural

and cultural landscapes that form part of a site‘s setting

contribute to its significance and must be integrated with its

conservation;

(vii) Ensure that during any archaeological excavation, if required,

care is taken to conserve the physical remains. A practical

plan for the conservation of a site–both during and after

excavation–must be submitted for all sites programmed for

excavation;

(viii) Ensure that treatment of the cultural heritage site and its

environs is a comprehensive measure to prevent damage from

natural processes and human actions to reveal the historic

condition of a site, and to allow its rational use. Treatment shall

be taken that involves the provision of facilities to service the

public and to ensure site and visitor safety. Service buildings

must be as far as possible from the principal area of the site.

Exhibition and visitor facilities must be integrated in design and

located in the same vicinity. Landscaping must aim to restore

the site to its historic state and must not adversely affect the

structure should be taken with caution. All problems revealed in the course of disassembly should be rectified so that

the structure should need no further treatment for a considerable time. Restoration should, as far as possible, preserve

the vestiges and traces of periods judged to have significance. Both the design and materials for replacement

elements should be consistent with the evidence provided by existing fabric.



site. Contemporary gardening and landscape concepts and

designs must not be introduced;

(ix) Explore/plan that after heritage restoration and conservation

works, can the site/buildings be put to adaptive reuse, so that

the tourism revenues so generated from such reuse can fund

its future conservation costs, and thus bring-in financial self-

sustainability perspective to conservation needs; and

(x) For heritage sites of national significance, prepare a heritage

conservation and management plan including the visitor

management/circulation plan, prior to undertaking above-

mentioned steps/details for restoration and conservation work.

o As per an unpublished document prepared by ADB TA as

Consultant to an earlier project viz. ―Implementation Guidelines‖ as

Part of DPR for Conservation and Revitalization of Rambagh

Garden (2007-08), Amritsar, Punjab, the following recommendations

for heritage conservation & revitalization are given below:

Projects pertaining to historic places require more supervision

than those of new buildings. The need for close attention during

project implementation can be reduced by thorough research,

documentation, investigation and contract-preparation in the

preliminary stages of the project. Despite thorough preparatory

work, unforeseen findings should generally be expected in the

course of work in a historic place. The technical ‗expert

committee‘ must be prepared to undertake frequent decision-

making with the help of relevant qualified consultants.

The contract documents should provide for changes to the

scope of work owing to the nature of work in historic places. This

is because certain characteristics of a historic place may not be

ascertained at the outset of the contract and may be

discovered in the course of the project. Provision of flexibility

would aid in proper financial control of these changes. The

contract should be concise, comprehensive and underline the

significance of the various procedures.

In certain situations it may be necessary to prepare a

preliminary contract to undertake urgent works to prevent rapid

deterioration and impending hazards, while the often long

process of obtaining funds, consents and main contracts

proceeds. A separate contract for archaeological excavations

or material investigation may be prepared before the main

contract to understand the historic place better and reduce the

need for changes to the scope of work due to subsequent



exploration. Tracing service lines and concealed voids within the

fabric may be another rationale for preliminary contracts.

Prepare and refer the RFP (Request for Proposals) document to

determine who is qualified to undertake projects pertaining to

historic places.

The applicability of a guideline with respect to the heritage

conservation & revitalization should be such that the quality of

the entire experience of a visitor to a heritage place should be

the essence of any conservation approach that involves

tourism. The idea behind tourism promotion must be to make a

historic place self-sustainable, without causing damage to

significant characteristics of the heritage place.

All planning and implementation measures that pertaini to ‗new

proposals‘ as well as conservation of the historic fabric must

conform to the guidelines in order to safeguard the cultural

value of the places. These refer to all works within and around

the historic places.

These guidelines direct the process of conservation, planning,

policy-making, revitalization, interpretation, design,

maintenance and management of the historic places and their

environs. The guidelines are meant to enable effective

preservation in conjunction with development for the present

and future. All those involved with any of these processes must

be sensitized with respect to handling of historic fabric and must

be familiarized with these guidelines. They include owners,

managers, archaeologists, architects, engineers, surveyors,

contractors, conservators and local authorities of historic places.

It is recommended, at the very outset, that a Technical ‗Expert

Committee‘ be appointed to guide the planning,

implementation and maintenance plan for the historic places.

The technical ‗expert committee‘ must ensure that all works

(current projects and future works) are carried out in

conjunction with this document. This committee must comprise

of qualified multi-disciplinary specialists from the field of heritage

conservation and management. Historic places that have stood

the test of time require judgement to be exercised when

decisions are being made about their conservation or

revitalization. This judgement should be based on an

understanding of principles informed by experience and

knowledge. The decisions specific to each historic place (such



as alterations, etc. that require approval) must be taken on

case-by-case basis after consultation with additional qualified

professionals such as conservation architects, landscape

architects, geo-technical experts, structural engineers,

archaeologists and other experts.

The current projects and all works proposed in the future for the

historic places, must conform with the principles of The Burra

Charter, 1999 (Australia ICOMOS Charter for Places of Cultural

Significance) to ensure that best international practice is

followed. Also the management should refer to the International

Cultural Tourism Charter (Managing Tourism at Places of Historic

Significance, ICOMOS, Mexico) for tools of managing sites of

similar use.

Community Development or Social Welfare/Gender Inclusiveness/

Training & Skill Development, and Overall Economic Development

o The UNWTO has identified the following 7 ST-EP (Sustainable Tourism-

Eliminating Poverty) Mechanisms for creation of awareness and

capacity building (Uttarakhand Tourism Development Master Plan,

UNWTO, 2008, and http://step.unwto.org/):

Employment of the disadvantaged sections/poor in tourism

enterprises.

This mechanism involves undertaking measures to increase the

level of the poor working in tourism enterprises. Indeed, the

relationship between tourism enterprises and the employment of

local people is symbiotic, in that both sides stand to benefit

considerably. This addresses poverty directly by enabling the

poor to develop their own skills; by allowing for the possibility of

a large number of people to benefit directly; and raising the

standards of service. It is important that the provision of

education and training is strengthened so that the poor may

respond to such opportunities, and any social or cultural barriers

are removed.

Supply of goods and services to tourism enterprises by the poor

or by enterprises employing the poor.

One of the fundamental conditions to achieving poverty

reduction is in ensuring that goods and services in the tourism

supply chain, as much as possible, come from local sources at

all stages. The objective would be to maximise the proportion of

tourism spending that is retained in local communities and to



involve the poor in the supply process. Such a measure would

help support traditional forms of rural activities and skills,

enhance the quality and identity of the local tourism product,

and help establish stable sources of business.

Direct sales of goods and services to visitors by the poor

(informal economy)/sector.

One of the main ways in which poor people seek to earn

income from tourists is through selling produce and services,

such as fruits, handicrafts or guided tours, directly to them.

Where visitors engage with this informal economy, it can be a

successful direct route to providing income to the poor, and it

can provide visitors with a colourful and rewarding experience.

Information provision to tourists on available local products is

important, as well as training to local people to ensure their

products meet the quality requirements of visitors.

Establishment and running of small, micro or community-based

tourism enterprises or joint ventures by the poor (formal

economy)/host population.

This involves the establishment and management of more

formal tourism enterprises by the poor, either individually or at a

community level. These may include accommodation

establishments, catering, transport, retail outlets, guiding and

entertainment. Advantages of enterprise formation at the local

level are that it places power and control in the hands of the

local people, it can guarantee investments for the longer term

and it enables enterprises to establish a scale of operation

needed to attract customers.

Redistribution of proceeds from tax or charge on tourists or

tourism enterprises with proceeds benefiting the host

population.

This mechanism relates to the revenues that are earned by

national or local government from tourism which can be used to

reduce poverty. It has the advantage that all of the poor can

benefit from tourism without being directly engaged in the

sector. The extent to which state revenue earned from tourism is

put towards poverty alleviation will depend on national priorities

and programs. Taxes or levies raised locally, for example

through levies on bed-nights or entrance fees for protected

areas, can often be used fully or partly for community benefits.



Transparency in the application of local taxes is essential, as well

as consultation with the private sector to avoid deterring the

industry and travellers by imposing too high taxation levels.

Voluntary giving and support by tourists or tourism enterprises.

Voluntary support in money or in kind, given by visitors or tourism

enterprises to the poor can act as influential drivers for local

poverty reduction. Various studies have pointed to a willingness

amongst tourists to give something back to the area they are

visiting. Many tourism enterprises are also committed to provide

sponsorship to development initiative in the areas where they

operate. Local NGOs or trusts may help develop mechanisms

for the collection and dispersal of donations. Beneficiary

schemes clearly showing tangible local impact and community

involvement have a high chance of attracting sponsorship and

visitor support.

Investment in infrastructure stimulated by tourism also benefiting

the poor/inhabitants in the locality, directly or through support

to other sectors.

Tourism development, particularly in a new, remote or rural

location, can include investment in new infrastructure, such as

roads, water and energy supply, sanitation and

communications. With careful planning, such infrastructure can

also bring positive benefits to the poor, by providing them with

basic services and opening up new and faster routes to access

markets. The main challenge is to make sure that new tourism

development is not consuming resources at the expense of

local communities, but rather offering them the chance to gain

new access to them.

o Even if supporting operations like mule operations are procured

through auction, the provision of medical insurance for porters or an

investment should be made for their welfare from the amount

raised through their venture which is primarily environment-friendly.


o Through the provisions of ―Uttarakhand Tourism and Travel Trade

Registration Regulations, 2014‖ issued by UTDB, the Department of

Tourism shall ensure that apart from the current provision that the

residents of the Uttarakhand are provided employment in the firm

of each Tourism Unit/Enterprise Operator according to the Orders

issued by the Government from time to time, it shall also be assured



that the statutory minimum wages would be payable and are paid

too in the tourism industry.

o Tourism is a service industry and its success depends greatly on the

service offered. It is also imperative that those employed within the

industry have the necessary skills to perform their duties, for a

satisfactory visitor experience. To achieve these professional

standards, planned programs of education and training for the

industry are vital requirements for any emerging destination. Scenic

beauty, attractions and facilities are all important, but a

professional service is equally important. The industry must

appreciate that training can improve the quality of staff, their

motivation and productivity and can lead to a reduction in staff

turnover. Education processes assist communication within the

industry and develop staff relationships so that employees

engender a team spirit and this must have a positive impact on

company's operations. As a result, all parties benefit: employees

experience personal as well as job performance improvements;

management understands more about staff capability; a team

spirit is engendered; educators and trainers upgrade their own skills

as well. (Uttarakhand Tourism Development Master Plan, UNWTO,

2008)

o Conduct training needs analysis (TNA) study every 5-years for

tourism industry. Apart from making provisions for tourism industry-

related training in general, make some specific provisions for

―Foreign Language Training for Tourist Guides/Eco-Guides/Mountain

Guides‖ (may consider languages of top-5 countries based on

visitor country profile analysis for such tourism activities), ―Training

the Artisans‖ and ―Training the Trainers‖ programs as well.

Also, the Uttarakhand Tourism Development Master Plan, UNWTO,

2008, recommends that ―During field visits an attempt must be

made to identify collective and strategic needs of training in tourist

welcome and orientation for the actors in tourism. Strategic needs

are understood as those needs that directly address requirements

of the industry and the satisfaction of which contributes to meet the

development objectives of tourism. Collective needs are

understood as the actual and common needs of the various actors

that need to be assessed. These needs are the result of an analysis

of a survey of individual needs.‖ An evaluation scheme was also

presented in the Master Plan, can always be improved upon and

modified depending upon the type of unit or course being

evaluated.



o When required in remote areas, integrate the usage of multi-

purpose halls/shelters created under disaster preparedness

program (from time-to-time) for the training space purposes.

o For promotion of community-based tourism, there would be need

to re-orient bank officials and NGO workers (for proper

implementation/coverage of employment schemes with micro-

finance), as also tour operators. The village population would have

to be trained to become good guides; the local craftsmen should

learn how to sell their products in an attractive and enticing

manner. There may also be need for developing local crafts by way

of introduction of new designs and products and marketing them.

Most importantly there would be the need to develop local cuisine

and to present it in a clean and hygienic fashion for the tourist.


o A central feature of the ecotourism strategy is to involve local

communities in engaging in tourism with adequate training

imparted (Uttarakhand Tourism Development Master Plan, UNWTO,

2008, and Rural Tourism Scheme Components Presentation Excerpts,

UTDB, 2014):

Whereas activities that directly involve local people in

ecotourism (such as guiding i.e. eco-guides, the employment of

villagers as environmental guards or activities which promote or

conserve the cultural heritage of an area) do most to help the

environment directly, other forms of intervention, some involving

mainstream tourism activities, can also be beneficial for

conservation and social development, provided these are well

planned and sustainable. For example, encouraging local

people to open small businesses for goods and services in areas

where there is a clear perception that conservation helps bring

tourists to admire scenery or fauna, can help foster a sense of

environmental ownership among local people and hence install

a purpose and responsibility for respecting the environment. As

long as local people realize that tourists visit a particular locality

because of the beauty and quality of its environment, a direct

link between economic gain and conservation/environmental

protection can be established which will reduce conflicts

between villagers and the natural environment. The existing

MOT, GoI Scheme that tries to promote village tourism as a

primary tourism product and is related to funding by Central

Government (under CFA) for physical works like tourist

accommodation/reception centres/cafes/crafts/sports centres



(i.e. ‗hardware‘) and training & skill development/capacity

development/awareness programs etc. (i.e. ‗software‘) projects

with its applicable sub-components shall continue, and the

State (through its current efforts by UTDB and ILSP under UGVS,

RDD) is further encouraged to identify villages and proposals for

promoting rural tourism.

At the planning stage of physical infrastructure, it is necessary to

define, ideally with the co-operation of the villagers, what type

of hard infrastructure is required to implement or support

ecotourism. This could relate to facilities directly related to

ecotourism, such as an interpretation or information centre,

hides or watch towers, or support utility infrastructure such as

proper sewage or solid waste disposal, or improved access such

as walking/trekking paths, equipment such as canoes, or

training facilities such as a learning centre. Activities may relate

to those specified in the ‗Revised Guidelines of Scheme for

Product/Infrastructure Development for Destinations and

Circuits‘ by MOT, GoI for which funding by the National

government is available as described above. The process

should include a meeting to be held with local people to discuss

the strengths of the village for ecotourism and to gauge their

preference for particular activities and the specific needs of the

community.

Private tourism businesses‘ employing local people is a direct

form of intervention that can usefully provide employment for

the local workforce. Many accreditation schemes measuring

the performance of tourism businesses vis-à-vis sustainable and

responsible tourism use the number of local people employed in

a business as a key indicator. However, it is necessary to ensure

that wages and conditions promote better living quality and

satisfaction among these workers so that ecotourism is

perceived among the local community as being a positive

economic and social contributor. Exploitation of workers in this

capacity can lead to unfavourable reactions towards

ecotourism and tourism in general and may not encourage

people to look after their environment as a result. Particularly

low wages may also encourage local people to continue

activities that conflict with conservation, such as poaching, to

supplement livelihoods.

Local individuals selling produce and handicraft to visitors

should ideally be organized through tourism or other local



businesses. It allows local people to participate directly and can

result in a good spreading of benefits. However it is necessary to

ensure that quality products are made available for sale, ideally

with an element of local distinctiveness that represents the

locality in which they are produced. Quality control and

agreements with tourism businesses to promote fair trade should

be put in place. The advantage is that products can be made

in villages that are not necessarily in themselves scenic

attractions or which have major tourism attractions.

Private tourism businesses (internally or externally owned)

operating within a community can be permitted through the

granting of a concession to operate in the community, in return

for a fee and a share of revenue. Although they are often

successful, such schemes can usually only be undertaken in

communities that have important tourism attractions (such as

those near to scenic spots or interesting natural or cultural

features). The management set-up of such arrangements,

ensuring a fair share and effective co-operation between the

community and the businesses, assumes great importance in

such schemes.

When individuals, with links to the community, establish and run

their own small tourism businesses in their own communities,

there is a need to ensure that sufficient skills and tourism

knowledge is available to such operators, although the degree

to which these are required depends on the sophistication of

the products or services offered. Nevertheless it is an important

means to ensure that local people can directly benefit in

tourism activities. Where businesses grow too large however,

similar safeguards concerning wages and conditions for workers

also need to be assured.

Initiatives like communally owned and run enterprises, if backed

by a sound business plan and good community organizing

mechanisms, can ensure a wide spread of benefits to members

of the community. Co-operatives can ensure that revenues are

ploughed back into the community, with surpluses used for

training and production of added value products over time.

It need not be reiterated that human interaction is an essential

part of the tourism experience. As far as the development of

human resources is concerned, the policy must involve the State

Tourism Department and Uttarakhand Tourism Development

Board (UTDB) in conducting various training programmes,



seminars, and workshops for departmental staff as well as the

general public to meet the requirement of accommodation,

catering, tourist guides, hotel management, eco-tourism,

trekking management, etc. and of course general awareness.

((Uttarakhand Tourism Development Master Plan, UNWTO, 2008)

i.e. Government should be on hand to kick-start and support

initiatives through appropriate training programmes. It can

either do this directly or through appropriate NGOs, who are

active in these fields and/or the areas concerned. It is important

that this is put into the context of a concise strategy in which all

actors know their roles and responsibilities, including the

targeted local communities. It is recommended that five

elements of training should be targeted: English language (The

need to communicate preferably in the language of the tourist

would always remain paramount. It is therefore extremely

important that all young trainees and even the existing ones are

made to undergo a general course in communication with a

special emphasis on communication in the English language

which is emerging as a universal language of communication);

Environmental Awareness and Interpretation; Hygiene and

Safety; Tourism Management; and Financial Management. The

objectives of the training programmes inter alia will be to

provide villagers with basic skills, sufficient to converse with

tourists, to show a degree of expertise in the interpretation and

management of the environment and gain know how in tourism

and financial management. It would also help them prepare an

environment that is safe and clean, the minimum standards that

international tourists will expect. In particular, skills in

environmental interpretation can be linked to the particular

strengths of the locality, be it watching birds, butterflies, or large

mammals, understanding the pharmacopoeia of the forests,

appraising the cultural heritage of the locality or simply

undertaking nature trails. It is essential that the courses and the

trainers are learner friendly and are geared to local people. In

this respect courses should be fun and easy to understand.

Overly academic or elitist forms of training are likely to fail: as

one of the major constraints usually holding villagers back is a

lack of confidence in dealing with outsiders, teachers should be

able to quickly install a sense of confidence and ease. As such

careful screening of trainers should be exercised. The

combination of a native English teacher with local teachers



would be a creative and cost effective method to bring quality

teaching in English language to selected village communities.

Alternatively or complementarily, training could be directed

towards livelihood generation in guiding and environmental

protection for villagers wanting employment in conservation in

surrounding national parks. This should be done in cooperation

with and active support of the Department of Forests &

Environment covering some exposure and training for personnel

dealing with ecotourism, bird watching, wildlife tourism etc.

Coming to hotels and such establishments it is better to

motivate the industry to start adopting training facilities which

can be captive to such service providers but insist on a strict

compliance of standards as may be laid down by the

government or a corresponding apex body. The government

will not have the wherewithal to undertake this training other

than introduction of vocational courses in the craft centres and

industrial training institutes in the State.

In general, there should be a reorientation programme (at least

once in 3 years) for all staff coming in contact with the tourists,

international or domestic. The scheme of training of guides

deserves to be revisited: there should be adequate emphasis on

local history, culture, cuisine, customs and geography. All tour

operators shall be persuaded to depute only trained guides with

the tourists. There should be a mandatory refresher course for

the guides and porters, once in every two years. There should

be a separate capsule for personnel serving guests under the

―bed and breakfast (B&B)‖ scheme / Home Stays. Since the

future belongs to those who can handle computers, therefore,

all training courses must lay adequate emphasis on handling of

computers and information technology.

In the medium- to long- term other investments to further

strengthen the ecotourism products in the selected villages

should be developed. These could help develop more

sophisticated forms of training or activities in the villages, in line

with villagers‘ aspirations. In accordance with the communities‘

requirements these could comprise: Developing more

sophisticated forms of guiding and interpretation; Initiating food

processing for local products such as local vegetables; Creating

Indian cooking classes for tourists; Developing higher value

agriculture; Helping create a more comprehensive ecotourism



product built around such activities as trekking, mountaineering,

and rafting; Helping create skills and abilities necessary for

intensified participation in the upcoming mainstream tourism

and high quality tourism activities in the village area; Introducing

more sophisticated information displays; Developing a village

heritage trail for tourists; Planning and developing village home

stays (in new or refurbished traditional village houses) or

guesthouses for tourists; Introducing a village co-operative store;

and Introducing better public toilets* and conveniences. [*For

example, bio-toilets or conventional public toilets with bio-

digester system of sewerage disposal.]

o Revising regulatory mechanisms to facilitate ecotourism: A number

of regulatory mechanisms are recommended to be put in place in

order to facilitate the ecotourism strategy and to ensure

compliance to quality products and services (Uttarakhand Tourism

Development Master Plan, UNWTO, 2008):

Facilitating Ecotourism Development in Selected Areas: It is

important that ecotourism can develop in selected national

parks. This will entail request for lifting some of the more

draconian regulations that restrict all development or access

into forest areas. A special zoning of the forest area could be

introduced, proposed as Quiet Zones, where limited ecotourism

activities may be undertaken. Here small groups of visitors could

enjoy the tranquillity of the mountains and partake in a special

ecotourism product. The zones could include specialist eco-

lodges or spas, trekking or wildlife trails and various ecotourism

facilities such as viewing towers or hides where visitors may

experience outstanding views of the mountains in solitude and

contemplation. Restricted access roads would also be included

in these zones. The name ‗Quiet Zones‘ is intended to reinforce

the special and select nature of such ecotourism areas, so that

they cannot be exploited for any large scale or non-ecotourism

development and to ensure that any development here

remains exclusive and non-catering to a mass market. All

facilities would need to be accredited to strict environmental

standards. Accredited facilities / institutions / homestays etc

shall be advertised and published on the GoUK website / portal.

Moreover UNEP* provides useful and comprehensive guidelines

for building eco-lodges that should be strictly observed in the

quiet zones. These include specifying that the siting and design

of tourism developments should consider the appropriateness of



the location and its sense of place. It should involve locally

made products and be planned at an appropriate scale of

design for lodging, tours and attractions. Biodiversity

conservation and integrity of the ecosystem processes should

be researched in detail where ecotourism facilities are planned

and site disturbance, should be minimised and where necessary

mitigated by landscaping or rehabilitation. Design and

construction should prevent impacts upon natural drainage,

soils and ensure that storm water management is sustainable.

Energy supply should be ecologically sustainable (using where

possible renewable energy) and minimize total energy use.

Water supply should be ecologically sustainable and minimize

total use (and wastewater should be treated and disposed of in

a long term sustainable manner, involving removal from sensitive

areas). There should moreover be no dominant visual impacts

and lighting should be discreet. Materials and supplies used

should be sustainable (recyclable and recycled materials,

locally produced, certified timber products etc.). Moreover

specific minimal environmental impact codes of practice

should be adopted for activities.

[* ―Ecotourism: Principles, Practices & Policies for Sustainability‖

by Megan Epler Wood, UNEP-TIES, 2002]

Devising Schemes to Fund Conservation Initiatives through

Tourism: Through consultations with the Forest Department,

conservation groups, communities and tourists, strategies should

be developed and tested for using tourism as a source of

funding for conservation. Entrance fees, wildlife viewing fees,

tourism concessions and tourist donation funds are examples of

revenue-generating strategies that have proved successful and

could be used. A further measure could be an eco-tax. A

crucial prerequisite for such measures is for transparency,

namely to ensure that the funds are well managed to support

key conservation objectives and that such management and its

results is clearly visible to tourists. An eco-tax could be

introduced to help fund improvements to the environment. The

tax could either be voluntary or mandatory and either restricted

to certain attractions (such as ecotourism activities) or applied

at a wider level in Uttarakhand (for example as part of hotel

fees). Such a tax would allow: Government to raise additional

revenue to subsidise environmentally friendly modes of travel

such as or important projects on environmental improvements



(for example solid waste disposal) or conservation; Reinforce the

image of Uttarakhand as an exclusive natural environment of

the highest quality; and Discourage the large flows of low

spending tourists to selected areas where it is desirable to keep

visitor numbers low.

Certification and Accreditation Systems: A certification system

of eco-resorts or mainstream hotels that adhere to sound

environmental practices (such as recycling of water, use of solar

energy, etc.) in natural areas should be set up. For those hotels

not adhering to standards as described above, tourists could be

made to pay an eco-tax as mentioned above. The precise

nature of this certification should be based on best practice as

through detailed research on accreditation systems in

environmentally sensitive areas. The system should be simply

applied to the mountains or be extended and elaborated from

other schemes developed in similar areas. Operators would be

accredited if they satisfied a certain number of environmental

and socially responsible criteria, helping them differentiate from

other operators. Given that responsible tourists would be a

major target of the ecotourism strategy, such an initiative would

provide sound business sense. The certification scheme to be

developed should:

contribute to sustainable tourism development of the target

areas;

verify those products with advanced performance

indicators;

contribute to maintaining and enhancing service quality in

tourism;

limit energy consumption;

limit water consumption;

limit the production of waste;

favour the use of renewable resources and of substances

which are less hazardous to the environment;

promote environmental communication and education;

and

recognise community and social support contributions from

tourism businesses, such as sponsoring local product

association programs.

Criteria to be set up monitoring will include those on energy

management, water management, wastewater management;

waste management, chemical use; purchasing; contribution to



biodiversity and nature conservation; community development

and social issues in the workplace; set-up of environmental

management systems; interpretation; and transportation. A form

of eco-labelling (such as a green elephant sign) could be

devised and be publicized widely to make it a worthwhile

marketing tool for the operator.

A separate accreditation system could be applied to eco-

lodges where these are permitted in a national park of

protected forest environment. This accreditation system could

be developed to assure tourists that they are truly staying in a

real environmental sustainable facility which has no adverse

impact on the national park or wildlife sanctuary and actually

contributes towards conservation. This specialised accreditation

system would cover:

A written policy regarding sustaining the environment and

local people;

A description of the contribution made to conservation

and/or local people.

A description of how contributions to conservation and local

communities are measured.

Percentage of local people employed and numbers in

management positions.

Links to local or national/international conservation groups/

charities and other NGOs;

Percentage of produce and services sourced locally from

the lodge;

Treatment of waste water and how sustainable fuels are

used;

Level of information and advice provided to tourists on the

local environment; and

Number of guides employed from the local community.

The principles for this type of accommodation may be taken

from UNEP, namely:

They should conserve the surrounding environment both

natural and cultural;

They have minimal impact on the natural surroundings

during construction;

They should use alternative, sustainable means of water

acquisition and reduce water consumption;



They should provide careful handling and disposal of solid

waste and sewage;

They should meet energy needs through passive design;

They should offer interpretative programmes to educate

both employees and tourists; and

They could contribute to sustainable local development

through research programs.

o Facilitating Greater Participation by and Returns to Rural Women,

Youth and Rural Specialists from the Tourism Economy: The action

plan recommended below is based on situation analysis in

Uttarakhand along parameters concerning the present and

potential role for women in rural areas. (Uttarakhand Tourism


Table 4.2: Action Plan for Greater Participation by Rural Women

S.

No.

Activity Who Trains Who

Benefits

Short-term Goals Mid-term

Goals

Long-term

Goals

1 Increasing

tourism

awareness

through village-

level meetings

NGO

worker

Rural

women

Increased

capacity to

augment local

income

possibilities from

diverse tourism

activities

Efforts at

income

result in an

income

stream

The activity

engages

increasing

numbers of

women

2 Design of

village-based

Home Stays

NGO

worker

Rural

women

Visits to

successful Home

Stay areas for

knowledge

sharing

Able to

profit from

Home Stays

The activity

engages

increasing

numbers of

women

3 Seeking

subsidies/ grant

for tourism

development

Bank

Worker

Rural

women

Capacity to

refurbish

accommod-

ation

Able to

access

loans for

tourism

efforts

The activity

engages

increasing

numbers of

women

4 Developing

e-business

skills/working

with tour

operators

including rate

fixing

Profession

al

Computer

Trainer

Young

Educated

rural

women

Capacity to use

the Worldwide

Web

Capacity to

access relevant

tourist sites

Capacity to

run e-

business

independ-

ently

The activity

increases

degree of

control over

income

5 Empowering

women towards

Financial

management

and control of

Bank

Worker

Educated

women

Capacity to

open and work

an independent

bank account

for enterprise

Capacity to

run a

tourism

enterprise

for profit

The activity

engages

increasing

numbers of



S.

No.


Benefits

Short-term Goals Mid-term

Goals

Long-term

Goals

enterprise women

Source: Uttarakhand Tourism Development Master Plan, UNWTO, 2008

o The ―RED Tourism Groundwork Uttarakhand (UA) Report‖ issued by

gtz on 8/1/2008, emphasises the challenges and recommendations

on empowerment as:

―The research illustrates that in many cases women and

disadvantaged group of the society still remain outside the direct

circle of beneficiaries. In the case of Home Stays a bias12 to better-

off households exists (c.f. Sarmoli Van Panchayat). In the case of

committee formation men outweigh women in most cases creating

a male-dominated atmosphere (c.f. Village Ways). The women‘s

role in decision making and management jobs is often not by man

in the community and male members of the family (c.f.

Barsu/Raithal village cluster in UNWTO master plan, 2008; Village

Ways), resulting into men engaging in the actual business

management while women only remain a ―on paper ownership‖

phenomena (c.f. UPASaC Lodge Kharadi Village, Uttarkashi).

Recommendation:

12

The ―RED Tourism Groundwork Uttarakhand (UA) Report‖ issued by gtz on 8/1/2008 further elaborated

―…questioning the whole idea of pro-poor development. Therefore, home stays development should be

reconsidered and not included into the pro-poor development strategies when no private actor is

involved who provides facilities and ensure services. Replications should be thought twice about and a

thorough analysis of-if the product fits the community (i.e. strong leadership, heritage property asset,

sources of expertise and finance through cooperation, etc.) followed by an assessment-if the tourist

would want to actually visit the location (i.e. access). In the case all qualifiers are met, community guest

houses are to be preferred to home stays, and inclusive models can be created through equality

measures as wider community benefit quality measures are integrated to be implemented that foster a

fair benefit to the wider community (i.e. Village Fund). Instead focus should lie on the attraction and

facilitation of quality facilities that benefits the region by attracting large numbers of tourists and

comparably higher direct and indirect employment as well as transfer of skills that potentially can be run

by the community… … or the support of value chain linkages.‖

Further, ―The RED Tourism Value Chain Selection, Strategy and Operational Plan-Uttarakhand, October

2008‖ by International Tourism Consultancy for gtz-RED program, Uttarakhand emphasises that ―Too

often, tourism is seen as an easy sector to enter believing that the assets of the area will automatically

attract visitors, without understanding that the sector is very market-driven. The perception held by some

local authorities, local communities, entrepreneurs and NGOs about the tourism potential of an area

often overshadows the reality of actually developing a viable tourism destination which will bring tourists

and therefore income to local firms and communities. So, more often than not a product-driven

approach is adopted, i.e. opening a guest house or a home stay without taking into account the markets

that they will serve, their needs and how the product should be adapted to these or how they can be

reached. For SMEs, local communities and entrepreneurs to successfully enter the tourism sector, they

must identify their markets, tailor the products and services to their needs, and have access to strong

distribution channels. The most effective strategy to adopt for firms and communities with limited

resources is to find strong marketing partners which will focus on the promotion effort.‖



Overcoming traditional structures is a challenging and long-term

process that requires sensitisation of the whole community,

innovative approaches (i.e. club women to strengthen their position

and avoid isolation; gender sensitisation committee–Village Ways)

and mechanisms of checks and balances (i.e. pay women

directly). Empowerment indicators should be included in project

proposals and checked against the actual implementation.‖

o Involving Youngsters in the Rural Tourism Effort: The Uttarakhand

Tourism Development Master Plan, UNWTO, 2008 reported that

―Survey shows that youngsters evinced considerable interest in

tourism development in rural areas but how to go about organizing

a successful tourism enterprise was the moot issue. Young and

educated men especially did not want to work in the fields and

were excited about the prospects that could open up with tourism

development in their villages.‖ An action-plan for rural youngsters as

outlined in the said Master Plan is given below.

Table 4.3: Action Plan for Participation in Tourism by Rural Youth

S. No. Activity Who Trains Short-term Goals Mid-term Goals Long-term Goals

1 Campaign

driving

home value

of local

heritage

International

volunteer

An assessment

of area‘s unique

assets and

accurate

interpretation,

presentation

and marketing

of heritage sites

Capacity to

grow, develop

and market USPs

Conservation and

tourism can work

synergistically

2 Mountain

guides

Uttarkashi

Mountain-

eering

Institute

Capacity to

negotiate

mountain terrain

Development of

adventure tourism

in the region

making most of

destination

potential

Mountain guides

can combine this

activity with

organizing Home

Stays, experiential

tourism

3 e-business

skills for

tourism and

marketing

destination

Professional

Computer

Trainer

Capacity to use

the Worldwide

Web

Capacity to

access relevant

tourist sites

Capacity to run

e-business

independently

Growing the

tourism enterprise

beyond the

immediate locale

Should show

direct impact on

the local

economy


o Spreading Tourism Benefits to Distinctive Ethnic/Artisanal Groups in

Rural Areas: The state of Uttarakhand offers the tourist the chance

to watch artisans at work in villages, to listen to folk singers and



musicians and watch dance performances that are organically

linked to local culture, as well as to experience the nomadic culture

of pastoralists in rural areas. Rural youngsters can design special

programs that dovetail living and learning of such niche styles of life

for national and international tourists. An action plan with this in

mind is proposed below. (Uttarakhand Tourism Development Master

Plan, UNWTO, 2008)

Table 4.4: Action Plan for Participation in Tourism by Rural Youth

S.

No.


Benefits

Short-term

Goals

Mid-term

Goals

Long-term

Goals

1 Tourists learn

about

weaving,

local

styles

Niche tour

operators

focusing on

weaving

world-wide

Tour

operator –

in the main

Weaver

secondarily

Weaver

learns that his

skill and

method may

interest others

NGO to help

weavers

organize their

own local

craft displays

/ learning

classes

Weavers

adapt the

quality of

their product

to tourist

tastes and

earn higher

profit

2 Tourists learn

how to play

local

instruments

from folk

musicians

Niche tour

operators

focusing on

folk music

worldwide

Tour

operator

– in the

main

Musicians

secondarily

Musician

learns

that his skill

and method

can interest

tourists

NGO assists

musicians to

organize their

own local

music events/

learning

classes

Local music

grows

through

interaction

Marketing of

local music

soft media

3 Tourists learn

the ways of

nomadic

shepherds

and

mountain

livestock

rearing

Niche tour

operator

focusing on

high-

mountain

lifestyle

experience

Tour

operator –

in the main

Shepherds

secondarily

Shepherd

learns that his

skill and life-

style can

interest

tourists

NGO assists

shepherds to

market their

experience

with high

altitude-

shepherding

Nomadic

and simple

lifestyle of

shepherds

can be a

profitable

tourist

experience


o The potential of pro-poor tourism as a developmental strategy for

Uttarakhand is immense. The social and cultural environment is

generally ready for a more active engagement with tourism as an

industry. However, to ensure that the benefits actually reach

villagers, women, mule-drivers, porters and other disadvantaged

sections as well as improving the facilities and activities for both the

traditional pilgrims and international tourists, what is needed is

integrated and detailed planning, careful execution management

and monitoring of village tourism and perhaps, cutting-edge work

on public-private partnerships and initiatives fostering and enabling



pro-poor and village-based entrepreneurship. (Uttarakhand Tourism


The ―RED Tourism Groundwork Uttarakhand (UA) Report‖ issued by

gtz on 8/1/2008, recommends that ―Links with many different types

of ‗the poor‘ need to be considered: staff, neighbouring

communities, land-holders, producers of food, fuel and other

suppliers, operators of micro-tourism businesses, craft-makers, other

users of tourism infrastructure (i.e. roads), and resources (i.e. water

etc.). There are many types of pro-poor tourism strategies, ranging

from increasing local employment, building mechanisms for

consultation, facilitation of conducive framework conditions (i.e.

welfare mechanism that increase the benefits of poor population

groups like porters), to regional marketing (i.e. supporting an

effective promotion network). Any type of company can be

involved in pro-poor tourism–a small lodge, an urban hotel, a tour

operator, an infrastructure developer… The critical factor is not the

type of the company or type of tourism, but that an increase in the

net benefits that go to poor people can be demonstrated… Note:

In a country where the majority of the workforce is engaged in

agriculture, boosting agricultural supplies to hotels and restaurants –

related tourism sectors–is more likely to be successful, than, for

instance, transferring labour from the agricultural sector to a limited

tourism sector.‖

o The enhancement of economic benefits of tourism, particularly

income generation and employment creation depends on

strengthening of infrastructure facilities, effective marketing,

adequate human resource development and strengthening of

institutional structure for the promotion of tourism in the State.

(Uttarakhand Tourism Development Master Plan, UNWTO, 2008):

The improvement of occupancy rates in accommodation

establishments by encouraging the tourists, particularly the

domestic tourists, to extend their duration of stay by a day can

lead to significant revenue gains for tourism industry and the

local community. It can, however, be achieved only by

providing innovative additional attractions for making the

tourists to spend one more night in places visited.

Uttarakhand has a rich cultural heritage and a number of

performing artists. Performance of these artists could be

organized in association with the tourism industry in major tourist

centres. It would provide tourists with entertainment and



adequate reason for spending one more day in places visited.

The artists will also be able to improve their income and it could

become a motivation for the maintenance of such art forms.

The establishment of effective linkages of tourism activities with

other sectors like art and crafts, entertainment industry, trade,

etc. is yet another important instrument for enhancing the

economic benefits of tourism to the local community.

The opportunities of marketing of local handicrafts and art

materials to tourists and tourism industry have to be to fully

recognised and efforts should be made to establish such

linkages. Uttarakhand is known as the abode of gods, but there

is not even a single souvenir item which the tourists can take

home as a testimony of having visited such holy places. The

feasibility of producing small items like key chains, wooden

carvings, metal works, etc. inscribing the pictures of holy places

and temples and marketing them through tourism industry

outlets has to be examined by the State Government.

Uttarakhand also has very little to offer at present in terms of

decent souvenir shops and shopping arcades which the tourists

could conveniently visit and make purchases. It would be useful

if such facilities are created in major tourist centres and given

adequate publicity though tourism industry.

It is also important to promote community tourism initiative so

that tourists can have a real experience of villages and at the

same time the benefits of tourism do accrue to local community

in good measure. The villagers, particularly women, can be

organized in the form of Self-Help Groups to provide various

tourist facilities and services to improve their livelihood through

tourism. (As already having been done by RDD through their

ULIPH program and currently being done through ILSP under

UGVS under their rural/ecotourism initiative)

The scheme launched for providing self-employment

opportunities to local residents and for encouraging maximum

participation of the host community in the tourism sector shall

continue. Under this scheme titled ―Uttarakhand Tourism

Development Scheme‖ state assistance up to maximum 20% of

project cost in the case of those with a capital investment up to

Rs 10.00 lakh will be provided. Projects under the scheme can

include fast food centres, retail outlets for local handicrafts,

plying of buses and taxis, provision of equipment for adventure

sports, establishing small motel-like accommodation, setting-up



tourism information centres with PCOs/restaurants, tented

residential facilities, and garages. (Tourism Policy of State of


A Scheme on similar lines was initiated earlier by Department of

Tourism as ―Veer Chandra Singh Garhwali Paryatan Swarojgar

Yojana‖ that commence from 01 June 2002. The Scheme would

consider for its coverage: development of buses/taxi transport

services, construction of motor garage/workshop, setting-up of

fast-food centers, Saadhna Kutir/yoga & meditation centers,

establishing 8-10 rooms motel-like accommodation / hotel /

paying guest scheme, setting-up of sale for centers for local

representative artefacts, procurement of equipments for

adventure sports activities, setting-up of modern tourism

information centres with PCOs, development of tented

accommodation, and any other innovative tourism project

proposals in consonance with any area-specific attractions and

specialities. Under this Scheme, interest is payable only as per

the rates specified by the Reserve Bank of India/Funding Bank.

The beneficiary receives the loan only when the economic

viability of the proposed scheme is verified & found affirmative

by the concerned Bank. The entrepreneur has to invest 12.5%

value of the project‘s estimated cost as margin money. A

provision has been made for Uttarakhand Tourism Development

Board to provide the selected beneficiaries an amount of 25%

of the loan or maximum Rs 10.00 lakh as State Assistance. The

State Assistance would be directly provided to the beneficiary‘s

concerned Bank Branch.

As per ―RED Tourism Groundwork Uttarakhand (UA) Report‖

issued by gtz on 8/1/2008, it recommends the following:

―Adapted Veer Chandra Garhwali Programme: In order to

overcome unequal distribution of benefits, the model should be

adapted to apply only to community-run guesthouses instead of

individual households, ensuring benefits being spread to the

wider community. Such change in focus from individual

household to the community requires the formation of a legally

recognised entity–‗the community group/company‘ to be able

to receive the funds from the financial sector.‖

o The ―Guidelines for Mountaineering Expeditions in Uttarakhand‖

issued by UTDB, 2007, have already recommended the following,



which shall be duly followed: ―A portion of the Expedition Fee13 will

be used for activities, including the following:

Recycling non-biodegradable waste

Office transactions

Promotional activities

Development and maintenance of camping sites and trails

Monitoring of environmental and socio‐ economic impacts

Capacity building of stakeholder departments

Capacity building of local communities

General safety measures

Benefit sharing with the community.

The State Government will develop a procedure for allocation of

funds for the above listed purposes. It will seek necessary assistance

from the IMF and mountaineering training institutions within the

State for search and rescue operations in the State.‖

Administrative Guidelines/Recommendations


gtz on 8/1/2008, emphasises the challenges and recommendations

on the following (as excerpted below):

Infrastructure

―The main problem in the State is inadequate infrastructure

(Transportation by road, rail, air; electricity and drinking water

supply; telecommunications, emergency services, roadside

facilities, quality accommodation, waste disposal, etc.).

Increasing travel time reduces the occupancy in hotels

proportionally; except if niche market is being tapped that

usually attract small number but high budget (i.e. extreme

mountaineering, tourism volunteering)–vice versa.

Recommendation:

Tourism zones have to be connected to the market. If not

attracting niche tourists, tourism destinations should not be

more than 5 hrs travelling from the starting destination or be 13 The Expedition Fee includes: 1. Peak Fee payable to Uttarakhand Government for climbing a particular

peak. 2. Enroute Camping Site Fee and Trail Management Fee. 3. Service/Handling charge of the State

Government. 4. Environmental Levy. 5. National Parks and Sanctuaries Fee, where applicable. 6.

Professional Filming Fee in National Parks and Sanctuaries, where applicable. [Refer for other

mountaineering regulations‘ details for expedition purposes ―Guidelines for Mountaineering Expeditions in

Uttarakhand‖ issued by UTDB, 2007; Mountaineering Guidelines (Text in Hindi), available on Forest

Department website; ―Guidelines for mountaineering expeditions in Uttaranchal‖ published by

Government of Uttaranchal, 03 July 2004; and any other separately issued directives e.g. Instructions /

Directives for the High Altitude ―Gangotri National Park‖ for any travel to the destination of ―Gaumukh‖

viz. Order No. 2930/37-1 dated 29 April 2008 issued by CWLW Office, Camp-Dehradun]



included or attached to the existing circuit with sufficient

tourism inflow to cover operating cost. The state government

should ideally develop such infrastructure in PPP mode.

Tourists, especially women, travelling on long distances

through the state are left in a scenario of few public toilet

facilities. The government needs to provide portal toilets that

can be run by a group of disadvantaged community

members ...‖

Risk Adversity–Incentive Structures/Models

―Risk adversity is one of the main challenges faced when

working with people on the subsistence level that lack access to

finance, collateral, and mostly understanding of the tourism

sector. Incentives structures to reduce risk adversity need to be

established to encourage the uptake of new opportunities while

maintaining incentive for real ownership and ensuring business

sense rather than subsidised model.

Recommendation:

1) Foster awareness and understanding–mobilisation.

2) Demonstrate revenue generation potential liked to

competitive product at different ownership/cooperation

models illustrating the different investment, benefit, and

prerequisite (expertise) scenarios in respect to the

community (i.e. the community ownership, private actor,

PPP, PPCP etc.).

3) Training.

4) Incentives for participants, i.e.:

give family benefit to release their kids/women into

training until actual income generation starts, i.e. sack of

rice (c.f. Orchid Hotel);

pay new entrants small monthly income for the first year

(c.f. Village Ways);

loan-grant structure (i.e. 60:40) with condition of

repayment only with arrival of tourists;

maintenance fund: deduct i.e. 2% of gross income from

community guesthouse for maintenance;

cooperation with renowned businesses that have a track

record of tourist arrivals; and



mix of direct and indirect benefit structures: establish

direct benefit structures that can be earned directly by

people/group that takes responsibility of certain

activities (i.e. guesthouse coordinators, sweepers,

shopkeeper. etc.) while i.e. 10% of income goes to

community to spread benefits to wider community [i.e.

Village Development Fund for community guest house,

instead of direct tipping to create a tourist-friendly

atmosphere beyond the ‗direct service deliverer.‘‖

Use of Local Assets, Endowments

―Tourism development initiatives should build on existing assets;

i.e. renovate local buildings rather than rebuild, to minimise

parallel structures. Moreover, the cultural heritage is being

preserved, existing ownership made use of, and time saved. In

many cases quality improvements are more needed than

development of new structures. Key is to establish a platform

from where the initiative can grow while being managed by the

community.‖

o In the State of Uttarakhand, the tourism enterprise has important

contribution to the economic development, employment

generation, and gross domestic product, and State Government &

Central Government considers it as an industry in priority area. From

this perspective, the Tourism Policy gives importance to attracting

private investment. Thus, from the perspective of providing the

entrepreneurs and investors of the tourism industry in the State with

necessary assistance from various State Government

Departments/Institutions in an expedited manner and with ease,

the Department of Tourism, Government of Uttarakhand had

already initiated a best practice of an ―Single Window Contact and

Time-bound Information and Ease of Clearance Facility‖ as per the

directives regarding ―Implementation of Facility for Single Window

Contact and Time-bound Information and Ease of Clearance for

Investors and Entrepreneurs in Tourism Industry‖ issued by Tourism

Section, Government of Uttarakhand vide No.

539/VI/2006/12(8)2004 dated 11 May 2006. The effective

implementation of this facility at the district level reportedly is the

responsibility of the District Magistrate, with proactive assistance

from the respective District Tourism Development Officer.

The necessary environment clearances at the level below the

20,000 sqm built-up area as mentioned earlier under Environment



Guidelines of this document is further recommended to be part of

process of certain levels of clearances under the above Single

Window Facility, and the same would thus need to be followed as

part of prerequisites for such investment proposals for tourism

development in the State of Uttarakhand.

o Effective coordination between several concerned government

departments is critical to ensuring that a tourism

development/tourism activity planned and proposed by

Department of Tourism does not get adversely affected in its

implementation by:

separate decisions/proposals of another department in the

same geographical area that may conflict with the envisaged

tourism development potential/any tourism operation; or

different priorities of concerned departments affecting timely

development & commissioning of a tourism development.

o Since availability of land for tourism industries and obtaining various

clearances including clearance from the Forest Department is a

major hurdle in the development of tourism in the State, the State

Government may create ‗land banks‘ in important tourist

destinations and make them available to prospective

entrepreneurs with all the required clearances after appropriate

Environment Impact Assessments (EIA). (Uttarakhand Tourism


o The tourism industry in Uttarakhand, however, considers the levels of

luxury and entertainment taxes as un-justifiably high and has

become impediments to the development of the industry. Further,

tented accommodation is not included in the category of hotel

room and considered as base camp for trekkers. Accordingly the

tourists staying in such facilities are charged license fee for trekking

irrespective of the fact they do trekking or not. (Uttarakhand Tourism

Development Master Plan, UNWTO, 2008). This has been duly

corrected through the current applicable ―Uttarakhand Tourism

and Travel Trade Registration Regulations, 2014‖ with effect from 24

January 2014, wherein ―Tent Colony/Nature Camp‖ is considered

part of Accommodation-related Unit along with hotels, motels,

resorts, etc. to be registered under the said Regulations.

o As per Uttarakhand Tourism Development Master Plan, UNWTO,

2008, under Chapter 8-Action Plans, the following action plans were

already recommended, of which some aspects that are directly

concerned with provisions for tourism infrastructure



planning/development at site-/destination-level and for tourism

asset management are highlighted:

S.

No.

Action Nature of Action Responsibility Time Frame

A Infrastructure Development

1 Establish

Channels

between UTDB

and

Departments

responsible for

Infrastructure

Development

Infrastructure is essential for tourism

but it also can stifle tourism if the

natural or urban environment is

damaged by insensitively built

infrastructure.

These channels will allow the UTDB

to be informed of and have a say

in infrastructure projects to be built

in the state. It also allows the UTDB

to suggest where improvements of

new infrastructure should be

provided.

UTDB to set up

and initiate.

Immediately

2 Integrated

Urban Traffic

Management

Plans

This plan is to organise the

connections between public

transport termini, tourism attractions

and the city centres.

Emphasis should be on pedestrian

flow, traffic safety and

environmental upgrading. At least

the following cities need to be

covered: Dehradun, Rishikesh,

Haridwar, Mussoorie, Gangotri,

Nainital, Pantnagar and

Kathgodam.

Public Works

Department,

UTDB and the

relevant city

planning

departments.

Short Term

3 Air Traffic

Management

No-fly zones and fixed-wing zones

should be established and

regulations put in place since the

proliferation of air traffic (especially

helicopter services) could have a

detrimental effect on tourism if

aircrafts are allowed to access

sensitive sites such as the valley of

flowers, Gaumukh or holy sites on

the Char Dham route.

Aviation

Authority, UTDB

Short Term

4 Waste

Management

Plans

Waste management plans must be

established for major tourist

destinations, notably those along

the Char Dham route. Gangotri

could be used as a case study.

Local

Government,

Private Sector

and

UTDB

Short Term

5 Tourism

Infrastructure

and Asset

Management

System

Create a database to map all

natural and man-made tourism

assets in the state including

sightseeing spots, parks, trails,

religious facilities, sports /outdoor

areas, hotels, guesthouses,

UTDB Short Term



S.

No.


restaurants, etc.

6 Road

Maintenance

Assessment

System

A geographic Information system

(GIS) based facility should be

created to monitor the state of the

roads, to map the location of

landslides and to record

maintenance that was carried out.

This system must feed into a road

condition warning system that

broadcasts traffic jams and road

closures to the general public.

Road safety must be improved and

the system can be used to map

dangerous sections and point of

frequent accidents to allow for a

more structured road improvement

strategy.

Public Works

Department

Medium

Term

B Marketing and Institutional

1 Developing a

Grading System

Creation of a quality assurance

system to grade tourist facilities in

the State following local criteria

UTDB: Marketing

Division–Legal

and Licensing

Division

Private sector

Short Term to

Medium

Term

2 Establishing

Tourist

Information

Centres

Establishing three levels of TICs from

information counters to main

offices

The Ministry of

Tourism

UTDB: Marketing

Division

Local authorities

Short to

Medium

Term

C Community-based Tourism and Social Development

1 Identifying

Targeted

Villages for

Community

Participation in

Tourism

Assessment of potential and needs

of villages and gateway towns to

undertake tourism based on

selection guidelines established in

Section 4.4 of the Master Plan

Forest

Department /

UTDB / Vikas* /

Community

Development

Department of

Government

Short Term

2 Identify Suitable

Ecotourism

Products

Gauging potential products which

are most suitable for the selected

villages, perhaps through

consultation based on criteria

developed in Section 4.4 of the

Master plan

Forest

Department /

UTDB / Vikas* /

Community

Development

Department of

Government

Short Term

3 Define and

Implement

Physical

Infrastructure

Required

Consultation with villagers to

ascertain hard and soft

infrastructure needs to support

community participation on tourism

Forest

Department /

UTDB / Vikas* /

Community

Development

Department of

Short to

Medium

Term



S.

No.


Government

4 Define Nature of

Participation

Consultation with stakeholders

including village committees to

ascertain form of intervention to be

carried out (private sector, village

communally owned enterprises

etc.)

Forest

Department /

UTDB / Vikas* /

Community

Development

Department of

Government

Short to

Medium

Term

5 Undertake

Training and

Awareness

Preparation and implementation of

learner friendly courses covering

environmental awareness and

interpretation, tourism

management, safety and hygiene

and financial management.

Forest

Department /

UTDB /

Appropriate

NGOs (e.g.

student

partnership

worldwide)

Medium

Term

6 Long Term

Diversification

and

Strengthening

Encourage more sophisticated

forms of training or activities in line

with villagers‟ aspirations

Forest

Department /

UTDB / Vikas* /

Community

Development

Department of

Government

Long Term

D Socio-cultural Initiatives and Pro-Poor Strategies

1 Tourism

Resource Centre

Proposed at Block level Tourism

Department

Short Term

2 Creation of a

Welfare Fund for

Mule-drivers

Organize it modalities Municipal Council Short Term

3 Identification of

New

Architectural

Heritage Circuits

Developing and diversifying tourist

sites

Tourism

Department

Short to

Medium

Term

4 Constructing

Amphitheatres

Show-casing the state‘s living

heritage

State

Government with

corporate

partnership

Short to

Medium

Term

5 Interventions in

the Gangotri

Sanctuary

Environment-friendly pilgrim tourism Forest

Department /

State

Government

Short to

Medium

Term

6 Up Scaling and

Expanding

Pilgrim Circuits

Helicopter services, expanded

pilgrim tourist itineraries

Tourism

Department /

State

Government

Medium

Term

7 Action plans for

Greater

Participation by

Gender-sensitive, specialist-

oriented and youth-friendly rural

tourism plans

NGO Short to

Medium

Term



S.

No.


Rural Women,

Youngsters and

Rural Specialists

8 Development of

pro-poor tourism

in Raithal-Barsu

Priority zone as a ski-resort is being

planned here

NGO/Tourism

Department

Short Term

9 Pro-poor tourism

for residents of

villages

adjoining

wildlife parks

Special concerns of this region NGO/Tourism

Department

Short to

Medium

Term


* Vikas: Vikas Samiti or Eco-Development Committee (EDC) e.g. The forest department has initiated

an Eco-development Programme to involve villagers in conflict reduction and biodiversity conservation.

Eco-development committees consisting of representatives of both villagers and the forest department are

being encouraged to enable communities to plan and implement programmes for resource conservation

and generate livelihood. [―Eco-development‖ section under Park Management & Conservation webpage,

Corbett National Park website]

o Compliance to be ensured to the provisions of ―Guidelines for

Procuring Land for Tourism Investment by Private Investors in

Uttarakhand State‖ issued by Tourism Section vide No. 910/VI/2005-

3(42)2005 dated 20 August 2005 by Department of Tourism and

District Administration is mandatory w.r.t. the private investment,

clearly illustrating the coverage of aspects of–confirmation of

firmness of the investor towards the intent of the project proposal for

which the land is being procured, justification that the project

proposal is as per the conditions of the land being applied for

procurement, and other requirements (viz. detailed project report-

DPR including feasibility study, financial and technical analysis, etc.)

of the Department of Tourism for ease of and timely approval

(necessary and detailed information to be provided as per

annexed Performa-A & B of above-mentioned guideline).

o Follow the provisions of ―Amendment to G.O. on Land Use

Conversion and it‘s Rates from Lower Land Use to Upper Land Use-

category Development under Master Plan and Regional Plan‖

issued by Housing Section, Government of Uttarakhand vide No.

1573/V-H-2006-11(LUC)/65 dated 10 September 2006, and as

applicable comply with any further amendment/revision from time

to time.

o The ―Directives for establishing State Sector Planning‖ issued by

Tourism Section, Government of Uttarakhand vide No. 478/VI/2006

dated 25 April 2006 shall be followed in general by the UTDB for



State sector projects, while certain tourism infrastructure

development related specific directives are reproduced below:

While selecting the projects at the District-level District Tourism

Advisory Committee and at the Uttarakhand Tourism

Development Board-level, first priority would be given to the

project proposals identified in the Different Master Plans

prepared at the Uttarakhand Tourism Development Board

Headquarter-level.

Only those project proposals related to tourism development

would be considered where the tourists from outside the State

arrive in large numbers. When selecting such destinations, the

tourism importance and the tourist visitation numbers would be

the basis for determining the priority.

Those project proposals that are related to the development of

such destinations, which at present are little known, but have

the capability to attract national and international tourists and

where tourism attractions are present, can also be considered.

If any heritage property/heritage area exists within important

circuits/destinations from the tourism perspective, projects for

such destinations can also be proposed.

For revenue generating projects under the State sector, the

implementation should be attempted based on PPP model as

much as possible. Such projects would be, viz. development of

parks (established in tourism destinations or at tourism circuits),

bus parking, land development bank, bathing ghats,

development infrastructure facilities, construction of Tourist Rest

Houses and O&M, procurement of adventure sports and

camping equipments, construction of ropeways and O&M,

other tourism related activities. Also apart from above Theme

Park, Entertainment Park, ropeway, boating, etc. can be

included.

Equipments related to adventure sports, upgradation /

strengthening of basic facilities at present, departmental

buildings and staff quarters should also be provisioned.

For every work, based on work progress from time-to-time at

least at three levels (Beginning of Work, 50 percent Work

Completed, and on Work Completion), photographs shall be

provided to the Uttarakhand Tourism Development Board

Headquarter.

Ensure the project plans are suitable from aesthetics/eco-

friendly perspective.



The number of employment expected to be generated from

the project.

o The ―Directives for establishing District Sector Planning‖ issued by

Tourism Section, Government of Uttarakhand vide No. 479/VI/2006

dated 25 April 2006 shall be followed in general by the District

Administration for District sector projects, while certain tourism

infrastructure related specific conditions are reproduced below:

While choosing projects, regional balance should be duly

considered.

Prior to presenting the project works to District Monitoring &

Planning Committee, the District Tourism Development Officer

and Implementing Agency shall ensure the availability of land,

and Operation/Maintenance responsibilities.

For new and ongoing projects according to the requirements of

the Implementing Agency, through District Monitoring &

Planning Committee, budget provision for project-wise

expenditure should be made.

The utility of the proposed projects and justification related to its

favourable impacts on tourism visitation numbers should be

presented in the project estimation.

Ensure for all projects that they are not for private purpose, but

are related with public purpose.

For every work, based on work progress from time-to-time at

least at three levels (Preliminary Stage, Middle Stage, and Work

Completed Stage), photographs shall be taken and duly

recorded.


gtz on 8/1/2008, already emphasises developing a grading system

i.e. ―Creation of a quality assurance system to grade tourist facilities

in the State following local criteria–short-term to medium-term.‖

o As per ―The RED Tourism Value Chain Selection, Strategy and

Operational Plan-Uttarakhand, October 2008‖ by International

Tourism Consultancy for gtz-RED program, Uttarakhand, following

recommendations are made for ―Product Development and

Maintenance and Provision of Services:

gtz-RED: To ensure that the product is up to the standards

required (including accommodation, cuisine and activities) the

following interventions are recommended:

Prepare a manual to describe the types of facilities and

standards required in terms of accommodation and



catering; organise exposure visits for interested developers

to see good practice;

Encourage identification of handicraft and local specialities,

production and sales and develop opportunities to

showcase and sell handicrafts and local specialities to

tourists;

Develop a capacity building strategy for ecolodges,

homestays and camps in hospitality provision; prepare

training modules for capacity building in hospitality and

guiding, highlighting the different activities that can be

enjoyed in the village environment and how villagers should

interact with visitors; and

Develop a certification course for porters and guides to

include such topics as safety, first aid, emergency

evacuation, and information about flora, fauna and culture.

Civil Society Partners: Partners in the field will be required to:

Build the capacity of local communities wanting to provide

ecotourism services: hospitality, guiding and so on…

Organise exposure visits to see examples of good practice;

Develop training modules on the different types of activities

that can be enjoyed at ecotourism facilities, including in a

village environment and organise capacity building

programmes;

Empower through training local inspectors to ensure that the

product remains at a consistently high standard;

Assist porters and guides in forming associations so that they

are organized to provide the services when required and

that they are in a stronger position in the delivery of the

product; and

Deliver certification training courses for porters and guides.

Public Sector Agencies: Public sector agencies can assist in

improving the product through the following interventions:

Officially recognise local inspectors who will be trained to

ensure that standards are maintained.‖

o For river rafting/kayaking operating units establishment and

undertaking rafting/kayaking activities, and their monitoring &

management, compliance to be ensured in general with the

provisions of ―Uttarakhand River Rafting/Kayaking Regulations,

2014‖ issued by Tourism Department vide No. 160/VI/2013-

01(03)/2013 dated 24 January 2014, and compliance specifically is



emphasised with respect to the required safety standards &

capabilities, and environment protection related standards.

o Standardisation and Rescue Organisation: As per Tourism Policy of

State of Uttarakhand, UTDB, 2007, ―Adequate facilities will be

developed to provide a high-level rescue system for adventure

sports and other tourism related activities. This will include provision

of various rescue equipments like recovery vans, Repling, Jumar

and walkie-talkie sets, etc. A Rescue Co-ordination Committee will

also be set-up. Registered organisations/clubs connected with

adventure tourism will be encouraged through grants. A separate

set of rules will be framed for this purpose.

While, for safety standards/regulations in Aero Sports ―Instructions

related to temporary directives till the Permanent Regulations /

Directives are prepared for Aero Sports in Uttarakhand‖ issued by

Tourism Section, Government of Uttarakhand vide No.

112/T.O./2003-47 Tourism/2003 dated 28 Mar 2003 would continue

to remain applicable; some related new regulations have certainly

come into effect recently viz. ―Uttarakhand River Rafting/Kayaking

Regulations, 2014‖ dated 24 January 2014, and ―Uttarakhand

Tourism and Travel Trade Registration Regulations, 2014‖ with effect

from 24 January 2014 which only includes ―Adventure Tour

Operator‖ as part of Adventure Tourism-related Unit to be

registered under the said Regulations. However, for detailed

regulation on ―Adventure Tour Operator,‖ one may have

to/continue to refer the ―Guidelines for Recognition/Renewal or

Extension as an Approved Adventure Tour Operator (ATO)‖ revised

with effect from 2nd January 2012, issued by MOT, GoI.

o Safeguards and Retrofitting measures in the interest of wildlife

conservation (new activity/non-recurring): The ―Comprehensive


dated 15th October 2012, NTCA highlights provision to be ensured

as infrastructure retrofitting measures i.e. ―Several tiger reserves are

affected on account of heavily used infrastructure like roads,

railway tracks and others. The high tension electric lines passing

through many reserves cause mortality of wild animals due to

electrocution by poachers. In the interest of wild animals several

safeguards as well as retrofitting measures may be required, which

would be supported on a site-specific basis.‖

o Establishment of Tiger Safari, interpretation and awareness centres

under the existing component of ‗co-existence agenda in buffer



and fringe areas,‘ and management of such centres through the

respective Panchayati Raj Institutions (creation – Non-Recurring;

maintenance – Recurring): The Tiger Safaris may be established in

the buffer areas of tiger reserves which experience immense tourist

influx in the core/critical tiger habitat for viewing tiger. The

interpretation and awareness centres would also be supported in

such buffer areas to foster awareness for eliciting public support.

The management of such centres would be through the respective

Panchayati Raj (PR) institutions. [―Comprehensive Guidelines for

Tiger Conservation and Tourism‖ as per Notification dated 15th

October 2012, NTCA]

o As per the provisions made in the Comprehensive Guidelines for


October 2012, NTCA, that shall be duly followed i.e. ―The State

Governments shall develop a system to ensure that gate receipts

from tiger reserves are utilised by their management for specific

conservation purposes and shall not to go as revenue to the State

Exchequer. This will ensure that resources generated from tourism

can be earmarked for protection, conservation and local livelihood

development, tackling human-wild animal conflict and welfare

measures of field staff.

Since the tourism industry in and around tiger reserves is sustained

primarily from the non-consumptive use of wildlife resources and the

local communities are the ones that bear the brunt of conservation,

the State Governments may charge a conservation fee from the

tourism industry for eco-development and local community

upliftment works. The conservation fee shall be decided on the

number of beds in a facility, the duration of operation of the facility

(seasonal or year round) and on a luxury classification system such

as home stay (fee for which will not be charged up to a 6-bed

facility), to high end (which will have the maximum quantum of the

fee). The suggested fee structure may range between Rs 500 to Rs

3000 per room per month. The rate of conservation fee and tourist

facility strata shall be determined by the State Government, and

the fund thus collected shall be earmarked to address local

livelihood development, human-wildlife conflict management and

conservation through eco-development and not go to the State

Exchequer as specified in para above.‖



o Tiger Reserve Management in the context of Tourism

[―Comprehensive Guidelines for Tiger Conservation and Tourism‖ as

per Notification dated 15th October 2012, NTCA]:

The Chief Wildlife Warden of the State shall ensure that each

tiger reserve prepares a tourism plan, as part of the Tiger

Conservation Plan vis-à-vis the technical Guidelines of the

National Tiger Conservation Authority. The plan shall inter alia,

include identification of corridor connectivity and important

wildlife habitats and mechanisms to secure them. This site-

specific tourism plan forming part of the Tiger Conservation Plan

shall be approved as per the provisions of the Wild Life

(Protection) Act, 1972. Prior to this approval, no new

infrastructure for tourism (except for minor alterations in existing

modest home stays) shall be allowed to be developed in and

around tiger reserves.

The tourism plan shall, inter alia, include a monitoring

mechanism, estimated carrying capacity (a suggested model

mechanism to calculate carrying capacity, is provided in

Annexure-I and Annexure-II (of above-mentioned NTCA, 2012

Guidelines), which may be modified on a site specific basis),

tourism zones and demarcation of the area open to tourism on

the basis of objective and scientific criteria.

The tourism plan should be consistent with the State Tourism and

Ecotourism Strategy and shall also be approved by the LAC*

and the State Government. [*A Local Advisory Committee

(LAC) shall be constituted for each tiger reserve by the State

Government (as per above-mentioned NTCA, 2012 Guidelines).]

The plan shall:

(i) identify (using landscape ecological principles and tools)

and monitor the ecologically sensitive areas surrounding

tiger reserves, in order to ensure the ecological integrity of

corridor and buffer areas, and prevent corridor

encroachment;

(ii) assess carrying capacity of the tiger reserve, at three levels:

physical, real and effective and permissible carrying

capacity of visitors and vehicles as well as residential

facilities in and around the tiger reserve (in accordance

with Annexure-I, Annexure-II of above-mentioned NTCA,

2012 Guidelines). On the lines of the illustrative calculation

provided for vehicular tourist visitation, carrying capacity

needs to be computed on a site specific basis for tourist



visitation involving elephant, boat and foot travel. Explore

the possibility of technological tools (Global Positioning

System-GPS, wireless, etc.) to manage traffic and spacing

of tourist vehicles within tiger reserves;

(iii) set a ceiling level on number of visitors allowed to enter a

tiger reserve at any given time, based on the carrying

capacity of the habitat;

(iv) indicate the area open to tourism in the reserves to be

designated as ‗eco-tourism zone;‘

(v) ensure visitor entry into tiger reserves through vehicles

registered with the tiger reserve management,

accompanied by authorised guide;

(vi) develop a participatory community-based tourism strategy

in collaboration with local communities, to ensure long-

term local community benefit-sharing, and promotion of

activities run by local communities;

(vii) develop codes and standards for privately-operated tourist

facilities located in the vicinity of core or critical tiger

habitats, eco-sensitive zones or buffer areas, with a view to,

inter alia, ensure benefit and income to local communities;

(viii) develop monitoring mechanisms to assess impact of

tourism activities on the wildlife and its habitat so as to

minimize them;

(ix) develop generic guidelines for environmentally

acceptable and culturally appropriate practices, and for

all new constructions;

(x) set up lists of Do‘s and Don‘ts for visitors; and

(xi) provide for subsidized visits of students while fostering

educational extension activities.

In the case of human-animal conflicts, compensation shall be

paid within the period as per Citizen‘s Charter, apart from

immediate payment of ex-gratia.

All tourism activities shall take place only in delineated ‗tourism

zones‘ indicated in the tourism plan. The vacant posts in tiger

reserves shall be filled up since the staff is also required to

manage some tourism in addition to their regular duties.

Tigers in India occur across varied habitats that range from high

elevation mountain subtropical forests, tropical wet evergreen

forests, mangrove swamps, tropical moist or dry deciduous

forests and alluvial floodplain grasslands. The densities of large

ungulates, the main prey of tigers, vary from 2 to over 60 animals



per km2 among these different habitats. Breeding tigress‘s are

territorial, and the size of their territories adjust to prey density so

as to successfully raise cubs. Male tiger territories cover the

territories of two to four breeding tigress territories. Due to

variation in habitat specific prey density, breeding tigress

territories range from 20 to 200 km2 in India. For a

demographically viable population it is essential to have a core

area that harbours a minimum of 20 to 25 breeding tigresses. For

long-term genetic viability the minimum effective population

size is believed to be about 500 individuals. Due to the variability

in breeding tigress territory size and thus breeding tiger density,

the core area needed can be generalized to be between 800-

1200 km2. This core and surrounding buffer can then sustain a

population of about 75 to 100 individual tigers to attain

demographic viability. However, genetic viability is possible only

through corridor connectivity within the larger landscape where

dispersing individual tigers ensure genetic mixing between

different source populations (tiger reserves) in a meta-

population framework. Current tourism zones where only tourist

visits are permitted and there are no consumptive uses, tiger

density and recruitment does not seem to be impacted. For this

reason permitting up to 20% of the core/ critical tiger habitat as

a tourism zone should not have an adverse effect on the tiger

biology needs, which is subject to adherence to all the

prescriptions made in these Guidelines (NTCA, 2012 Guidelines).

There is also a need for fostering the buffer and peripheral areas

for carrying out the greater part of ecotourism to benefit local

communities.

Conservation of the tiger, our National animal, is the paramount

objective of tiger reserves and generating public support

through regulated tourism is an invaluable tool for harnessing

public and community support for tiger conservation. Regulated

tourism results in enhanced awareness and is of educational

value especially for the younger generation. Non-consumptive

regulated, low-impact tourism could be permitted within core or

critical tiger habitat without in any way compromising the spirit

of core/critical tiger habitat for tiger conservation. With this

importance of tourism in tiger conservation in mind, it is

recommended that a maximum of 20% of the core or critical

tiger habitat usage (not exceeding the present usage) for

regulated, low-impact tourist visitation may be permitted. In



case the current usage exceeds 20% the Local Advisory

Committee may decide on a timeframe for bringing down the

usage to 20%. Such area may be demarcated as tourism zone

and there should be strict adherence to site specific carrying

capacity. Restoration of buffer forest areas shall be done

through its unified control under the respective Field Directors of

tiger reserves vis-à-vis the Guidelines of the Project Tiger and the

National Tiger Conservation Authority. Further, no new tourism

infrastructure shall be created in the core areas. Existing

residential infrastructure inside core or critical tiger habitats shall

be strictly regulated to adhere to low ecological impacts as

decided by the Local Advisory Committee on a site specific

basis.

Any core area in a tiger reserve from which relocation has

been carried out, shall not be used for tourism infrastructure.

Forest dwellers who have been relocated from core or critical

tiger habitat to the Buffer shall be given priority in terms of

livelihood generation activities related to community-based

ecotourism in the tiger reserve. Tiger reserve management shall

make a special effort in this regard, besides a periodic review to

ensure its compliance.

Tourism infrastructure shall conform to environment-friendly, low-

impact aesthetic architecture, including solar energy, waste

recycling, rainwater harvesting, natural cross-ventilation, proper

sewage disposal, and merging with the surrounding habitat.

Violations of these norms will be appropriately dealt with by the

LAC. Any violation of the guidelines will be referred to the

appropriate authorities under intimation to the NTCA, for taking

action in accordance to the relevant provisions of the law.

The District Revenue and tiger reserve authorities shall ensure

that all tourist facilities within a zone of influence (to be identified

by the LAC) in the context of core/critical tiger habitats in tiger

reserves must adhere to all environmental clearances, noise

pollution norms, and are non-polluting, blending in with

surroundings. Severe penalties must be imposed for non-

compliance.

Permanent tourist facilities located inside core or critical tiger

habitat, which are being used for wildlife tourism shall be

phased out on a time frame decided by the LAC. Strict plans

ensuring low-impact adherence by these facilities shall be

developed and approved by LAC for implementation. There



shall be no privately run facilities such as catering, etc., inside

the core or critical tiger habitat where night stay is permitted.

Such existing facilities if any, are to be run by the Tiger

Conservation Foundations.

All tourism facilities located within the zone of influence (as

determined by the LAC) in the context of the tiger reserve shall

adhere to pollution norms (noise, solid waste, air and water,

etc.), under the respective laws or rules for the time being in

force. Outdoor high intensity illumination shall not be utilized as

it disturbs nocturnal wild animal activities.

There shall be a complete ban on burying, burning or otherwise

disposing non-biodegradable or toxic waste in and around the

tiger reserve. Proper plan for disposal for degradable waste shall

be developed and strictly implemented.

Management of habitat to inflate animal abundance for

tourism purposes shall not be practiced within the core or

critical habitat. Visitors shall keep a minimum distance of more

than 20 meter from all wildlife; cordoning, luring or feeding of

any wildlife shall be prohibited. Minimum distance between

vehicles while spotting wildlife shall be maintained at 50 meters.

Vehicles shall not monopolize a wildlife sighting for more than 15

minutes.

To avoid the number of visitors and vehicles exceeding carrying

capacity, tiger reserve managers shall establish an advance

booking system to control tourist and vehicle numbers. Rules of

booking shall be transparent and, violators shall be penalized.

Tiger reserve authorities shall delineate an adequate and

appropriate area for the visitor facility outside the protected

area.

Tourism activities in a tiger reserves shall be under the overall

guidance of the respective Tiger Conservation Foundations and

the LACs.

o Tourist Facilities and Tour Operators [―Comprehensive Guidelines for


October 2012, NTCA]:

Tourism infrastructure must conform to environment-friendly,

low-impact, low-height aesthetic architecture; renewable

including solar energy, waste recycling, water management,

natural cross-ventilation, no use of asbestos, discharge of only

treated sewage, no air pollution, minimal outdoor lighting, and

merging with the surrounding landscape.



The use of battery operated vehicles shall be encouraged to

minimize pollution wherever terrain permits.

A 'curriculum' shall be developed for training of guides and

drivers in the art, craft and ethics of wildlife tourism, resulting in

certification. All guides and drivers shall compulsorily go through

a short course in interpretation and rules and regulations

followed by an oral examination before being certified by the

Tiger Conservation Foundation. Courses may be scheduled

during the non-tourist season. All certified guides and drivers

shall wear appropriately designed uniforms with name tags and

badges. This will instil a sense of pride, discipline and

accountability. Prior to every tourist season, certified guides and

drivers shall go through a refresher course or workshop. These

shall also build up their capacity to identify birds and provide

natural history information on other species, to slowly wean

them away from a tiger-centric obsession. A periodic

assessment of their performance shall be reviewed by the LAC

before reissuing their licences.

All tourist facilities falling within the zone of influence of a tiger

reserve shall be reviewed regularly by the Local Advisory

Committee vis-à-vis environmental clearance, area of

coverage, ownership, type of construction, number of

employees, etc., for suggesting mitigation and retrofitting

measures if needed.

All tourist facilities, old and new shall aim to generate at least

50% of their total energy and fuel requirements from alternate

energy sources that may include solar and biogas.

The use of wood as fuel shall be prohibited, except for

campfires for which wood must be procured from State Forest

Department or the Forest Development Corporation depots.

In order to allow free passage to wildlife, developments shall be

sensitive to the conservation of flora and fauna, and the

corridor value of the area in and around tiger reserves.

Tourist facilities and tour operators shall not cause disturbance

to animals while taking visitors on nature trails.

Any violation of the guidelines shall be referred to the

appropriate authorities under intimation to the National Tiger

Conservation Authority, for taking action in accordance to the

relevant provisions of the law.



o Temple and Pilgrimage Boards [―Comprehensive Guidelines for


October 2012, NTCA]:

Pilgrim sites located inside tiger reserves shall be in accordance

with the Forest (Conservation) Act, 1980, The Wild Life

(Protection) Act, 1972 and the Environment (Protection) Act,

1986 to prevent any further expansion. This shall be periodically

reviewed by the LAC.

All transit camps and places of stay for such pilgrimage shall be

restricted to nominated days in a year. The protected area

managers shall work with the temple authorities to develop a

system for controlling the number of pilgrims so as to maintain

the ecological integrity of the area. This mechanism shall be

developed within three years of the notification of these

Guidelines.

All rules relating to tourism facilities including noise, building

design, use of alternate energy and free passage to wildlife shall

apply to such pilgrim facilities.

Temple boards shall negotiate terms of revenue sharing with

local communities and channel a minimum of 10 percent of

gross revenue collected into development of local communities

through the Gram Sabha.

The tourist operators, drivers and temple controlling authorities

shall be given an exposure on the value of forest ecosystem and

their ecological services and along with the do’s and don’ts

during visits to forests and tiger reserves.

o These Guidelines (NTCA, 2012 Guidelines) shall be applicable to the

tiger reserves notified under section 38-V of The Wild Life

(Protection) Act, 1972. The State Government shall lay down

Guidelines on similar lines for tourism in other protected areas.

o Contravention of any provision of these guidelines (NTCA, 2012

Guidelines) or conditions laid therein by any person or organization

shall be liable of an offence under subsection (2) of 38-O of The

Wild Life (Protection) Act, 1972.

o As per the directives issued ―Regarding Permission of Purchase of

Land under the Clauses 154(4)(3)(a) & (b) of Zamindari Abolition

and Land Reforms Act in the area abutting 2 km from external limit

of the Region of Corbett Tiger Reserve declared under the Forest

Act/Regarding Prohibiting Land-use Change under the Clauses 143

of Zamindari Abolition and Land Reforms Act for Land Parcels with

reference to Agricultural Land situated in Areas under Corbett Tiger



Reserve‖ issued by Revenue Section-2 vide No. 2756/XXIII(2)/2012

dated 16 November 2012 under the authority of Principal Secretary,

Revenue Department, Government of Uttarakhand, certain

provisions are made to ensure the following:

Until further orders, it is informed that it is prohibited to give any

permission regarding Purchase of Land/Any Land-use Change

under the Clauses 154(4)(3)(a) & (b) of Uttar Pradesh Zamindari

Abolition and Land Reforms Act-1950 (as appropriately

changed in Uttarakhand thereafter and as amended till date)

in the area abutting 2 km from external limit of the Region of

Corbett Tiger Reserve declared under the Forest Act; and

Until further orders, it is further informed that no permission shall

be given regarding Land-use Change under the Clauses 143 of

Uttar Pradesh Zamindari Abolition and Land Reforms Act for

Land Parcels (as appropriately changed in Uttarakhand

thereafter and as amended till date) in areas under Corbett

Tiger Reserve declared under the Forest Act until it is fully

ensured that there is no breach of any provision of all

regulations/byelaws, rules, ordinance, and circulars related to

forest land conservation.

o As per ―The RED Tourism Value Chain Selection, Strategy and


Tourism Consultancy for gtz-RED program, Uttarakhand, some

recommendations having been made for the management of

religious tourism undertaken by lakhs of pilgrims every year, followed

by leisure tourism visitors, rafting/water sports/weekend tourism

visitors (in which RED program can provide assistance to the

stakeholders of such value chains) are highlighted below:

Improving frame conditions by policy intervention to ensure a

system for local traffic information and policy intervention to

stop price abuses during peak periods. Here the idea is to set up

a warning system about traffic problems that can be accessed

through wireless equipment (i.e. mobile phone). This will allow

tourists to be prepared, for instance call ahead to their

destination to announce their estimated time of arrival. This is

particularly important in the Religious Tourism value chain when

roads are closed at certain times of the day in high season to

control the number and flow of visitors and pilgrims to and from

the Char Dhams. Opening times and especially last closing time

in the evening would be transmitted wirelessly allowing visitors to

plan their journeys.



Sensitising priests/ashrams of the importance of environmental

protection of the religious sites and surroundings which they can

pass onto pilgrims.

Environmental and planning control is necessary to avoid

damage to the assets that attract the tourists in the first place.

However, the product has to be protected from over-

construction and poor architectural design and methods need

to be devised and systems put in place for a greater

involvement of local communities in this value chain of leisure

tourism. A guide describing appropriate locally sensitive

architectural designs for different-sized properties, from hotel to

guest house to home stays to river camps, with a section on

appropriate energy management should be produced and

could be made available to all investors/developers wanting to

build new accommodation, with a special focus on the SMEs in

the selected value chains. These could also be taken on

exposure visits to appropriately designed properties.

Surveying the rivers and lakes in the state to find appropriate

areas to develop rafting and water sports services and advising

on facilities that are required.

Link communities supplying organic produce to river camps.

o The ―Report on Identification and Assessment of Off-Beat

Destinations in Uttarakhand for Community-based Ecotourism

Development & Promotion‖ submitted to gtz-RED Program,

Uttarakhand, January 2010 highlights the scenario of eco-tourism

development & management as ―Service and safety concerns,

limited budget constraints of government have worsened existing

problems. An example is that all the tourist information centres of

Uttarakhand Tourism do not maintain a proper record on

destination management14. Forests and land are common

resources used by many groups. It is not only the local people who

depend on forest resources. Government agencies and private

companies are also interested in using these resources. Many

national development projects, such as one of ecotourism wing of

forest department are proposed in forest managed areas. This

creates a conflict of interest between the forest and other groups, 14

Destination management aims at optimizing the functioning of a tourist destination on three levels:

Organisation of the tourism economy; relation with local population; and Control of environmental

impact. Destination management can include land use planning, business permits and zoning controls,

environmental and other regulations, business association initiatives, and a host of other techniques to

shape the development and daily operation of tourism-related activities. [―Destination Management

Plan–Kumaon Circuit‖ Mission Report (31 October 2010 to 20 November 2010), gtz-RED Program,

Uttarakhand]



resulting in a lack of mutual trust. Consequently, a partnership is

needed not only to create good working relationships and

agreements amongst the various parties, but also to form sincerity

and trustfulness.‖

o Administrative Best Practices:

The unregulated tourism along the trail in the Valley of Flowers &

Hemkunt Sahib had resulted in pollution of beautiful terrain.

Large mound of garbage, mainly plastic had accumulated

along the trail. Forest Department rose to meet the challenge of

cleaning the garbage. Eco-Development Committee (EDC) of

local people of village Bhyundar and Govindghat undertook an

exercise to assess the garbage and causative factors. A series of

discussion was held with all concerned, local people,

shopkeepers, and mule owners etc. to sensitize them and seek

support for salvaging the situation. An operation was launched

with the support of EDC and local people. As a consequence of

this effort, 19 km trek to Valley of Flowers and Hemkunt Sahib

was cleaned and strategy to keep it clean was evolved. In last

two years 84 tons of garbage has been removed without

spending government fund. The EDC with the support of Forest

Department has taken over the responsibility of managing the

activities related with tourism, such as registration and booking

of porters, mules and the interpretation centre and marketing of

souvenirs. The EDC of Bhyundar realizes Eco-fee from

shopkeepers, mule owners and tourists and the garbage

management is being done by them. EDC has now provided

insurance cover to tourists, parks, mule owners, who avail the

services provided by them, without any extra charges. EDC has

realized Eco-fee to the tune of Rs 37 lakhs in the year 2006 and

are successfully managing the trail. [―Experience village life:

Community-based Tourism (CBT)‖ issued by Ecotourism Division,

under Ecotourism Menu on Forest Department‘s website]

―The RED Tourism Value Chain Selection, Strategy and


Tourism Consultancy for gtz-RED program, Uttarakhand also

emphasises that ―It is important that EDCs or similar organisations

are set up in areas where these do not exist to redress and/or

avoid pollution.‖

As per ―Uttaranchal Van Panchayat Regulations, 2005‖ vide

Notification dated 23rd January 2006 by Forest & Environment



Section-2, ―Micro-Plan with plan duration of 5-years‖ and for its

implementation the ―Annual Action Plans‖ is to be prepared

with the purpose of protection and management of Village

Forests/Panchayati Van.



5 SPECIFIC GUIDELINES FOR DEVELOPMENT OF INFRASTRUCTURE FOR

TOURISM SECTOR

5.1 Guidelines for Site Selection and Development

5.1.1 Introduction

The primary purpose of these guidelines is to have a tourism

accommodation asset/supporting visitor infrastructure creation and

development which is safely sited with necessary graded slope

stabilisation/mitigation measures, eco-friendly in resource usage,

vernacular / traditional look and functionally convenient as well as

sustainable in long-term usage. It is to encourage architecture design that

is appropriate and vernacular to its settings and surroundings and it is

complementing to the special conditions of climate and other

environmental factors indigenous to the region. The reviewing authorities

will adjust project review to accommodate the dynamic regulations set

by other authorities having jurisdiction on the region, i.e., building codes,

various acts, flood plain requirements, G.O.s/directives on construction,

control on number of visitors, and the effective amendments to such

Orders/Directives/Acts as issued from time-to-time etc.

Key important terms used are:

Viewing Areas: Key viewing areas have been designated within the

scenic area and include portions of public roads, trails, parks, recreational

sites, river gorges, valley, rural settlements, stepped farm lands, etc.

Development is a broad term that includes the creation of new parcels,

the construction of buildings and structures, and ground-disturbing

activities such as mining, dredging, filling, grading, paving, and

excavation.

Landscape Settings are areas in the location with distinct characteristics.

These characteristics contribute to the beauty and diversity of the Scenic

Area. Some landscape settings have specific requirements for plant

species, building design, and building location. The UTDB will help

determine which landscape setting requirements apply to the project.

Landscape settings are determined by:

Landform – such as cliffs, hillsides including river banks/riparian buffer

areas, and rock outcroppings.

Vegetation Types and Patterns – such as grassland, forests, or

pastures.



Existing Land-use and Development Patterns – including types,

amount, spacing, and other aspects of existing development within

the landscape.

5.1.2 Preliminary Requirements

Scenic Standards are ways of describing how well a development blends

with the landscape. Most development in the Scenic Area must be

visually subordinate to the landscape. These guidelines apply to:

Structure location and orientation;

Structure size, colour, height, shape and exterior materials;

Plantings to help screen or shade new development; and

Grading necessary to accommodate structures and circulation on the

site. The site selection process, EIA, and overall site design are critical

to demonstrating the proponents understanding of the local

environment and the environmental issues associated with the

development of the site.

This stage of the planning process must be comprehensive and clearly

demonstrate that all measures have been taken to ensure the minimal

environmental degradation to the site and surrounding area. Furthermore

the EIA must identify the social and economic impacts on the local

communities as well as any mitigation measures that will be used.

Multiple sites should be considered before the proponent settles on a

specific location. In order to select the best possible site the proponent will

have followed a site selection process leading to the final selection. A

typical site selection matrix is shown below:

Selection Criteria Site - 1 Site-2 Site-3

Suitability

1. Adjacent community

2. Proximity to highway (access)

3. Access to waterway

4. Attractive views

5. On-site natural resources

6. On-site cultural resources

7. Multi-community potential

8. Access to Deep Range

9. Multi-activity potential

10. Compatibility: adjacent land-use (special

concern w.r.t. any river/stream)

11. Remoteness - Seclusion

12. Distance from Airport

13. Four-season potential

14. Waste Water Treatment

Capability



Selection Criteria Site - 1 Site-2 Site-3

1. Size of site

2. Expansion potential

3. Ownership

4. Overall response to market

5. Stakeholders concerns

6. Financial sustainability

Environmental impact

1. Irreversible loss

2. Rare species

3. Landscape alteration

4. Disturbance of fauna

5. Due to conveyance of utilities (e.g. water

supply outsourcing not only affects the eco-

footprint, but it‘s conveyance through water

tanker usage contributes to vehicular

pollution; laying out electricity supply lines

for grid-connectivity, etc.)

Site Inventory and Analysis - The variety of elements to be included in the

regional and site inventory depends on the mix of resources. For the most

part they can be grouped into the following categories:

1) Geography + topography

Physiographic region and sub-regions

Topographic relief

Elevation and steep slopes (including landslide prone zones)

Rock outcrops

2) Geology

Bedrock type and characteristics (structure, type, age)

Depth to bedrock

Unconsolidated materials (loose rocks, sands, any debris) and

thickness

Geologic cross-sections

Earthquake zone

3) Hydrology

Groundwater

− aquifer outcrops; location, extent, thickness

− direction and rate of groundwater movement

− groundwater recharge and discharge areas (probably off-

site)

− depth to groundwater

− community/village well locations, depths, production,

history

− well-head protection areas

− quality of groundwater; pollutant sources,

cleanups/remediation



− proximity to septic and effluent-holding tanks

Surface Water

− types, location, direction of flow

− watersheds and sub-watersheds

− designation/classification of surface water bodies

− floodplains, wadi‘s, wetlands, marshes, bogs

− erosion, sedimentation

4) Soils

Soil types, texture, stoniness, depth, hydrological types

Erosion and potential soil loss in cubic feet per year

Percolation rates

Depth to groundwater

Surface runoff, permeability,

Fertility (vegetative capability)

Nutrient absorption and pH

5) Vegetation

Types of vegetation and mix

Specimen tree

Aesthetic value

Known/possible habitats for endangered/ threatened plant

species

6) Wildlife

Species inventory

Rare, threatened and endangered species

Nuisance and invasive species

Valuable interpretation species

Abundance and distribution of significant species within habitat

and season

7) Land use

Existing

− Open space (including any riparian buffers), easements

Roads, trails, Trek routes/paths

Recreation features

Waste treatment and disposal facilities (sewage and solid waste)

Proposed land use and plans

8) Climate

Prevailing winds and sea breezes

Sun angles by season

Maximum/minimum fluctuations in temperature

Seasonal precipitation

Topographic protection (wind)



9) Air

Air quality

Stationary sources of air pollution and toxics

Vehicular air pollution/ozone areas

Odors

10) Heritage, cultural and archaeology

Historic sites, villages, monuments

Historic roads, bridges and trees

Existing or possible archaeological sites

Heritage viewsheds

11) Noise - Significant sources of noise adjacent to the site

12) Views and viewscapes

Attractive views and panoramas

Views to adjacent properties

Views to the highway and traffic

Views to the site

13) Special environmental features

Wetlands

Steep slopes, rock outcropping, sea cliffs

Floodplains, floodways, beaches

Aquifer recharge areas Endangered/threatened species habitat

Environmental Impact Assessment

All lodging development in eco-sensitive areas requires an EIA. This is also

a critical part of the planning process. The proponent must demonstrate

that responsible professionals performed an adequate EIA. The structure

of the EIA varies for different projects; however, the final EIA report must

include more or less the following headings:

1) Introduction to the project

2) Description of an EIA

3) The ecolodging Environmental Impact Assessment Process

4) Policy, Legal and Administrative Framework

5) Description of the Area and Site Environment

6) Description of the Proposed Project

7) Significant Environmental Impacts

8) Socio-economic Analysis of Projects Impacts

9) Analysis of Alternatives

10) Mitigation Action or Measures

11) Environmental Management and Training

12) Monitoring Program or Plan



13) Public and Community Involvement

14) EIA Review Process.

5.1.3 Major Requirements

a. The project reviewing authority will look at all above options to make

sure the development will blend in its natural surroundings as much as

possible. The future owners will be responsible for maintaining

compliance with all of the conditions listed in the development

approval.

b. Site selection for development should also consider the following:

New buildings are not to be built on land slopes steeper than 30%.

Cultural resources such as archaeological artefacts, historic

buildings, or other cultural features identified in a cultural resource

survey must be avoided.

Natural resources – such as streams, wetlands, rare plants, and

sensitive wildlife habitat must be avoided when selecting a building

site. Most natural resources have a buffer zone that also must be

avoided in most cases.

Grading – including moving of soil or rock to accommodate

proposed structures, temporary staging areas for construction,

driveways or turnarounds, septic drain fields, terraces, and other

new land forms. Decisions about where to locate development

need to consider and minimize the amount of ground disturbance

(grading) required.

New buildings in the Scenic Area must remain below the skyline.

Locating development alongside, below, or behind a ridge or bluff

will help maintain the natural form of the ridge in the landscape.

c. The design and size of the structures should fit well with the site and

landscape. Some good strategies to consider as part of site selection

and design process are:

Consider turning a structure to face a Key Viewing Area at an

angle. A structure that parallels or faces a Key Viewing Area directly

is more noticeable than a structure set at an angle.

Structures also can be set into a hillside rather than perched over a

slope. Designing a building to follow the topography of the site

often helps limit the amount and visibility of grading.

Avoiding large, flat surfaces will help a structure follow natural

grades. For example, a long structure can be stair-stepped to follow

natural grades or a roof line can be varied to break up continuous

straight lines.



Keeping structures below the forest canopy height or the tops of

surrounding trees.

Clustering development at the edge of meadows to retain the

overall agricultural appearance of the site.

Designing tall, narrow structures to blend with the vertical

appearance of a forest having tall trees.

Designing low, horizontal structures to blend with shorter, broader

vegetation like Oak-Pine woodland.

d. The agency or authority developing the site shall submit the site plan for

approval. A complete site plan shall include:

A scale, relating the size of the site plan map to the size of the

actual development.

A North arrow.

Development / property boundaries, dimensions and area.

Significant terrain and landforms on and near the proposed

development.

Location and species of any vegetation to be removed or planted.

Water bodies, wetlands and rivers/streams.

Locations and dimensions of existing and proposed structures

including pedestrian pathways, driveways and parking areas.

Location of existing and proposed services, including wells or other

water supplies, sewage disposal systems, power and telephone

poles and lines and outdoor lighting.

Location and depths of all proposed grading and ditching – this

information also can be shown on the grading plan.

e. Grading & Grading Plan Preparation – Grading is the movement of

earth, including the addition (fill) and remove (cut) of soil or rock to

prepare a site for development of structures, pedestrian pathways,

driveways, outdoor spaces, roads, turn-around, and other aspects of

the development. The grading plans must be submitted to approving

authority for approval.

The grading plan should confirm that proposed grading will blend well

with surrounding landforms. To a larger extent the grading plans should

demonstrate that cut and fill are balanced within a site. The grading

plans should document where fill material is coming from, where excess

material will be taken if the amounts of cut and fill are not equal.

The grading plan must be prepared on a base map drawn to scale

and include:



Existing slopes and points at which new grading activities will meet

existing grades.

Important landforms and the general direction and slope of grades

for surrounding areas.

Sufficient topography to clearly show the resulting land form.

Proposed cut and fill areas.

Any proposed structures to retain cut or fill slopes, such as retaining

walls.

Evidence that proposed cut and fill are balanced, or that material

will be removed from or imported to permissible locations.

Grading to accommodate structures, access, and circulation should

be minimized through careful site selection and structure design.

Access roads shall follow existing contours and use of existing grades is

made as much as possible.

If retaining walls are necessary for safety or desirable to minimize overall

grading, the shape of the wall and material used on the exterior face

of the retaining wall should blend with surroundings.

To protect existing vegetation, keep all grading activity beyond the

canopy of the trees as much as possible. Avoid damaging tree roots by

keeping heavy construction equipment away from the base of existing

trees. Flagging areas to be retained so as to protect important

landscape features.

Distance from key viewing areas, screening by topography and

vegetation, exterior textures, and surface variation must be considered

together with colour to help a structure blend with its surrounding.

f. Exterior building material requirements

Exterior building materials play a big part in how well a development

blends in with its surroundings. It is required that structures

topographically visible from key viewing areas use non-reflective

materials or materials that only reflect low levels of light. A shiny

structure is difficult to blend with its natural surroundings.

i) Heavily textured, low reflectivity materials are recommended for

exposed foreground locations.

a. Siding

Rock masonry, rock veneer15, clustered stone

Logs

15 Veneer – typically made to look like brick or stone, veneers are applied one layer deep, and are usually

attached to the exterior surface from the ground up.



Wood shingle, shake16, or clapboard17

Concrete board or composite clapboard

Board plank siding18 (mill cut, board and batten, V-groove,

channel, shiplap, etc.

Brick, brick veneer

b. Roof

Architectural composite shingle19

Slate or tile roofs (including concrete tile)

Imitation slate or tile composites (including rubber tiles from

recycled tires)

Dark metal treated with dark asphalt or other permanent

flexible coating

c. Windows

Tinted thermal pane20 glass, e.g. grey or bronze (glass less

than 11% exterior visible light reflectivity rating)

ii) Moderately textured, best in well-screened or shaded areas outside

the foreground of key viewing areas are potentially acceptable.

a. Siding

Rough textured stucco21, concrete or plywood

Textured concrete or composite panels (square or

rectangular panels textured to imitate stucco)

Vinyl shingle, shake, or clapboard

Pre-weathered metal

b. Roof

Three tab22

Concrete shingles

16 Shakes or Shingles – squares or rectangles of wood that are applied in rows overlapping each other.

Shingles are usually uniform is size and shape. Shakes are typically more roughly cut and vary in size and

shape. Many vinyl and aluminium siding products also come in shake and shingle styles. 17 Horizontal rectangular planks applied in rows with upper rows overlapping lower rows. Clapboard is most

commonly made of wood. Concrete or composition board, vinyl, and aluminium siding also come in

clapboard styles. 18 V-groove, channel, board and batten – this siding has special milled cuts in the boards which allows the

boards to fit together and protect board edges from weather. Board and batten siding has narrow

wood battens where planks come together creating a vertical texture. 19 Overlapping roofing shingles with a granular surface that is textured due to overlap between shingles

and granular color variations. 20 Thermal Pane – two panes of glass, sealed together with an even amount of space between them for

better insulation. 21 Stucco – similar to plaster on an interior wall, stucco is composed of sand, water, and cement. Stucco is

applied in several layers. A color is usually mixed into stucco. The final layer of stucco is applied to create

rough or smooth finished texture. 22

Three Tab – horizontal flat roofing shingles with a granular surface. The texture on a three tab roof comes

primarily from color variations in the granular surface.



Metal w/ granular finish (looks like composite shingle)

Pre-weathered or rusted metal roofing

Metal shake, shingle, or tile simulations (w/ crushed stone top

coat)

Fiberglass coated metal roofing

c. Windows

Clear thermal pane glass, e.g. clear over low e (11%-15%

exterior visible light reflectivity rating)

iii) Highly reflective, smooth and shiny materials, do not comply with

regulations in most circumstances; approved only with special

limitations and design considerations.

a. Siding

Aluminium shingle, shake, or clapboard

Aluminium standing seam

Galvanized or enamel painted steel

b. Roof

Smooth metal (sheet or standing seam)

Smooth metal tile simulations (no top coating)

Mill/pre-coated metal

c. Windows

Mirrored or reflective glass should not be proposed, e.g.

solar cool grey or solar cool bronze (glass greater than 15%

exterior visible light reflectivity rating)

The exterior color of all improvements must be compatible with the

forest setting, and provide a quality visual experience for all forest

visitors. Colors must generally be neutral and darker than the

landscape backdrop. Light and bright colors and highly reflective

materials create a contrast and will usually not be approved.

Natural materials and earth tones or soft shaded colors will blend

with the surroundings and help to achieve the desired landscape

character.

g. New vegetation may be required to improve the screening and

shading of development. New plantings must be designed and

planted to provide sufficient screening within five years of the

beginning of construction. New screening vegetation should include

trees and shrubs that will thrive in the Scenic Area‘s habitat and blend

with their surroundings. Native plants are often recommended because

they live in the existing environment, are easier to grow and keep

healthy, and require less maintenance. Other important factors to be

considered under plan are as follows:



Orientation – south-facing sites are hotter and drier than north-

facing sites and may require selection of more drought-tolerant

species.

Wind – many exposed sites in the Gorge are windy; new plantings

should be planted and staked to withstand wind until they are

successfully established.

Soil depth and type – It is important to consider on-site soil

conditions. Steep sites and ridges require careful planting location

selection to ensure sufficient pockets of soil are available. Some

rocky areas may not allow screening trees to grow to the required

height and breadth within five years of the beginning of

construction.

Rainfall, soil moisture, and drainage – moisture levels can vary within

a site. Plants suited to available moisture levels should be selected.

Continuous irrigation may be necessary to help less drought-tolerant

species survive on a dry site. Drought-tolerant species may not do

well on a wet site.

Need for year-round screening – The plan requires a proportion of

evergreen plantings to help ensure year-round screening.

Evergreen plants should be planted where year-round screening is

most critical.

h. All signs must have a rustic appearance (e.g. the material used can be

seasoned wood panels/stone slab panels with engraved lettering and

mounted on wood/stainless steel pole supports, etc.). All lettering must

be black, white, or earth tones on a natural background and between

4 and 24 inches in height. Signs shall not be nailed to trees. Painting on

natural features such as rocks and trees is prohibited.

i. Hardscape guidelines

i) Each building or development to have only one driveway access

from the street. ―Straight shot‖ driveways are greatly discouraged.

ii) Driveways can be paved with either concrete or asphalt;

however, in wooded areas use of soft pervious material such as

gravel, oyster shell, pine straw, or wood chips are encouraged.

Driveway colors that are subdued and natural in tone are

preferred.

iii) Driveway width should be a minimum of 12‘ on curves and 10‘ for

straighter drives. Where the driveway meets the street, the width of

the drive should be at least 18‘ wide. Curved driveways should

have no less than a 15‘ radius. Design of driveways must also meet

fire department requirements for access.



iv) All walkways to the front entrance should be a minimum of 54‖

wide.

v) No paved areas may be sited closer than five (5) feet from side or

rear property lines. A minimum of 36 inches of planting area is to

be maintained between the driveway and the building.

vi) When allowed, entry gates or piers must be located within the

buildable area and should not have an overall height greater than

three (3) feet above the adjacent grade.

j. A 20‖ diameter or less satellite dish, or 1 meter if required by regulations,

may be placed on the roof of a property provided it is not visible from

the street and is properly screened from adjoining property. If ground

placement is necessary, locate in areas least obtrusive to viewing from

streets or adjoining property. The dish must be painted a color that will

blend with the surrounding roof or screening.

5.2 Guidelines for Development of Home Stays in Uttarakhand

The Department of Tourism (DoT), Government of Uttarakhand (GoUK) had

introduced a scheme for Homestays to supplement the demand of

accommodations at various tourist destinations in the State of Uttarakhand.

These Home Stays provide standard facilities with minimal investment and

encourage the locals to earn an extra income.

All Home Stays shall be registered and established as per Uttarakhand

Home Stay Rules, 2015 annexed with this document as Appendix-2.

Existing Home Stays registered with ILSP under Rural Development

Department should be integrated with the registration requirements of

Uttarakhand Home Stay Rules, 2015 and the information on such Home

Stays should be duly linked with communication mechanism of the UTDB

website.

5.3 Guidelines for Rural Tourism

5.3.1 Introduction

Rural Tourism has been advocated to showcase the rural life, art, culture

and heritage at rural locations, to benefit the local community,

economically and socially. It also enables interaction between the tourists

and the locals for a more enriching & rewarding tourism experience.

Rural tourism is essentially an activity which takes place in the countryside.

It is multi-faceted and may entail farm/agricultural tourism, cultural tourism,

nature tourism, adventure tourism, and eco-tourism. Rural tourism has



certain typical characteristics like; it is experience-oriented, the locations

are sparsely populated, it is predominantly in natural environment, it

meshes with seasonality and local events, and is based on preservation of

culture, heritage and traditions.

Government of Uttarakhand (GoUK), intends to promote village/rural

tourism and spread its socio-economic benefits to rural and backward

areas in the state. Rural areas provide many opportunities for the

development of tourism, as an alternative means of income-generation.

Land is inexpensive in comparison to urban areas; the environment is green

and unpolluted; and buildings which previously served other purposes can

easily be refurbished.

Some of the potential benefits include generation of additional/off-farm

income, job creation, farm support, landscape conservation, services

retention, and support to rural arts and crafts, nature conservation,

environmental improvements, and enhanced role of women. Eligible

applicants are required to fulfil the following conditions to submit

applications for the purpose of development of Rural Tourism.

The following entities can be considered eligible to develop the facility:

Any Panchayat representing a village or;

NGO, federations, cooperative societies, trust, self-help group or a

group of individuals (community); and

An individual owning a farm (horticulture, sericulture, agriculture, dairy

farm, etc).

5.3.2 Requirements

To deliver a unique experience to visitors, the special rural heritage of

Uttarakhand‘s countryside should be showcased in a special manner,

without compromising on quality.

Delivering quality should focus on bringing out the special, distinctive

features and flavours of the destination. Quality rural tourism depends on,

and in turn supports many other activities such as agriculture, craft

industries, transport and local services.

Basic infrastructure such as access, water, sanitation, electricity etc., should

be present at the site/village.

The development should be small-scale, integrating easily into the

economic fabric of the community. It should directly link small-scale

agriculture, horticulture or sericulture with the tourism experience.

The following facilities should be available for visitors:



Overnight accommodation with clean toilets/bathrooms

Traditional/local cuisine (could be made available in the form of

community kitchens etc.)

Guides

Souvenirs.

Activities to experience rural life/central theme/product at the

village(s).

5.4 Guidelines for Developing Eco-Tourism

5.4.1 Introduction

Uttarakhand with its scenic hills, forests with abundant wildlife and beautiful

river stretches, has a lot of potential for development as an ecotourism

destination. Valley of Flowers National Park, Jim Corbett National Park/Tiger

Reserve, Mussoorie, Nainital, waterfalls, etc., are some of the destinations

amongst many which have a potential to be developed as ecotourism

destinations.

In recent years, the mushrooming of tourist facilities around protected

areas has led to the exploitation, degradation, disturbance, and misuse of

fragile ecosystems. It has also led to misuse of the term ‗ecotourism,‘ often

to the detriment of the ecosystem, and towards further alienation of local

people and communities. These guidelines are applicable to any

Protected Areas (PAs), National Parks, Wildlife Sanctuaries, Community

Reserves; Conservation Reserves, Sacred Groves, or Pilgrimage Spots

located within protected areas and forested areas.

The Department of Tourism (DoT), GoUK proposes these guidelines for

facilitating identification, promotion and development of lesser known

areas having ecotourism potential in addition to popular destinations. At

the same time, these guidelines aim for diversification in the range of

tourism activities available at destinations and facilitate involvement of the

local communities living in, and dependent on peripheral and other areas

for their livelihood. The provisions of various Acts related to Forests and

Environment, namely, Uttarakhand Forest Policy, Wildlife Protection Act

1972, Forest Conservation Act, 1980, Environment Protection Act, 1986, and

the directives and guidelines issued by the Central/ State Government from

time to time shall be strictly followed.



5.4.2 Eligibility

With a view to encourage entities to enter into the Ecotourism segment,

DoT proposes the following guidelines for entity applying for development

of ecotourism destination(s):

i. Ecotourism will be restricted to designated tourism zones prescribed

under the tourism theme plan of the Department of Tourism. The zone

may include core zone / critical tiger habitat, buffer areas and other

wildlife rich areas.

ii. The proposed ecotourism activities will be in strict conformance with

the provisions of the existing environmental law of the country,

especially The Wildlife (Protection) Act, 1972, the Forest Conservation

Act, 1980 and the various other directives and guidelines issued by the

Government from time to time.

iii. Adherence to international standards in terms of quality and safety in

developing and operating ecotourism facilities and activities.

iv. The Entity would need to conduct carrying capacity of the proposed

site to arrive at the types and level of tourism-related activity that the

proposed site can sustainably accommodate.

v. In conformity with Forest Conservation Act. 1980, The Wildlife

(Protection) Act. 1972 and directions by the Hon‟ble Supreme Court, no

new tourist facilities will be established in the protected areas without

prior approval of competent authority. However, the existing tourist

facilities will be continued, as discontinuation will have adverse effect

on the protection and management of the Protected Area (PA).

Adequate provisions should be made for improving the conditions of

these facilities, meeting to the strict ecotourism standards. Local eco-

development committees can be involved in managing these facilities.

Priority will be given to developing sites near existing and known tourist

destinations.

vi. It will be mandatory to have trained nature guides/eco-guides

registered with park administration with every tourist vehicle entering

the Tiger Reserve / National Park. The park management will select,

train and manage these nature guides, while eco-guides would be

managed under the Eco-Development Committee (EDC) mechanism

supported by the Forest Department (e.g. EDC Govindghat for

managing visitation to Valley of Flowers National Park – Hemkunt Sahib

Belt located in the Nanda Devi Biosphere Reserve). 50% of the

candidates for Nature guides will be from rural areas adjoining to the

park (up to 2 km from the boundary). The department will develop

separate competency standards for both rural and other nature guides



and evolve a system of rankings based on the knowledge,

competence and experience (expertise) of each nature guide.

vii. The vehicles used for tourism in PAs will be registered and administered

by the park management as per instructions/directions/regulations

issued from time to time.

viii. To avoid the number of visitors and vehicles exceeding carrying

capacity, the entity shall establish an online advance booking system

to control tourist and vehicle numbers. Rules of booking shall be

transparent and violators shall be penalized.

ix. The proposed project will focus on creating environmental awareness

amongst all sections and age groups, especially the youth, to be

incorporated as a major activity for each ecotourism destination.

x. Only activities and facilities having least impact on the natural

resources and the local culture will be permitted.

xi. All facilities located within five kms. of a Protected Area must adhere to

noise pollution rules under „The Noise Pollution (Regulation and Control)

Rules, 2000,‘ and „The Noise Pollution (Regulation and Control)

(Amendment) Rules, 2010‟ issued by the Ministry of Environment and

Forests.

xii. The proposal should focus on providing quality experience rather than

the number of visitors, without compromising on financial viability as far

as possible.

xiii. Wherever resources harnessed for ecotourism are traditionally in use by

the local community, the proposal should be developed in consultation

with them and mechanisms to ensure flow of benefits to the community

should be clearly identified. Overwhelming presence of external private

investments to exploit ecotourism/rural tourism benefits instead of

greater involvement by- and flow of benefits to- the local community,

should at best be avoided (e.g. Bhakrakot Village near Corbett

National Park is reported to having presence of lot of private resorts).

xiv. The proposal should highlight the marketing strategies for promotion of

the proposed project, which should be based on sound market

research and segmentation analysis and make wide use of electronic,

print and cyber media for marketing.

xv. Installation of technologically efficient systems and clean development

mechanisms will be mandatory for operation of any ecotourism facility.

xvi. Tourism infrastructure proposed in the project shall conform to

environment-friendly, low-impact development with aesthetic

architecture, including solar energy, waste recycling, rainwater

harvesting, natural cross-ventilation, and proper sewage disposal and

merging with the surrounding habitat.



5.4.3 Other Requirements

In addition to eligibility, there are certain mandatory requirements for

entities operating Ecotourism destinations. Ecotourism activities to be

identified and developed at any destination shall be site-specific i.e.

dependent upon the potential of the particular site being developed.

Following are the activities and facilities that may be undertaken for

promoting an area as an ecotourism destination within the State.

Nature Camps: Camping sites identified for ecotourism activities should

be provided with basic facilities to enable the tourists to stay in natural

surroundings either solely to experience the wilderness, or additionally

for participating in other activities requiring overnight stay in forests.

Eco-friendly Accommodation: Accommodation that would be

developed in an eco-tourism destination should be ‗eco-friendly‘, i.e.,

i. They should be built with locally available material including forest

produced building materials available with- & promoted by- the

State Forest Development Corporation/Uttarakhand Bamboo Board

for wood, bamboo, bamboo-based compressed sheet, etc.

ii. Should make use of renewable resources

iii. Should adopt ecological sustainable solutions such as water

harvesting etc.

Above all, the entire concept should contribute to the revenue of the

local community and raise their living standards by involving them in

provision of various services related to this segment of tourism.

Trekking and Nature Walks: Eco-tourism destinations identified in

Trekking routes of varying distances and guided nature trails should

ensure that they cause minimum/no disturbance to the natural

vegetation and soil. Staff and local persons, especially youth should be

appropriately trained to act as Nature Guides and Naturalists so as to

assist visitors during wildlife viewing and trekking.

Wildlife Viewing and River Cruise: Wildlife viewing in eco-friendly

vehicles or on elephant backs should be promoted at appropriate sites

for observing wildlife.

Adventure Sports: Facilities for adventure sports such as rock climbing,

rappelling and parasailing along with water sports such as river rafting,

boating and canoeing should be developed in consultation and

cooperation with experts and the concerned department or agency

having control over the water bodies.

Angling: Angling facilities for Mahaseer and other suitable fish species,

strictly on a catch and release basis, should be developed only on

suitable rivers/ water bodies flowing through or along the forest areas in



consultation with the concerned Department. If necessary, water

bodies may be artificially stocked by rearing and releasing fish seed

into the rivers that have been depleted of the target species over time.

Herbal Ecotourism: Herbal ecotourism should be made the thrust areas

only at locations having a rich herbal heritage. Traditional medicinal

practices of such locations could be explored and based on these,

authentic herbal inputs having appropriate certifications and

recognition could be made available to the tourists.

Urban Ecotourism through Eco-Parks: In order to promote urban

ecotourism, eco-parks could be developed in various urban centres.

Such Eco-parks should contain provisions for various ecotourism

activities including interpretation centres, trekking, nature walks, biking,

bird watching, camping, angling, herbal centre, adventure sports etc.

on a small scale, depending upon the area being developed. For this

purpose, existing public parks in urban localities could also be utilized.

Visitor Interpretation Centres: Existing interpretation facilities should be

strengthened to provide complete information to visitors and

accommodate the requirements of various classes of visitors envisaged.

Each destination must incorporate ways to enhance and enrich the

visitor experience.

Conservation Education: Conservation education should be promoted

in and around each destination for creating awareness amongst

school and college students, local communities, government staff and

visitors in order to maintain and enhance support for ecotourism and

environmental conservation. Various means that could be adopted

include media campaigns, formation of eco-clubs at schools and

colleges, exposure visits to destinations, displays and hoardings,

community centres etc. New and innovative methods shall also be

encouraged.

Other Facilities: Facilities for any other eco-friendly activities could also

be developed based on specific requirements of a site, provided the

activity is compatible with the overall objectives of tourism policy

(Department of Tourism) and ecotourism policy (Forest Department),

and in conformance with the various standards and guidelines laid

down in this regard over time.

5.5 Guidelines for Developing Adventure Tourism & related Activities

5.5.1 Introduction

Uttarakhand has diverse tourist products ranging from Heritage, Nature,

Pristine river stretches, Pilgrimage, urban, rural, ecotourism and adventure



tourism. Uttarakhand has a huge potential for development of adventure

tourism. There are a vast number of Adventure Tourism Activities being

conducted in the State. Adventure Tourism proves the tourist with a special

thrill and feeling of adventure while participating in sporting events in rivers,

water bodies, and hills etc. Adventure-based tourism was initially limited to

specific regions of India and the trend has been showing an increased

movement year after year with the development of facilities and greater

awareness about adventure tourism options across the country.

Uttarakhand with its rugged terrains, undulating mountains, thundering

rivers, and dense forests can be development as a premier adventure

tourism destination.

In order to tap the abundant natural resources that Uttarakhand is

endowed with, the Department of Tourism, GoUK intends to steer

Adventure Tourism to the next level. There are many prominent locations

along the river Ganges and its tributaries for developing adventure tourism.

DoT has set out certain eligibility criteria for entities aspiring to enter the

Adventure Tourism segment. These criteria have been laid out to safeguard

the tourists from the perils of the various activities associated with this

segment of tourism.

5.5.2 Eligibility

The Entity applying for development of adventure tourism destination

would be eligible for setting up the facility under the adventure tourism

guidelines, provided the proposal conforms to the following principles:

Operators will have to be registered with Adventure Tour Operators

Association of India and Ministry of Tourism, GoI.

The Adventure Tourism Operator must follow the general guidelines for

all Adventure Sports and the Activity Specific Guidelines for specific

activities where applicable.

The entity that wishes to operate this segment of tourism should ensure the

following:

Prohibition of Alcohol Intake and Drugs: Consuming alcohol in any form

or quantity or illicit drugs at least six hours prior to the river trip should not

be allowed.

Foreign Guides: Foreign Guides must be aware of the Indian Safety

Regulations before being allowed to operate. They must fulfil the

required criteria and should do a few familiarization runs on the river

and equipment before being allowed to operate commercially. A valid

first aid certificate is a must.



Minimum Age Requirements: Only Children over 12 years should be

allowed to participate in adventure activities, that too, after the

operator has made reasonable prior judgment and exercised extreme

caution.

Safety Briefing: Guides/trip leader should ensure that a thorough brief

on safety, covering all pertinent details for that particular trip is

imparted. The trip leader should ensure that clients are suitably dressed,

(bulky clothes, sarees, neck ties, long skirts and three piece suits should

not be permitted). People suffering from any serious ailments, weak

heart conditions, epilepsy, and expecting mothers should not be

allowed.

Advertisements showcasing any adventure tourism should depict the

difficulties and dangers involved. Every group participating in

adventure sports should be accompanied by a trained guide.

The guide should possess appropriate qualification and skills for the

specific adventure activity.

Guides should have the following basic skills:

i. Be familiar with search procedures and brief all group members on

these procedures.

ii. Have a first aid certification and should be competent to impart first

aid training in the use of stretchers.

iii. Should be proficient in the use of maps and compasses in any

weather by day or night.

iv. Should be familiar with helicopter operations; know how to

approach a helicopter and procedures for being winched up and

down.

Every person joining a group engaged in adventure sports should

receive an introductory training and the guide should be satisfied that

they have acquired the skills necessary to participate. Guide should be

satisfied that all members are medically fit to take part in the adventure

sports.

All group members should be familiar with the use of radios wherever

they are being used.

All equipment used should meet all safety norms for each adventure

sport and all inspections have to been carried out as recommended by

the manufacturer and are fit for use.

Under no circumstances should the capacity rated by the

manufacturer of adventure sports equipment be exceeded, any

unauthorized modifications, except as additional safety measures, be

carried out or sub-standard material used.



Information regarding nature of activity, area of operation, period of

activity, possible hazards, persons to be contacted in an emergency,

and list of members should be given to the concerned safety and

rescue committees.

A qualified Doctor should be available on call. First aid should be

available at site with Qualified First-aid Instructors (having additional

knowledge of related accidents), with arrangements from a nearby

hospital for quick emergency services.

Communication facilities such as Mobile Telephone / Walkie - Talkie

etc. should be available.

Use of package wastewater treatment plant or where sufficient natural

gradient is available use of gravity-flow based bio-digester system

should be encouraged for recycling wastewater for making the

campsite a zero discharge facility.

5.5.3 Specific Requirements:

Adventure Tourism should also advocate Safe Tourism. Below are laid out

specific requirements for Adventure Tourism involving greater peril, to

ensure safety of the participants and build their confidence levels. Caution

should be stringently exercised by meeting these requirements with respect

to the following adventure activities:

5.5.3.1 Mountaineering

Application: These Basic Minimum Standards (BMS) will apply

specifically to commercial operators attempting 6000 m or other

comparable peaks, which offer to guide or accompany climbers

above Base Camp and also to operators who offer more limited

facilities. However, it will also concern operators who supply transport

etc to Base Camp, and also supply Base Camp services and High

Altitude porters.

Information to Clients: A variety of organisations offer to take clients

on 6000 m or other comparable peaks. They vary from those which

provide a full service to the summit or nearly to the summit, to those

where there is minimal support for clients above Base Camp.

However at the present moment it is difficult for clients to deduce

from brochures exactly what is offered in terms of guiding and

support, and whether it corresponds to their needs. These Basic

Minimum Standards will supply clients with pointers to assist them to

make an informed choice.

Danger awareness: Mountaineers climbing at very high altitude,

especially above 6000 m are at considerable stress to their mental



and physical powers and may not be capable of assisting others as

has always been traditional in mountaineering. This fact is of

particular importance to mountaineers of limited experience, who

rely on professional guides to bring them safely up and down 6000

m+ peaks. They should be made aware that the risks involved in

climbing at altitudes are such that a degree of self-reliance is

necessary. All such operators will have to be registered with

Adventure Tour Operators Association of India and Ministry of

Tourism, GoI.

The expedition leader or chief guide and as many as possible of the

guides should have high altitude experience appropriate to the

altitude of the peak to be climbed. He/She must have been a

member of three climbing expeditions above 6000 m and must have

completed the Basic Mountaineering Course with an ‗A‘ grade or an

equivalent from abroad. He/She must be qualified on first aid and

cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR) certification.

The guiding and porter staff on the mountain and the material

supplied must be adequate for the aims of the party and stated level

of service offered.

An experienced Doctor in the party is desirable but at the very least

advance arrangements must be known for medical help. Advance

arrangements must also be made for evacuation assistance in case

of emergency.

The minimum safety equipment available is recommended walkie-

talkie radios and recommended medical supplies.

If an expedition is commercially launched by an operator, then the

Biographical information about the guiding team should be

included.

The client must truthfully reveal his/her experience, supported by

documentation/photograph, medical history etc. to the organiser so

that the organiser can make an informed choice about the potential

client.

Information supplied in advance will include a clear statement of the

guiding, porterage and equipment which will be supplied by the

organiser, together with details of the clothing and equipment to be

supplied by the client. This is not in context of the operators assisting

expeditions with logistics alone.

All equipment on which life is dependent must be Union International

de Alpine Association (UIAA) or European Union (EU) certified.

Knowledge of low-impact environmental expeditions must be

undertaken, pledging to environmental guidelines of Union



International de Alpine Association (UIAA)/Himalayan Environment

Trust (HET) etc.

In addition to the ―Guidelines for mountaineering expeditions in

Uttaranchal, 2004,‖ implemented by both the Forest and Tourism

Departments, the expedition team must strictly follow the

G.O.s/directives issued from the Forest Department of the State over

time on the compliance to be made on the number of members

and porters etc. in an expedition team for the specified list of

mountain peak ranges.

The expedition team must strictly follow the regulations specified by

the Forest Department for

solid waste disposal for

retaining the eco-sanctity of

the mountaineering route and

the mountain peak

destination.

5.5.3.2 Trekking

The leader or chief guide and as many as possible of the guides

should have experience appropriate to the difficulty of the route

being attempted The trip leader must have completed at least two

trekking trips in general and must have completed the Basic

Mountaineering Course or equivalent with an ‗A‘ grade. He/She must

be qualified on first aid and cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR)

certification.

The guiding and porter staff for the trek and the material supplied

must be adequate for the aims of the party and stated level of

services offered.

Adequate arrangements must be made known in advance for

medical help available in the area. Advance information must also

be made for evacuation assistance in case of emergency. Minimum

first aid medical supplies must be carried on the trip. In case of a

helicopter requirement for rescue operation, it is recommended that

the Accreditation Committee be empowered to authorize the

rescue.

Information provided to clients must give a true picture of all the

difficulties and dangers involved, and avoid promising the

impossible. Biographical information about the guiding team should

be included.



The client must truthfully reveal his/her experience, medical history

etc. to the organizer so that the organizer can make an informed

choice about the potential client.

Information supplied in advance will include a clear statement of the

guiding, porterage and equipment which will be supplied by the

organizer, together with details of the clothing and equipment to be

supplied by the client.

The trekkers must strictly follow the regulations specified by the Forest

Department/Tourism Department for solid waste disposal for retaining

the eco-sanctity of the trekking route and the trek destination.

5.5.3.3 River Running/Rafting

Any company operating river running trips or commercial white

water rafting trips must be registered with Indian Association of

Professional Rafting Outfitters/Adventure Tour Operators Association

of India and Ministry of Tourism.

All trips on white water for tourists will be conducted with at least one

qualified guide on each craft. A senior guide or trip leader must be

present and supervise the activity at all times.

The Guide accompanying the trips should:

a. be at least 18 years of age;

b. be able to swim;

c. hold a valid first aid and cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR)

certificate or equivalent.

Training: Guide trainees should complete a course (or equivalent

training) that equips them with the necessary skills and knowledge to

safely and competently guide a raft. A guide training course should

include the following topics:

a. Skills - rafting techniques, crew training and management,

emergency and rescue techniques.

b. Knowledge - equipment, safety and emergency procedures,

rapid theory, leadership, signals, environment protection.

Recognition Experience: Guides should:

a. have guided a raft under the supervision of and to the

satisfaction of a Trip Leader on at least ten white water runs within

the past two years in rapids of the same class or higher than the

run they intend to guide on;

b. Should be trained from either National Institute of Water-sports

(NIWAS) or any equivalent recognised body in India or on an

International Level.



c. complete a familiarization run on any new stretch of white water

they intend to guide on;

d. maintain a log book recording each run and signed by the Trip

leader as proof of experience;

e. should have good communication skills in Hindi and English

Special Requirements for Trip Leaders: Trip Leaders should:

a. have been qualified guides for at least two years;

b. have a high level of guide skills and knowledge;

c. have a thorough knowledge of trip planning, white water rescue

techniques, emergency procedures and advanced first aid;

d. have guided a raft as a qualified guide on at least twenty white

water runs within the past two years in rapids of the same class or

higher than the run they intend to lead on;

e. has completed a familiarization run and know the evacuation

routes on any new stretch of white water they intend to lead on;

f. should have excellent communication skills in Hindi and English.

Single Raft Trips: Some of the worst accidents in river running

internationally have occurred where there has been only one raft.

There should always be at least two crafts on the water i.e, two rafts

or kayaks or a raft and a safety kayak. This may be relaxed for float

trips (maximum grade II) in the case of rafts. For kayaks a minimum of

two or preferably three is always recommended. Safety Kayaks must

be mandatory on technical rapids grade IV and beyond. In case on

continuous white water sections, one should look at a minimum of

one kayak per raft, if not more.

Kit: All trips must carry a well- equipped first Aid kit (it must have

triangular bandages, sterile pads, gauze roller bandages, pressure

bandages, first aid adhesive tape, splints, scissors as bare minimum),

a repair kit (it must contain approx. half meter of repair material, a

sufficient amount of flue and accelerator, sand paper or roughing

tool and waterproof repair tape/duck or duct tape). Oar rafts must

carry at least one spare oar. All rafts must have a safety line going all

around the raft, a bow- line and preferably a stern line as well. All

rafts must have a throw bag and a bailing bucket (in case of non

self-bailer bucket boats). A flip line is recommended for all big drops.



Personal River Equipment: All rafters/kayakers must have a life jacket

on all times while on water. This includes the guides also. The life

jackets must have adequate buoyancy (minimum of 6.14 kgs, and

preferably 9 – 10 kgs.), must be the proper type (U.S. Coast Guard

Type III or V) with a provision of ensuring a snug fit by straps etc. and

the life jacket must be worn correctly. Inflatable life jackets and the

‗keyhole‘ type jackets should not be allowed. Guides must ensure

that the life jackets are on in a secure manner before the trip starts

and above all major drops. Helmets are mandatory on all rapids and

it is recommended that helmets be kept on throughout the trip. The

helmet should be properly strapped. Rafts must be of good condition

with no leakage or compartment damage. A baffle / compartment

inflation check must be carried out

at regular intervals to ensure that

each compartment is air tight with

no leaks. A minimum of 14 – 16 feet

boats are recommended for

commercial rafting. Self-bailing

rafts are recommended.

Age Limit: Fourteen years on all

stretches except float trips (grade II and below), where it may be

relaxed to ten years.

Non Swimmers: Non swimmers should not be allowed on any serious

rapid (grade III +/IV)/ or hard section.

Familiarization Runs: One or two familiarization runs before operating

commercially each season or on new rivers is recommended. Rivers

should not be run commercially at flood levels.

Senior Guide: A senior guide must have spent at least three

consecutive seasons on any of the above three rivers with a

minimum of sixty days on the river per season. He must have all

requisite first aid and cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR)

qualifications and must have a clean safety record. A senior guide

must have river- running experience on at least three different rivers.

Safety Kayaker: A safety and rescue kayaker must be thoroughly

trained and experienced in all safety norms, river rescue and first

aid/cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR) certification. A minimum of

thirty days on the river is mandatory before kayaking with

commercial trips.

For River Rafting/Kayaking adventurism activity, ―Uttarakhand River

Rafting/Kayaking Regulations, 2014‖ implemented by Department of

Tourism must be strictly followed.



5.5.3.4 Paragliding

In case of solo flights the pilot should have undergone two full days

ground training consisting theoretical and practical training and

instructor should satisfy

himself of the first launch

both in hill and winch

launched paragliding. For

first 15 launches height

should be restricted to max.

500 feet and student should

be radio guided. After

demonstrated capability for

180 degree stable turns, five spot (20 mtrs) landings and after the

theory paper is cleared, the student may be allowed to carry out

free fly. The student pilot must have a valid registration with a club

recognised by the Aero Club of India.

Tandem pilots must have a tandem pilots license issued by the

competent authority, which will be issued after the following:

a. 150 logged flights.

b. 35 hrs + logged.

c. Pass theory paper.

All instructors must be current pilots having sufficient knowledge and

experience in the sport.

Operator must have access to safe and open take off points in case

of hill launches. The take-off point should be free from obstructions in

the take-off path and should not have rock or crops which could

injure the participant. Cliff take-off points must strictly not to be used.

The operator must have free and clear access to a designated

landing ground free of obstructions such as tall trees, buildings,

electric wires etc.

Wind conditions should be strictly monitored and the activity must be

done within the weather conditions stipulated by the equipment

manufacturer.

Paragliding wings must have APCUL DHV or CEN certification. Such

certification should be stitched on the wing and visible for inspection.

Harness should be with back protection and harness must be fitted

with round type certified rescue parachute.

Helmets and Ankle shoes must be compulsory.

Proper log books must be maintained for all equipment.



Annual inspection and certification of equipment for air worthiness

must be carried out.

5.5.3.5 Parasailing

All operators shall be certified by the appropriate agency in terms of

their capability to conduct the activity on land or water, specifically

endorsed to allow multi-passenger flight operations.

In Flight Floatation Devices and helmets: At all times passengers

participating in parasailing activities over water, while in flight shall

wear a properly fitted approved life jacket. Over land, the

passengers must wear an ISI approved helmet.

Passenger Safety Briefing: All parasail participants shall be required to

view a Parasail Safety Briefing video and/ or be given a written

Parasail Safety Briefing hand-out. In addition, the crew shall give a

pre-flight verbal summary of the briefing before any parasail flight

activities commence, which should include the following:

a. A description of the activity itself.

b. Safety precautions while underway and in-flight.

c. Safety and life-saving equipment locations.

d. Warnings and Procedures for unexpected events, such as water

landings, equipment malfunctions, and towline separation.

e. Procedure in the event of an emergency on-board the vessel.

f. The proper use of signals.

g. Question and Answer period.

h. Exclusion of any participant that may be afraid or intimidated

prior to participation.

Wind restrictions: Operator should have a wind measurement device

and should not operate in winds exceeding 18 Kph.

Tow worthiness of parasailing vehicles. Under no circumstances shall

the operator and/or crew utilize any equipment outside the

parameter for which the parasailing equipment was designed and

must all times adhere to manufacturer‘s specifications.

Pre-Flight Weather Evaluation should be carried out.

5.5.3.6 Bungee Jumping

All parts of the jump line must be duplicated. This extends from the

connection of the bungee to the jumper and the connection to the

structure at the other end of the line. Normally the jumper should

have an attachment to ankle straps, and another to a body or sit

harness.



Equipment (harnesses, karabiners) should be of sound construction

and suitable for this use. Mountaineering equipment from reputable

suppliers is appropriate. Karabiners should be of the screw gate type.

Braided ropes: At least 2 braided ropes should be used and

matched to the weight of the jumper; they should be to BS 3F 70

1991 specification for heavy duty braided rubber cord, or to a

demonstrably similar standard.

Unbraided ropes: Normally one unbraided rope is adequate

because of the in-built redundancy from its structure of

approximately one thousand individual strands bound together.

Each rope should have an examiners certificate from an

independent source and be selected according to the weight of the

jumper.

Rope log books should be kept, describing maximum load, and

numbers of jumps and drop tests undertaken, and in the case of

unbraided ropes, any other conditions required by the examiner

(e.g. length of time in sunlight). Ropes have a finite life and operators

should be able to demonstrate that this has not been exceeded.

There should be a written Operating Procedure. If not written,

elements will be more likely to be forgotten or short circuited. Both

operators and enforcement officers should be able to check that

safe procedures have been established and are being followed.

The Operating Procedure should cover at least:

a. medical enquiry;

b. age verification - if under 18, parental consent should be

required; and if under 14, they should not be allowed to jump;

c. weighing and rope selection: There should be a method of

checking that the weight of the jumper has been correctly

measured and recorded so as to ensure that the correct rope is

selected for each jumper;

d. attachment of each part of harness and ropes, and the

checking of each action by a second trained person;

e. briefing of jumper;

f. entry into and riding in cage;

g. re-instruction and jump; and

h. retrieval of jumper.

Use of mobile cranes: Use of mobile cranes is not recommended

allowed as this is too dangerous.

Other important elements: Training of personnel is of paramount

importance. Each job undertaken requires a different level of training

and experience. Those in charge should be able to demonstrate that



everyone who is carrying out a task has enough experience to do so,

unless under direct supervision by another experienced person. There

should be a proper training schedule showing how a person

progresses from one level of competence to the next. The schedule

of work should clearly state, who carries out every safety critical

action and who checks it. Each person should know the tasks, which

they are permitted to carry out and those which they are not

authorised to do. To date, all known fatal accidents worldwide have

resulted from human error.

The person in overall charge should keep close control of the site.

Arrangements should be made to exclude spectators from the jump

zone for their own safety and to avoid distraction of the operators.

Anyone in a cage should be securely attached to it. Spectator

riding, especially by children, should be discouraged.

There should be a dead-weight drop test of the whole line at the

beginning of the day to ensure its integrity.

Spares for all the components in the jump line should be kept on site

so as to be available for immediate replacement of suspect

components.

An air bag should be used for jumps over land with unbraided ropes.

The purpose of the bag is to prevent a jumper striking the ground if

an incorrect rope selection is made. It is not to safeguard jumpers

who fall due to a failure to properly connect them to the supporting

structure. Braided ropes to BS 3F 70 have an outer covering which

tightens when stretched. Unbraided ropes do not, so there is more

risk of a jumper descending too far if a wrong rope selection is made.

If a jump is made over water with an unbraided rope, relying on the

water to perform the function of the airbag, steps should be taken to

ensure that there are no obstructions under the water surface. ln

addition, suitable arrangements should be made for rescue from the

water.

5.6 Guidelines for Developing Theme Parks

5.6.1 Introduction

Theme parks provide a place for relaxation as an outdoor centre providing

various rides, games and entertainment, live performances, food and

beverage, and retailing. Similar to an amusement park, a theme park

contains a variety of entertainment, food and beverage, and shops and

an environment that is designed around a key theme. According to the

International Association of Amusement Parks and Attractions (IAAPA), a



theme park is an amusement park that has themed attractions, be it food,

costumes, entertainment, retail stores and/or rides‘. The theme is the main

part of the visitors‘ experience which is chosen when the park is planned to

provide a focus for the design, development and operation of such a park.

Therefore the selection of the theme is extremely important to the

operations of the park.

Department of Tourism, GoUK intends to facilitate development of theme

parks in the State. These guidelines have been devised to assist entities in

setting up the theme parks in the state. Further, DoT aims to provide theme-

filled entertainment zones to the public, as a change from the routine

tourism spots that would have been visited several times.

5.6.2 Eligibility

To achieve these objective, entities, who could be well-equipped to

provide ―Tourism with a Difference‖ may be invited for setting up these

Theme Parks.

The entity could be:

a. Public sector: Government, Quasi-governmental organisations

b. Private sector: Multi-national organisations having interests in a

number of industries, e.g. Walt Disney Company with movies, media

and parks, Major leisure companies, Developers who include leisure

as part of mixed-use development, Small and medium-sized private

enterprises, Individual entrepreneurs

c. Voluntary sector: National bodies, Trusts, Local charities,

Cooperatives and NGOs.

DoT envisages to develop this concept of tourism across the following

themes:

a. Adventure - Excitement and Action, Frightening, Mysterious, Thrill

rides

b. Futurism - Advances in society and technology, Discovery,

Exploration of science and technology, Robotics, Scientific, Science

fiction

c. International - Flavours of the world, International village, Miniature

replicas, Scenic spots, World expositions

d. Nature – Animals, Floral displays, Horticultural gardens,

Landscaping, Marine life, Natural wonders, Ocean, Wildlife

e. Fantasy – Animation, Cartoon characters, Childhood enchantment,

Children‘s play park, Fairy tales, Magic, Make believe, Myths and

legends



f. History and Culture – Authentic, Cultural heritage, Cultural village,

Historic ambience

g. Movies – Comedy, Motion pictures, Show business or any other such

theme as approved by the Approving Authority.

The development could be

a. wholly new purpose-built attractions on site New purpose-built

attractions developed on sites that were previously used as

attractions

b. Major new development at existing attractions designed to

rejuvenate or enhance the market appeal of the site

c. Improvement of facilities at existing attractions to enhance visitor

satisfaction or encourage secondary spending by visitors, such as

the provision of new retail outlets or themed catering at museums.


To develop effective Theme Parks, DoT proposes certain other requirements

which need to be fulfilled. These are outlined below:

A detailed feasibility study would need to be submitted covering the

three major aspects:

a. Site feasibility - site selection, location, size and area of land, and

accessibility etc.

b. Market feasibility – appeal, attractiveness, potential visitor market

etc.

c. Financial feasibility – overall costs, revenue sources, pricing etc.

A detailed Safety Management Plan should be prepared covering the

following factors:

a. Environmental factors – e.g. illumination, gases, dust, noise

b. Hazardous supplies and materials – e.g. pool chemicals, cleaning

solvents

c. Power source equipment – e.g. pumps, motors

d. Electrical equipment – e.g. switches, control rooms

e. Personal protective equipment

f. Personal service and first aid equipment – e.g. restroom facilities

g. Fire protection systems – e.g. alarms, sprinklers, fire extinguishers

h. Walkways and roadways

i. Working structures – e.g. ladders, scaffolding

j. Transportation systems – e.g. cars, monorails, motorised service

vehicles

k. Warning and signalling devices

l. Storage facilities



m. Rides and buildings

n. Location of dangerous machinery should be away or sectioned off

from the guests and common staff working areas

o. Fire exits to be provided in clearly visible locations

p. Provision of stairs, escalators, elevators, access for the physically

disabled to be provided for safe and easy access to various areas

and attractions in the park

q. Car park security system to be provided for guest and staff vehicles

r. Lockers to be provided for guest convenience and safekeeping of

belongings.

All applicable clearances should be taken from the concerned

authorities and submitted along with the proposal.

5.7 Guidelines for Developing Wayside Amenities

5.7.1 Introduction

Provision of wayside amenities is vital for comfort and convenience of the

tourists visiting any tourist destination. Well-designed wayside amenities are

instrumental to providing holistic experience to the visitors. Department of

Tourism, GoUK (DoT), intends to promote and facilitate development of

wayside amenities on all the major National Highways, State Highways, and

Major District Roads or at within a short distance from such roads

connecting the identified tourist destinations on the priority basis. These

amenities should include gender distinct toilets including barrier-free built-

environment compliant requirement met, cafeteria, mini store/pharmacy

and an information / souvenir booth. These amenities should be established

at intervals of about 20-30 km along the highways leading to major tourist

destinations. These guidelines have been devised to assist entities

interested in setting up the wayside amenities in and around the identified

tourist destinations and circuits.

5.7.2 Eligibility

To provide an enriching and fulfilling experience to all tourists visiting

Uttarakhand, DoT intends to develop wayside amenities by assisting/

facilitating private entrepreneurs / franchisees. These entities would

include:

Contractors of NHAI, PWD or any other Government agency

developing any of the State roads along which the wayside amenity is

proposed.

Private Land owners/Entrepreneurs.



The land should be in effective possession of the legal entity developing/

implementing the project or could be handed over as through a contract

by the Government agency/department/authority implementing the road

project. DoT will identify locations for development of wayside facilities.

Priority would be given to the development of wayside amenities at the

identified locations by the government, while providing concessions. Apart

from the development of wayside amenities, DoT also aims to encourage

development of midway wayside facilities to be developed into resorts.


In addition to basic facilities to improve the comfort of tourists, the

following mandatory facilities are required to be provided at every wayside

amenity and all these should be wheelchair accessible.

S. No. Facilities Requirement Remarks

1. AREA 2 acres (minimum)

2. PARKING Mandatory

a. Taxis / Private cars

b. Tourist Coaches /

Buses

3. AMENITIES

a. Fuel Station Petrol & Diesel refuelling stations. At least 2

machines of each fuel type.

Optional

b. Maintenance &

Repairs

Onsite mechanic. Basic repairs and services

such as car cleaning, puncture repair, etc.

Optional

c. Food Plaza /

Restaurant

To serve 50 – 100 persons at anytime Mandatory

d. Toilets and shower

room Separate complex for men and women.

Min. 6 toilets & 4 shower rooms for complex.

Provision for special toilets and showers for

old and disabled.

Mandatory

e. Conveyance store Stocked with basic groceries Optional

f. Coffee shop 24 x 7 Coffee shop

Optional

4. SOCIAL UTILITIES

a. Emergency /

Medical Facilities 24 x 7 Doctor on call.

Onsite First aid kit and 2 first aid trained/

paramedic personnel should be available 24

x 7

Onsite ambulance

Optional

b. Pharmacy 24 x 7 Optional

c. Sewage

Treatment Plant

(STP)

Onsite sewage treatment facility is to be

developed, as Package STP or Bio-digester

System (Gravity-flow based or Pumping System-

based with or without Energy Recovery)

Optional

5. HOTEL

a. Rooms Minimum 2 AC Double rooms Mandatory

b. Conference room At least one conference room with a capacity

to seat 20 people

Optional



Dimensions for standard parking spaces and lodging / unloading bays

should be as follows:

Type of Parking Space Length

(m)

Width

(m)

Minimum

Headroom (m)

Private Cars and Taxis 5 2.5 2.4

Light Goods Vehicle (LGV) 7 3.5 3.6

Medium / Heavy Goods Vehicle (MGV/HGV) 11 3.5 4.7

Container Vehicle 16 3.5 4.7

Coaches & Buses 12 3.5 3.8

Light Buses 8 3.0 3.3

Notes:

i) Buses mean a motor vehicle constructed or adapted for the carriage of more than

16 passengers and their personal effects.

ii) Light buses mean a motor vehicle having permitted gross vehicle weight not

exceeding 4 tonnes which is constructed or adapted for use solely for the

carriage of not more than 16 passengers and their personal effects, but does not

include an invalid carriage, motorcycle, motor tricycle, private car and taxi.

iii) Minimum headroom means the clearance between the floor and the lowest

projection from the ceiling, including any lighting units, ventilation duct,

conduits or similar installations.

The proposed facility should be as per the design and architectural

standards specified by DoT.

A Signage Board/Hoarding indicating ‗Sponsored by DoT‘ should be

provided at the entrance at strategic location and should be clearly

visible from a minimum of 250 mts from the access road.

There should be two lane entries and exit road of good quality built as

per NH, SH standards for easy access into the amenity. Traffic from both

directions must have separate access roads.

Clear visible signage indicating the location and distance from the

wayside amenity should be placed at distance of 5 kms, 2 kms, 1 km ,

750 mtrs, 500 mtrs and 250 mtrs from the access road.

Provision of 24 x 7 power supply and water facilities and generator

backup must be available. Use of renewable energy should be

encouraged to be built-up in design, as felt feasible.

Hygiene, Responsible Standards, Environment-friendly Practices: There

should be a provision of facility for segregation of garbage into

biodegradable (kitchen waste from food stall, etc.), non-bio-degradable

(aluminum foil, cigarettes, etc) & recyclable (newspapers, bottles, cans,

plastics etc). Two standard pattern garbage covered receptacles / bins

for bio-degradable and non-degradable waste should be provided.

Environmentally-friendly practices will be eligible for availing additional

incentives. The same shall be based on the discretion of the Committee

appointed by the DoT.



5.8 Guidelines for Tourist Rest Houses/Yatri Niwas with Dormitories, and Youth

Hostels

5.8.1 Introduction

In the year 2012, the projected tourist arrival, as per Uttarakhand Tourist

Development Master Plan, UNWTO, 2008, was 20.56 million but the actual

tourist arrivals recorded was 28.43 million. Also, the said Master Plan has

projected the tourist arrivals by the year 2022 as 69.72 million. The pride of a

State, vests in its ability to provide quality, comfort and safe

accommodation to tourists across various income groups. This requires

augmentation of tourist accommodation facilities across the states through

various means such as hotels, home stays, Tourist Rest Houses (TRHs of

GMVN and/or Tourist Reception Centers-TRCs of KMVN)/Yatri Niwas along

with dormitories, and hostels. These guidelines have been proposed to

assist and facilitate development of quality and affordable TRHs/Yatri

Niwas along with dormitories in the State with the intent to provide tourists

an affordable, comfortable and convenient option for accommodation.

5.8.2 Eligibility

DoT intends to develop and post-Disaster of June 2013

reconstruct/rehabilitate or retrofit the TRHs/Yatri Niwas and dormitories by

assisting/facilitating private entrepreneurs / franchisees and has set out the

following eligibility criteria for entities opting to enter this tourism segment.

These entities could be:

Existing reputed private hoteliers, Yatri Niwas owners.

Private Land owners/ Entrepreneurs.

Priority will be given to those entities which are:

Already in the tourism sector with a prior expertise in operations and

management of similar projects.

Owners of Land suitable for development of such facilities around the

identified tourist destinations.

Existing Yatri Niwas who intend to upgrade their facilities to avail

incentives. In such cases the incentive will be provided for the up

gradation works.

5.8.3 Requirements for Yatri Niwas

The site area on which Yatri Niwas is located should be at least 0.5 acre.

Ownership/lease of land and land use should be in order.



Should be located on National Highway, State Highway or Main District

Road (MDR) or within distance of 1.5 kms, 1 km or 0.5 km. respectively

from such highways/MDR.

The facility must be wheelchair accessible.

Should have at least 10 lettable rooms and 100% of lettable rooms

should have attached bathrooms. 4 out every 10 rooms must be

wheelchair accessible and have attached bathrooms that can be

used by disabled persons and/or senior citizens.

Should have at least 2 dormitory rooms one for women and one for

men as per the requirements specified for constructing dormitories

under these guidelines.

Should have restaurant/dining hall with sitting area of minimum 30 sq.

mtrs (excluding kitchen, storage).

The double room and single room should have minimum carpet area of

12 sq.mtrs and 10 sq.mtrs respectively.

Rooms should have adequate furniture, fixtures, linen, and AC

(wherever required as per climatic conditions).

Bathroom carpet area should admeasure at least 4 sq.mtrs.

Attached toilets for each Dormitory / Room: Bathroom fittings should be

of branded company with ISI mark. Use of low-flow/aerated-flow

faucets, low-flush cisterns should be encouraged.

Should have telephone with STD facility.

Internet and wi-fi facility must be available in all rooms.

Should have a separate public toilets for men and women and first aid

centre. Should have at least one common public toilet meeting barrier-

free friendly built-environment compliant requirements.

The following facilities must be provided for:

a. Front Desk

b. Visitors sitting area and lobby

c. Tourism ‗Info‘ booth

d. Souvenir Shop

e. For every three lettable rooms one car parking must be provided of

minimum 5 sq. mtrs.

f. Free internet service for all guests.

g. All rooms should have telephone connectivity

At least one electrician, plumber, sweeper, etc. to be available for

general service and maintenance on a 24 hrs basis.

24 hrs security and CCTV surveillance at reception and corridors. At

least one female security personnel must be present at all times.

Power back-up system is to be provided in the entire facility to provide

uninterrupted power supply for all the appliances in the facility



24 hour uninterrupted hot and cold water supply.

Provision of well lit, dedicated visitor parking area is to be provided in

the facility for parking of tourist vehicles. These areas should be paved

(use of environment-friendly permeable pavements should be

encouraged, and paved area be planned & marked as per barrier-

free built-environment compliant requirements) and fenced to suit the

type of facility. These areas should have security to ensure safety of the

vehicles.

Staff should be in uniform, well groomed and properly trained. Number

of workers should be proportionate to the capacity of the unit in all

services provided.

Staffs should be trained local residents specialised in the respective

fields of operation.

Staff should be hospitable and capable to effectively respond to Tourist

requirements and should have a fair idea of the places of tourist

interest in the State.

Front desk staff should be well versed in English and other regional

languages to communicate with tourists from different regions of the

country and abroad There should be provision of solid waste

management with incinerators and rain water harvesting. Additional

incentives will be given for provision of STP/Bio-digester System with or

without energy recovery, use of renewable energy, etc.

5.8.4 Requirements for Youth Hostels

The entities developing Youth Hostels could be:

a. NGOs, Educational Institutes, Sports Academy, and Associations etc.

can take up the development and management.

b. Priority will be given to those entities which are:

Already in the tourism sector with a prior expertise in operations and


Owners of Land suitable for development of such facilities around

the identified tourist destinations. However, a partnership between

land owners and the above mentioned entities will be given higher

priority.

Other guidelines for setting up the facility include:

Youth hostel should be built on minimum 2 acres of land.

The facility must be wheelchair accessible.

Rooms can be single, double or on triple occupancy basis. Single,

double and triple rooms should have minimum carpet area of 10

sq.mtrs, 12 sq.mtrs and 16 sq.mtrs respectively.



If a youth hostel has dormitories the requirements for dormitories will also

apply.

There must be a minimum of 15 rooms (single, double, triple or

dormitory would all be considered as a single room) with a capacity of

at least 30 persons and all rooms should have attached bathrooms.

Rooms should have adequate furniture, fixtures and linen.

Bathroom carpet area should admeasure at least 4 sq.mtrs.

Bathroom fittings should be of branded company with ISI mark. Use of

low-flow/aerated-flow faucets, low-flush cisterns should be

encouraged.

Should have a dining hall with a canteen / mess with sufficient

capacity.

Should have separate public toilets for men and women and first aid

centre.

Provision of anodised aluminium/wooden doors and windows.

Provision of well lit, dedicated visitor parking area should be provided in

the facility for parking of tourist vehicles. These areas should be paved

(use of environment-friendly permeable pavements should be

encouraged, and paved area be planned & marked as per barrier-

free built-environment compliant requirements) and fenced to suit the

type of facility. These areas should also have security to ensure safety of

the vehicles.

The following facilities should be provided for:

a. Recreation Room

b. Front Desk

c. Visitors sitting area and lobby

d. Tourism ‗Info‘ booth

e. Souvenir Shop

f. Free internet service for all guests

g. Parking for at least 4 cars and 2 buses for every 30 persons

h. All rooms should have telephone connectivity.

At least one electrician, plumber, sweeper, etc. should be available for

general service and maintenance on a 24 hrs basis.

24 hrs security and CCTV surveillance at reception, corridors and all

entry and exit points should be provided. At least one female security

personnel should be present at all times.

Power back-up system should be provided in the entire facility to

provide uninterrupted power supply for all the appliances in the facility.

Provision of 24 hour uninterrupted hot and cold water supply is essential.



Staff should be in uniform, well groomed and properly trained. Number

of workers should be proportionate to the capacity of the unit in all

services provided.

Staffs should be trained local residents specialised in the respective

fields of operation.

Staff should be hospitable and capable of responding effectively to

Tourist requirements and should have a fair idea of the places of tourist

interest in the State.

Front desk staff should be well versed in English and other regional

languages to communicate with tourists from different regions of the

country and abroad.

There should be provision of solid waste management with incinerators

and rain water harvesting. Additional incentives would be given for

provision of STP/Bio-digester System with or without energy recovery,

use of renewable energy etc.

5.8.5 Requirements for Dormitories

Dormitory should be gender specific and constructed as part of

TRHs/Yatri Nivas and Youth Hostels. Dormitories by themselves will not be

considered a tourism product.

There should not be more than 12 beds in 1 dormitory room with

adequate furniture, fixtures and linen.

A standard of space requirement of 5 sq.mtrs per person must be

maintained while building a dormitory. For example if the dormitory

capacity is 12 beds the dormitory carpet area must be at least 60 sq.

Mtrs. Minimum vertical clearances / height of the ceiling from the floor

level shall be 10 feet.

Each dormitory room should have attached shower rooms (3 nos.) and

toilets (4 nos., including 1 toilet for differently-abled persons). If the

number of beds in a dormitory is less than 12 the number of shower

rooms and toilets can be relaxed proportionality.

Shower/Toilet/Bathroom carpet area should measure at least 3 sq. mtrs.

All bathroom fittings should be of branded company with ISI mark. Use

of low-flow/aerated-flow faucets, low-flush cisterns should be

encouraged.



5.9 Guidelines for Developing Tourist Information Centre and Interpretation

Centre

5.9.1 Introduction

Uttarakhand is gifted with myriad options of natural endowment ranging

from mystical hill stations to serene beaches. It is home to several forts,

architectural marvels and is blessed with rich heritage of over 500 years.

The experiences generated by visual arts, culture and heritage of

Uttarakhand are unique. Other diverse and vibrant aspects of Uttarakhand

tourism products include pilgrim, river run, wildlife, pristine, and scenic to

offer to its tourists. The State has also made rapid strides in Eco Tourism,

Wellness Tourism – Alternate Lifestyle/Yoga, Voluntary Tourism and

Adventure Tourism.

There is great need for development of Tourist Information Centres,

Interpretation Centres and Information Kiosks to assist and sensitize tourists

visiting the state. In order to project the various facets of the State to large

number of visitors, there is a strong urge to develop visitor centres to assist

the tourists in planning their visits and having a holistic experience.

A Tourist Information Centre (TIC) is a dedicated space within a building for

interpretive displays, programs, services, and information. TICs generally

have support facilities and conveniences for the travelling public and

provide the necessary information for visitors to have a safe and enjoyable

visit. Large TICs may also include exhibition/small auditorium facility with

proper audi-visual presentations, café, souvenir kiosks etc.

An Interpretation Centre is a space where a combination of educational

activities designed to reveal meanings and relationships through the use of

presentations, original objects, first-hand experience, graphic illustrations,

activities, or media designed to help people understand, appreciate, and

care for the natural and cultural environment. The primary purpose of an

Interpretation centre is to provide interpretive and educational information

to the visitors (including those with physical, sensory, and cognitive

impairments) about tourism in Uttarakhand, its diverse products, culture,

heritage, the various tourist projects/destinations and its facilities, visitor

security and safety, the geographic area where the project is located, and

the cultural and natural resources of the area. The interpretive objectives of

Interpretation centres are to enhance the public‘s understanding of

tourism & its contribution to the State, understanding of the archaeological,

historical, human-made, natural, and cultural features of the State which

should lead to:



Developing public appreciation for the proper and safe use of

project resources;

Fostering the spirit of personal stewardship of public lands;

Orienting the visitor to the tourism destinations, products and its

recreational opportunities; and

Aiding project personnel in accomplishing management objectives.

5.9.2 Eligibility

DoT intends to develop the Tourist Information Centres, Interpretation

Centres and Information Kiosks by assisting/facilitating interested entities.


NGOs, Educational Institutes, private entrepreneurs, Government

Agencies, Trusts and Associations etc can take up the development

and management.

Priority will be given to those entities which are:

a. Already in the tourism sector with a prior expertise in operations and


b. Owners of Land suitable for development of such facilities around

the identified tourist destinations. However, a partnership between

land owners and the above mentioned entities will be given higher

priority.

5.9.3 Requirements for Tourist Information Centre (TIC)


The intention of setting up of the TIC is to provide quick information to

the visitors on the region, attractions, timings, availability of amenities

etc. Hence the entities having prior experience of setting-up and

operating such centres with the help of the locals would be given

preference.

The entities would need to exhibit capability of designing the centres

keeping in mind tourism security and crime prevention principles such

that the centre facility is functional, aesthetically pleasing and tourist

friendly.

The centre proposed/designed by the entities would need to meet the

following minimum criteria:

a. Well-designed centre of at least 10 m x 10 m size which would make

the visitors feel welcome and safe without necessitating formation

of long queues of visitors exposing them to potential hazards

b. Provision of monitored security cameras in vulnerable areas like

corners, entrance/exits, blind corners etc.



c. Sufficient safety aspects should be incorporated in planning and

designing of windows/doors to avoid any kind of harm from

projectiles during public unrest or similar situations

d. Should have provisions for well lit, quiet and functional spaces

including rest-rooms, public phones, nursing rooms etc. in the public

area

e. Hallways should be designed with consideration for both rescue

and evacuation needs, along with minimum accessibility

requirements

f. No restricted area in the TIC should have an access to the general

public

g. Should exhibit an efficient functional planning having physically

separated public and non-public areas (including employee work

areas, storage rooms, or any area that is not intended for public

access)

h. Where access control screening has been deemed necessary, it

should be performed by trained personnel, with proper access

screening equipment, and supported by written procedures.

As personal service would be the main motto of the TIC, employees

and contractors who come in regular contact with visitors should wear

visible identification badges/cards and provide impartial services to all

the tourists/visitors.

The entities must demonstrate a well-trained workforce with

experienced advisors having the ability to interpret body language,

probe to find out what people really want, help plan itineraries, give

advice and make recommendations, explain how to get there with the

aid of a map etc.

The TIC must have in place an efficient information management

system including a comprehensive database of visitors, places, facilities

etc.

Each TIC must have a master plan that addresses the visitor centre

facilities and program requirements, including compliance with

accessibility standards. The master plan must address each of the items

listed below:

a. An inventory and analysis of current visitors and projected visitation

levels;

b. An inventory and analysis of existing resources to be interpreted in

the visitor centre;

c. The layout of the visitor centre including visitors flow/circulation plan

with entrance and emergency exists;



d. Interpretive themes and goals and a description of the method that

will be used to achieve effective communication;

e. Detailed recommendations for proposed interpretive exhibits and

programs (universally accessible for persons with mobility, hearing,

speech, sight, or cognitive disabilities);

f. A staffing plan to operate the visitor centre, taking into

consideration whether, and how, volunteers will be used;

g. Equipment needed to support exhibits and programs;

h. Budget required for operation and management;

i. Use of fees, if authorized;

j. Any partnerships supporting the visitor centre;

k. Visitor centre review schedules; and

l. Security measures and procedures at the visitor centre, including

any necessary physical and technical upgrades.

5.9.4 Requirements for Tourist Interpretation Centre


The interpretation centres should provide routine, non-sensitive

information regarding the tourism offerings in Uttarakhand, recreation

opportunities, and cultural and natural resources to the public. If

available, this information should be provided to visitors in alternative

formats to accommodate the needs of persons with disabilities.

Consideration needs to be given to the information being

communicated while determining effective formats to be developed

nd used to communicate with the public.

The interpretation centre and equipment used in relation to it, both

inside the centre and on the surrounding grounds, are subject to the

highest standards of maintenance. All equipment used in interpretation

centres must be selected for dependability, ease of maintenance,

accessibility, longevity, and low operating cost. For equipment that is

critical to the visitor‘s experience, a backup must be on hand, if

possible.

Audio- and visual- equipment purchased or upgraded must be highly

dependable, fully accessible, off-the-shelf equipment that can be

easily and cost effectively maintained, repaired, or replaced.

Interpretation centres and their exhibits should be formally reviewed

once every 5 years by the agency appointed by the Department of

Tourism. The purpose of the review should be to ensure that all facilities

are safe, secure, accessible, and adequate; equipments are in

operating condition; and audio-visual presentations, photographs,



taped messages, and other interpretive materials are accurate,

current, and communicated effectively. The review team should

prepare a report that details its findings, including any

recommendations for facility improvements or repairs or for updating

exhibits. The official directly responsible for managing the Interpretation

centre would be responsible for determining what actions to take, in

consultation with the regional office and review team, as a result of the

review.

Items made available to the public may be sold, where authorized.

Examples of appropriate sale items include project memorabilia,

educational materials, maps, food and beverages, film, and other

customary supplies to support a safe and enjoyable recreation visit.

Interpretation centres, tour routes, and other public access areas

should be periodically assessed for security-related risks. Public and

non-public access areas and applicable physical security measures to

separate those areas.

a. Tour and evacuation routes and assembly points.

b. Parking areas/structures. Lighting and signage.

c. The type of information that is presented to the public.

d. Security and standard operating procedures for visitor

management.

e. Facility Security Plan coverage of visitor security.

f. Integration of security procedures with the Emergency Action Plan.

g. Tour guide and security officers familiarity of emergency

procedures.

The other planning and designing criteria for the Interpretation Centre

would be same as TIC (except that the minimum size of the centre should

be 80 m x 80 m).

5.10 Guidelines for Media, Communication and Promotional Activities

5.10.1 Introduction

The development of tourism cannot be realized in the absence of

promotion activities. Marketing is a vital tool to build successful tourism.

Print Media and Electronic Media are essential in promoting tourism

products and services, to highlight the exceptional tourism opportunities

that Uttarakhand has to offer. Department of Tourism, Government of

Uttarakhand (DoT) intends to incentivize any such initiatives through

media, communication and promotional activities targeted to promote

tourism related activities and services.



5.10.2 Eligibility

Individuals, printing and publishing houses, Community based

organizations, NGOs, trusts, entities involved in tourism wanting to

promote their tourism products/services, corporate and private sector

are all eligible for the incentives. They include the following:

Tourist Guides

Tourist Maps

Travel and Tourism Books

Information brochures and Pamphlets

Coffee table books

Blogs and Websites

Audio Guides

Documentaries.


The content of the print media/electronic media should promote

and generate awareness on tourism in Uttarakhand, and restore

tourist confidence for visitation to Uttarahand post-Disaster of June

2013.

The material should pertain exclusively to Uttarakhand or to

destinations that are in Uttarakhand.

Information produced in the media should be accurate and verified.

Coffee table books and Documentaries, besides covering the tourist

destinations, should also focus on global topics of Uttarakhand such

as its flora, fauna, heritage, festivals, and local culture to stimulate

readers and develop the demand for tourist products and services.

Specific Requirements for Tourist Maps and Guides: Standardised

tourist guides and maps should be made available to the tourists as

these are the first and foremost tools that would be utilised by visitors

to acquaint themselves with the tourism features that Uttarakhand

has to offer.

a. Maps should be north-aligned and show location of all tourist

locations identified by DoT.

b. Additional facilities such as coffee shops, public toilets, public

transport, police stations, etc. should also be highlighted in the

maps.

c. Maps and guides should provide accurate information on

destinations including timings and entry fee for the tourist facility

wherever applicable.



d. These should be regularly updated to provide latest/accurate

information.

e. Audio Guides: There is abundant scope for usage of audio guides

at tourist destinations, information centres, interpretation centres

etc. Hence, the content for these audio guides should have

clarity and should be prepared keeping in mind the place and

purpose for which they would be used.

f. Audio guides should be available in English and Hindi as a basic

minimum requirement at the tourist destination.

g. All audio guides must be accompanied with the corresponding

print materials.

5.11 Guidelines for Event-based tourism

5.11.1 Introduction

Events can be defined as experiences that are unique, as they have the

ability to create time and space to convey specific objectives for a

specific audience. Events can, stimulate tourism competitiveness

particularly in backward regions. The use of events as a local and

regional development strategy requires efficient management and the

support of a proper tourism policy, to result in positive impact for local

communities. Interesting strategies need to be developed to develop

events as tourism products. The singularity, uniqueness, authenticity and

local participation of Uttarakhand need to be tapped to develop

exceptional Event-based tourism products.

5.11.2 Eligibility

Department of Tourism (GoUK) intends to promote any such initiatives

targeted to promote tourism related activities and services through

events based tourism products by assisting/facilitating interested entities.


Individuals, event organizers, Community-based organizations,

NGOs, trusts, art and culture foundations, Non-profits, youth

associations, student groups and clubs, theatre troupes, etc.

Apart from the above, the following print media will be eligible for

incentives.

a. Festivals

b. Fairs

c. Theatre and cinema

d. Concerts

e. Light and Sound Shows



f. Cultural festivals.

Events in destinations and involving local communities will be given

priority.

Priority will be given to entities with prior experience in event based

tourism to develop new event based tourism products.

Entities with existing events that satisfy all requirements can also

apply for the incentive after registration.


The event must generate interest and increase footfall from domestic

and international tourists.

All events should link to local community.

Frequency, duration, timings and description of the event should be

clearly stated. An estimate of annual tourist footfalls that the event

will generate should be provided.

Provisions need to be made for safety and Security of the tourists

present at all events.

There must be provision for parking of cars and buses during the

event in the following ratio:

a. for every 4 persons there must be one car parking available; and

b. for every 60 persons 1 bus parking must be provided.

The parking area meeting barrier-free built-environment compliant

requirements must be easily accessible from the main road and

there should be clear signage indicating entry and exit points, and

accessible spaces for differently-abled parking users.

Hygiene, Responsible Standards, Environment-friendly Practices:

Responsible tourism-friendly policy should be adopted for sustainable

growth Use of eco-friendly practices and local products should be

encouraged. There should be a provision within the facility for

segregation of garbage into bio-degradable (kitchen waste etc.),

non-bio-degradable (thermo-coal products, aluminium foil, cigarette

stubs, etc.) & recyclable (newspapers, bottles, cans etc.) material.

Two standard pattern garbage covered receptacles / bins for bio-

degradable and non-degradable waste should be provided.

Festivals and Fair: All products sold at festivals and fairs should be

sourced from Uttarakhand and result in economic benefit to the

local community.

Light and Sound Show: The content of light and sound show must be

historic in nature pertaining to the destination/historic building or site

where it is held. All prior clearances needed must be procured in

advance from the respective authorities.



5.12 Guidelines for Heritage Trails and Nature Trails

5.12.1 Introduction

Uttarakhand has immense potential for development of Heritage trails as

well as Natural trails. The Government believes that heritage Trails are a

way of encouraging people to get the best out of visiting environments

of particular cultural, natural, social and historical interest.

Similarly, a nature trail through a forest, wildlife preserve, beach, etc.

could be specifically designed to provide opportunities for observing

and learning about flora and fauna, understanding the eco-system,

appreciation of nature and local culture and practices.

Apart from the various possible trails around the tourist destinations,

Department of Tourism (DoT), GoUK intends to develop heritage and

nature trails in select areas on a priority basis:

a. Historical and Heritage locations.

b. Forest areas.

5.12.2 Eligibility

Department of Tourism (GoUK) intends to incentivize development of

heritage trails and nature trails to promote tourism by assisting/

facilitating interested entities in developing such trails. These entities

could be:

a. Individual Entrepreneurs or a Company. Trained guides / naturalist

should be present in the group or be employed.

b. Developed the Trail and should have been in operation for at least

one year from the date of application.


Other general requirements for the applicant to be eligible for incentives

are:

All Trail rails should be guided. Every group must be accompanied by

a certified guide / naturalist. Guide / naturalist to tourist ratio should

be 1 for every 10 persons in a group.

Group size should not exceed 20 persons per trail.

Transportation must be included as part of the trail if it is not a

walking trail.

Trails should incorporate plaques or signs on particular structures to

provide additional information. There should be a sign indicating the

starting point of the trail.



Trails should be thematic to target the interest of certain groups.

A trail designed to arouse interest in conservation could include a

number of conserved buildings and places, with accompanying

material on the local history, architectural forms, conservation

practice, etc.

If a heritage trail is created for a specific user group, the presentation

of that trail would have to be designed to cater to the interests of

that group. For example, a guided tour for senior citizens should be

undertaken at a relaxed pace, with frequent rest stops and a large

degree of audience participation.

The trail should be accompanied by information kits, preferably with

an audio guide. At the starting point of the trail, the following facilities

should be provided:

a. Drinking water

b. Changing room

c. Toilets

d. Provision should be made for all of the above mentioned

facilities, except changing rooms, after every 4 kms of the trail.

For nature trails, the facilities should be made of eco-friendly

materials that are harmonious with the surroundings.

A Trail brochure should be prepared as promotional material to

inform tourists of the nature of the trail.

The brochure should contain the following information:

a. Length/duration of the trail and means of transport

b. Contents and theme of the trail.

c. Transportation information.

d. Information on how to reach the starting point of the trail.

e. Timings for the trail Map of the trail: Maps are a simple and

effective way of showing the configuration of the trail and should

be included in the brochure with attention to the following

details:

They should preferably be drawn by a draftsperson and

should show a north point facing up the page. Additionally

for a nature trail, satellite could be used to develop the map.

Show the start and end location of the tour along with all rest

points along the trail.

Identify and number each item / point of interest in the trail

Show the location of car parks, cafes and public toilets for

heritage walks.

Regular capacity building sessions will be provided free of cost by

the government to the guides.



At the end of the trail, feedback from the tourist should be obtained

through questionnaires.

5.12.4 Additional Requirements for Nature Trails

Since nature trails are often identified in protected habitats, it is

important that the trail is sustainable. The following requirements should

be met and sustainability assessment would need to be carried out to:

a. Support current and future use with minimal impact to the area‘s

natural systems.

b. Produce negligible soil loss or movement while allowing vegetation

to inhabit the area.

c. Recognize that pruning or removal of certain plants may be

necessary for proper trail construction and maintenance.

d. Should not adversely affect the area‘s wildlife.

e. Minimal rerouting and trail maintenance.

f. Areas of wet or poorly drained soils should be avoided.

g. All permits should be obtained prior to application. For nature trails if

the trail is through a protected area, all requirements under eco-

tourism should be complied with.

5.13 Guidelines for Heritage Property Conservation & Revitalization

5.13.1 Introduction

Places of cultural significance and heritage sites enrich people‘s lives,

often providing a deep and inspirational sense of connection to

community and landscape, to the past and to lived experiences. They

are historical records that are important as tangible expressions of

Uttarakhand identity and experience. Places of cultural significance

reflect the diversity of our communities, telling us about who we are and

the past that has formed us, and the Uttarakhand landscape. They are

irreplaceable and precious. These heritage sites must be conserved for

present and future generations.

In conservation of Heritage Buildings/Sites the practices set out in Burra

Charter23 and Indian ICOMOS publication may also be referred and

followed. ―The Burra Charter, 1999‖ provides guidance for the

conservation and management of places of cultural / heritage

23 The Burra Charter defines the basic principles and procedures to be followed in the conservation of

Australian heritage places. In 1979, the Australia ICOMOS Charter for the Conservation of Places of

Cultural Significance was adopted at a meeting of Australia ICOMOS (International Council on

Monuments and Sites) at the historic mining town of Burra, South Australia. It was given the short title

of The Burra Charter. The latest charter was published and adopted in November, 1999.

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/International_Council_on_Monuments_and_Sites

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/International_Council_on_Monuments_and_Sites



significance and is based on the knowledge and experience of Australia

ICOMOS24 members. As per The Burra Charter, ―Places of cultural

significance enrich people‘s lives, often providing a deep and

inspirational sense of connection to community and landscape, to the

past and to lived experiences… These places of cultural significance

must be conserved for present and future generations.‖ The Burra

Charter advocates a cautious approach to change: do as much as

necessary to care for the place and to make it useable, but otherwise

change it as little as possible so that its cultural significance is retained.

While changes may be necessary to adapt heritage buildings to new

uses, it is important to ensure that these changes during restoration and

restoration of the heritage places do not compromise the heritage

significance of the item.

5.13.2 Conservation & Revitalization Process

1) The guidelines given in subsequent subsections will assist in planning

to undertake conservation work on a heritage building/site.

Research & Documentation

The first process is to undertake proper research & documentation

as below:

a. Documentation and Survey

Prior to execution of any work in a historic place, sufficient

studies must be undertaken to be reasonably assured that:

the historic place, its development and significance are

adequately understood;

nothing of significant value is likely to be damaged or

destroyed; and

work is appropriately designed and specified.

The studies comprise the preliminary stages of the conservation

process and include detailed documentation, condition

mapping, survey, research, investigation and evaluation. This

would include documenting interventions made in the past

(including repairs and alterations made to the physical fabric). It

is absolutely essential to record thoroughly, with drawings and

photographs, the parameters and the status of the historic

places before commencement of any work. Information about

each historic place must be recorded in a preliminary inventory

24 International Council on Monument and Sites (ICOMOS)



form and a detailed ‗historic building information system‘

format. Drawings, written accounts and records of research /

investigations should be kept up-to-date and maintained as

part of the permanent documentation of the building. This is

important more so because undertaking these is expensive, and

therefore valuable for future.

The minimum drawings required for documentation include

plans of all levels, all external elevations, and sectional

elevations through all main spaces of the historic place. In cases

where a project entails only a part of the building to be

conserved, a general documentation of the entire site would be

acceptable along with detail of the part prioritized for such

project.

Physical documentation (with drawings and photographs) must

be carried out before, during and after any development or

conservation work is executed on the historic place. If

adequate funds are available, state-of-the-art recording

techniques such as photogrammetry must be employed. Any

material removed from the historic places (after approval from

the technical ‗expert committee‘) must be recorded by

photographs and drawings for archival purposes. All material

and debris removed from the place must be stored and marked

in a methodical system. The documentation process should be

non-destructive to the physical existence of the historic place.

Topographical Survey/Total Station Survey of the historic place

(site and setting) must be undertaken in the preliminary stages

of the project. The extents of the survey must be defined in

consultation with qualified experts, who would determine the

setting of specific historic places as their ecological boundary /

historical use pattern / geographical boundary / archaeological

boundary, etc.

Survey Grid: The contour interval should be 0.5 mtr., and spacing

between two spot levels must be minimum 5 mtrs.

b. Research and Investigation

This document contains preliminary research about the region

and historic places. Further research must be encouraged so as

to update the document and reinforce the significance

attached to the places. This includes literary research on social,

historical and architectural aspects, as well as systematic



investigative testing which must be carefully recorded.

Research should be based on primary and secondary

information and references from other sources. Research other

than archival, such as oral history, folklore, etc. should also be

considered for sieving authentic information.

It is critical to investigate the source of deterioration in the built

fabric in order to plan the intervention for reducing it, based on

this understanding. Material testing and analysis, and research

into aspects related to art and construction techniques are

recommended to inform the conservation intervention detail

plan. Preliminary investigation may lead to unexpected

discoveries during the course of building operations.

Investigations must be as non-destructive as possible.

c. Archaeological Excavations

Excavations must be carried out to avoid conjecture in case of

unavailability of information. A thorough documentation is

recommended of all findings during the excavation. The

location and validity of archaeological excavations in historic

places must be as per the advice and recommendations of

expert archaeologists.

Proper understanding and interpretation of history depends

crucially on the evidence of primary sources, including original

documents, artefacts and the results of archaeological

investigation. Excavations must have minimum impact on the

historic fabric, and must be supervised by the technical ‗expert

committee.‘

2) Significance

a. Statement of Significance

Thorough research, documentation and investigations, followed

by their analysis lead to the assessment of significance of a

historic place. Various levels and kinds of significance are

evaluated: historical, architectural, archaeological, art/

aesthetics related, associational/ social, religious/ spiritual, and

natural. Thereafter, a statement of significance is arrived at,

which encompasses the entire assessment. The statement of

significance should highlight the key architectural features,

historical/traditional usage, users, events, notional linkages,

socio-physical changes of the place or the legendary figure



associated with the place. It should also define the interpretive

quality of parallel history.

It will be mandatory to identify obligations arising from

significance (refer The Burra Charter, 1999). The statement of

significance should be given the highest priority throughout the

entire process of conservation, revitalization and management

of historic places. Any development must uphold the

significance of the historic place. Prior to execution of work,

further research is essential and must be followed by analysis

and lead to supplementing the significance.

b. Historic Fabric

Respect must be exercised towards the historic fabric by users,

staff, visitors, owners, managers, local authorities and those

involved in work in the historic places. The management must

ensure constant vigilance for strict control to prevent any act of

vandalism or defacement to the historic fabric, both during the

course of any work as well as during general visitorship. Any

activity concerned with interpretation, promotion or tourism

must not impact the historic fabric of the places.

3) Site Planning

a. Development History of the Place

Development history of the historic place must be researched

and traced as it will determine the morphological character,

patterns of development & change, referential changes, and

inform about abrupt/ abnormal changes, etc. These would be

useful for planning and reaching decisions concerning

interventions in the historic place.

b. Views and Setting

The views of the historic places from various directions are

significant attributes and are therefore recommended to be

preserved. Significant views of and from the historic places must

be identified and documented. As part of the detailed

conservation management plan of each individual historic

place, guidelines/bye-laws must be prepared in consultation

with the appropriate local authority to protect these views and

prevent any development that obstructs them. These include

land use control, formulation of specific building guidelines,

improvement of connectivity, and improvement of the overall



visual character of the area. No superstructure must be allowed

to be constructed that may hinder the views of the historic

places. Construction of basement is prohibited unless the

technical ‗expert committee‘ approves after investigative tests

and archaeological excavations in the historic place.

The historical, architectural and visual relationship between the

historic places and their surroundings should be preserved. The

landscape features that form an important part of the wider

landscape of the area must be protected.

c. Landmark Quality

The further specific guidelines/bye-laws to be prepared must

retain and enhance the landmark quality of the historic places.

These would include guidelines for any development in the

vicinity of the historic places; for example, new structures and

signage in the area should be permitted only after they have

been considered carefully and approved by the technical

‗expert committee.‘ This is to ensure that the scenic qualities

and attributes of the historic places that make them local

landmarks are not undermined.

4) Access and Infrastructure

a. Public Access and Transportation

All historic places need to have complete public access.

Spaces that have been demarcated for proposed public uses in

the historic places must be accessible to the general public at

designated timings. Sufficient and adequately experienced or

trained staff who supervise and manage public access must be

present at all times during public visiting hours to the historic

places. These culturally significant historic places must have

proper pedestrian and vehicular links for easy access of visitors.

The circulation flow planning must cater to easy movement of

the visitors to the various cultural edifices of the places.

Vehicular access and approach roads must be supported with

sufficient parking areas that do not hinder views or interfere with

significant spaces of the historic places.

In the process of planning, respect must be exercised for

religious tradition and solemnity in spaces associated with

pilgrimage or any other cultural sensitivities. Adequate security

measures and staff must be provided and reviewed regularly.



Fire safety and emergency vehicular access (EVA) requirements

must be adhered to in a sensitive manner, without causing any

impact to the significant values of the place.

b. Visitor Numbers and Management

The number of visitors to each historic place should be

managed keeping in mind the mechanical wear and tear,

structural stability and impact on the micro-environment within

the buildings. The environmental impact of visitors should be

continuously monitored. The carrying capacity should be

determined for each site and the visitor numbers within the site

should thereby be regulated. Safety of both the visitors and the

place must be ensured. Necessary steps must be taken to

prevent harassment of visitors by hawkers, untrained guides, etc.

Visitor management for tourists as well as for the general public

is essential especially on important calendar days.

c. Visitor Information

It is recommended that an information centre be provided in an

accessible and central place of each city/town of the

proposed trail. These information centres must have available

facts and information regarding the individual historic places

and the entire tourism circuits. Aesthetically harmonized

information points must be provided within the historic places to

facilitate a visitor-friendly environment and to link the individual

site to the other historic places and the entire circuit. The

interpretative material about the place must not impact the

features of significant value in the historic place.

d. Infrastructure for Visitors

Suitable infrastructure must be provided for facilitating visitors.

This includes toilets, drinking water points, first-aid facilities,

refreshment kiosks and space for belongings. The equipment

and maintenance procedures of such facilities must not infringe

into the historic places or their setting. Safety of visitors must be

ensured within all places. The design and location of facilities

must respect the cultural value and aesthetics of the historic

places.

The broad objectives of infrastructure development planning at

heritage sites are:



to improve site environment conditions (removal of

garbage, cables, and encroachments that degrade the

heritage place);

improvement of access and approach roads, providing for

visitor parking facilities, developing wayside amenities,

development of transit nodes, and up-gradation and

management of transport modes;

visitor information centres, and providing signage and other

interpretive visual communication systems at appropriate

places;

orientation and incentives to the hospitality industry;

providing visitor amenities like toilets, drinking water facilities,

etc.;

solid waste management and waste water management in

and around the sites;

improving the overall visitor experience (street furniture,

pedestrian walkways, planting trees, improving signages,

organising retail activities, etc.);

providing for furniture and structural equipments for

temporary exhibitions, festivals, etc.; and

re-strengthening the physical and notional links to places

and people.

e. Universal Access (Access for Persons with Disabilities)

There must be provision for access to the historic places by

persons with disabilities. All public facilities must be accessible to

the disabled/also termed as differently-abled. The design and

location of access for the physically challenged must respect

the cultural value and aesthetics of the historic places and must

not be intrusive to the significant aspects of the places. Ramps

with supporting rails or elevators must be incorporated. Apart

from providing gender specific toilets, barrier-free friendly built-

environment compliant toilets shall also be provisioned in

infrastructure design. Not only physical access but intellectual

access too should be maximized for the disabled. Importantly,

such interventions should ensure that physical damage is

minimal and the aesthetics of the place is not compromised.

[Refer ―Guidelines and Space Standards for Barrier-Free Built-

Environment for Disabled and Elderly Persons, 1998,‖ CPWD, GoI

as national best practice, while ―2010 ADA (American Disability



Act) Standards for Accessible Design‖ may be considered as

an international best practice for universal access compliance.]

5) Conservation Management Planning

a. Conservation Management Plan

Each historic place needs a ‗Conservation Management Plan‘

to be prepared before embarking on the project, and its copies

must be placed in public and government department libraries.

Its availability to the public and departments would ensure

enabling them to refer to the recommended procedures and

guidelines that uphold the significance of historic places in

course of any future work proposed. The conservation

management plan is prepared on the basis of the principles

outlined in this document as part of the conservation and

historic places revitalization guidelines. The conservation

management plan broadly consists of:

gathering information (by way of documentation, research,

condition assessment, investigation, etc.);

analysis of information;

assessment of significance;

developing policies/ guidelines for conservation and

revitalization;

planning a strategy for implementing policies/ guidelines;

and

outlining a management framework for the project and

future of the historic place.

A conservation management plan is required to streamline the

process of conservation and development, and ensure efficient

use of resources. The objectives of a project must be identified

and balanced in principle before attempting to resolve issues

which can arise in practice.

b. Conservation Intervention

The main aim is to conserve the historic place in accordance

with the ‗Conservation Management Plan‘ to ensure that the

cultural value is preserved. The objective is that the historic

place is conserved by internationally accepted standards, and

made safe for users, staff, visitors and those involved in work.

Details and levels of intervention must be decided on a case-

by-case basis and based on the significance, condition and



potential. These should collectively be in the interest of

conserving the value of the historic places. The priority and

phasing of interventions must be stated in the conservation

management plan. The materials used in the interventions must

be compatible with the original materials of the historic places

in terms of material behaviour (chemical and physical),

composition, texture, colour, strength, etc.

c. Reversibility

Reversibility is the concept of work to a building, part of a

building or artefact being carried out in such a way that it can

be reversed at some future time, without any significant

damage having being done. Principle of ‗reversibility‘ must be

followed in all conservation planning and development works to

any part of the historic place. All interventions must be

reversible at any stage without causing any harm to the historic

fabric.

d. Consolidation of Dilapidated Building Fabric

Consolidation denotes physical intervention in the actual fabric

of a building to ensure its continued structural integrity. The parts

of existing fabric of the historic places that are in a dilapidated

condition must be consolidated to prevent further damage and

deterioration. This applies to those spaces that are not

designated for restoration or reconstruction as per the

conservation management plan. Public safety must be ensured

during the process of structural consolidation.

e. Emergency Stabilization

The portions in historic places that are in a serious state of near-

collapse must be given urgent attention. These must be dealt

with on a priority basis in consultation with qualified

conservation professionals in order to prevent any further loss of

historic fabric.

f. New Elements and Materials

An appraisal of the aesthetic objectives of the project must be

done prior to deciding the conservation approach. The

principles of minimum intervention and conservative repair must

be followed. The technical ‗expert committee‘ must decide on

case by case basis whether specific new works are to be



distinguishable from the existing features, or are to match the

original.

In cases where replicas of any architectural feature or element

of a historic place must be distinguishable from the original,

care must be executed not to create a false sense of history.

The combined result should be a well-integrated whole and not

draw attention disproportionately. Any new work that is

matched to the old for aesthetic reasons should be recorded

and should be finished in such a way that it can be

differentiated from the original by discreet dating or other

means. Matching should not be merely in terms of colour and

appearance, but of physical and chemical characteristics of

materials, and their composition, breathability, ageing, species,

source and method of processing, as appropriate. The use of

modern substitutes or synthetic ‗look-alike‘ materials is

prohibited. Use of state-of-the-art technology is encouraged

while incorporating traditional materials and traditional

techniques.

g. Additions and Alterations

The spatial character of the historic places must not be altered

by additions/ alterations except in the case of reuse wherein the

adaptation will be in accordance with the Conservation

management plan of the historic place. Additions and

alterations needed for the purpose of emergency, safety,

security or connectivity etc. may be allowed, but only after

approval by the technical ‗expert committee‘. Any work in and

around the historic places must be carried out under the

supervision of the approved technical monitoring body/ expert

committee in accordance with the Conservation Management

Plan.

With consultation and approval of the technical ‗expert

committee‘, previous alterations and repairs, which are

established of low significance, may be removed. Modern

materials should be used only where it is demonstrated and

proved that traditional materials cannot achieve a satisfactory

outcome. Where required, new means of achieving structural

stability in the historic places must be justified case-by-case, and

must be in harmony with the significance. All features of the

historic place must be thoroughly documented in the form of



drawings, photographs etc. of architectural details and

construction techniques, before removal. No significant historic

fabric must be disturbed in the process, and pending

recommended repair work must be carried out along with the

alteration procedure. New work in alterations should be of

appropriate quality and design, and should contribute to the

architectural integrity of the altered historic place as a whole,

(judged by the technical ‗expert committee‘). All approved

new works in terms of additions and alterations must conform to

conservation & revitalization guidelines.

All interventions must be reversible in nature. Additions and

alterations should be removable and the historic place

reinstated to its previous state without further damage to the

pre-existing fabric (such as foundations, etc.). This is particularly

recommended in the installation of services, where the life of

the services is likely to be short compared with that of the

building as a whole. Expert advice must be sought before

extension in a historic place is designed, and research,

investigation, monitoring and/ or excavation must be

undertaken. After additions, the historic place should have

architectural integrity as a whole and in its setting. Additions

should not dominate, cover or detract architecturally or visually

from the historic fabric.

h. Adaptive Reuse

Undertaking adaptation or designating adaptive reuse means

adapting a historic place to requirements of a new sustainable

compatible use, while respecting its significance and historic

fabric. The recommended use of a historic place must not be

contradictory to its associational/ intangible value.

In case of historic places that are designated to be reused, the

objectives are to have appropriate uses which would:

be in the spirit of the unique history of its original owners;

utilize the potential of the space while causing minimum

changes to the significant components;

be socially acceptable by the local community and address

their requirements and expectations;

contribute to the value of the place;

be of social and cultural value to the present and future

generations; and



have a healthy and safe environment for all the occupants,

users, visitors and staff on the site.

The approved interventions in the process of reuse of the

buildings must not be detrimental to their historic fabric and

must not compromise with their structural stability. Decisions

regarding compatible additions, alterations, elements and

materials in the course of adaptive reuse must be taken by the

technical ‗expert committee‘ and must conform to guidelines

and certain aspects must be taken into consideration while

designating and designing for adaptive reuse. Dead load and

proposed live load constraints in each space must be strictly

followed considering the condition and significant value of the

space. The ground levels of new development must be

designed strictly in accordance with existing building levels, so

as to prevent problems of water/drainage flow. It is

recommended that covered space requirements during any

development be met by adaptive reuse of spaces, keeping in

mind their level of significance.

The adaptive reuse proposal must provide for the required

infrastructure facilities for users, staff and visitors to the places.

This includes adequate parking, toilets, refreshment kiosks, first-

aid facilities, space for belongings and information about the

place. Guided tours and shows in the historic places must not

disrupt the designated functions therein. Use of the historic

places for special events may be allowed provided it is in

compliance with the rules laid down by the management

(which must be in the interest of conservation). Strict rules must

also be laid down regarding installation of electrical equipment,

plumbing and water management services as well as in the

erection of temporary structures in historic places.

The reuse for the historic places in a project is predefined by an

appropriate plan that shall be prepared according to the

methodology for compatible reuse as described below:

Client‘s brief

Functional needs

Functional organization

Morphological analysis

Characteristics analysis

Requirements for retention of significance



Constraints of physical condition

Reuse planning principles

New building principles.

Based on these standards a reuse strategy should be formulated

for historic places keeping in mind the nature and impacts of

the uses. Following are the salient features which define the kind

of usage:

that need minimum intervention in historic structure

that have optimal service requirements

that generate lesser waste

that confirm to building safety regulations

that do not have negative impact on the cultural value of

the place

which require minimal interior refurbishment

which require minimum installations of heavy machineries &

gadgets which can cause environmental problems and

structural destruction

that are compatible in functional requirement

that can facilitate universal access (access for persons with

disabilities).

It may be noted that it is not allowed to use a historic place or a

part of it merely for administrative purpose, which is not

connected to its designated adaptive reuse as per the overall

reuse plan.

i. Impact Assessment

The conservation management plan outlines the process of

achieving the project aims while respecting the significance of

the heritage place. An impact assessment is carried out to

deduce the outcomes of the specified actions, prior to

executing them. It should be the effort of the conservation

advisors to maximize the beneficial impacts and reduce the

adverse ones, especially considering impacts on the

significance.

In an integrated tourism development-heritage conservation

project, the extent of promotion, intervention and activities

designated in a historic place must be based on assessment of

the impacts versus the potential and capacity of the place. The

development must be such so as to ensure sustainability of the

historic place while causing minimum cultural shock to the local



population. It must be established that the predicted effects

(whether physical or intangible) and the scope of reducing

them are properly understood by the public, the implementing

agency and the authority before it makes its decision.

j. Professional Experts

A technical ‗expert committee‘ must be appointed to guide the

planning, implementation and maintenance plan for the historic

places. This committee must comprise qualified multi-disciplinary

specialists from the field of heritage conservation and

management, and all work must be carried out in conjunction

with this guideline document.

k. Monitoring

Monitoring entails responsibility within the project and thereby

ensures better quality. Milestones and timelines must be

decided upon before work commencement, and they must

comply with the project objectives. The assessor must be

familiarized with the historic place and the contents of its

conservation management plan, conservation manual, log

book and previous inspection reports. It is preferable for the

assessor to have some continuing responsibility for the care and

conservation of the historic place.

6) New Proposals and Interventions

a. Design in Context

The principle that must be followed while undertaking design of

any new building/site feature in context of a historic setting

would be: to respect the past and embrace the present without

creating a false sense of history. The design should embody the

spirit of the place, may it be freedom or sanctity. The technical

‗expert committee‘ must give careful consideration to all

designs in historic places and precincts. Some factors to

consider for designing in context are:

It is mandatory to delineate zones for development and

revitalization in the case of historic precincts according to

their area of influence and character of usage.

Development guidelines would need to be framed case-by-

case for each zone. These guidelines must be devised to

retain the landmark quality of the historic places.



Consistency and continuity are vital virtues while designing in

the context of historic settings. Modern structures in

traditional guises fail to produce architecture of good

repute. New buildings should not draw undue attention.

Proposals for new development in and adjacent to a historic

place must respect its historic context in mass/volume,

scale, form, materials, quality, grain and general character.

A new building in a historic area should be in harmony with,

or complementary to, adjacent historic buildings in terms of

pattern, rhythm, detail, style, scale, continuity and

composition. This does not indicate that new building

designs should merely imitate the features of historic

buildings. This sensitivity of new design must be judged by

the technical ‗expert committee‘.

No development or building activity must be permitted in

close proximity to the historic buildings or abut the historic

fabric of the historic places. The distance between new

development and historic fabric is to be determined by the

technical ‗expert committee‘ for each individual historic

place, and must be substantiated by archaeological

evidence. There should be no archaeological disturbance.

The design of a new building must be capable of alteration

and adaptation in response to changing needs in the future.

The architecture of any new building in a historic place /

precinct must be influenced by its site.

Additions and alterations in heritage places must be

sensitive to the historic fabric and compatible in terms of

finishes, character of elements and size of new structures. All

externally visible elements must especially be considered

while evaluation, such as entrances, openings, columns,

arches, staircases, balconies, parapets and finishes.

Removal of any part or feature of a historic place must not

be permitted unless the technical ‗expert committee‘

confirms it as an impending hazard that cannot have

practicable repairs. Improvements can be achieved

through removal/relocation of negative factors, such as

obtrusive hoardings, unsightly poles and overhead wires.

Enhancement proposals should always be informed by

extensive historical research.

Any new building element to be introduced in the historic

places must be of sympathetic scale with respect to the



original elements and must be approved by the technical

‗expert committee.‘ It is recommended that traditional

building materials be used in the construction of the new

buildings. This would provide training ground for the use of

traditional materials. Introduction of new elements and

materials must conform to guidelines.

Occupiers and owners in a historic area/precinct should be

informed about architectural features that are important to

the character and appearance of the area (through local

media). This would make them aware of valuable

architectural details that must be preserved. They should

also be informed about where appropriate advice on new

development, additions and alterations can be sought i.e.

the technical ‗expert committee‘ must be accessible to the

general public.

b. Design Controls

The technical ‗expert committee‘ must give careful

consideration in the process of granting approval to any design

in historic places and precincts. Some considerations while

formulating design control guidelines for historic places are:

Development should not create problems of traffic, parking,

noise or environmental degradation in the historic area.

The setting and significant views of historic places must not

be compromised or obstructed by any new development or

construction, as discussed in guidelines. This includes

erecting new equipment such as satellite dishes, mobile

phone towers, electrical towers/ posts, etc.

In commercial areas, the proximity of activities requiring

heavy traffic, loading/unloading of goods, storage and

trade of inflammable materials, etc. should be carefully

judged with respect to historic fabric before giving

necessary approvals. An advertisement control system must

be adopted sensitively because outdoor advertising is

essential to commercial activity.

‗Façadism‘ (i.e. rebuilding behind the front façade of a

historic building) should not be promoted unless the structure

is beyond reasonable repair, because the conflict between

interiors and exterior is evident in such cases. The character

of an area depends not just on the street frontages of its

buildings, but on their integrity as historic structures and the



contribution which they make in all dimensions. The interior is

integral to the exterior of a historic place, and the

decoration, furniture, fittings, fixtures and services may be

historically significant features that should be preserved.

Therefore, every effort should be made to find means of

utilising the buildings essentially in their historic form, to

ensure their continued beneficial use rather than to

maximise their redevelopment value.

Historic settlement patterns, plot boundaries and curtilage,

pedestrian routes and enclosures must be respected.

Site planning and development regulations must be

formulated for each zone around a historic place in

compliance with the existing legal framework (development

guidelines, bye laws, special area development plan, etc.).

These regulations are meant to:

o Control the type and character of development, and

the land use;

o Maintain hierarchy of space and usage sensitive to the

heritage environment;

o Contain the cultural spirit & historical aspects;

o Determine building guidelines (Floor Area Ratio-F.A.R.,

Floor Space Indes-F.S.I., height regulations, ground

coverage, setbacks, building use); and

o Ensure quality visitor experience and management of

the site.

c. Building Services

Utilities such as electricity lines/cables and water supply /

wastewater disposal pipes must be located and designed in a

manner so as to prevent damage to the historic fabric of sites

and so they do not obstruct views and setting.

The existing drainage and rainwater disposal system of the

historic place must be studied in detail, and it should be

upgraded to minimize, if not completely prevent, ingress of

water. It is critical to locate the source of dampness in the built

fabric and plan the intervention for reducing it based on this

understanding. New plumbing and rainwater pipes must be

unobtrusive to the historic fabric, and their location and

materials must be approved by the technical ‗expert

committee.‘



The water supply system must be investigated in the historic

places. In order to meet the additional infrastructural

requirements, a plan must be devised to use optimum quantity

of water while recharging resources. It is recommended that

rainwater harvesting be practiced with guidance from

landscape architects, geo-technical experts, structural

engineers, archaeologists and other experts.

Any changes to the present electrical system and lighting

arrangements should have minimal impact on the historic fabric

and, in fact, must enhance the architectural and aesthetic

qualities of the historic place. The techniques and materials for

these should be approved by the technical ‗expert committee.‘

d. Finishes

After condition assessment of the historic places, the aim of the

conservation process must be to preserve the original finishes to

the maximum. The conservation work must be carried out in

accordance with the guidelines. Exterior and interior surfaces

that were not painted in history should remain unpainted. Tests

and analysis of paint layers should be carried out to supplement

researched information gathered about finishes. The finishes

specified in the new development works must not hamper the

historic fabric in any way and must be approved by the

technical ‗expert committee‘.

In the historic places that are proposed to be reused, the

internal finishes must not have a negative impact on the historic

building fabric. The selection of materials should be based on

compatibility in texture, colour, composition and material

behaviour (chemical and physical) and must be approved by

the technical ‗expert committee.‘

e. Landscape

The landscape features that form an important part of the wider

landscape of the area must be protected. Historic landscapes

cannot be isolated from their own particular environment,

whether urban or rural, artificial or natural. Any excavation

within and around the historic place would need to be closely

monitored by landscape architects, geo-technical experts,

structural engineers, archaeologists and other experts.



All existing plants and trees must be surveyed on a case-by-case

basis with a qualified landscape professional, conservation

architect and structural engineer. Thereafter, any vegetation

notified by the experts to be discarded due to its negative

impact on structural stability of the historic place should be

removed along with roots and an approved herbicide must be

used. Any damage caused to the historic fabric by plant

removal must be minimal, and approved remedial measures

must be adopted immediately. Trees identified to be of cultural

significance must be preserved and maintained with advice

from qualified landscape professionals. Revival of any historic

garden or its features must be based on authentic evidence in

consultation with qualified landscape and conservation

professionals, and must conform to the principles of the Florence

Charter, 198225.

f. Illumination

Illumination required to upgrade the environment of the historic

place must have minimal impact on the historic fabric. The

position of lighting equipment and techniques deployed for

installation must be approved by the technical ‗expert

committee.‘ The lighting must enhance the architectural and

aesthetic qualities of the historic place.

For illumination of any ancient painted surfaces or frescoes, only

soft illumination should be resorted to, like fibre optic white

lighting. Use of camera flash should not be permitted thereafter.

7) Environment Upgradation

a. Street Furniture and Paving

Street furniture and paving in historic places need to be

sensitively designed and should be integrated into the design of

the street as a whole. The aim should be to minimise physical

obstruction and visual clutter. They should demonstrate the spirit

25

The 1982 ICOMOS Florence Charter on Historic Gardens (Florence Charter) was developed at a meeting

of the members of the ICOMOS IFLA International Committee for Historic Gardens (now known as the

ICOMOS IFLA International Scientific Committee on Cultural Landscapes) in Florence on 21 May 1981.

The Florence Charter, a document addressing a specific field of garden preservation within preservation

of historic resources, was registered by the International Council on Monuments and Sites (ICOMOS) as

an addendum to the Venice Charter on 15 December 1982. The drafting and acceptance of this

charter as an addition to guiding documents in the preservation of cultural heritage signalled an

enlargement of the realm of preservation from consideration of significant architecture and monuments

to include historic gardens and parks in a range of sizes, which may be associated with a building or a

property important for a significant landscape.

http://www.springerreference.com/docs/link/2280115.html?s=401821&t=drafting



of the place and could be inspired by the design elements of

the particular historic place or style but should not be mere

imitations.

[If possible, a historic paving with exceptional architectural

value should be first attempted to be restored, prior to any other

intervention in this regard.]

Street furniture like lamp-posts, bollards, seating, garbage

disposal bins, hydrants and water points must be designed in

harmony with the existing historic places, and must not be just

utilitarian structures. Appropriate street lighting of simple design

or a design reflecting the local style should be preferred.

b. Signage

Signage must be incorporated into the design of buildings as a

whole and must be compatible in form, scale and materials to

the context. Hoardings and advertisement displays must be

regulated (in terms of location, size and fixing) through design

controls and guidelines for individual historic places. The

technical ‗expert committee‘ should publish advice about

design and position of suitable displays (whether attached to

buildings or freestanding) with respect to the character and

appearance of the area. Road signs also have a significant

effect on the appearance of a historic place, and they should

be of character appropriate to their context.

[A national best practice example of historic place, context

specific signage that may be referred is the different types of

signage (monument sign/informational sign/directional sign) as

integrated with the landscaping/streetscape installed as part of

the work of Revitalization of the Gardens of Emperor Humayun’s

Tomb (a World Heritage Site), New Delhi undertaken through

the joint efforts of The Aga Khan Trust for Culture (AKTC) and the

Archaeological Survey of India (ASI), under the aegis of the

National Culture Fund, and completed in 2003.]

8) Site Practices

a. Training and Capacity Building

Training and capacity building programs for the local and

regional skilled, semi-skilled and unskilled artisans must be

undertaken as part of the conservation program. This is

necessary as it has been found that the knowledge of the use of

http://www.akdn.org/aktc.asp



traditional materials needs to be revived. Knowledge of the

local artisans‘ especially master crafts persons must be

documented and integrated in the training program. The use of

traditional materials would also provide livelihood for the local

unskilled, semi-skilled and skilled artisans.

The general care, maintenance and repair of historic places

depend mainly on labour and skill. Such work requires

dedication, skill, care and craftsmanship to various degrees, the

results of which are often visible. All those who are to be

involved in any work in the historic places must be sensitized

about handling and significance through printed information

(by the technical ‗expert committee‘) and through

demonstration workshops prior to start of work.

b. Workmanship

The selection of the workers must be given careful

considerations. The contractors and supervisors must have prior

experience in handling historic fabric. In case the workforce is

not experienced with historic places, they must go through

proper training and sensitizing prior to start of work.

The structural stability of the historic place must not be

compromised due to modern building activity. Scaffolding or

other building material must not be stacked next to historic

fabric during any investigation, conservation or building process.

c. Dismantling

The necessity of dismantling any element in a historic place must

be established satisfactorily to the technical ‗expert

committee.‘ Where necessary, dismantling of the historic fabric

must be carried out in a systematic manner by marking at the

back of each dismantled element and storing it methodically.

The accumulated debris should be stored for reuse of the

historic material. An attempt must be made to reuse maximum

historic material under the supervision of the technical ‗expert

committee‘. The maximum safety possible under the

circumstances must be provided to the workers on site. It is

recommended that the management provide insurance cover

to workers in cases where condition of the built fabric is

precarious.

9) Interpretation, Promotion, Tourism, & Community Participation



a. Interpretation

The most important aspect of a tourism circuit covering historic

places is that it brings to life the distant and forgotten past.

Interpretative material thus becomes key to dissemination of

information, and therefore it must be compiled following

thorough research. The enjoyment derived from visiting and

understanding historic places can be enhanced by the

availability of interpretative information. Its value will depend on

its accessibility and reliability, and how well it interprets and

communicates the significance, it is recommended that an

information centre be provided in an accessible and central

place of each city/town of the proposed circuits. Each historic

place must have adequate interpretative material about the

place itself and its context in the tourism circuit. The location

and design of the interpretative material must not interfere with

the appearance of the historic place itself, especially the

features of significant value.

Guided tours and publication of literature must be undertaken

for various sections of local society in order to inculcate interest.

This researched information must be forwarded to local schools

to be included in the curriculum and kept in relevant public

places, so as to impart a sense of personal attachment to

historic places among the natives. Training for effective guiding

must be organized periodically among locals in order to convey

appropriate information as well as provide employment

opportunities to the inhabitants.

b. Promotion

Outreach must be generated so as to create interest in the

general public regarding the historic places and the entire trails.

Promotion must be undertaken through various tools of the

electronic and print media. Public awareness campaigns impart

a sense of ownership and appreciation among the local

inhabitants about their heritage. Awareness needs to be

generated in public regarding heritage and significance of

historic places. Awareness must be increased in communities

about their own assets especially among those that have

association with the tourism and hospitality sector, such as hotel

personnel, taxi drivers, bus conductors, policemen and local

food vendors. Opportunities must be sought to develop cultural



activities such as festivals, plays, historic narratives with the aid

of the local population to complement selected circuit sites.

Local handicrafts and folk arts must be promoted to augment

the local economy.

c. Tourism

All tourism development should provide maximum benefit to the

local community and not exploit the cultural resource. An

impact assessment must be carried out prior to implementation

of any plans for the historic places, as discussed earlier. The

emphasis should be on integrated development as described in

this document, and thereby support the economic growth of

the region.

Tourism promotion includes the information dissemination system

for visitors. There will be assessment of sectoral benefits of

promotion and outreach and these will be responsive to the

user groups. These will include the location, their subject of

focus, etc. This sector will stress on developing interactive tools

for visitor information located on the sites and circuits.

Promotion, outreach and interpretation could engage activities

such as:

creating a brand and market it through print and electronic

media;

creating decentralized system of information dissemination

throughout the country and abroad;

uploading destination websites carrying first-hand

information about the city and their significant destinations;

production and marketing of limited range of merchandise

items (postcards, posters, T-shirts, souvenirs, etc.) through

private sector;

providing for global booking & reservation centres at

international airports, major railway stations, commercial

centres, etc., and packaging tours and itinerary;

developing and enhancing the cultural capital experience

by promoting festivals, fairs, concerts, plays, guided

narratives, etc.;

promoting local arts, crafts, cuisine, culture and way of

living;

identifying, organising and marketing the local skills;

training for effective guided tours in historic places; and



setting up interpretation centres and interactive information

kiosks for visitors.

d. Participation

Active participation of the immediate community goes a long

way in the success and sustenance of a project. Therefore

public consultation process should be undertaken and their

opinion must be sought and incorporated in the initial stages of

the projects. Open discussions must be encouraged between

the local population and the authorities for contributions at

certain important milestones in the project. Transparency of

decisions and accessibility of the executing agencies to the

locals would encourage participation.

10) Management of Historic Places

a. Management Framework

Historic places should be managed to sustain their significance.

A clear structure should be defined for those involved in

decision-making, execution, maintenance and any other work

involving the historic places. This will help in demarcation of

responsibility and increase efficiency. A management

framework must be put in place prior to start of site-work to

ensure continuity and accountability. The Conservation

Management Plan must be reviewed every five years in

consultation with conservation professionals, to incorporate any

new information or changes (following further research); the

responsibility for reviewing the plan must lie with the

management.

b. Risk Assessment and Disaster Management

Risk assessment must be carried out and a comprehensive risk-

preparedness plan made for each historic place. Since loss of

authentic fabric is irretrievable, early elimination of major risks

must be carried out by the preparation of a risk management

plan. The plan would include safeguards against both natural

(earthquake etc.) and manmade (fire etc.) disasters. It would

include measures to minimize damage in the event of disasters

and a scheme for emergency evacuation. Preventive

measures, such as prohibiting smoking and open fires, must be

taken, especially near significant areas of the historic places.

Appropriate advice must be sought regarding insurance cover.



Professional advice must be sought on fire precautions for the

individual historic places. Specific measures such as the

following must be observed, without causing any detrimental

effect to the historic fabric:

ensuring all works of the project and future contracts comply

with fire safety norms;

establishment of a written fire safety policy;

appointment of a named person to be responsible for all fire

matters, and formation of a damage control team;

preparation of a fire safety manual;

installation of a fire detection and alarm system;

obtaining a fire safety certificate and complying with its

requirements;

provision and maintenance of appropriate first-aid and fire-

fighting equipment, and ensuring their access to all parts of

the historic place;

fire training for all staff;

keeping link with the local fire station;

copies of records stored off-site;

installation of lightning protection where necessary; and

regular inspection and maintenance of all heating systems,

electrical wiring and equipment.

The management must assign a team for the task of disaster

management to take charge in case of any calamity. Actions

to be taken in case of emergency must be determined

beforehand, and these instructions must be in the log book kept

in the historic place. Current information of key people,

including emergency numbers, must also be listed in the log

book.

11) Maintenance and Repair

a. Maintenance

Regular maintenance and early action can often prevent

decay and avert the need for major intervention and high

expenditure later. Any maintenance and repair measures for

the historic places must be sensitive to the significant features

and in accordance with best practices as outlined in this

guideline document. Good housekeeping protects a place

from avoidable damage or decay. Easy and safe access must

be ensured to all parts of the historic place for maintenance



purposes. All building services must be regularly inspected for

timely identification of faults, for example, drainage gutters and

down-take pipes should be regularly checked for blockages

and cleared out. Regular inspections must be carried out by the

management to ensure effective maintenance.

All housekeeping staff in the historic places, including

landscape, should be adequately instructed regarding the

significant features of the place and the sensitivity required in

their upkeep. A brief description of the items of cleaning and

cleaning methods and materials should be kept in the

administration office dealing with housekeeping. This would

ensure continuity in case of changing staff.

b. Conservation Manual

A Conservation Manual should be prepared and made

available to all maintenance and management staff of the

historic places. The purpose of the manual is to inform the

owners and managers of historic places about the importance

of the place as well as describe a housekeeping and

management regime.

The manual should contain essential information about the

historic place, including its history, significance, architecture,

materials, construction and services. It should be accompanied

by architectural description and drawings along with service

installation diagrams. Routine housekeeping, management and

maintenance procedures should be mentioned and regularly

updated in the manual in accordance with the research

undertaken on causes of decay in the materials of the historic

place. It should also contain guidance on constraints to be

applied to any repair or alteration work. Guidelines must also be

prepared for maintenance and cleaning of decorative features

and embellishments, and these must be followed by all those

involved in such activities.

c. Repair

A conservative approach to repair is fundamental to good

conservation. In the historic places, all repair work undertaken in

the current projects as well as future repairs must be in

accordance with the Conservation Management Plan. A

systematic record of maintenance and repair activities must be

kept in a log book for understanding of the pattern of building



defects in future. This practice will help plan a long-term

approach to repairs as well as aid in future research.

Previous repair works that are intrusive to the historic fabric or

are now showing signs of decay must be replaced with repairs

techniques that are in harmony with the historic fabric. The

technical ‗expert committee‘ must monitor the materials,

techniques and suitability of repair works. New repairs should

follow traditional methods and materials.

d. Log Book

A log book should be maintained in which a record of events,

procedures carried out and work undertaken should be entered

routinely. Current information of key people, including

emergency numbers, must be listed in the log book. It should

contain concise instructions on maintenance and inspection

routines and on actions to take in an emergency. Regular

inspections and their outcome, along with notes of any work

carried out in the historic place, should be recorded in the log

book. Completed log books should not be destroyed, and

should be kept as part of the permanent record of the historic

place. Digital copies of log books should be kept if possible.

All building services must be regularly inspected and their

records kept, with a section on urgent and desirable

recommendations. These must be documented

photographically. A systematic record of maintenance and

repair activities must be kept for understanding of the pattern of

building defects in future. The log book should include

procedures such as:

checking, testing and servicing of building services

installation;

regular checking and cleaning of roofs, gutters, drains,

rainwater disposal systems;

inspecting all spaces of the historic place, especially less

frequented areas like storage areas; and

checking and cleaning windows and other natural

ventilation systems.

e. Periodic Inspections

The condition of a historic place must be assessed every five

years. Accordingly, the content of the conservation manual



must be reviewed every five years. The assessor must be

familiarized with the historic place and the contents of its

conservation management plan, conservation manual, log

book and previous inspection reports. It is preferable for the

assessor to have some continuing responsibility for the care and

conservation of the historic place.

The inspection must include general condition of all visible parts

of the place and recommendations for repairs and other works,

in order of priority (immediate, urgent, necessary and desirable).

The progress of repairs carried out since the previous inspection

must be recorded. The inspections must be carried out in a fairly

consistent sequence. A large or complex historic place can be

divided into wings or sections. Generally the exterior of the

building should be inspected first, and from top to bottom,

starting from the same point on the floor plan at each level and

working clockwise from room to room and within each space.

Condition and defects must be recorded concisely and with

photographs.

5.13.3 On-site issues

a. Site

It is not just the main building on the site that is important from a

heritage point of view. Other elements of the site, such as

landscaping, fences and gates, lamp standards, paving, garden

furniture and outbuildings, may all make their own contributions to

the heritage significance of the place, and should be considered in

evaluation prior to carrying out any work. Where there is the

likelihood of disturbing archaeological relics, such as the foundations

of an earlier building, be careful with the use of heavy equipment. If

it is proposed to excavate, and relics over 50 years old are involved,

approval needed from the Archaeological Survey of India or any

other authority, as applicable, to proceed. New underground

services may have to be re-located to avoid ground which contains

significant archaeological material.

b. Structure

Stabilize, consolidate or repair surviving structural members and

systems. Supplement or replace only unsound material. Avoid repairs

which are stronger than the existing fabric and may lead to



differential stress cracking. Avoid disturbing existing footings with new

excavations that could weaken the structure.

c. Masonry

Clean masonry surfaces only in order to remove harmful substances

and to reveal deterioration. Use a gentle method, such as low

pressure water spray and soft natural bristle brushes. Don‘t use too

much water - it can cause efflorescence and hasten deterioration of

the stone. Don‘t use acid - particularly on marble or limestone. If

stains are difficult to remove, you should consult specialist cleaning

companies with conservation/restoration work experience.

d. Metal

Form or recast and replace only the missing or unsound elements.

Maintain protective coatings on ferrous metals. Do not alter the

colour, texture, tone or patina of the metal by inappropriate

cleaning. All metal cleaners are abrasive to some degree. Remove

the cause of corrosion. If not, use the mildest cleaning agent, then a

reversible sealant. Conserve foundry nameplates or stencilled

trademarks. Cast iron replacement is available. Aluminium casting is

acceptable but should be of the right profile.

e. Roofing

Corrugated Roofing

Corrugated iron is a traditional material and therefore one should

not refrain from using it where it‘s appropriate. Use sheets of the

same length as the roof under repairing, rather than the current

practice of using full length sheets. Traditional springhead nails

should be used for fixings.

Slate

It is important to know why a slate roof is failing before taking

action. Is the slate itself failing, or is the problem due to the failure

of the fixing nails or the timber structure? If it's the latter, the slate

can be lifted off and replaced when the framework has been

repaired. If the slate itself is failing, part or all of it will need to be

replaced. If there is a need to replace only some of the roofing

material, use the best slate on the most visible profile of the

building. Ensure slates are the correct size (usually 610 mm x 305

mm, 508 mm x 254 mm and 406 mm x 203 mm) and from the

same place of origin.

Tiles



Use Terracotta Marseilles to replace the original profile. Cement

tiles are not appropriate for heritage buildings.

Timber Shingles

Split shingles were traditionally used in early buildings and are still

available. And it is authentic to use them, but they do not have a

long life. It is worth considering that a later material, such as

corrugated iron, may have been associated with the building for

a much longer period and may be more important in heritage

terms. Corrugated iron also has the advantage of being

structural, lightweight and cheaper.

Sawn shingles and Red Cedar shingles are only appropriate

where there is clear evidence that they were previously used,

such as in vertical facade detailing on Federation interwar

buildings.

Roof Plumbing

Use the correct guttering and downpipes. Downpipes on older

buildings are usually round. Gutter profiles come in half round,

ogee and quad forms. Check old photographs or profiles in

paintwork to find out which is the correct shape for the building.

Cast iron plumbing can be purchased or specially cast to order. If

downpipes were recessed in the original building, maintain them,

but ensure they are watertight.

Skylights

Take great care with the location of skylights. P.V.C. skylights are

generally inappropriate, as they introduce unsympathetic

modern shapes and materials into the roof line. Flat wired glass

skylights are preferable.

f. Timber and Joinery

Repair, rather than replace, unsound timber. An example of this

approach is splicing new timber into a verandah post. It is usually

more cost effective to do repair work rather than complete

dismantling and rebuilding. When timber is structurally weakened, by

termite damage for example, consider using epoxy resin for repairs.

Although it is expensive, it avoids the problems encountered with the

removal and replacement of timber. Retain all hardware, replacing

only deteriorated or missing elements with matching elements. The

selection of the timber species is not critical in heritage terms where

timber is to be painted or stained.



g. Paints and other finishes

Carefully evaluate whether existing early paint finishes are significant

and should be retained before they are painted. Where there has

been overpainting, and it is practical for to do so, take paint scrapes

to find out the original colours and also any decoration used, such as

stencilling. Stencilling is easy to learn.

If there is insufficient evidence of the original paint scheme, it is

better to adopt a simple sympathetic colour scheme rather than

attempt to reproduce the original. Generally, modern high gloss or

satin paint finishes are inappropriate. Use an appropriate paint for

the job. It is better to use water based paint on masonry buildings

because it breathes more than oil paint.

Carpet and linoleum may also be significant and should be

conserved where this is practical. Traditional oil, wax, varnish and

shellac finishes are generally more appropriate for timber than

polyurethane, which is an impervious inflexible finish. Where

polyurethane is necessary, use a satin finish in a 1:1 mix with thinner.

Avoid damaging original finishes, such as wallpapers, decorative

plasterwork, etc. Expert cleaning may be appropriate if they are

significant and relatively intact. Carefully clean wallpaper using the

gentlest method. Consider reproducing early wallpaper to complete

an overall pattern. Protect vulnerable surfaces.

h. Damp, Drainage and Ventilation

Keeping a building dry is extremely important. It reduces the need for

costly maintenance and is also an insurance against the

development of serious structural problems. Ensure the building is

water and weather tight by using sound roofing, flashing and damp

proofing methods which also allow the building to ―breathe.‖ Damp

is a major cause of deterioration and should be remedied. Find the

cause of damp and to try to correct this first before engaging a

damp-proof repair firm to carry out work which may be unnecessary

and expensive. The problem may be caused by leaking roofs or

plumbing, or an incomplete damp-proof course in the walls.

Excessive watering in garden beds close to the building may be

another cause. In this case the simplest solution is to move the

garden beds. Storm water and surface water must be drained well

away from the building. Paving must fall away from the building.

Prevent rainwater falling from roofs on to hard paving and splashing



against walls. If the damp-proof course is bridged by the raised

ground level, this ground should be lowered. Sometimes the render

on a building crosses the damp course. One solution is to cut a deep

groove through the render at the level of the damp course so that

the contact is broken. Sub-floor spaces should be well cross-

ventilated. You may need to install additional wall vents, or insert

them into internal sub-floor walls. It is also possible to vent into rooms

through floor grills.

i. Structural Movement

Cracking, deflection, bulging or failure of walls may require the

expert advice of a structural engineer experienced with

strengthening old buildings. Use tie rods, props and cables as

appropriate, but protect the building's surfaces from localised

stresses and puncturing.

j. Services and Safety Requirements

Install new services (ductwork, pipework, wiring conduits, air

conditioners and TV antennae, etc.) inconspicuously to cause least

damage to the fabric. Use sub-floor or roof spaces or bury them

underground. Pull cord switches are a viable alternative to chasing

electrical wiring. Floor mounted power points are an alternative to

damaging skirtings. It is preferable for fittings to be unobtrusive.

Rewire existing electrical services to minimise the risk of fire. Avoid

powerful heating and cooling systems, which may cause dryness

and cracking or internal condensation. Supplementary humidity

control may be appropriate. Standard solutions to the requirement

for new services and safety features can be detrimental to heritage

buildings.

k. Advertising Signs

Conserve existing signs if they are of heritage significance. Standard

modern signs of product suppliers may be obtrusive on historic

commercial buildings. Traditional and appropriate locations for

signage include:

parapet panels above and below the cornice;

front and side fascia of the verandah, or hanging below;

string course bands and on other small individual elements;

spandrel panels below windows and on ground floor;

piers (including plaques beside entries);

ground and first floor windows, or glass; and



side walls, upper storey, and panels on fences.

There are no standard sizes. Use appropriate colours and lettering

styles. Skysigns or signs projecting over parapets or roof lines should

not be used. For site signs, monument sign type signage at ground

level integrated with landscaping and located at the entrance of

premises can also be used.

l. Landscape, Planting and Gardens

Approach the conservation and alteration of significant landscapes,

gardens and other planting in the same manner as for buildings -

research the documentary evidence first. Planting near to buildings

may cause damage. Structural and horticultural advice may be

needed. Creeper roots may be destructive in walls and should be

removed by severing. Creeper leaves may also damage walls by

keeping them damp. After removing vegetation, delay structural

works until the ground has stabilised. Surviving early garden elements

are rare and should be carefully conserved. These include garden

walls, paving, steps, furniture, edgings and garden structures.

m. Fences and Gates

Apply a similar approach to the repair of fences as for buildings.

Retain as much of the original fence material as possible and

replace only what is absolutely necessary. The precise replication of

historic detail is not generally appropriate.

For instance, timber fences usually deteriorate near the ground. This

can be fixed by splicing in new timber or strengthening the posts with

metal braces.

Timber picket fences may be readily repaired or unsound elements

replaced. It is possible to obtain pickets cut to any pattern.

If privacy or sound isolation is required, a hedge may be grown

behind the fence. This is generally preferable to a solid masonry

fence.

Cast iron palisade fences on masonry plinths are expensive and

difficult to replicate accurately. Aluminium or steel metal hollow

section fencing is generally an inappropriate substitute for wrought

and -iron fencing.

Early rural timber fences, post and rail fences, dry stone walls, and

other patent metal fences are rare and should be carefully

conserved.



n. Land Subdivision

Outbuildings, gardens, fences and surrounding gardens or farmland

are often intrinsic elements of the heritage significance of a place. It

is therefore preferable for a complex of heritage buildings and its

setting not to be sub-divided.

o. Maintenance

Any building is an asset and should be looked after accordingly,

whether it is old or new. It is essential that regular inspections by a

conservation architect or experienced builder and a cyclical

maintenance program be carried out for every building. Generally,

5-yearly defect inspections are adequate, but some structural

elements, such as roof gutters and downpipes, need more frequent

inspection. Fire, security and electrical systems should be inspected

by experts during the 5-yearly inspection. Significant interiors and

contents should be inspected annually by a conservator.

p. Ruins

Ruins are important as relics of earlier structures on the site. They have

an important role as evidence of the past, even though they may no

longer have a functional use. After ensuring structural stability and

site drainage, stabilise ruins by protecting exposed horizontal surfaces

from water penetration. This is often achieved by capping masonry

structures with lead or other material.

5.13.4 Minor Additions

Additions should retain the building's cultural significance and be

sympathetic to its character. The addition should generally be simpler

and more contemporary in design so that the existing building

predominates. The traditional construction system used on the original

building should be continued in any additions. In particular, new roof

material should match the existing material, or be a historically

appropriate substitute. Distinguish old from new work by: setting back

the new wall line a minimum of 100 mm from the existing wall; or

creating a clear visual break (e.g. an expansion joint, recess, or a full

height opening). Avoid flat roofs.

5.13.5 Major Additions

These are additions which are of a bulk comparable to or greater than

that of the existing building. Generally, treat a major addition as a visual



entity by separating it from the existing building, joining the two with an

unobtrusive link. This emphasises their discrete character.

a. Siting

As a general rule, attach the addition to the less significant

elevations of the existing building. This maintains its visual dominance.

Preserve existing views of the building and its setting. In a confined

space such as a continuous streetscape, rear additions should not

be visible from across the street. Where existing buildings are

detached or isolated, rear additions should preferably be contained

within a wedge-shaped envelope. Additions should not overhang

the existing building.

b. Visual Distinction from Existing Building

Set the addition back, or form a break or rebate between the two, in

order to provide a strong shadow-line between them, relative to their

scale. This visual break should generally emphasise the separateness

of the existing building from the addition. This may be achieved by

compatible contemporary design.

c. Scale and Dimensions

The addition should be sympathetic in scale and bulk to the existing

building. The scale of the addition should not dominate the heritage

item. The eave height, roof height, overall width and bay dimension

should relate to those of the existing building.

d. Plan and Form

Plan form, roof massing and pitch should relate to the existing

building. Continue existing bay grids and axes. Where additions are

considerably larger than the existing building, their bulk should be

broken up to reduce the scale.

5.13.5.1 Style

Whilst it may reflect the main stylistic characteristics of the existing

building, additions should not attempt to replicate decorative detail

of heritage buildings. Good contemporary design should be capable

of satisfying all of the requirements for major additions without copying

the original building design.

5.13.5.2 Materials and Colours

No attempts should be made to replicate existing materials. It is

preferable to use different but compatible materials. For example, an



addition to a sandstone building could be carried out in rendered

brickwork. Use paler paint colours on additions than those on the

heritage building. This will reinforce its visual dominance.

5.13.5.3 Construction System, Cladding and Window Pattern

The construction system should appear to be similar to the existing

building. Generally, frame construction or curtain walls should not be

added to load bearing construction with small openings. The window

pattern should relate to the heritage building in size, proportion,

rhythm and opening pattern. Mirror glass is inappropriate.

5.14 Museum Management and Special Experiences




Punjab, which integrates the aspects of museum management and

special experiences, certain design guidelines related

recommendations/suggestions are given below:

5.14.1 Objectives of Museum Management and Special Experiences

To retain the vision of the institution based on special significance,

theme or narration.

To develop, encourage and harness the relationship of objects of

interpretation to the audience.

For mitigating, limiting or prohibiting physical damages to the valuable

collections.

For disseminating the authenticity and significance to the audience in

an ordered manner.

To establish the best viewing experiences for the audience.

To maintain the physiological character and context of the objects in

display.

To establish operational standards those have minimum impact on the

optimal requirements for both the object and the audience.

To propagate accurate and comprehensive information for the site or

objects of significance.

5.14.2 Guidelines and Directives for Design of Museum and Special Experiences

5.14.2.1 Exhibition Content



(a) Exhibitions must make exhibit content accessible at multiple

intellectual levels and present it through more than one sensory

channel.

o Offer a programmatic path for traveling through the exhibition.

o Present information to all the senses.

(b) Exhibitions must include the experiences of people with disabilities

within their content and presentation.

o Include people with disabilities in exhibition topics,

photographs, and presentations of perspective.

o Use the voice of people with disabilities.

o Include people with disabilities appropriately.

o Exhibition labels must use appropriate language

when discussing issues related to people with disabilities.

5.14.2.2 Exhibition Items

(a) Items in exhibitions (e.g. artifacts, graphics, props) must be visually

accessible to people.

o Mount small items (to center line) at no higher than 1015 mm

(40 in.) above the floor.

A male adult who uses a wheelchair has an average eye level

of between 1090 mm (43 in.) and 1295 mm (51 in.) above the

finished floor see. Objects placed above 1015 mm (40 in.) will

be seen only from below by most seated and short viewers.

o Design simple backdrops for items.

Objects mounted against complex backgrounds (e.g. a vessel

mounted against an enlarged photograph of an

archaeological dig) are difficult to see for people with low

vision and for those with figure-ground perceptual problems.

(Figure-ground problems cause difficulty in sorting foreground

from background. People with this disability, then, have

difficulty finding, for example, their keys atop a desk covered

with a variety of office objects.) Multiple objects staggered

from the front to the back of a case may also cause visual

clutter and foreground- background discrimination problems

for some people.

o Construct the top of a case at a maximum of 915 mm (36 in.)

above the finished floor for items that are mounted flat on a

pedestal or deck. For larger items, maintain the minimum case

height possible.



If the case floor is low but the glass is high, viewing the interior

of a bowl or the overall design of a textile is blocked for both

visitors with visual and mobility impairments. The standing visitor

with low vision cannot get close enough to the object to see

the details; the seated visitor cannot see the object's top or

interior at all. Shallow cases better serve both types of visitors.

o Construct exhibition barriers (e.g. railings) at a maximum height

of 915 mm (36 in.).

Items placed below an average-height exhibit barrier (1065

mm; 42 in.) cannot be seen by people who are short or seated.

However, caution must be used when placing objects inside

spaces protected by barriers. Items mounted immediately

inside the barriers, if the barriers are label rails, cannot be seen

over the tops of the angled labels.

o Create color contrast between the items and the background,

particularly when the items are displayed in lower light levels.

Objects mounted in front of a solid, contrasting (colour)

background are most easily perceived. A 70% contrast

between foreground and background is recommended. The

ADA (Americans with Disabilities Act) Standards for Accessible

Design offers the following formula for determining contrast

percentage:

Contrast = [(B1-B2)/B1] x 100

where B1 = light reflectance value (LRV) of the lighter area

where B2 = light reflectance value (LRV) of the darker area

Note that in any application both white and black are never

absolute; thus B1 never equals 100 and B2 is always greater

than 0.

o Place small items in the front portion of a case, with larger

items behind.

People who have low vision often will be able to see small

items that are closer.

o Avoid shadows falling directly on items. Items placed in

shadows will be lost for people with low vision.

o When not prohibited from doing so by conservation

requirements, provide at least 100 lux (10 foot-candles) of light

on an object.



This is the minimum light level at which someone with low vision

can see an object.

o If displaying sensitive materials that require a maximum of 50

lux (5 foot-candles), then:

1) position the items to allow the visitor to approach them as

closely as possible.

2) light the environment with even light (i.e. do not spotlight

the object and provide low-level ambient light in the

gallery).

3) provide the highest contrasting background to make

objects stand out.

4) present the objects in an alternate format, such as a

reproduction or a brochure, that can be viewed in a

brighter location.

o Provide photographs within an exhibition space to give

accessibility to objects that require a high-mounting position

and/or low-lighting. Laminated, high-contrast photographs,

located near the individual exhibits or centrally set within the

exhibition, are effective in serving those with low-vision as well

as those who use wheelchairs. People can hold the

photographs as close as needed, at whatever angle limits

glare, and in the best quality light offered within the space.

(b) Items essential to the exhibition's main theme must be accessible

to people by tactile examination (e.g. touching artifacts,

reproduction, models) and/or comprehensive audio description.

o When objects are being selected for inclusion in an exhibition,

consider those that may be touched or reproduced for tactile

examination.

Tactile experiences are essential to people with visual

impairments and greatly assist many people with cognitive

disabilities. Tactile experiences should be included in every

exhibition.

o Select tactile objects so that they provide a coherent

explanation of the exhibition topic.

Touchable objects must be related to each other--by context

and in space--in order to provide true access to exhibition

content for people who have visual impairments.

o Whenever possible allow objects to be touched by all visitors,

not just those who have low vision or are blind.



Tactile access to all visitors may not always be possible (e.g. if

actual works of art are used, and only limited touching by

those to whom it is essential can be allowed). However,

isolating individuals may embarrass those who first must identify

themselves and then must handle objects in front of others. The

restriction also puts an unfair burden on the guards and

docents who must identify "legitimate" users. It also deprives

many who could benefit by the accommodation.

o Include touchable objects, such as models and reproductions,

within the actual exhibition space.

This allows people with visual impairments equal access to the

objects without having to separate from their friends or family

who are not blind or have low-vision.

o Provide audio description for those objects that cannot be

touched or that offer little information through touch (e.g.

watercolors).

Audio description fills in what persons with low vision may not

be able to see completely; it provides details and compares

new objects to familiar ones for people who are blind. When

tactile examination is possible, audio description can serve as

a valuable complement.

(c) Items must not be placed in locations such that they create a

hazard to visitors.

o Mount objects so they do not protrude more than 100 mm (4

in.) from a surface and do not present head-clearance

problems.

Objects that are wall mounted must protrude no more than

100 mm (4 in.) from the wall unless their bottom edges are

cane detectable (less than 685 mm [27 in.] above the floor) or

more than 2030 mm (80 in.) above the floor.

Objects hanging from above must have lower edges between

685 mm (27 in.) or above 2030 mm (80 in.). This is a critical

factor when the object or work of art has features that make it

dangerous.

o Mount objects so that they are not tripping hazards.

Low-height (less than 305 mm (12 in.) above the floor) objects

mounted on floors can be missed by people with limited fields

of vision. If these objects must be floor mounted, they must be



placed out of the path of circulation, be well lighted, and

have a surface color of high contrast to the floor.

o Ensure that platforms for objects are not tripping hazards.

Platforms should have colors that are of high contrast to the

floors and walls, should not have sharp corners, and should not

project unpredictably into the path of travel.

5.14.2.3 Label Design and Text

(a) Essential information in exhibition label text must be accessible to

people who have difficulty reading English.

o Avoid the use of colloquial and complex dialect, jargon, and

technical language in text panels unless such language is

explained within the text or in supplementary handouts.

o Use the active voice in text panels; limit sentence label length.

o Use a line length for text that facilitates reading.

Text containing too many characters on a line is difficult to

read. Exhibit text should have a maximum of 55 characters

(average) per line. Narrower columns, with 45-50 characters

per line, are preferable.

o Provide a short overview paragraph at the beginning of

introductory and thematic label panels.

People with reading difficulties as well as those with low vision

tire easily from the effort of seeing and reading a great number

of printed words. An overview sentence or two--set in clear,

large print--allows these visitors to gather key information

without having to read all of the text.

o Carefully link sentences and paragraphs.

Avoid pronouns that are more than a few words away from

their antecedents. Try to limit a sentence or paragraph to one

idea. Be sure that when making comparisons, the points of

comparison are obvious.

o Provide line drawings, silhouettes, and photographs that

complement label text to aid comprehension for those with

reading difficulties.

(b) Label design must present main exhibition copy legibly for all

visitors. Such exhibition label information must be available within

the galleries in alternative formats (e.g. Braille, audio) for people

who cannot read print.



o Use typefaces that are readily legible.

The typefaces that are easiest for people who have low vision,

language problems, or cognitive disabilities are sans serif or

simple serif.

Accessible faces have the following characteristics:

1) proportions that contribute to legibility

2) a clear extension for lowercase b, d, g, h, j, k, l, p, q, t, and

y

3) easily legible numbers (e.g. distinguishable 5, 6, and 8).

The following characteristics of type make reading difficult for

this audience:

1) condensed, extended, or relatively light typefaces

2) a wide variation in stroke width

3) thin strokes that fade, break, or disappear

4) letter and numbers that closely resemble each other (e.g.

the shapes of "d" and "a" or "6" and "8").

o Do not set text in all caps.

Type set in all caps is more difficult to read and should be

limited to items such as titles and decorative heads.

o Avoid use of script and italic type for essential information.

These styles are inaccessible to people with low-vision. Oblique

type is, however, generally legible. Alternatives to italic type for

book citations, artwork titles, foreign words, and quotations

such as underlining, bold face, quotation marks, or another

colour should be used whenever possible. If an exhibition title is

presented in an ornate or decorative type (and, thus, serves

more as a graphic than as legible type), it should be repeated

in a clearer type at an accessible location near the exhibition

entrance.

o Provide alternative forms of labels (e.g. Braille, audio, large

print) within the exhibition space.

They should be located near a well-lighted seating area in an

easy-to-use format to facilitate use by visitors with visual

impairments.

o Select type size appropriate to the viewing distance.

People who have low vision will need larger type than other

visitors at every distance. When calculating distance, consider



also the effects of crowds on actual viewing distance. Type on

signs mounted 2030 mm (80 in.) above the floor should have

upper case letters at least 75 mm (3 in.) high. Minimum type

size, at even the shortest distance, is an x-height of 4.5 mm

(3/16 in.)

o Provide sufficient leading.

Leading, the space between lines (measured from baseline to

baseline) should be at least 20 percent greater than the font

size used. Wide column widths and typefaces with a high x-

height usually require a higher ratio of type size to leading.

o Provide consistent letter spacing and word spacing.

Consistent spaces between letters and words facilitate reading

of text passages. If kerning between letters is adjusted do not

allow letters to touch each other.

o Justify the left margin and keep a ragged right margin.

Do not center more than three lines of label text. A predictable

beginning point, line after line, and evenly spaced words are

much easier to read for people with low-vision and for people

with cognitive disabilities. Justified text can work only if normal

word and letter spacing can be preserved.

o Provide high contrast between text and background.

Contrast is an essential element for people with low vision.

Research shows that dark on light works marginally better than

light on dark for headlines. Light on dark text is acceptable for

back-lit labels when light intensity is moderated. A 70% light

reflectance value contrast is most effective.

Lighter type weight and greater letter spacing is required when

type is reversed out of the background to ensure legibility.

For outdoor signage, light type reversed out of a dark field may

be desirable to offset glare.

o Print only on a solid background.

Overprinting (type on an imaged background) is unreadable

for people with low vision and perceptual difficulties. The most

minimal contrast--5% contrast to the background--overprinted

with the darkest type available, may present legible text.



Print on a surface that is textured or that has differing colors

and tones (e.g. faux marble, wood grain) can result in the

same illegibility as overprinting.

o Diminish glare on all label surfaces.

Glare makes text unreadable for many people with low-vision.

Labels should be printed on eggshell, matte, or other non-glare

surfaces.

o Avoid distorting type.

Labels should be silk-screened on clear plexiglass with another

background color screened directly onto the back of the

plexiglass. Clear plexiglass labels mounted on a solid surface

have letter shadows that make them unreadable.

o Mount labels so that visitors can get very close to read them.

People with low vision often must be within 75 mm (3 in.) of a

label to read it. Label and location should be situated so that

the reader does not block his own light. Label location should

be out of the way of barriers, protruding objects, stairs, or the

swing of a door.

o Keep in mind the natural line of sight when mounting labels.

Labels mounted at 45 degree angles to the front of a case or

vitrine are more accessible to people who have low-vision

than those that are mounted flat on the floor of the case.

Labels should also be as close to the front of the case as

possible. Labels on the back wall of a case or behind a vitrine

are impossible for many people to read.

o Define labels with colour or a raised surface.

These elements serve as clues to finding the labels for people

with low vision. Type silk-screened on walls often goes

undiscovered and, thus, unread by people who have low

vision.

o Mount wall labels at a height that is comfortable for both those

seated and standing.

Wall labels mounted between 1220 mm (48 in.) and 1675 mm

(67 in.) are in a comfortable viewing location for both those

seated and standing. Wall labels mounted with a centerline at

1370 mm (54 in.) above the floor are at optimum height for

everyone.



o Mount label rails so that the top of the label is at approximately

1015 mm (40 in.) above the floor.

At this height the labels are low enough for those seated but

not too low for people with low vision who are standing. Labels

mounted lower, particularly in label wells at 305 mm (12 in.) or

less above the floor, require that people who have low vision

kneel to be close enough to the type.

o Locate labels in consistent locations throughout an exhibition.

Labels that appear in a different location at each work of art

or within each case are difficult to find for people with low-

vision and people with cognitive disabilities.

o Provide sufficient light to read labels.

For text to be readable by people with low vision, lighting on

the label must be between 100 lux and 300 lux (10 foot-candles

to 30 foot-candles). Light must be at the same level as the light

in the area immediately surrounding the label and must be

uniform across the label and the rail.

o Avoid shadows on labels.

Shadows from nearby objects or from portions of the exhibit

case lower the contrast of type to background. The possibility

of shadows should be considered carefully so that text does

not become illegible for people with low vision.

Notes on 'Legibility' and 'Readability':

Legibility and readability are different concepts. "Legibility" refers

to how the design of letter forms that make up a particular font

influences word recognition. Legibility contributes to "readability,"

or the ease of reading, which is determined by the combined

impact of type size, kerning, line and word spacing, and line

length.

A particular font may evoke a certain mood or time period, but

may not be very legible if used for text. For instance, a designer

who wishes to display a letter in a script font to suggest it was

written with a quill pen should treat the letter as an illustration,

rather than as text. If the letter contains important information, a

transcription in a legible font should be provided.

5.14.2. Audio-Visuals and Interactives



(a) All exhibition interactives, audio-only programs (e.g. music with

lyrics and texts of speeches), and audio-visuals with soundtracks

produced by a Renowned Museum Institution must be either open

or closed captioned.

If an audio presentation not produced by the Renowned Museum

Institution is shown in the exhibition for more than three months it

must be open or closed captioned. If an audio presentation not

produced by the Renowned Museum Institution is shown for fewer

than three months it may be accompanied by a verbatim script

mounted directly next to it. Soundtracks of ambient sounds must

be identified whether captioning or a script is used. Sounds may

also be identified in label text.

o Provide all audio narration in a print format.

For people who are deaf or hard of hearing to understand

presentations with a narrative soundtrack, they need a print

translation of the narration. This print can either be open or

closed captioning or a verbatim transcript. Audio-only

programs require a printed text; ambient soundtracks should

be described in a label.

Captioning is, by far, the most effective method of presenting

narration in print. It allows people to watch the images and the

text simultaneously. A script requires a back-and-forth effort

between the screen and the script. It also requires a minimum

of 16-point type, visual cuing to scenes and key points, and

sufficient lighting for reading. A script is a last-resort solution.

Open captioning translates the audio portion of a video or film

program into visible subtitles. Viewing does not require special

equipment; the captions are present on the screen at all times.

Closed captioning requires a decoding capability for display

on a standard television receiver and can be switched on and

off by the visitor on demand.

o For non-narrated audio programs, provide visitor-operated

volume controls. People who are hard of hearing can hear

music at above-average volume. Individual volume controls

on hand-held audio receivers provide access to music for this

audience.

(b) Interactives and audiovisuals that do not have soundtracks must

carry labels stating that fact to assure deaf and hard-of-hearing

people that they are not missing information.



(c) Audio-visual programs and computer interactives that present

information with images and print must be audio described.

Audio description (audible description of visuals fit into pauses in

the soundtrack) presents information about the on-screen images

and action to people with visual impairments. Provide audio

description either on the general soundtrack or on a separate

track accessed at the interactive site.

(d) Instructions for proper use of interactives must be accessible to all

visitors.

Write instructions for interactives in a short-sentence, step-by-step

format. People who have difficulty reading can perform the

activities if they can get beyond the barrier of complex written

instructions.

Instructions are more effective for people with cognitive disabilities

if participant action is required after each direction rather than

after a string of directions. This step-action-step format assists

people who have short-term memory problems.

Add illustrations and demonstrations to support verbal instructions.

Any support to the reading process can contribute to the

interactive's overall effectiveness.

Present written instructions in:

o 70% contrast

o sans serif or simple serif type

o type that has a minimum 4.5 mm (3/16 in.) x-height

o lighting at a minimum of 100 lux (10 foot-candles)

o Present all instructions in both an audio and printed format.

People who are blind and those who cannot read need

instructions presented orally. Those who are deaf or hard of

hearing require the instructions in print.

(e) Controls for and operation of all interactives must be accessible

and usable by all visitors.

o Interactives must be within reach range of people who are

short or those who use wheelchairs as well as of those who are

standing.

Locate controls (e.g. levers, buttons, track balls) so that they

are within reach range of a wheelchair user and unobstructed

by shelves or furniture. If the controls are to be used from a



forward approach in a wheelchair, they can be no higher than

1220 mm (48 in.) and no lower than 380 mm (15 in.) above the

floor. If the controls are to be used from a parallel approach,

they can be no higher than 1370 mm (54 in.) and no lower

than 230 mm (9 in.) above the floor.

Some people who use wheelchairs cannot extend their arms

to full length and cannot use interactives from a side

approach. Front-reach range height at a maximum of 1220

mm (48 in.) above the floor is preferred.

Some people who are of short stature may not be able to

reach controls above 915 mm (36 in.) above the floor.

o Lower the reach height for controls that must be located over

obstacles.

To accommodate forward reach over a table top of between

510 mm to 635 mm (20 in. to 25 in.), the maximum reach height

should be 1120 mm (44 in.) above the floor.

If a person using a wheelchair must make a side reach over an

obstacle (of a maximum 610 mm [24 in.] depth and 865 mm

[34 in.] height) to use a control, the controls can be no higher

than 1170 mm (46 in.) above the floor to be usable.

o Eliminate glare on the interactive's instructional surfaces.

Glare on surfaces such as a monitor screen or a plexiglass

protective panel obscures viewing of the audio-visual's images

and instructions for people with low vision.

o Eliminate reflection and glare for those who are seated or short

as well as for those who are standing.

When working to redirect the negative effects of lights, it is

important to consider such effects from the perspective of

people who are short or seated.

o Provide tactile characters and Braille on or directly below the

controls to indicate the function of the controls unless they

form a standard computer keyboard (i.e. in QWERTY format).

Blind people and some people with low vision need tactile

characters (at a 70% colour contrast against their background)

or Braille to identify the location and function of various

controls. People with some residual vision need the markings to

be in colors contrasting to the controls. A QWERTY format



keyboard (where the first keys of the top line of letters are Q-W-

E-R-T-Y) is universally understood and may not need additional

markings.

o Provide touch-sensitive areas in predictable locations (e.g. on

all of the four corners of the screen).

o People with visual impairments or cognitive disabilities need

touch screen programs that have touch areas where they can

find them. This eliminates the need to run one's hand across the

screen to locate the touch area, or to have to reorient oneself

repeatedly to touch areas on each new screen.

Provide touch-sensitive areas that are at least 75 mm (3 in.) in

diameter.

Small touch areas require fine muscle control. If areas are too

small, people with cerebral palsy or other mobility impairments

often activate unwanted areas instead of or in addition to

those selected.

o For activities that require speaking into a specific area, provide

equipment that is adjustable for height.

In order for a wheelchair user or someone who is short to use

them, manipulative requiring a person to speak directly into

them can be no higher than 1015 mm (40 in.) above the floor.

If the devices are adjustable in height, people in wheelchairs

who sit at different heights and people who are tall and

cannot bend can use them equally well.

o For activities that require listening at a specific area, provide



them, manipulative requiring a person to place his ear next to

the object to listen can be no higher than 1017 mm (40 in.)

above the floor. If the devices are adjustable in height, people

in wheelchairs who sit at different heights and people who are

tall and cannot bend can use them equally well.

o For activities that require viewing in a specific area, provide



them, manipulatives requiring a person to look into a specified

area (e.g. a microscope) can be no higher than 915 mm (36

in.) above the floor. If the devices are adjustable in height and



angle, people in wheelchairs who sit at different heights and

people who are tall and cannot bend can use them equally

well.

o Prevent sound from overlapping between interactive areas.

Some people who are hard of hearing or have difficulty

filtering a lot of stimuli cannot separate foreground from

background noise. For that reason, it is important that there is

little overlap of sound from different sources at any one point in

an exhibition. Good acoustical environments are essential.

o Interactive elements must be operable by people who have

limited muscle and hand control and by those who have only

one hand. For controls and operating mechanisms to be

accessible, these devices must:

1) be fully operable with only one hand

2) require no tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist

(e.g. lever handles)

3) require no more than 5 lbs. of force to operate

4) be at least 75 mm (3 in.) in their smallest dimension

5) be covered with non-slip surfaces (e.g. rubber or ridges on

a trackball).

o Provide a place to rest one's hand while using the controls.

Some people may need additional support for hands or arms

(e.g. table extension or wrist rests) in order to use controls

effectively.

(f) Use of interactives must be from a location accessible to people

using wheelchairs or other assistive devices (e.g. canes, crutches);

interactives must not be blocked by furniture or other obstacles.

o Locate the interactive so that everyone can get to it.

For the interactive to be accessible, it must be on an

accessible route that meets all of the requirements of the

Renowned Museum Institution for Accessible Design for

Facilities and Sites.

o Provide sufficient space at and around the interactive so that

everyone can use it.

The minimum clear floor space required by a wheelchair is 760

mm (30 in.) wide by 1220 mm (48 in.) long. Therefore, a space

at least that size that overlaps the accessible route is necessary

in order for a wheelchair user to work at an interactive.



Unless the activity requires only minimal interaction by the

participant, that floor space must adjoin the interactive in a

way that allows forward (not side) access to the activity.

In order for the space to be usable, no more than 485 mm (19

in.) of the clear space (760 mm [30 in.] by 1220 mm [48 in.]) is

under the table.

To work at a station, a wheelchair user must have knee space

at the interactive of at least 685 (27 in.) high by 760 mm (30 in.)

wide by 485 mm (19 in.) deep.

To work at a station, a wheelchair user must have the top of

the work surface at between 710 mm (28 in.) and 865 mm (34

in.) above the floor.

To make a 180 degree turn out of a station area, a wheelchair

user must have either a minimum 1525 mm (60 in.) turning

diameter or a 915 mm (36 in.) T-shaped area.

5.14.2.5 Circulation Route

(a) The circulation route within the exhibition must be accessible

according to the requirements of the guidelines for Accessible

Design for Facilities and Sites.

Create an accessible route with the following characteristics:

To be accessible to people using wheelchairs and other mobility-

oriented assistive devices, the circulation route must be at least

915 mm (36 in.) wide for one-way traffic. For two-way routes, the

minimum width is 1525 mm (60 in.). It is recommended that even

one-way traffic routes be a minimum of 1525 mm (60 in.) to allow

wheelchair users to stop to look at cases without blocking the

route.

All entrances, gates, and doors must meet accessibility

requirements (e.g. width, hardware, opening force, thresholds).

A wheelchair user's clear floor space is approximately 760 mm (30

in.) by 1220 mm (48 in.). At least this amount of floor space is

necessary on all viewing sides of exhibit cases and vitrines.

People need to be able to get to the viewing space from the

circulation route. Therefore, this clear floor space must overlap the

accessible circulation route through the exhibition space.

If a person in a wheelchair must make a turn around an

obstruction, the minimum clear width of the accessible route shall



be as appropriate. Where the circulation route makes a U-turn

around an object that is less than 1220 mm (48 in.) wide, the

pathway width increases to at least 1065 mm (42 in.) on the

approach and 1220 mm (48 in.) in the turn.

Where the circulation route branches off to allow viewing of cases

or objects, the end of the branch provides either a minimum 1525

mm (60 in.) diameter circle or a 915 mm (36 in.) T-shaped turning

space.

People in wheelchairs should not have to back-up out of spaces

more than 915 mm (36 in.) deep, particularly crowded ones. The

circle or T-shape allows someone using a wheelchair the necessary

turning space to return easily to the circulation route.

If the circulation route is less than 1525 mm (60 in.) wide, there

should be passing spaces at least 1525 mm (60 in.) wide and 1525

mm (60 in.) long at reasonable intervals not exceeding 61 m (200

ft.).

OR

If the circulation route is less than 1525 mm (60 in.) wide, there are

T-shaped intersections of two pathways--each a minimum of 915

mm (36 in.) wide--within reasonable intervals not exceeding 61 m

(200 ft.).

Clear floor spaces (approximately 760 mm [30 in.] by 1220 mm [48

in.]) should be planned to allow a person using a wheelchair to

either move parallel to the case and then proceed in a forward

motion or to move perpendicular to a case and then back away

easily. Cases and vitrines should be positioned to avoid dead ends

at walls. When this is impossible, a minimum 1525 mm (60 in.)

diameter turnaround space must be allowed at the end.

There must be at least 2030 mm (80 in.) of clear head room along

the circulation route. Obstacles to be avoided include

overhanging works of art, exhibit props, ceiling-mounted signs,

plants, and low space under escalators.

If the head room is less than 2030 mm (80 in.) in a space next to

the circulation route, there is a cane-detectable barrier within 685

mm (27 in.) of the ground. This maximum height for the barrier

gives someone who has low-vision and using a cane the time to

stop before his body hits that overhead object.



A cane-detectable barrier can be double guardrails, large potted

plants, or other solid surfaces. Stanchions with a single woven strip

or a velvet rope between vertical posts are not acceptable

because the horizontal barrier is above 685 mm (27 in.) and the

vertical posts are too far apart to be detected in a cane sweep.

Changes in surface texture (i.e. detectable warnings) are useful for

alerting people to upcoming barriers when used in the context of

an established, consistent warning system. However, they do not

give sufficient warning for barriers overhead. A person using a

cane will detect the change and slow his forward movement to

determine the message it gives. If the cane detects nothing on the

ground, the person will proceed and still hit his head on the object

above. Also, dog guides do not interpret texture changes. They will

proceed forward, and their masters will bump into the objects

above.

If objects mounted on the wall parallel to the pathway have

bottom edges between 685 mm (27 in.) and 2030 mm (80 in.) from

the floor, they must project less than 100 mm (4 in.) into the

pathway. Wall-mounted objects with bottom edges below 685

mm (27 in.) may project any amount so long as they do not

reduce the required minimum clear width of the circulation route

(915 mm [36 in.]). This includes wall-mounted cases, wall-mounted

signage that is installed perpendicular to the wall, video monitors,

and other equipment that is cantilevered from the wall.

Objects on the floor that rise less than 305 mm (12 in.), are tripping

hazards. The problem worsens if the object's color does not

contrast with the floor or if the lighting is poor.

The circulation route surface must be stable, firm, and slip-resistant.

The slope of the circulation route must be no more than 5%. If the

slope exceeds 5%, then it becomes a ramp and must meet

requirements for a ramp. (See ramps in the guidelines for

Accessible Design for Facilities and Sites.) Any cross slope (a slope

that is perpendicular to the path of travel) of the circulation route

must be no more than 2%.

When circulation route levels change, the vertical difference must

be less than 6.5 mm (1/4 in.). When there is a change in level of

between 6.5 mm (1/4 in.) and 13 mm (1/2 in.), the edge must be

beveled with a slope of 1:2. Any change greater than 13 mm (1/2

in.) must be ramped.



The circulation route must be free of steps and stairs or include

ramps or elevators adjacent to those steps and stairs. Ramps and

elevators must meet the guidelines for Accessible Design for

Facilities and Sites accessibility requirements.

If carpet or carpet tile is used on the floor, it must be securely

attached.

Carpet must have a level, low pile and a firm pad or no pad at all

underneath it (maximum pile thickness is 13 mm [1/2 in.]).

Artificial carpet surfaces and some natural surfaces (e.g.

"Astroturf," exterior rubber mats used to clean shoes and cocoa

mat) are extremely difficult for wheelchair users. Such surfaces

cause the wheelchair wheels to pull to one side or to sink into the

surface.

(b) The circulation route must be clearly defined, well lighted, and

easy to follow.

o Provide sufficient lighting on circulation routes.

A minimum of 50 to 100 lux (5 to 10 foot-candles) of quality light

on the circulation route is necessary for people with visual and

perceptual difficulties to negotiate the path.

o Provide nonverbal way finding assistance along the circulation

route.

Colour coding, changes in surface texture, symbols or other

nonverbal techniques assist people with cognitive disabilities in

finding their way through complex environments. Colour

contrast (of 70%) between carpet path and edge is also an

effective way to define paths for people with low vision or

cognitive disabilities.

o Visually define the walls, floors, and pedestals.

Some people with low vision have difficulty with depth

perception. Colour contrast (70%) and directed lighting can

differentiate horizontal from vertical surfaces on paths.

o Design areas so that floor surfaces at and around accessible

seating areas are level, stable, firm, and slip-resistant.

o Provide an accessible floor plan to aid visitors in wayfinding.

A floor plan that meets requirements for accessible printed

and raised-line materials can assist people with visual

impairments and cognitive disabilities to plan travel through



complex exhibitions. These should be available at entries to

exhibitions, information desks, and/or other central locations.

o Provide more than one exit from an exhibition.

Mid-point exits from exhibitions (particularly large exhibitions)

assist those who become tired, confused, or overwhelmed

when in an exhibition.

5.14.2.6 Furniture

(a) All cases must provide viewing access to people who are short or

seated as well as to those who are standing.

o Design cases and pedestals so they display objects within

viewing distance of people who are short, seated, or standing.

o Design cases and vitrines so they are as shallow as possible,

allowing all visitors to see objects up close and from above.

(b) Cases and vitrines must not present a safety hazard to any visitor.

o Design wall-mounted cases so that their lower edges are at or

below 685 mm (27 in.) above the floor.

This height allows a cane-detectable barrier for people with

visual impairments. If the lower edge is maintained at 685 mm

(27 in.), it also provides knee clearance for a wheelchair user

who wants to move close to a case. Depending on the size of

the case, a cane-detectable platform that matches the

footprint of the case may work if placed on the floor directly

below. This will, however, eliminate knee clearance for

wheelchair users.

o Long, horizontal cases that have legs only at the four corners

(more than 305 mm [12 in.] apart) should be designed so they

have a cane-detectable barrier at no higher than 685 mm (27

in.) above the floor.

A cane user will detect objects within a sweep that extends

approximately 150 mm (6 in.) to either side of his shoulders.

Therefore, cases that are, for example, 1830 mm (72 in.) long

with a lower edge higher than 685 mm (27 in.) could easily be

hit at midsection by a person's body. Horizontal supports may

provide a cane-detectable barrier.

o Maintain a predictable border on both sides of circulation

routes.

Cases that jut unpredictably into routes--especially if the cases

are not well lighted and have little colour contrast to the floor



and walls--are very dangerous to people with low vision. This

problem is heightened if the cases have sharp angles, corners,

or edges.

o Design cases so they are distinguishable from wall openings.

Floor-to-ceiling wall cases, with glass fronts of 1830 mm (72 in.)

or more in height, can be mistaken for wall openings by

people with low vision. Good case lighting, clearly defined

case edges, and floors of a different material and colour than

the floor outside the case limit this problem.

o Design vitrines and plexiglass barriers so they are easily

detectable.

Plexiglass and glass case tops or half-plexiglass walls in front of

objects can go undetected by people with low vision. Edges

and corners must be rounded. An edging of another material

or even a tint at the seams and edges aids detection.

(c) Seating must be provided in each exhibition. 50% of the seats must

be accessible. Single-gallery exhibitions must have seating

nearby, in a corridor or in an adjacent gallery space.

o Provide accessible seating in gallery spaces.

For seating to be accessible, seats should be firm and between

430 mm (17 in.) and 510 mm (19 in.) above the floor. Chairs or

benches should have both arm and back support. This support

is essential for people who have mobility impairments: arms

and backs offer people support points when lowering

themselves into as well as when rising out of seats. Seat backs

should be firm and have an upper edge of no less than 455

mm (18 in.) above the seat; arm heights should be roughly

proportionate to the back heights.

o Provide seats that are not tripping hazards or obstacles.

For people with low vision, seating is best located where it is

not a tripping hazard and where it is clearly visible due to

colour contrast and good lighting. Benches should not be

placed under text on walls. This presents an obstacle and a

potential hazard to people who must get very close to text to

read.

Seating cannot be a barrier to people with mobility

impairments. It must not block passage between areas or



block the clear floor space needed to operate controls or to

use equipment.

o Provide seating that can be used by people who use

wheelchairs as well as by their companions.

Benches and fixed seating need at one end a minimum 760

mm (30 in.) by 1220 mm (48 in.) space to allow a person in a

wheelchair to sit next to someone on the bench or to transfer

onto the seating itself.

5.14.2.7 Colour

(a) Gallery colours (floors, walls, furniture) must create an environment

that is clearly articulated, comfortable, and safe.

o Choose colours so that floors are visually separated from the

walls and furniture.

People with low-vision and visual perceptual difficulties require

at least a 70% contrast in colours to negotiate a space. If the

walls, floor, pedestals, and benches are all basically the same

hue, all pieces of the room blend together. At minimum,

contrasting baseboard strips are necessary. For floors and

furniture, shadows from toe kicks and glare off of metal legs

provide some assistance in detection. However, furniture that is

seen primarily from above (e.g. benches) will still blend with the

floors unless the colour contrasts.

o Select light gallery colours if object conservation requires low

lighting.

Dark wall and floor colours absorb light. If a gallery requires low

lighting for conservation reasons, the gallery colours should

compensate by being light. This will counteract the low-light

effects on negotiating the circulation route, seeing the objects,

and reading the labels.

o Design well-lighted spaces with limited imagery and few

objects in several places within an exhibition.

A lack of solid background in exhibit spaces forces people

reading sign language to sort sign movements out of busy

surroundings. This quickly becomes tiring on the reader's eyes.

Well-lighted, visually quiet areas serve as respite stations for sign

language tours and conversations.



(b) The colours and patterns of exhibition floor surfaces must give

accurate information about the depth, height, and condition of the

floor surface.

o Avoid patterned carpets and floor tiles on uneven surfaces

and in low-lit areas.

Highly patterned coverings misinform people with low-vision

about changing heights of the surface. This is a particular

problem when the pattern is combined with pools of light and

shadow or with high polish and glare. Dark colours and

shadows are read as sunken; light colours and pools of light are

read as raised; glare and sheen are read as wet. At minimum,

more and even lighting should be provided in a gallery where

patterned floors are a pre-existing condition.

(c) Colours within cases must provide clear visual access to items

inside.

o Select background colours that contrast with the items in a

case.

(d) Colours for labels must have a high contrast between text and

background.

o Select label colour combinations that provide sufficient

contrast between print and background. (Refer "Label Design

and Text" section earlier.)

5.14.2.8 Lighting

(a) The safety of visitors (particularly those with low vision and visual

perceptual difficulties) must receive equal consideration with

conservation issues and exhibition design issues.

o Accessible Lighting Levels

Description Range in lux Range in foot-candle

Ambient lighting 50-300 lx 5-30 fc

Text panels 100-300 lx 10-30 fc

Controls 100 lx 10 fc

Directional signage 200-300 lx 20-30 fc

Specimens, objects 100-300 lx 10-30 fc

Ramps, stairs 100-300 lx 10-30 fc

Visitor pathways 100-300 lx 10-30 fc

http://www.si.edu/opa/accessibility/exdesign/sectionb.htm#ldt




(b) Light and colour must combine to produce a clearly delineated

circulation route into, through, and out of every exhibition space.

This is a particular requirement whenever there are changes in

level or unexpected turns or obstacles in the route.

o Limit changes in light level within a gallery and between

galleries.

When they must occur, stepping light levels up or down should

be gradual. The eyes of people with low-vision adjust more

slowly than those without impairment. Spotlighted objects in

darkened galleries or dark galleries contiguous with brightly

lighted galleries are very difficult to negotiate.

o Provide sufficient light on the circulation route.

People with low-vision need at minimum 100 lux (10 foot-

candles) of light to negotiate a clear path that has good

colour contrast and no obstacles.

Avoid creating pools of light and shadow that create false

impressions of depth and height on floor surfaces. (Refer

"Colour" section earlier.)

(c) There must be sufficient light on objects to make them visible to all

visitors unless the light level will do substantial damage to the

objects.

(d) There must be sufficient light on labels to make them readable by

all visitors.

o Avoid shadows on label text or objects. (Refer ―Label Design

and Text‖ section earlier.)

(e) The elimination of glare from cases must be considered for those

visitors who are seated as well as for those standing.

(f) Sufficient light to accommodate speech reading and sign

language conversation must be provided in locations throughout

the exhibition space.

o Provide even, high-quality light in selected areas of galleries.

People who speech read or read sign language need good

light to complete the task without eye strain. At least a 100 lux

(10 foot-candles) level of light between the speaker and

receiver is needed. (Refer "Colour" section earlier.)

5.14.2.9 Public Programming Spaces

(a) In places of assembly with fixed seating, there must be a number

of wheelchair locations provided in compliance with the

http://www.si.edu/opa/accessibility/exdesign/sectionb2.htm#col

http://www.si.edu/opa/accessibility/exdesign/sectionb.htm#ei

http://www.si.edu/opa/accessibility/exdesign/sectionb.htm#ei


http://www.si.edu/opa/accessibility/exdesign/sectionb2.htm#col



requirements of Accessible Design for Facilities and Sites. These

locations must be dispersed throughout the seating area.

o Provide seating areas that are accessible to people using

wheelchairs.

The requirements for wheelchair locations for Accessible

Design for Facilities and Sites are as follows:

Capacity of Overall Seating No. of Wheelchair Spaces

4-25 1

26-50 2

51-75 3

76-100 4

101-150 5

151-200 6

200-300 7

301-400 8

401-500 9

501-1000 2% of total

over 1000 20, plus 1 for each additional 100

o Locate spaces for wheelchair users so that they adjoin, but do

not block, an accessible route that also serves as a means of

egress in an emergency.

o Disperse seating for wheelchair users throughout the space.

People using wheelchairs do not always want to sit at the very

back or the very front of a public programming space; it is

uncomfortable, psychologically isolating, and, if in front,

obstructive in that it blocks the view of others. Spaces for

people using wheelchairs must be an integral part of the

seating plan and must always be near fixed seating.

o Spaces for wheelchair users can be filled temporarily by

removable chairs when not needed by people with disabilities.

However, those removable seats must be easily removable,

preferably by the person using a wheelchair. Removable seats

can be fixed seats that swing aside or they can be portable,

folding chairs.

o Design areas so that floor surfaces at and around accessible

seating areas are level, stable, firm, and slip-resistant.



o If a person enters the wheelchair location from the side, the

spaces must be at least 1525 mm (60 in.) long.

o If a person using a wheelchair enters the space from the front

or back, the spaces are at least 1220 mm (48 in.) long.

o The width of a space for one wheelchair user is at least 760 mm

(30 in.). Space required for two wheelchair users together is at

least 1675 mm (66 in.) wide. One such pairing is desirable;

however, there is no requirement that spaces for wheelchair

users be paired.

(b) If seating is in the form of benches, the same number of benches

with arm and back support as wheelchair locations required for

Accessible Design for Facilities and Sites must be provided.

(c) Where there is fixed seating, there must also be aisle seats (one

percent of the total number, with no fewer than one) that have no

armrests, swing-away armrests, or removable armrests. These seats

must be dispersed throughout the programming space.

(d) Each seat without an armrest or with a removable or swing- away

armrest must be identified on the armrest by the international

symbol of access.

(e) Stages, dressing rooms, and other areas for performers associated

with public programming areas must be accessible, according to

the requirements Guidelines for Accessible Design for Facilities and

Sites.

o Provide an accessible route to all performance areas,

including stages (from both front and back stage, if

applicable), dressing rooms, and other spaces used by

performers.

o Design all stages, dressing rooms, and spaces used by

performers so they are fully accessible according to the

standards of the guidelines for Accessible Design for Facilities

and Sites.

(f) Assistive listening systems must be provided in all public

programming spaces.

o Provide a permanent assistive listening system if the area seats

50 or more people or, if the number is smaller, either a

permanent or a portable assistive listening system may be

provided.

o Provide assistive listening receivers in number equal to 4% of

the total number of seats (but no fewer than two receivers).



o Provide signs indicating the availability of the assistive listening

system and the procedure for borrowing receivers. The signs

must meet accessibility requirements.

(g) If the programming space is always kept dark, assistive devices

(e.g. handrails, strip lighting) must be available to make

accessible the route in, through, and out of the space.

o Design handrails and lighting so that they assist people in

finding and following the route into and through a darkened

program area.

Handrails and lighting should start outside the entrance--where

it is still light--and continue into and through the space, and

then all the way back out to the exit.

(h) Seating colour and material choice must make seats visually

accessible to everyone.

o Design the space so that seating does not become a tripping

or bumping hazard.

Low-light, lack of contrast, step-up seats and unpredictable

rows of seats make public programming spaces difficult for

those with low vision. Seating in public programming space

should not be covered by the same carpeting that is on the

floor. Rather, the seats should be made of a material that

contrasts in colour and texture to the floor and surrounding

walls. Seats should be arranged in a configuration that

presents predictable row beginnings and ends.

Lighting or lights on the ends of rows of seats or benches assists

in locating the seating.

5.14.2.10 Emergency Egress

(a) There must be fully accessible emergency egress from the

exhibition spaces. Provide as many accessible emergency exits

from an exhibition space as the number of fire exits required by

the National Building Code (NBC).

o Provide areas of rescue assistance if the number of accessible

exits is insufficient.

They are safe waiting areas for people who cannot leave the

building by using stairs. Areas of rescue assistance are

equipped with intercom systems connected directly to the fire

control area, allowing a waiting person to inform firefighters of

his whereabouts and to receive instructions for safety.



o Plan for emergency egress from areas where lifts have been

used for access.

The lifts should be connected to emergency power and should

be usable during fire emergencies.

(b) Design the exits from the exhibition to either lead back to the

accessible entry route or to lead directly to another accessible

egress route.

(c) Notification about locations of accessible egress from the gallery

must be available at key points in the museum.

o Provide signs with the international symbol of access at

accessible emergency exits. Inaccessible exits are required to

provide directions to those that are accessible or to areas of

rescue assistance.

o Make available at key points within the museum an exhibition

floor plan that meets accessibility requirements for printed

materials. Accessible egress routes should be clearly marked.

This can assist someone before the emergency happens.

Visitors can use the plan to familiarize themselves with the

exhibition layout as well as with how to get into and out of it

quickly.

(d) Both visual and audible fire alarm systems must be provided.

o Install visual as well as audible fire alarms to the standards.

5.14.2.11 Children‟s Environments

(a) Areas designed specifically for children must meet the children's

accessibility recommendations.

o Provide accessible routes meeting all standards and children's

requirements into, through, and out of all spaces.

o Provide a circulation route that is at least 1118 mm (44 in.) wide

for travel in a single direction.

Children are generally less adept at travel in a straight line than

are adults. Therefore, children's environments require a wider

circulation route.

o Provide a circulation route that is at least 2235 mm (88 in.) wide

for passage by two wheelchair users.

o Provide passing spaces of at least 1879 mm (74 in.) wide at no

more than 30 m (100 ft.) apart.

o Select carpets that have a maximum pile height of 6 mm (1/4

in.).



o Design interactives so they are usable from a forward

approach with a maximum high reach of 915 mm (36 in.) and

a maximum low reach of 508 mm (20 in.).

o Design interactives so they are usable from a side approach

with a maximum high reach of 915 mm (36 in.) and maximum

low reach of 508 mm (20 in.).

o Design wall-mounted cases and other protrusions of 100 mm (4

in.) or deeper so their lower edges extend to the floor.

o Design wall protrusions of more than 25 mm (1 in.) deep and of

a height less than 760 mm (30 in.) so they extend all the way to

the floor.

o Design cane-detectable barriers for overhead hazards to be

no higher than 305 mm (12 in.) above the floor.

o Design seating for children with backs and arm support and

with seats at the following heights:

Pre-kindergarten 203 mm to 305 mm (8 to 12 in.)

Kindergarten and older 305 mm to 432 mm (12 to 17 in.)

o Provide tables, counters, and work surfaces with clear knee

space 610 mm (24 in.) high, 610 mm (24 in.) deep, and 760 mm

(30 in.) wide. Wherever possible, provide adjustable-height

work surfaces.

o Design cases, text, and mount labels to accommodate a child

wheelchair user's eye level.

A 6-to-9 year old wheelchair user's eye level is approximately

1036 mm (41 in.) above the floor.

o Mount directional signage at no higher than 1219 mm (48 in.)

above the floor.

5.15 Human Resource Development & Capacity Enhancement Interventions

It is expected that number of jobs will be created in the sector in coming

years, but the skills required for these jobs requires to be strengthened. To

address the skill gaps and provide better employment opportunities for the

people, the Government shall undertake the following actions:

Provide training to different stakeholder groups as well as support

community through customized capacity building programs, exposure

visits, vocational courses, short-term online courses and other tourism

related programs.

Promote Vocational Training Institutes at strategic locations, offering a

range of courses.



Develop curriculum for job-oriented courses which can be offered

to school/college drop-outs.

5.15.1 Education and Awareness-Raising

i. Education and awareness-raising campaigns need to be addressed

to both the professional sectors and the general public and should

inform them about the impacts of tourism on biological diversity, and

good practices in this area. The private sector, and, especially, tour

operators, should provide information more widely to their clients—

the tourists—about tourism and biodiversity issues, and encourage

them to conserve, and avoid adverse impact on, biodiversity and

cultural heritage to respect national legislation of the Uttarakhand

State, as well as traditions of indigenous and local communities, and

to support actions in conformity with the present Guidelines.

ii. Raise awareness within the academic sector responsible for training

and research on issues regarding the interaction between biological

diversity and sustainable tourism, of the role that they can play

concerning public education, capacity-building and awareness-

raising on these issues.

iii. Awareness should also be increased within and outside government

that vulnerable ecosystems and habitats are often located within

lands and waters occupied or used by indigenous and local

communities.

iv. Education and awareness-raising is required at all levels of

government. This should include processes for increasing mutual

understanding between relevant ministries, including joint and

innovative approaches for dealing with tourism and environmental

issues.

5.15.2 Training / Capacity Building

i. The Government will collaborate with the expertise and resources

available with international tourism training organizations towards

developing a Uttarakhand Tourism Human Resources Strategy.

Training will be imparted to government officials, guides, hospitality

staff, including homestay hosts, tour operators, etc.

ii. A new category of skilled guides will be trained that will cater to the

upper echelon of tourists. Uttarakhand skill development society may

be roped in to introduce courses and training programs needed to

impart skills to the local youth and entrepreneurs required for

engagement in tourism industry.



iii. Licensing and certification of tour guides in order to standardize their

services (through a competency test) and accreditation of travel

agents will be promoted.

iv. Education and enhancement of competencies for local

communities in the surroundings of a tourism clusters will be

encouraged, as a tool to catalyse economic opportunities from

tourism activities.

v. Training of tourism professionals in conservation and biodiversity

issues.

5.16 Do‟s and Don‟ts for Visitors

Awesome, serene and inspiring snow bound Himalayas are one of nature's

most beautiful gifts to mankind. In general, as a visitor, please make sure to

maintain harmony, and protect this majestic environment; and respect

local tradition and culture. Specific do‘s and don‘ts that visitors shall

respect as part of efforts made towards achieving a tourism development

that is safe, sustainable, and compatible with ecological sensitivity

requirements and leads towards meeting the objectives of climate-resilient

tourism development in a difficult & treacherous Himalayan terrain are

incorporated herewith (as consolidated from several do’s & don’ts

published currently by several departments as mentioned in the

Bibliography section):

Do‟s

o Appreciate the colours and sounds of nature, i.e. Please enjoy the

Nature without disturbing it and be an ambassador back home.

o Treat the protected area/wilderness area with respect.

o Help conserve habitats of flora and fauna, and any site–natural or

cultural, which may be affected by tourism.

o Limit deforestation, make no open fires, smoke or light campfires in

the forest areas, and discourage others from doing so (ensure

burning cigarette butts are extinguished, if any). Please extinguish

fire after cooking and any campfire. Accidental fires can destroy a

wonderful jungle in no time, and thus cause irreparable damage.

Please inform immediately about happening of fire incident to the

nearest Forest Department personnel and help them to curb it.

o Choose accommodation that uses kerosene or fuel efficient wood

stoves, and use of firewood should be minimized. Similarly, for

expeditions, the team shall ensure carriage of a sufficient quantity

of kerosene and LPG for cooking and heating purposes, as the use

of firewood is strictly prohibited during the expedition.



o Dispose waste responsibly and help keep the protected areas

pollution-free. While trekking inside these protected areas, please

put your entire non-biodegradable litter (tin cans, plastic, glass

bottles, metal foils, and crush plastic water bottles and used

wrappers etc.) into your rucksack/any bag provided at designated

entrance/check-points, and dispose-off it on your way out (i.e.

leave campsites litter-free before departing/clean after use, as

remember that another party will be using the same camp site after

your departure). Deposit plastic etc. in your place of stay/Hotel or

at a plastic storage centre/plastic waste collection centers. Used

plastics should never be littered in mountains, disposed-off in

valleys, buried or burnt or washed away in rivers. Prevent water from

getting polluted. You shall undertake to abide by such terms &

conditions as may be further stipulated in this regard by the State

Government.

o Avoid using polythene. If you do, do not throw it away, but collect it

separately.

o This efforts of your shall be a big contribution in keeping the

Devbhumi clean and protected. You can definitely help in

conserving the Environment! You can do it!

“Arjuna, with me as the Supervisor, Nature brings forth the whole

creation both animate and inanimate: It is due to this cause that

the wheel of Samsara is revolving.” (Gita)

o Treat the mountains with respect. Do not attempt to 'conquer' them

or show-off physical fitness or over-exert. Fatigue can lead to cold

and more serious problems, especially at high altitudes.

o Walk at a steady, rhythmic pace. Walk with a companion as a

safety measure against sudden sickness and accidents.

o Keep away from high conical rocks.

o If at a lower altitude, take shelter under a lone tree or on top of a

hill. It is safer to sit out in the open.

o Carry enough heavy woolen clothes, including sweaters, trousers,

woolen thermal body warmers, mufflers monkey-caps and other

cold-resistant apparels. Also include windcheaters, sleeping bags,

raincoats, waterproof shoes with grips, blankets, small waterproof

tents, walking sticks and a torch with sufficient batteries should also

be carried. Females should wear the body hugging clothes. And



remember to cover your head with the woolen clothes while at high

altitude to avoid hill-sickness and feeling of faintness.

o Avoid wearing one or two very thick woolen layers. Instead, wear

loose clothes in several layers with an outer wind covering.

o Get at least two pairs of good trekking shoes and practise walking

with these shoes before the high altitude mountain trekking for

adventure tourism or for pilgrimage/yatra.

o Wear two pairs of socks (cotton and woollen) inside the climbing

boots.

o Ensure to keep feet dry. Use dusting powder before wearing socks

and change into dry socks soon after reaching the transit camp.

Use of wet socks or wet shoes causes extreme discomfort, blisters

and skin ailments. It is therefore advisable to carry extra pairs of

socks.

o Wear well-fitting gloves to protect hands and fingers. Hands, feet,

ears and nose must be protected against extreme cold. Continuous

exposure of hands and feet can bring down the body temperature

drastically and cause high altitude pulmonary oedema.

o Carry dry eatables such as biscuits, candies, sugar, chocolates,

assorted dry fruits, milk powder, lemons, honey and tinned foods

and other items suiting your tastes. Also carry water bottles, cups,

spoons, saucers and plates.

o For Chardham Yatra tap water is available everywhere, but use

only boiled water. You can get boiled water from a local tea-shop

for free whilst trekking.

o Drink lot of water and fluids during trekking. Take liberal amounts of

hot, sweet fluids and enough nourishment to provide energy for

body.

o It‘s a good idea to keep sweet candy in your mouth and use some

sort of glucose with water whilst trekking.

o Carry sufficient money for your personal expenses during the trip

and it is always wise to carry your own personal medical and first

aid kit containing painkiller tablets, Vicks or Antiseptic Ointment,

Bandages and any other medicines prescribed by your doctor,

particularly if you suffer from high blood pressure or any other

medical problems.

o Use good quality tinted snow-glasses or dark sun-glasses to protect

eyes against snow blindness. Avoid use of cheap, poor quality sun-

glasses.

o Apply sun cream or calamine lotion to exposed parts of the body to

avoid sun burn, particularly during the trekking or Parikramas.



o Take bath in a High Altitude Lake (e.g. Hemkunt Sahib, Mansarovar

etc.) only if body can sustain low temperature in the area.

o Take prompt treatment for minor cuts, blisters and ulcers.

o Move fingers, toes and facial muscles, and exercise limbs during

periods of immobility by wiggling the toes and fingers and wrinkling

the face muscles at intervals. Keep in motion to remain warm.

o Trek in small groups. If there is heavy snowfall or snow storms, stay

close to each other and avoid being separated.

o If you stand on the valley-side, you may be pushed down by the

pony coming from the opposite direction, which can cause serious

injury, so trek or stand on the hill-side only.

o Only an authorized pony-walla, dandy man or porter should be

hired as they are available for pre-fixed tariffs. Ponies carrying

belongings should remain with you at all times and ensure that you

are constantly in touch with your luggage carrying ponies to avoid

any loss of luggage and be sure to tie it on properly.

o Ensure that the batch commences the day's trekking early in the

morning and sticks to the departure time.

o Whilst trekking, move slowly and avoid any kind of walking

competition and maintain discipline.

o Follow instructions of the Liaison Officer properly for any adventure

tourism. Also, the commands of Yatra officer should be followed for

your own safety and respect the customs of the locals.

o Expedition teams shall abide by the relevant laws of the State

during their stay in Uttarakhand.

o It shall be mandatory for all expedition teams to travel only along

the permitted route. Permission for deviation from the permitted

route shall be given by the CWLW, only under exceptional

circumstances. The team leader must bring any such deviation to

the notice of the local DFO at the first opportunity.

o The expedition team shall refrain from polluting waters with human

and kitchen waste.

o The expedition team shall carry sufficient quantity of

bags/containers for bringing bag all non-biodegradable waste

back from transit camps and base camp to be deposited on return.

o The expedition team is advised to avail of all infrastructure facilities

(boarding, lodging and transport available with the State

Government, such as Tourist Rest Houses, Forest Rest House, and

Home Stay facilities available in the villages‘ enroute.

o Ecotourists should ensure your entry in the register of check-in and

check-out and take receipt against payment.



o Of all the high altitude porters, helpers, and guides being used by

the expedition, ensure that at least 50% of them comprise local

persons.

o Observe the rules and regulations while visiting holy sites, and

observe the sanctity of holy sites (do not touch or remove religious

objects). Respect the natural and cultural heritage of the area, and

respect/follow local customs and local etiquette, and behave

decently with them. Your behaviour reflects your identity.

o Respect privacy of individuals, and ask permission and use restraint

in taking photographs of local inhabitants.

o Enter the protected areas (biosphere reserves, national park,

sanctuary, etc.) only after taking the necessary permits and follow

all the rules.

o Obtain services of Nature/Eco-Guides that the protected areas

authorities have trained for your benefit. They are of great help to

you in spotting wildlife and ensuring that you do not lose your way in

the forest. (e.g. Nature guide or Naturalist is compulsory on all

excursions within the Corbett Tiger Reserve).

o Visitors are required to switch-off lights, fans and water taps when

not in use (i.e. be fair while using water and energy), and park their

vehicles only at designated places in national

parks/sanctuaries/reserves.

o Drive slowly if permitted in the protected areas. In this way you can

see, observe and enjoy the most, without disturbing wildlife.

o For movement, keep to the specified roads and trails/trek paths

and thus stay on track while trekking (e.g. Visitors are prohibited

from taking vehicles off the designated routes in Corbett Tiger

Reserve). When driving/walking off-track you may trample growing

trees or other flora and/or cause disturbance to resting animals and

their young.

o Respect the wild animals, maintain a reasonably safe distance from

them, and do not provoke them. Remember, you are in their home

and they get first priority in their habitat.

o Listen to the music of the forest instead of your car stereo or

transistor. The quieter you are, the more the chances of your seeing

wildlife.

o The protected areas are not a zoo; so don‘t expect to see wildlife

everywhere. These protected areas are breath-taking even in their

scenery and serenity.



o Do not be disappointed if you don‘t see a reserve animal that you

came particularly for. There are many other interesting creatures

that are to be seen and cherished.

o Please co-operate with Forest Department in environment

conservation activities following forest regulations.

o Propagate and pursue conservation by help to follow conservation

measures along with satisfactory visitor-experience in cooperation

with fellow tourists, tourist guides/eco-guides/mountain guides &

porters, etc. Do not allow cooks and porters to throw garbage in

streams or rivers.

o Allow the flora/fauna to flourish in its natural environment.

o Wear dull-coloured clothes, as bright colours alarm most wild

animals and they flee i.e. dress in colours that blend with the natural

environment (khaki, olive green or other dull colours).

o Strictly follow the guidelines for personal safety and security, and

always take your precautions and safety measures, i.e. Be cautious

about safety of yourself and your belongings. Tourism

Department/Forest Department/Any other Government will not be

responsible for any loss of yours.

Don‟ts

o Entry in reserved forest without permission from competent authority

is restricted.

o Do not pitch tents except at the earmarked site for the purpose.

o To go beyond the earmarked area for tourists inside forest area in

not advisable and restricted.

o Walking inside forest area from 5.00 p.m. to 7.00 a.m. during winter

and from 7.00 p.m. to 6.00 a.m. during summer is not advisable and

restricted.

o Any act detrimental to environment conservation, flora and fauna

along with medicinal plant is restricted.

o Outsider trekking guides are not allowed.

o Don‘t litter the mountains while travelling.

o Don‘t leave any eatables along the road side for wild animals.

o Don‘t let the caterer of your travel agent leave any eatables

behind for wild animals. Make sure that utensils are not washed in

the stream but through collection water in a bucket or a jerry can.

Water gradient is not to wash-off the left over food.

o Don‘t spit in water stream while brushing.

o Don‘t try to wash hands or clothes in the rivers/streams/water springs

on the way. Avoid using pollutants such as detergents in rivers,

streams or springs. If no toilet facilities are available, try to relieve



yourself at least 30 meters away from water sources and bury or

cover the waste. Never discharge saponified water in water

sources.

o Don‘t leave your undergarments behind after bath as the colours

and nylon, synthetic fiber in cloth is a pollutant.

o Don‘t defecate or urinate near river banks and spring beds.

o Don‘t throw wrappers of biscuits, candies etc. on the road/trek

paths during the expedition. It is better to use dustbins, if possible or

else keep them in your pocket and throw away when you find any

dustbin.

o Don‘t litter green pattal donas here and there. Bury them in soil.

o Don‘t litter plastic crockery like plates, donas, spoons and glasses.

Collect them in a big bag and dispose them in plastic storage

center/plastic waste collection centers.

o Don‘t dispose-off one time used rain coats, chappals and shoes in

valleys or mountain slopes. Collect them and dispose-off in plastic

storage/waste collection centers.

o Abstain from graffiti and contribute in keeping the environment

clean.

o Taking away plants/plant-cuttings, seeds and roots is illegal in many

parts of the Himalayas.

o Do not get separated from fellow pilgrims/yatris. If there is heavy

snowfall or snow storms, stay close to each other and avoid being

separated.

o Do not trek in one's or two's. Don't get separated from the main

group of trekking and ensure that the person in the front remains in

sight.

o Don‘t overstrain on sheer slopes, and places where caution signs

are fixed should not be used for taking a rest.

o Do not attract lightening during electric storms by putting up

pointed objects like ice-axes or wireless aerials.

o Do not neglect to consume sufficient food and fluids. Do remember

that pilgrims suffer from loss of appetite at high altitudes. So, per

force consume enough nourishment.

o Do not wear climbing boots that leak or are tight.

o Do not wear wet socks or permit socks to wrinkle inside the boots, as

this will cause blisters.

o Do not neglect minor injuries like cuts, blisters and ulcers as these

may become frost-bitten.

o Do not sleep with boots on.

o Do not carry too heavy a load.



o Heavy jewellery should be avoided during the trip.

o Do not consume alcoholic beverages and non-vegetarian food

during the pilgrimage/yatra. Alcohol is strictly banned. Visitors are

not allowed to carry and use any kind of intoxicants, drugs, and

other narcotics etc.

o Don‘t carry guns. Feel free to shoot with a camera instead (i.e. take

pictures, but without disturbing wildlife). However, in case of any

heritage areas that possesses heat-sensitive historical painted

surfaces, avoid using camera flash.

o Don't break traffic regulations or overtake any vehicle or drive an

overloaded vehicle. And whatever you do, do not try to win or race

with the local vehicles or drivers whilst driving as they know the

territory better than you!

o Don‘t get off your vehicle at any point in the protected areas

except where it‘s allowed. This is for your own safety and the safety

of wildlife.

o Do not get out of the vehicle or approach wild animals in general

and specifically do not approach animals closer than 15 m or

disturb them while they are resting.

o Please do not disturb or chase wild animals for better look or an

‗ultimate photograph.‘

o Never come between a parent animal and its kids.

o When in a vehicle, remember wild animals have right of way. Keep

to the speed limit, don‘t use the horn, and do not startle animals,

including not talking loudly or playing loud music.

o To feed wild animals is not allowed.

o Please do not make noise inside forest and at camping site.

o Use of search light at camping site as well as inside forest area is

prohibited.

o The expedition team shall not carry any weapons and/or injurious

substances, which can injure, harm or kill any wildlife or destroy their

habitat. The visitors should be aware that carrying of guns, fire arms,

inflammable materials are strictly prohibited as per the provisions of

The Wildlife (Protection) Act, 1972, and is punishable by law.

o The expedition team shall not poach; kindle fire or leave burning

embers; destroy, deface or remove any wildlife, trees, herbs, shrubs,

sign-posts etc. during the expedition.

Rules and Regulations for Tourists visiting Corbett Reserve have been

separately issued as ―A Set of 4-Directives/Rules and Regulations for

Corbett Tiger Reserve issued by CWLW Office, Camp-Dehradun,



Uttarakhand vide No. 1638/15-1 dated 02 December 2013 that shall be

duly followed w.r.t.:

1) Directives for Nature Guide and Naturalist (Text in Hindi);

2) Directives for Registration of Light Vehicles for Tourism Management

(Text in Hindi);

3) Directives for Vehicle Operators for Tourism Management (Text in

Hindi); and

4) Rules and Regulations for Tourists visiting Corbett Tiger Reserve.

Though in general for tiger reserves, NTCA, 2012 Guidelines are

applicable, in case of Corbett Tiger Reserve separate Rules &

Regulations as mentioned-above have been prescribed in 2013, and

any stricter provisions under the same shall be applicable in Corbett

Tiger Reserve [e.g. driving inside the Tiger Reserve beyond the

prescribed timings is prohibited; vehicles shall not monopolize a wildlife

sighting for more than 5 (five) minutes; permit would be issued for a

maximum of three days only; permit is non-transferable; entry into the

restricted zone by the visitors is prohibited; maximum two adults and

two children (below 12 years) per rooms are allowed to stay in the

tourism zone (one extra bed per room can be provided on payment of

prescribed charges); cooking is not allowed in Tiger Reserve except at

designated places where canteen facility is not provided; pets are not

allowed in the Tiger Reserve; etc.]



6 LIST OF OFFICIALS INTERACTED (MET / HAD TELECONVERSATION

WITH)

UEAP-PMU Program Director: Mr Amit Singh Negi, IAS, Secretary, PWD

Guidelines Owner: Dr Umakant Panwar, IAS, Secretary, Tourism

Guidelines Work Coordinator for:

o Data Collection: Mr Shiv Kumar Gupta, District Tourism Development

Officer, UTDB

o Guideline Document Compilation: Mr R K Joshi, Additional Project

Director, IDIPT-UK, UTDB assisting UEAP Work

S. No. Name of Officials Designation/Department Contact No.

1 Mr Amit Singh Negi, IAS Secretary, PWD, and Program

Director, UEAP-PMU (SDMA)

+91-135-2711439

+91-78953-12007

2 Dr Umakant Panwar, IAS Secretary, Tourism, and Chief

Executive Officer, UTDB

+91-135-2711227

2 Mr D S Garbiyal, IAS Secretary, Urban Development,

Housing and T&CP

+91-135-2712064

4 Mr Manoj Chandran, IFS Additional Secretary, Forest and

Environment

+91-135-2713810

5 Mr Vinod Fonia, Indian Foreign

Service

Secretary, Rural Development,

and Panchayati Raj

+91-135-2714113

6 Mr Rajiv Bhartari, IFS Chief Conservator of Forests (Eco-

tourism), Forest Department

+91-135-2669227

+91-94120-53603

7 Dr Dhananjai Mohan, IFS Chief Conservator of Forests

(Chief Wildlife Warden Office),

Forest Department

+91-135-2644691

+91-93581-03371

8 Mr R Meenakshi Sundaram, IAS Additional Secretary, Urban

Development

+91-135-2712012

9 Mr Omkar Singh Deputy Secretary, Urban

Development Section

-

10 Mr J P Maikhuri Section Officer, Urban

Development Section-2

-

11 Mr Subhash Gupta Deputy Director, Urban

Development Directorate

+91-94120-50008

12 Dr Shailesh Kumar Pant Deputy Secretary, Housing and

T&CP

-

13 Mr D N S Rana Under Secretary, Housing and

T&CP

-

14 Mr Narendra Singh Rawat Section Officer, Housing Section-2 -

15 Mr Vijay Kumar Project Director (ILSP), Rural

Development

+91-135-2773800

+91-94120-51152

16 Mr Rajeev Kumar Singhal Manager-Knowledge

Management and Innovations

+91-135-2773800



S. No. Name of Officials Designation/Department Contact No.

(ILSP), Rural Development +91-96342-22849

17 Mr Prakash Chandra Bhatt Deputy Secretary, Tourism -

18 Mr Arun Kumar Section Officer, Tourism Section-1 +91-99276-99158

19 Mr C M S Bisht, IAS Secretary, Rural Engineering

Services

+91-135-2714246

20 Er B S Kaira Chief Engineer, Rural Engineering

Services

+91-135-2781556

+91-94120-88835

21 Er A K Pant Superintending Engineer, Rural


+91-135-2781556

22 Mr Shekhar Chandra Pandey Section Officer, Disaster

Management Section

-

23 Mr Gopal Singh Rawat Section Officer, Irrigation Section-

2

-

24 Mr Rajesh Kumar Section Officer, Urban

Development Section-1

+91-99276-99137

25 Mr Kailash Sundriyal Assistant Tourism Officer, UTDB +91-94129-98379

26 Mr A K Dwivedi Additional Director Tourism, UTDB +91-94129-98502

27 Mr Manish Juyal Technical Expert-Tourism, giz-RED

Project on Sustainable Tourism,

GoUK

+91-94120-50217

28 Dr Raghav Langer, IAS District Magistrate, Rudraprayag-

cum-Chief Executive Officer,

Kedarnath Development

+91-1364-233300

+91-95576-39429

29 Mr Sanjay Bahti Technical Expert-Tourism, giz-RED

Project on Sustainable Tourism,

GoUK

+91-94129-98447

30 Mr Satish Bahuguna District Tourism Development

Officer, UTDB

+91-94129-98514

31 Dr R Rajesh Kumar, IAS Managing Director, GMVN and

Program Manager, UEAP-PIU

(Tourism), GMVN

+91-135-2742171

+91-94120-77700

32 Er Gambhir Singh Deputy General Manager (Civil),

GMVN and Specialist Engineering

Construction & Supervision, UEAP-

PIU(T), GMVN

+91-135-2742171

+91-94565-90706

33 Er S K Birla Superintending Engineer, UEAP-

PIU (PWD)

+91-94120-04992

+91-97562-04992



7 BIBLIOGRAPHY

S.

No.

Departments and Relevant Reference Documents Collected/

Received

Down-

loaded

State of Uttarakhand Departments

A Tourism Department

a) Uttarakhand Tourism Development Board (UTDB)

1 2014, Excerpts (Text in Hindi) from Presentation to the Government of Uttarakhand dated 20 June 2014 by

UTDB on ―Details of Schemes being implemented for Tourism Development – Rural Tourism covering

Development of Infrastructure Facilities (Hardware Project) and Training (Software Project); and Financial

Progress of Schemes implemented under Rural Tourism under Hardware and Software Projects‖ and ―Hurdles

in Tourism Development‖ provided by UTDB

-

2 2014, ―Proceedings of the Meeting held between Uttarakhand Tourism Development Board and Uttarakhand

Hotel Association with regards to Uttarakhand Tourism and Travel Trade Registration Regulations – 2014 dated

15.05.2014‖ (Text in Hindi) issued under the authority of Additional Director Tourism, UTDB vide No. 352/2-7-

499/2014 dated 17 May 2014

-

3 2014, ―Do‘s and Don‘ts of Chardham Yatra 2014‖ issued by UTDB on Uttarakhand Tourism Website -

4 2014, ―Uttarakhand Tourism and Travel Trade Registration Regulations, 2014‖ (Text in Hindi), issued by Culture,

Tourism & Sports Section-1, Tourism Department vide No. 161/VI/2013-01(07)/2013(418) dated 24 January

2014, under Tourism Department website

-

5 2014, ―Uttarakhand River Rafting/Kayaking Regulations, 2014‖ (Text in Hindi), issued by Culture, Tourism &

Sports Section-1, Tourism Department vide No. 160/VI/2013-01(03)/2013 dated 24 January 2014, under Tourism

Department website

-

6 ―Uttarakhand Home Stay Rules – 2015 (Text in Hindi)" -

7 2012, ―Tourist Statistics of Important Tourist Places in Uttarakhand (2009-2012)‖, under Tourism Department

website

-

8 2012, ―Tourist Statistics of Uttarakhand (2000-2012), under Tourism Department website -

9 2011, ―General Information – Uttarakhand at a Glance,‖ under Tourism Department website -



S.

No.


Received

Down-

loaded

10 2009-10, ―List of Rural Tourism Schemes including Tourism Villages under CFA covering Schemes for 13 Villages

in 8 Districts, with 28 New Tourism Villages identified in 13 Districts‖ (Text in Hindi) provided by UTDB

-

11 2009, ―Proposed Revised Rates in Protected Areas and Outside Areas Forest Divisions for Ecotourism Facilities

of Camping and Angling‖ issued by CCE-ET vide G.O. No. 3917/X-2-2009-12(7)/2003, December 2009, under

Tourism Department website

-

12 2008, ―Uttarakhand Tourism Development Master Plan 2007 – 2022‖ issued in April 2008 by Government of

India, Government of Uttarakhand, United Nations Development Programme, and World Tourism

Organisation (Vol. I - Executive Summary, Vol. II - Main Report, and Vol. III - Appendices), under Tourism

Department website

-

13 2007, Tourism Policy of State of Uttarakhand, 2007, under Tourism Department website -

14 2007, ―Guidelines for Mountaineering Expeditions in Uttarakhand‖ along with Do‘s & Don‘ts, issued by UTDB,

2007, under Tourism Department website -

15 2006, ―Amendment to G.O. on Land Use Conversion and it‘s Rates from Lower Land Use to Upper Land Use-

category Development under Master Plan and Regional Plan‖ issued by Housing Section, Government of

Uttarakhand vide No. 1573/V-H-2006-11(LUC)/65 dated 10 September 2006, under Tourism Department

website

-

16 2006, Directives regarding ―Implementation of Facility for Single Window Contact and Time-bound

Information and Ease of Clearance for Investors and Entrepreneurs in Tourism Industry‖ issued by Tourism

Section, Government of Uttarakhand vide No. 539/VI/2006/12(8)2004 dated 11 May 2006, under Tourism

Department website

-

17 2006, ―Directives for establishing District Sector Planning‖ issued by Tourism Section, Government of

Uttarakhand vide No. 479/VI/2006 dated 25 April 2006, under Tourism Department website

-

18 2006, ―Directives for establishing State Sector Planning‖ issued by Tourism Section, Government of

Uttarakhand vide No. 478/VI/2006 dated 25 April 2006, under Tourism Department website

-

19 2005, ―Guidelines for Procuring Land for Tourism Investment by Private Investors in Uttarakhand State‖ issued

by Tourism Section vide No. 910/VI/2005-3(42)2005 dated 20 August 2005, under Tourism Department website

-

20 2003, ―Instructions related to temporary directives till the Permanent Regulations/Directives are prepared for

Aero Sports in Uttarakhand‖ issued by Tourism Section, Government of Uttarakhand vide No. 112/T.O./2003-47

Tourism/2003 dated 28 Mar 2003, under Tourism Department website

-



S.

No.


Received

Down-

loaded

21 2002, Directives for ―Veer Chandra Singh Garhwali Paryatan Swarojgar Yojana‖ (Text in Hindi), introduced

dated 01 June 2002, under Tourism Department website

-

22 2001/2004, ―Uttaranchal Tourism Development Board Act, 2001‖ Notification dated 28 November 2001 and

Amended vide Notification dated 05 August 2004, under Tourism Department website

-

23 1999, ―Permission for River Rafting in the Forests of Hill Areas‖ issued by Forest Section-2, Government of Uttar

Pradesh vide letter dated 25 September 1999, under Tourism Department website

-

24 1994, ―Introduction of Paying Guest Scheme for Development of Tourism in the State‖ issued by Tourism

Department, the then State of Uttar Pradesh vide No. 2187/41-94-41/86 dated 08 August 1994, under Tourism

Department website

-

25 ____, ―Checklist for Eco-tourism units in Uttarakhand-related Directives for Establishment of Hotel / Resort / Spa

/ Amusement Park / Eco-Park / Ropeway etc.‖ issued by UTDB, under Tourism Department website

-

b) Garhwal Mandal Vikas Nigam Limited (GMVN)

1 ____, ―Do‘s and Don‘ts in Garhwal‖ under GMVN website -

c) Kumaon Mandal Vikas Nigam Limited (KMVN)

1 ____, ―Trekking Do‘s & Don‘ts …‖ under KMVN website -

B Forest Department

1 2010, MoEF, GoI communication F. No. 5-3/2007-FC dated 14 May 2010 under Subject ―Clarification

regarding the construction of permanent structures for Eco-Tourism in the forest areas‖ has clearly stated that

“,,, the Eco-tourism is regarded as non-forest activity. As such taking up of non-forest activity including

permanent structures amounts to violation of the provisions of the Forest (Conservation) Act, 1980.‖

-

2 2005, ―Uttaranchal Van Panchayat Regulations, 2005‖ (Text in Hindi), vide Notification dated 23rd January

2006 by Forest & Environment Section-2, Forest Department website

-

3 1988/1989, National Forest Policy, 1988 with Amendment for Uttarakhand, 1989 (Text in Hindi), Forest

Department website

-

4 ____, Mountaineering Guidelines (Text in Hindi), Forest Department website -

5 ____, ―Protected Area Network‘ webpage on Uttarakhand Forest Department website that provides the

latest list of National Parks, Sanctuaries, Conservation Reserves, and Biosphere Reserve

-



S.

No.


Received

Down-

loaded

a) Ecotourism Division

1 2011, ―Corbett National Park (1936-2011): Celebrating 75 Years Poster‖ providing information on its visions,

values, and tourism logistics, issued by Field Director, Corbett Tiger Reserve, Ramnagar, under Ecotourism

Menu on Forest Department‘s website

-

2 2003, ―Ecotourism Policy, 2003‖ (Text in Hindi) issued by Conservator of Forests-Ecotourism, Office of Principal

Conservator of Forests, Uttaranchal in August 2003, © Center for Ecotourism

-

3 ____, ―Ecotourism in Uttarakhand‖ issued by Ecotourism Division, under Ecotourism Menu on Forest

Department‘s website

-

4 ____, ―Ecotourism Map of Uttarakhand‖ issued by Ecotourism Division, under Eco-tourism Menu on Forest

Department‘s website

-

5 ____, ―Experience village life: Community-based Tourism (CBT)‖ issued by Ecotourism Division, under

Ecotourism Menu on Forest Department‘s website

-

6 ____, ―General Instruction for Ecotourists: Do‘s and Don‘ts‖ issued by Ecotourism Division, under Ecotourism

Menu on Forest Department‘s website

-

7 ____, ―Wildlife Ecotourism in Uttarakhand,‖ under Ecotourism Menu on Forest Department‘s website -

8 ____, ―Angling Rules for Mahaseer Conservation in Ram Ganga river through P.P.P. Mode in Uttarakhand‖

issued by Chief Wildlife Warden, Uttarakhand

-

b) Chief Wildlife Warden Office

1 2013, A Set of 4-Directives/Rules and Regulations for Corbett Tiger Reserve issued by CWLW Office, Camp-

Dehradun, Uttarakhand [vide No. 1638/15-1 dated 02 December 2013 w.r.t.–1) Directives for Nature Guide

and Naturalist (Text in Hindi); 2) Directives for Registration of Light Vehicles for Tourism Management (Text in

Hindi); 3) Directives for Vehicle Operators for Tourism Management (Text in Hindi); and 4) Rules and

Regulations for Tourists visiting Corbett Tiger Reserve]

-

2 2012, ―Guidance document for taking up non forestry activities in wildlife habitats‖ issued by the Office of the

Deputy Inspector General of Forests (WL), MoEF, GoI vide F. No. 6-10/2011 WL dated 19 December 2012

-

3 2012, ―Regarding Permission of Purchase of Land under the Clauses 154(4)(3)(a) & (b) of Zamindari Abolition

and Land Reforms Act in the area abutting 2 km from external limit of the Region of Corbett Tiger Reserve

declared under the Forest Act/Regarding Prohibiting Land-use Change under the Clauses 143 of Zamindari

-



S.

No.


Received

Down-

loaded

Abolition and Land Reforms Act for Land Parcels with reference to Agricultural Land situated in Areas under

Corbett Tiger Reserve‖ issued by Revenue Section-2 vide No. 2756/XXIII(2)/2012 dated 16 November 2012

under the authority of Principal Secretary, Revenue Department, Government of Uttarakhand

4 2012, ―Comprehensive Guidelines for Tiger Conservation and Tourism as provided under Section 38O (01) E of

The Wildlife (Protection) Act, 1972‖, as per Notification dated 15th October 2012, NTCA

-

5 2008, Instructions/Directives (Text in Hindi) for the High Altitude ―Gangotri National Park‖ for the destination of

Gaumukh [Order No. 2930/37-1 dated 29 April 2008 issued by CWLW Office, Camp-Dehradun w.r.t.–1) To

establish the process for issuing permits to 150 numbers of pilgrims, tourists, and other visitors per day in

Gaumukh area; 2) For complete prohibition on movement of mules, horses, and other animals plying under

commercial purposes; 3) Directives to reduce the number of mountaineers in Gaumukh area; 4) Research-

related Instructions in Gangotri National Park; and 5) Arrangements to regulate onward travel from Gangotri

(with entry prohibited at 500 m peripheral distance from the Gaumukh)]

-

6 2006/2009, MoEF, GoI issued EIA Notification, S.O. 1533 (E) dated 14 September 2006, and its Amendment S.O.

3067 (E) dated 01 December 2009

-

7 2004, ―Guidelines for mountaineering expeditions in Uttaranchal‖ published by Government of Uttaranchal,

03 July 2004

-

8 1998, ―Ecotourism in India: Policy & Guidelines, 1998‖ issued by Ministry of Tourism, GoI, provided by CCF-

CWLW

-

c) Corbett National Park/Corbett Tiger Reserve

1 ____, ―Eco-development‖ under Park Management & Conservation, Corbett National Park website -

2 ____, ―Tourism‖ under Park Management & Conservation, Corbett National Park website -

3 ____, ―Do‘s and Don‘ts‖ for visitation to Tiger Reserve under Corbett Tiger Reserve website -

C Urban Development, Housing and T&CP Departments

a) Urban Development Department

1 2013, Directions (Text in Hindi) passed regarding to ―The Order passed by The High Court of Uttarakhand at

Nainital on Writ Petition (PIL) No. 25 of 2013 stating–The State of Uttarakhand, through its Chief Secretary, is

directed to ensure that, henceforth, no construction of permanent nature is permitted within 200 meters from

the bank of any flowing river in the State, Order dated 26th August 2013‖ for the implementation of this High

-



S.

No.


Received

Down-

loaded

Court Order, and issued by Urban Development Section-2 under the authority of Principal Secretary, Urban

Development Department, Government of Uttarakhand vide No. 1247/IV(2)-UD-13-38(Court Case)/13, dated

19 September 2013 communicated to Heads of All Nagar Nigams and Nagar Palika Parishads (NPP)/Nagar

Panchayats (NP)

2 ____, ―List of All Urban Local Bodies – 72 No‘s in State of Uttarakhand,‖ (Text in Hindi) provided by Urban

Development Section-1, Urban Development Department, Government of Uttarakhand

-

b) Housing Department

1 2013, Master Plan-2025 of Dehradun including Revised Proposed Land Use Map, Amended Notification (Text

in Hindi) issued by Housing Section-2, Government of Uttarakhand vide No. 1856/V-H-2013-94(H)/2010 dated

28 November 2013, under MDDA website

-

2 2013, Master Plan-2025 of Dehradun–―Amendment to Building Construction and Development

Byelaws/Regulations–2011‖ (Text in Hindi) issued by Housing Section-2, Government of Uttarakhand vide No.

739/V-2013-24(H)/2009 dated 28 May 2013, under MDDA website

-

3 2011, Master Plan-2025 of Dehradun –―Building Construction and Development Byelaws/Regulations–2011

(including Annexure I & II),‖ (Text in Hindi) issued by MDDA vide Letter No. 447/UB-BCDB-2011 dated 29

November 2011, under MDDA website

-

4 2011, Signed Copy of ―Building Construction and Development Byelaws/Regulations–2011‖ (Text in Hindi)

issued by Housing Section-2 vide No. 2009/V-2011-55(H)/2006-TC, dated 17 November 2011 under the

authority of Principal Secretary, Housing Department, Government of Uttarakhand and communicated to

Development Authority – Dehradun/Haridwar/Tehri (These Byelaws/Regulations are applicable for all

Regulated Areas, Development Areas & Special Development Areas located in the State; and areas located

outside these in the whole State)

-

5 ____, MDDA Guidelines/Checklist for Processing of Building Layout Application Letter and Supporting

Documents (Text in Hindi), under MDDA Website

-

c) T&CP Department

1 2013, ―Amendment to Building Construction and Development Byelaws/Regulations–2011‖ (Text in Hindi)

issued by Housing Department, Government of Uttarakhand vide No. 46/V/H-2013-55(H)/06-TC dated 15

January 2013

-

2 2011, ―Building Construction and Development Byelaws/Regulations–2011‖ (Text in Hindi) issued by Housing -



S.

No.


Received

Down-

loaded

Department, Government of Uttarakhand, under T&CP website

3 ____, List of Master Plans applicable in Uttarakhand, prepared by Town and Country Planning Department,

Government of Uttarakhand, under T&CP website

-

D Rural Development and Panchayati Raj Department

a) IFAD–ILSP (International Fund for Agricultural Development–Integrated Livelihood Support Project) under UGVS

(Uttarakhand Gramya Vikas Samiti)

1 2014, ―Rural Tourism – A Snapshot in Uttarakhand – UGVS View‖ prepared by ILSP, UGVS, March 2014

(including the Home Stay Standards, and ―Draft Guidelines & Notification for Uttarakhand Homestay, 2012

(inclusive of Annexures Ito III),‖ and two-videos on Bhatoli and Gaul Village respectively)

-

2 Uttarakhand Homestay Rules 2015 -

E Irrigation Department

1 2013, Directions passed regarding to ―Loss of Lives-Money due to Natural Disaster in State, Rescue and Relief

Works and Reconstruction‖ that ―no permission to be given until G.O. is issued with regards to any

reconstruction on river banks,‖ (Text in Hindi) issued by Irrigation Section under the authority of Principal

Secretary, Irrigation Department, Government of Uttarakhand vide No. 1973/11-2013-17(12)/2013, dated 03

July 2013

-

Government of India Ministries/Departments

A Tourism Department, Ministry of Tourism

1 2013, ―Amendment in the existing Guidelines for Classification/Re-classification of Hotels‖ issued by H&R

Division vide No. 8-TH-I(3)/2013 dated 04 September 2013, Ministry of Tourism website

-

2 2012, ―Amendment in the existing Guidelines for Classification/Re-classification of Hotels‖ issued by H&R

Division vide No. 8-TH-I(03)/07-Vol. IV dated 28 June 2012, Ministry of Tourism website

-

3 2012, Interim Report-Uttarakhand on ―Identification of Tourism Circuits across India,‖ April 2012 submitted by

IL&FS Infrastructure Development Corporation (IL&FS IDC), Ministry of Tourism website

-

4 2012, ―Guidelines for Recognition/Renewal or Extension as an Approved Adventure Tour Operator (ATO)‖

revised with effect from 2nd January 2012, issued by MOT, GoI on Ministry of Tourism website

-

5 2011, ―Rural Tourism Scheme for Infrastructure Development – Scheme Guidelines (Revised)‖ issued by Rural -



S.

No.


Received

Down-

loaded

Tourism Division vide File No. 6-A&RT(10)/08-Pt. dated 09 December 2011, Ministry of Tourism website

6 2011, ―Report of The Working Group on Tourism for 12th Five Year Plan (2012-17)‖ prepared by Ministry of

Tourism, Government of India dated 07 October 2011, under Ministry of Tourism website

-

7 2010, ―Training Programme to Create Employable Skills (Hunar Se Rozgar) under The CBSP Scheme of The

Ministry of Tourism – Extension Thereof through Hotels – Guidelines‖ w.e.f. 11 November 2010, Ministry of

Tourism website

-

8 2009, ―Guidelines for Approval of Guest Houses (Revised)‖ issued by H&R Division in December 2009, Ministry

of Tourism website

-

9 2002, ―National Tourism Policy, 2002‖ published by Department of Tourism, Ministry of Tourism & Culture,

Government of India, Ministry of Tourism website

-

10 ____, ―Strategic Action Plan‖ of Ministry of Tourism, Government of India, Ministry of Tourism website -

11 ____, ―A Compendium on Hunar Se Rozgar Tak (A training initiative to create employable skills),‖ Ministry of

Tourism website

-

12 ____, ―Guidelines for Approval and Registration of Incredible India Bed & Breakfast/Homestay

Establishments,‖ H&R Division, Ministry of Tourism website

-

13 ____, Revised Guidelines of Scheme for Assistance to Central Agencies for Tourism Infrastructure

Development, Ministry of Tourism website

-

14 ____, Specific Guidelines for Financial Assistance to States/Union Territories for Construction of Heliports under

the Scheme of Product/Infrastructure Development for Destinations and Circuits, Ministry of Tourism website

-

15 ____, Revised Guidelines of Scheme for Product/Infrastructure Development for Destinations and Circuits,

Ministry of Tourism website

-

16 ____, ―Guidelines for Approval & Classification/Re-classification of Apartment Hotels‖ issued by H&R Division,


-

17 ____, ―Instructions for Regional Directors in regard to Classification/Re-Classification of Hotels,‖ Ministry of

Tourism website

-

18 -, ―Standard Operating Procedures for State Governments in regard to Classification/Re-Classification of

Hotels,‖ Ministry of Tourism website

-



S.

No.


Received

Down-

loaded

19 ____, ―Good Governance Initiatives: Standard Operating Procedures for Timely, Objective and Transparent

Classification/Re-Classification‖ of Hotels & Restaurants, Ministry of Tourism website

-

20 ____, ―Guidelines for Project Approval and Classification of Tented Accommodation‖ issued by H&R Division,


-

21 ____. Setting-up of a ―Hospitality Development and Promotion Board (HDPB)‖ for Hotel Projects, Ministry of

Tourism website

-

22 ____, ―A Compendium on Hunar Se Rozgar Tak (A training initiative to create employable skills),‖ Ministry of

Tourism website

-

23 ____, ―Scheme for Support to Public Private Partnerships in Infrastructure (Viability Gap Funding),‖ Ministry of

Tourism website

-

B Archaeological Survey of India, Ministry of Culture

1 2011, ―Ancient Monuments and Archaeological Sites and Remains (Framing of Heritage Bye-laws and Other

Functions of the Competent Authority) Rules, 2011‖ vide Notification dated 23 August 2011, Ministry of Culture

website

-

2 2010, ―The Ancient Monuments and Archaeological Sites and Remains (Amendment and Validation) Act,

2010‖ vide Notification dated 29 March 2010, Ministry of Culture website

-

3 1959, ―Ancient Monuments and Archaeological Sites and Remains Rules, 1959‖ vide Notification dated 15

October 1959, Ministry of Culture website

-

4 1958, ―The Ancient Monuments and Archaeological Sites and Remains Act, 1958‖ vide Notification dated 28

August 1958, Ministry of Culture website

-

C Ministry of Environment and Forests

1 2011, ―Guidelines for Ecotourism in and around Protected Areas (Draft)‖ introduced by MoEF dated 02 June

2011 under MoEF website

-

2 1980/1988, Forest (Conservation) Act, 1980 (with amendments made in 1988) under MoEF website -

3 2006, The Wild Life (Protection) Amendment Act w.e.f. 04 September 2006, MoEF, GoI -

4 1972, The Wildlife (Protection) Act, 1972 w.e.f. 09 September 1972, under MoEF website -



S.

No.


Received

Down-

loaded

5 1927, The Indian Forest Act, 1927 under MoEF website -

6 ____, Eco-sensitive Zone Notifications List by MoEF under Legislations, MoEF website -

D Ministry of Urban Affairs and Employment

1 1998, ―Guidelines and Space Standards for Barrier-Free Built-Environment for Disabled and Elderly Persons,

1998,‖ CPWD, MoUAE, GoI under website http://cpwd.gov.in/

-

E Ministry of Housing and Urban Poverty Alleviation

a) Building Materials & Technology Promotion Council

1 ____, ―Building a New Techno-Legal Regime for Safer India‖ published by Building Materials & Technology

Promotion Council, Ministry of Housing and Urban Poverty Alleviation, Government of India, and National

Disaster Management Division, Ministry of Home Affairs, Government of India, under MoHUPA website

-

F National Disaster Management Division, Ministry of Home Affairs

1 2004, Disaster Management in India, National Disaster Management Division, Ministry of Home Affairs,

Government of India, under MHA website

-

2 2004, Volume I Report (Proposed Amendment in Town and Country Planning Legislations; Regulations for

Land Use Zoning; Additional Provisions in Development Control Regulations for Safety; and Additional

Provisions in Building Regulations/Byelaws for Structural Safety–in Natural Hazard Zones in India), prepared by

Committee of Experts constituted by National Disaster Management Division, Ministry of Home Affairs,

Government of India, under MHA website

-

G General Information

1 2007, ―Report of the Steering Committee on Tourism for The Eleventh Five Year Plan (2007-2012), Planning

Commission, Government of India, under Planning Commission website

-

2 1867, The Sarais Act, 1867 w.e.f. 15 March 1867 -

International References

A giz Reports on Uttarakhand

1 2012, Presentation on ―Trekking in Uttarakhand: Empirical Analysis and Product Development,‖ giz-RED

Program, Uttarakhand

-



S.

No.


Received

Down-

loaded

2 2011, ―Uttarakhand: Diagnostic study of Building a Mountain State (2000-2010),‖ Doon University and gtz-RED


-

3 2011, Presentation on ―Sustainable Tourism Assessment in Uttarakhand–Results and Conclusions,‖ giz-RED


-

4 2011, ―Report on Assessment of Accommodation Providers in Nainital Tourism Zone,‖ giz-RED Program,

Uttarakhand

-

5 2011, ―Report on Assessment of Accommodation Providers in Corbett Tourism Zone,‖ giz-RED Program,

Uttarakhand

-

6 2011, Presentation and Final Report on Sustainable Destination Development of ―Corbett N.P. Buffer Zone‖

and Nainital, giz-RED Program, Uttarakhand

-

7 2010, ―Product Development for Sustainable Tourism in the Greater Corbett Circuit, Uttarakhand,‖ gtz-RED


-

8 2010, ―Tourism Value Chain in Uttarakhand–Financial Analysis of Tourism Value Chain in Kumaon,‖ gtz-RED


-

9 2010,‖Destination Management Plan–Kumaon Circuit‖ Mission Report (31 October 2010 to 20 November

2010), gtz-RED Program, Uttarakhand

-

10 2010, Operational Plan for ―Ramnagar-Choti Haldwani-Nainital-Kilbury-Vinayak-Kunjakhark Circuit (Eco-

Tourism Circuit, 12-14 Aug 2010)- A Training Program held at Academic Staff College, Nainital, ,‖ gtz-RED


-

11 2010, ―Eco-Tourism/Off-Beat Destination Promotion-Stakeholders Workshop–A Joint Effort by Uttarakhand

Forest Department (Eco-Tourism) & gtz-Regional Economic Development Program‖ dated 18 February 2010

-

12 2010, ―Report on Identification and Assessment of Off-Beat Destinations in Uttarakhand for Community-

based Ecotourism Development & Promotion‖ submitted to gtz-RED Program, Uttarakhand, January 2010

-

13 2009, Presentation on ―Is Ecotourism a strategy for regional economic development?‖ at Dehradun on

12/09/2009, gtz-RED program, Uttarakhand

-

14 2009, ―OFF BEAT DESTINATIONS–A Situational Analysis of Dehradun, Chakrata & Uttarkashi Off Beat

Destinations,‖ A Report on joint exercise by Eco-Tourism wing of the Forest Department & gtz-RED Program,

Uttarakhand

-



S.

No.


Received

Down-

loaded

15 2008, ―The RED Tourism Value Chain Selection, Strategy and Operational Plan-Uttarakhand, October 2008‖ by

International Tourism Consultancy for gtz-RED program, Uttarakhand

-

16 2008, ―RED Tourism Groundwork Uttarakhand (UA) Report‖ issued by gtz on 8/1/2008 -

17 2007, ―Regional Marketing‐Uttarakhand‖‐ A Report to gtz, November 2007 -

18 2006, ―Uttarakhand Sector Study, December 2006‖ by German Technical Cooperation on the economic

sectors for the upcoming gtz sponsored RED program

-

19

20 ____, ―Kumaon–Possible Eco-Tourism Circuits–Nainital-Almora-Ranikhet-Bageshwar Districts–A Situational

Analysis,‖ A Report on gtz-RED Program, Eco-Tourism (Forest Department), & India Off-Beat (Travel Operators) -

21 ____, ―Trekking Product Evaluation (Add-on),‖ gtz-RED Program, Uttarakhand -

B Other References

1 2013, ―Project Administration Manual (PAM) of ADB-funded ―Uttarakhand Emergency Assistance Project

(UEAP),‖ October 2013

-

2 2013, ―INDIA: Uttarakhand Disaster June 2013-Joint Rapid Damage and Needs Assessment (JRDNA) Report‖

issued by The World Bank, Government of Uttarakhand, and Asian Development Bank, August 2013

-

3 2013, Scientific Correspondence on ―Kedarnath disaster; facts and plausible causes‖ published by D. P.

Dobhal, Anil K. Gupta, Manish Mehta, and D. D. Khandelwal, Wadia Institute of Himalayan Geology,

Dehradun, in Current Science, Vol. 105, No.2, 25 July 2013, pp 171-174, available under website http://www.currentscience.ac.in/Volumes/105/02/0171.pdf

-

4 2011, ―Handbook on Tourism Product Development‖ issued by World Tourism Organization (UNWTO) and

European Travel Commission (ETC), Copyright © 2011

-

5 2011, ―Policy and Practice for Global Tourism‖ issued by World Tourism Organization (UNWTO), Copyright ©

2011

6 2010, ―2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design‖ issued by Department of Justice, USA, dated 15

September 2010 under website http://www.ada.gov/

-

7 2010, Maximising the benefits of Tourism: Tourism Planning Manual for Local Government‖ issued in August

2010 by Government of New South Wales, Australia

-



S.

No.


Received

Down-

loaded

8 2010, Facility Administration Manual (FAM) of ADB-funded ―Infrastructure Development Investment Program

for Tourism-Uttarakhand (IDIPT-UK),‖ August 2010

-

9 2007-08, ―Implementation Guidelines‖ as Part of DPR for Conservation and Revitalization of Rambagh

Garden, Amritsar, Punjab – An unpublished document prepared by ADB TA as Consultant to an earlier

project

-

10 2006, ―Tourism Planning Toolkit for Local Government,‖ May 2006, Tourism Recreation Research and

Education Center (TRREC), New Zealand

-

11 2005, ―Best Practice Model for Low-Impact Nature-based Sustainable Tourism Facilities in Remote Areas,‖

Sustainable Tourism Cooperative Research Center (ST-CRC), Australia, Copyright © CRC for Sustainable

Tourism Pty Ltd 2005

-

12 2002, ―Ecotourism: Principles, Practices & Policies for Sustainability‖ by Megan Epler Wood, UNEP-TIES, 2002 -

13 2001, ―Guidelines for Tourism in Parks and Protected Areas of East Asia,‖ issued by International Union for

Conservation of Nature and Natural Resources (IUCN), Copyright © 2001

-

14 2000, ―The Burra Charter, 1999: The Australian ICOMOS Charter for Places of Cultural Significance,‖ adopted

by Australia ICOMOS in November 1999, © Australia ICOMOS Incorporated 2000

-

15 1992, Inskeep, Edward and Kallenberger, Mark, ―An Integrated Approach to Resort Development: Six Case

Studies,‖ A Tourism and the Environment Publication, World Tourism Organization, 1992, under UNWTO website

-

16 ____, ―Tourism Physical Planning and Resort Development‖ Guideline (A Brief on Objectives and

Methodology), Policy Planning and Economic Development Section under UNWTO website

-



8 APPENDIX – 1 Checklist for Ensuring Due-diligence in Tourism Infrastructure Development Process in the State of Uttarakhand

S.

No.

Process Stage & Tasks/Activities in

(Stages in Chronological Order)

Compliance Criteria Compliance Status

or Remarks (if any) Externally-Aided Projects General Projects

Mandatory Desirable Mandatory Desirable

I PRE-PLANNING STAGE (FINALISATION

OF LAND& PRELIMINARY COSTING)

1 Availability of Land

[NOC from DM and

Land Title

Holder/User; List

ownership in Sub-

project Appraisal

Report (SAR)]

(NOC from DM)

(NOC from Land

Title Holder/User

to avoid any

issues later)

2 Accessibility of Land Parcel

3 Environmental Screening

(Respective

Checklists as

applicable to be

submitted as part

of SAR)

(Forapplicable

scheduled

categories under

MoEF&CC EIA

Notification

dtd14.09.2006,

and subsequent

Amendments dtd

01.12.2009, etc.)

(Even if for non-

scheduled

categories /

smaller projects,

due-diligence

from

environmental &

social screening is

encouraged)

4 Social Screening

5 Preliminary Cost Estimation

6 Identification of Operation &

Maintenance (O&M) Mechanism

7 Economic Analysis[including due

assessment of Economic Internal Rate

of Return (EIRR) to be at least 12%]

(To be submitted as

part of SAR)

II PLANNING & DESIGN STAGE



S.

No.






1 Availability of Destination-/ Region-/

State-level Demand Assessment and

Carrying Capacity Studies/Information

for

(For creation of

infrastructure

based on long-

term/holistic

planning)

(Prior information

will facilitate

proper planning

during post-

disaster

restoration &

redevelopment

works in the

immediate-/short-

term asset

recovery)

(Prior information

would facilitate to

avoid creation of

conditions that

may cause

overload on

assessed carrying

capacities)

2 Topographical/Total Station Survey

3 Geo-technical Investigation Report

4 Adopting vernacular architecture &

compatibility with surroundings

(For long-term

interventions as a

best practice)

(Encouraged as

best feasible for

immediate-/short-

term asset

recovery works

ofreconstruction/

redevelopment)

(For long-term

interventions as a

best practice)

(Encouraged as

best feasible for

immediate-/short-

term asset

recovery works of

reconstruction/

redevelopment)

5 Adopting light-weight building

structure designs, like pre-fabricated

(Pre-fab) structure / pre-engineered

building (PEB) etc., andsuch structures

built-in materials like fibre-reinforced

plastic (FRP) material with insulation,

hybrid huts material of steel frames &

pre-coated steel panels with

insulation, light-gauge steel framing

(For immediate-

/short-term asset

recovery works of

reconstruction/

redevelopment)

(For immediate-

/short-term asset

recovery works of

reconstruction/

redevelopment)



S.

No.






system (LGFS) structure consisting of

cold-rolled galvanised steel frames &

pre-coated steel panels with insulation

6 Adopting environment-friendly bio-

digester system-based toilet

complexes/individual bio-toilet units

and waste water-treatment solutions

(Also as feasible

retrofit existing

septic tank &

soak pit systems)

(Also as feasible

retrofit existing

septic tank &

soak pit systems)

7 Detailed Site Planning, Architectural &

Engineering Designs & Drawings, and

Preparation of Detailed Project Report

8 Preparation of Environmental

Management & Monitoring Plan

(EMMP)/Initial Environmental

Examination or Environmental Impact

Assessment (EIA)

(As per applicable

categories in

Facility/Project

Administration

Manual (FAM/PAM)

(For applicable

scheduled

categories under

MoEF&CC EIA

Notification dtd

14.09.2006, and

subsequent

Amendments dtd

01.12.2009,etc.)

(Even if for non-

scheduled

categories /

smaller projects,

due-diligence

adopted through

EMMP/IEE-level

document is

encouraged)

9 Preparation of Bid Document &

Appropriate Contract Document Set

[As per respective

Multi-lateral

Funding Institution

(MFI) approved

Standard Bidding

Document (SBD)

with EMMP part of

Bid Document &

Contract]

[As per State

approved

Standard Bidding

Document]

(Inclusion of

EMMP as part of

Bid Document &

Contract is

encouraged)



S.

No.






III CONSTRUCTION STAGE

1 Environmental Baseline Monitoring

prior to start of any physical

construction at site (ambient air

quality, noise quality, water quality,

and soil)

(As per Civil Works

Contract for

number of sites

covered and

respective number

of samples for

each sub-stage

environmental

monitoring)

(For applicable

scheduled

categories under

MoEF&CC EIA

Notification

dtd14.09.2006,

and subsequent

Amendments dtd

01.12.2009, etc. as

per Civil Works

Contract for

number of sites

covered and

respective

number of

samples for each

sub-stage

environmental

monitoring)

(Even if for non-

scheduled

categories /

smaller projects,

due-diligence

adopted as per

Civil Works

Contract-based

EMMP sub-stage

environmental

monitoring is

encouraged for

number of sites

covered and

respective

number of

samples for each

sub-stage

monitoring work)

2 Environmental Monitoring during

physical construction works at site (air

quality, noise levels, water quality, and

soil)

3 Environmental Monitoring during

Defect Liability Period at site (ambient

air quality, ambient noise quality, and

water quality)



9 APPENDIX – 2 Uttarakhand Home Stay Rules 2015